EHSmanual PDF

Environment Health and Safety
Manual
THE RISK MANAGEMENT OFFICE EHS Manual AMENDMENTS
Reference Number:
Version 1.1 May 2000
The University of Melbourne
2000 The University of Melbourne.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
permission of the University of Melbourne.
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction to Environment Health and Safety

11 Introduction to the Environment Health and Safety Manual
12 Occupational Health & Safety Policy
12.1 Purpose
12.2 Application
12.3 Legislation
12.4 References
12.5 Occupational Health and Safety Policy
12.5.1 Commitment
12.5.2 Safety Objectives
12.5.3 Responsibilities For Safety
12.5.4 Consultation
13 Environmental Policy
14 Environment Health and Safety Objectives
14.1 Purpose
14.2 Application
14.3 Legislation
14.4 References
14.5 Responsibilities
14.6 Procedure and Guidelines
14.6.1 Overview of Objectives and Targets
14.6.2 Information used for the establishment of
Objectives and Targets
14.6.3 Requirements of the EAC and its sub committees
and working groups
15 Legislation
15.1 Environmental Legislation
15.1.1 Purpose
15.1.2 Application
15.1.3 Legislation
15.1.4 References
15.1.5 Responsibilities
15.1.6 Procedure and Guidelines
15.1.6.1 Identification of relevant legal and other
requirements
15.1.6.2 Management of legal and other requirements
15.1.6.3 Monitoring of changes to legal and other
requirements
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
9
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
15.1.6.4 Communication of relevant information on legal

and other requirements
15.2 Occupational Health and Safety Legislation
15.2.1 Introduction to OHS Legislation
15.2.2 Victorian Acts of Parlaiment
15.2.3 Regulations
15.2.4 Codes of Practice
15.2.5 Australian Standards
15.2.6 Other Codes and Guidelines
15.3 Licenses and Permits
15.3.1 Purpose
15.3.2 Application
15.3.3 Legislation
15.3.4 References
15.3.5.1 Risk Management Office
15.3.5.2 Property and Buildings
15.3.5.3 Head of Department
15.3.5.4 Supervisor / Nominee
15.3.5.5 Staff / Students
15.3.6 Procedures and Guidelines
15.3.6.1 Summary of Licenses and Permits
15.3.6.2 Central Licenses for the Risk Management
Office
15.3.6.3 Central Licenses for Property and Buildings
15.3.6.4 Faculty and Departmental License and Permits
16 Management Systems
16.1 Introduction to Management Systems
16.1.1 Purpose
16.1.2 Application
16.1.3 Legislation
16.1.4 References
16.1.6.1 SafetyMAP
16.1.6.2 Environmental Management System (EMS)
16.1.6.3 Integration of SafetyMAP and EMS
16.1.6.4 Environmental Health and Safety Manual
16.1.6.5 Integration of the EMS with other University
Systems
16.1.6.6 Auditing, Measuring and Monitoring the
Management Systems
ii
12
12
12
13
14
16
16
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
26
16.2 Document and Data Control

16.2.1 Purpose
16.2.2 Application
16.2.3 Legislation
16.2.4 References
16.2.5.1 Responsible Committee
16.2.5.3 Records Services
16.2.6.1 Review of Procedures
16.2.6.2 Approval of Documents
16.2.6.3 Issue of Documents
16.2.6.4 Availability of Documents
16.2.6.5 Security of Documents
16.2.6.6 Retention of Documents
16.2.6.7 Receipt and Control of External Documents
16.3 Records Management
16.3.1 Purpose
16.3.2 Application
16.3.3 Legislation
16.3.4 References
16.3.5.1 Head of Department (or delegate)
16.3.5.2 Supervisors
16.3.5.3 All Staff &/ Students
16.4 Procedure for Procedures
16.4.1 Purpose
16.4.2 Application
16.4.3 Legislation
16.4.4 References
16.4.5.2 Deans and Heads of Departments
16.4.6.1 Outline of Procedures
16.4.6.2 Content of Procedures
Contents
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
iii
Chapter 2
iv
16.5 Auditing
16.5.1 Purpose
16.5.2 Application
16.5.3 Legislation
16.5.4 References
16.6 Communication
16.6.1 Purpose
16.6.2 Application
16.6.3 Legislation
16.6.4 References
16.6.6.1 Internal Communication
16.6.6.2 External Communication
16.6.6.3 Communication with Regulatory Bodies
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
Structure and Responsibilities

21 Risk Management Office
21.1 Overview of Risk Management Office
21.1.1 Purpose
21.1.2 Application
21.1.3 Legislation
21.1.4 References
21.1.5.1 Director
21.1.5.2 Office Management & Executive Assistant
21.1.5.3 Radiation Protection and Safety Officer
21.1.5.4 Acting EHS Systems Manager
21.1.5.5 EHS Advisor
21.1.5.6 EHS Internal Auditor
21.1.5.7 Green Office CoOrdinator
21.1.5.8 Work Cover Claims Officer
21.1.5.9 Return to Work Coordinator
21.1.5.10 Acting Self Insurance Officer
21.1.5.11 Acting Insurance Manager
21.1.5.12 Ergonomist
21.1.5.13 Claims and Finance Administrator
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
21.2 Insurance Guidelines and Information

21.2.1 Purpose
21.2.2 Application
21.2.3 Legislation
21.2.4 References
21.2.5.1 Insurance Manager, Risk Management Office
21.2.5.2 Heads of Department / Departmental
Managers
21.2.5.3 Staff / Students / Others
21.2.6.1 Employee Insurance Cover
21.2.6.2 Employee Travel Cover
21.2.6.3 Non Staff Cover
21.2.6.4 Professional Indemnity Insurance
21.2.6.5 Student Insurance
21.2.6.6 Property Insurance
22 Occupational Health and Safety Committee
22.1 Purpose
22.2 Application
22.3 Legislation
22.4 References
22.5.1 University Occupational Health and Safety
Committee
22.5.2 Chairperson
22.5.3 Employer Representatives
22.5.4 Employee Health and Safety Representatives
22.5.5 Gender balance observers, if required
22.5.6 Student Observers
22.5.7 Occasional Observers
23 Environment Advisory Committee
23.1 Purpose
23.2 Application
23.2.1 Function and Accountabilities
23.2.2 Membership
23.2.3 Meeting Structure
23.3 Legislation
23.4 References
23.5.1 Environment Advisory Committee
23.5.2 Risk Management Office
Contents
41
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
47
47
47
24 Department and Faculty Responsibilities for Environment

and Safety
24.1 Departmental and Faculty Responsibilities for
Committees
24.1.1 Introduction to Environment Health and Safety
Committees
24.1.2 Committees
24.1.2.1 Departmental Environment Health and Safety
Committees
24.1.2.2 Faculty Environment Health and Safety
Committees
24.1.2.3 University OHSC and EAC
24.2 Staff Responsibility for Environment and Safety
24.2.1 Purpose
24.2.2 Application
24.2.3 Legislation
24.2.4 References
24.2.5.1 Authority for Staff
24.2.5.2 Deans and Heads of departments
24.2.5.3 Managers and Section Heads
24.2.5.4 Supervisors (any person who controls or
directs others)
24.2.5.5 Staff
24.2.5.6 Contractor Responsibilities
24.2.5.7 Departmental / Faculty Safety Officers
24.2.5.8 Elected Health and Safety Representatives
(HSR)
24.2.5.9 Environmental Representatives
24.2.5.10 Departmental Radiation Safety Officer
24.2.5.11 First Aid Officers
24.2.5.12 Building Emergency Controller
24.2.5.13 Deputy Building Emergency Controller
24.2.5.14 Floor Wardens
24.3 Student Responsibility for Environment and Safety
24.3.1 Purpose
24.3.2 Application
24.3.3 Legislation
24.3.4 References
24.3.5.1 Students
24.3.5.2 Student Union
24.3.5.3 Academic Supervisors
24.3.6.1 Children on Campus
vi
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
52
53
53
53
53
53
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
55
55
Chapter 3
Contents
24.4 Health and Safety Representatives

24.4.1 Purpose
24.4.2 Application
24.4.3 Legislation
24.4.4 References
24.4.5.1 University OH&S Committee
24.4.5.2 HSR Functions
24.4.5.4 Management Health and Safety
Representatives
24.4.5.5 Deputy HSR
24.4.5.6 Local Area Managers
24.4.6.1 Executive Services
24.4.6.2 Term of Office
24.4.6.3 Staff Development and Training
25 EHS Training
25.1 Purpose
25.2 Application
25.3 Legislation
25.4 References
25.6.1 Provision of Training
25.6.2 Employment of Staff
25.6.3 Mandatory Training
25.6.4 Identification of Training
25.6.5 Induction of Contractors
25.6.6 Testing for Competency
25.6.7 Records
25.6.8 Specific Environmental Training
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
59
59
60
60
60
60
60
Identification, Assessment and Control

31 Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control Introduction
63
63
31.1 Purpose
31.2 Application
31.3 Legislation
31.4 References
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
56
56
63
63
63
63
63
vii

31.6.1 Audit Requirements
31.6.2 Terminology
31.6.3 Overview of Risk Management
31.6.4 Establish the Context
31.6.5 The Organisational Context
31.6.6 The Risk Management Context
31.6.7 Risk Evaluation Criteria
32 Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control Application
32.1 Purpose
32.2 Application
32.3 Legislation
32.4 References
32.6.1 Identification of Hazards and Environmental
Aspects
32.6.2 Tools and Techniques: Checklists
32.6.3 Managing Tools and Techniques
32.6.4 Risk Assessment of Personal Safety Risks and
Environmental Impacts
32.6.5 Risk Assessment Form 2D Model
32.6.7 Legal Implications for Environmental Risk Analysis
32.6.8 Consequences, Likelihood and Residual Risk
32.6.9 Risk Evaluation
32.6.10 Hierarchy of Risk Controls
32.6.11 Reporting
33 Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control Monitoring
and Measurement
33.1 Purpose
33.2 Application
33.3 Legislation
33.4 References
33.6 Procedures and Guidelines
33.6.1 Monitoring and Measuring the Management
Systems
33.6.2 Measuring for SafetyMAP
33.6.3 Measuring for Environmental Considerations
33.6.4 Notification and Review
33.6.5 Review of Risk Assessments
viii
64
64
64
65
65
66
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
72
73
73
73
73
73
73
74
74
74
74
74
74
75
75
Chapter 4
Contents
34 EHS PrePurchasing (July 2003) DRAFT

34.1 Purpose
34.2 Application
34.3 Legislation
34.4 References
34.5 Responsiblities
34.5.1 Heads of Departments, Administrative Divisions
34.5.2 Departmental Managers, Supervisors
34.5.3 Staff / Students
75
75
76
76
76
77
77
77
77
78
Reporting
41 OHS Issue Resolution Procedure
41.1 Purpose
41.2 Application
41.3 Legislation
41.4 References
41.5.1 Head of Department
41.5.2 Local Area Supervisor
41.5.3 The Elected Health and Safety Representative
41.6.1 Issue Resolution
41.6.2 Immediate Safety Hazards
41.6.3 Hierarchy of Controls
41.6.4 Guidelines for Incident Categories
42 Incident and Hazard Reporting
42.1 Purpose
42.2 Application
42.3 Legislation
42.4 References
42.5.2 Head of Department or nominee
42.5.3 Supervisors
42.5.4 All Employees
42.5.5 Students and Visitors
43 Investigation of Incidents
43.1 Purpose
43.2 Application
43.3 Legislation
43.4 References
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
82
83
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
84
84
85
85
85
85
86
86
86
86
87
ix
43.5.2 Health and Safety Representative
43.5.3 Supervisors
43.6.1 Information Gathering
43.6.2 Environmental Incidents
43.6.3 Incident Types
43.6.4 Control of Hazards
Chapter 5
Environment and Safety in the Workplace

51 General
51.1 Australian Standards in Laboratories
51.1.1 Purpose
51.1.2 Application
51.1.3 Legislation
51.1.4 References
51.1.5.1 Department Heads
51.1.6.1 Laboratories with Dangerous Goods
51.1.6.2 Using AS 2243 Safety in Laboratories
51.1.6.3 Understanding AS 2982 Laboratory
Construction
51.2 After Hours Work and Equipment (February 2003)
51.2.1 Purpose
51.2.2 Application
51.2.3 Legislation
51.2.4 References
51.2.5.3 Staff and Students
51.2.6.1 Working out of hours or whilst on leave or
special studies
51.2.6.2 Terms of Risk Assessments
51.2.6.3 Unsupervised Student Laboratory and Study
Areas
51.2.6.4 Laboratory and office Areas
51.2.6.5 High Risk Hazards (Not to be undertaken
alone or after hours alone)
87
87
87
87
88
88
88
88
88
89
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
95
52 Chemical Management
52.1 Chemical Management
52.1.1 Policy
52.1.2 Application
52.1.3 Legislation
52.1.4 Definitions
52.1.5.1 Head of Department / Nominee
52.1.6.1 Labelling
52.1.6.2 Storage
52.1.6.3 Quantities
52.1.6.4 Segregation
52.2 Hazardous Substances
52.2.1 Purpose
52.2.2 Application
52.2.3 Legislation
52.2.4 References
52.2.5 Definitions
52.2.6.1 Health Services
52.2.6.2 Human Resources
52.2.6.4 Departmental Managers
52.2.6.5 All Employees
52.2.7.1 Licencing and Notification Requirements
52.2.7.2 Storage
52.2.7.3 Use
52.2.7.4 Risk Assessment Process
52.2.7.5 Scheduled Hazardous Substances
52.2.8 Guidelines for Carcinogens
52.2.8.1 Handling
52.2.8.2 Storage and Labelling
52.2.8.3 Safety in the Laboratory
52.2.8.4 Protective Equipment
52.2.8.5 Contamination
52.2.8.6 Licensing and Monitoring
52.2.8.7 Animal Experimentation and Carcinogens
52.2.8.8 Waste Disposal
52.2.8.9 Emergency Procedures
Contents
95
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
99
99
99
99
100
100
100
101
101
101
101
101
102
103
104
104
104
105
105
105
105
105
106
xi
52.3 Dangerous Goods

52.3.1 Purpose
52.3.2 Application
52.3.3 Legislation
52.3.4 References
52.3.5 Definitions
52.3.6.2 Departmental Manager
52.3.6.5 Security
52.3.7.1 Register / Manifest
52.3.7.2 Storage
52.3.7.3 Handling
52.3.7.4 Transport Across Campus
52.3.7.5 Dangerous Goods Risk Assessment Process
52.3.7.6 Special Requirements for Dangerous Goods
52.3.7.7 Placarding
52.3.8 Special Dangerous Goods
52.3.8.1 Flammable Liquids
52.3.8.2 Gases
TooDeep! Special Guidelines for Handling Inert
Gases
52.4 Poisons and Drugs
52.4.1 Purpose
52.4.2 Application
52.4.3 Legislation
52.4.4 References
52.4.5.2 Permit Holder
52.4.5.4 Staff
52.4.6.1 Application for a Permit
52.4.6.2 Preparation of a Register
52.4.6.3 Storage and Use
52.4.6.4 Disposal
xii
106
106
106
106
107
107
107
107
107
108
108
108
108
108
108
109
109
109
109
111
111
111
111
112
112
112
112
113
113
113
113
113
113
113
113
113
114
114
114
52.5 Other Chemical Substances

52.5.1 Purpose
52.5.2 Application
52.5.3 Legislation
52.5.4 References
52.5.5.1 Head of Department / Departmental Manager
52.5.5.3 School of Chemistry
52.5.6.1 Alcohol
52.5.6.2 Cryogenic Liquids
52.5.6.3 Cytotoxic Substances
52.6 Material Safety Data Sheets
52.6.1 Purpose
52.6.2 Application
52.6.3 Legislation
52.6.4 References
52.6.5.1 Laboratory Managers, Workshop Managers
and Supervisors
52.6.5.3 Staff
52.7 Labelling of Chemicals
52.7.1 Purpose
52.7.2 Application
52.7.3 Legislation
52.7.4 References
52.7.6.1 Information on Labels
52.7.6.2 Labels on Decanted Containers
52.7.6.3 Labelling of Waste
53 Biohazards
53.1 Use of Animals
53.1.1 Purpose
53.1.2 Application
53.1.3 Legislation
53.1.4 References
Contents
114
114
114
114
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
116
116
117
117
117
117
117
117
117
117
117
118
118
118
118
118
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
120
120
120
120
120
120
121
121
xiii
53.1.5.1 Deans and Heads of Academic and
Administrative Departments
53.1.5.2 Managers and Supervisors
53.1.6.1 Personal Protections for Working with Animals
53.1.6.2 Special Consideration Animals
53.1.6.3 Pregnancy and Work with Animals
53.1.6.4 Work Requiring Immunisation
53.1.6.5 Biological Permits
53.2 Biohazard Committee
53.2.1 Purpose
53.2.2 Application
53.2.3 Legislation
53.2.4 References
53.2.5.1 Biohazard Committee
53.2.5.2 Biosafety Sub Committee
53.2.5.3 Gene Technology Committees
53.2.6.1 Biohazard Committee Activities
53.2.6.2 Gene Technology Requirements
53.3 Importation of Biological Materials
53.3.1 Purpose
53.3.2 Application
53.3.3 Legislation
53.3.4 References
53.3.6.1 Importation Permits
53.3.6.2 Local Authorisation
53.3.6.3 Potential Problems Associated with the
Importation of Biological Material
53.3.6.4 Further Information
53.4 Transport and Packaging of Infectious Material
53.4.1 Purpose
53.4.2 Application
53.4.3 Legislation
53.4.4 References
xiv
121
121
121
121
122
122
122
123
123
123
123
123
123
124
124
124
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
53.4.6.1 Transport of Infectious Waste
53.4.6.2 Classification of Biological Materials
53.4.6.3 Packaging of Infectious Waste
53.5 Laboratory Guidelines Sterilisation
53.5.1 Purpose
53.5.2 Application
53.5.3 Legislation
53.5.4 References
53.5.6.1 Sterilisation by Steam
53.5.6.2 Disinfection and Sterilisation by Heat
53.5.6.3 Disinfection by Chemical Agent
53.5.6.4 Selection of Disinfectants
53.6 Spill Response
53.6.1 Purpose
53.6.2 Application
53.6.3 Legislation
53.6.4 References
53.6.6.1 Spills in Laboratory Areas
53.6.6.2 Spills Inside Biological Safety Cabinets
53.6.6.3 Spills Inside Centrifuges
53.7 Equipment for Handling Biological Materials
53.7.1 Purpose
53.7.2 Application
53.7.3 Legislation
53.7.4 References
Contents
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
130
130
130
131
131
131
131
131
131
132
132
134
134
134
134
134
134
134
134
135
135
135
135
136
136
136
136
136
137
137
137
137
xv

53.7.6.1 Centrifuges
53.7.6.2 Refrigerators and Freezers
53.7.6.3 Biological Safety Cabinets
53.7.6.4 Servicing Equipment
53.7.6.5 Malfunction of Equipment
53.8 Work Practices
53.8.1 Purpose
53.8.2 Application
53.8.3 Legislation
53.8.4 References
53.8.5.3 Staff Students
53.8.6.1 Laboratory Accommodation
53.8.6.2 Safe Work Practices
53.9 Laboratory Hygiene
53.9.1 Purpose
53.9.2 Application
53.9.3 Legislation
53.9.4 References
53.9.6.1 Handling Potential Sources of Contamination
53.9.6.2 Precautions for Laboratory Workers
53.9.6.3 First Aid
53.9.6.4 Reporting Incidents
54 NonIonising Electromagnetic Radiation, Including Sound
DRAFT
54.1 Protection for NonIonising Radiation
54.1.1 Purpose
54.1.2 Application
54.1.3 Legislation
54.1.4 References
54.1.5 Definitions
xvi
137
137
137
138
139
139
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
141
141
141
141
141
142
142
142
142
142
143
143
143
143
143
143
143
144
144
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
54.1.6.1 Managers and Department Radiation Safety
Officers (D.R.S.Os)
54.1.6.2 Departments in Control of Equipment that emits
NonIonizing Electromagnetic Radiation
54.1.7.1 Safe Guarding Requirements
54.1.7.2 Extremely Low Frequency Electric Fields
(ELFEF)
54.1.7.3 Types of Radiation
55 Ionising Radiation (DRAFT)
55.1 Radiation Management Plan
55.1.1 Purpose
55.1.2 Application
55.1.3 Legislation
55.1.4 References
55.1.5.1 University Radiation Adviser
55.1.5.2 Radiation Safety Committee
55.1.6.1 Assessment of Risk
55.1.6.2 Control Measures
55.1.6.3 Justification
55.1.6.4 Training
55.1.6.5 Plan Requirements
55.1.6.6 Penalties
55.1.6.7 Contact Details
55.2 Licencing Requirements
55.2.1 Purpose
55.2.2 Application
55.2.3 Legislation
55.2.4 References
55.2.5.1 Radiation Adviser, Risk Management Office
55.2.5.2 Heads of Department / Departmental
Radiation Safety Officers
55.2.6.1 Management License
55.2.6.2 Operator Licenses
55.2.6.3 Unit and Sealed Source Licenses
Contents
145
145
146
146
146
146
146
147
152
152
152
153
153
153
153
153
154
154
154
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
157
157
157
xvii
55.3 Purchasing Procedures

55.3.1 Purpose
55.3.2 Application
55.3.3 Legislation
55.3.4 References
55.3.5.1 Departmental managers, supervisors and
DRSOs
55.4 Storage and Handling of Radionuclides
55.4.1 Purpose
55.4.2 Application
55.4.3 Legislation
55.4.4 References
55.4.5.1 Department Managers, Supervisors and
DRSOs
55.4.6.1 Training
55.4.6.2 Monitoring
55.4.6.3 Monitoring Equipment
55.4.6.4 Reduction of Hazards
55.4.6.5 Transport and Storage
55.4.6.6 Shielding
55.4.6.7 Decontamination and Wipe Tests
55.4.6.8 Disposal
55.5 Emergency Procedures
55.5.1 Purpose
55.5.2 Application
55.5.3 Legislation
55.5.4 References
DRSOs
55.5.6.1 Emergency Requirements
55.5.6.2 Hazard Identification
55.5.6.3 Possible Emergency Scenarios
55.5.6.4 Medical Care for Radiation Exposure Victims
xviii
157
157
157
158
158
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
159
159
159
159
159
160
160
160
160
160
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
162
162
162
162
162
162
162
162
163
163
56 Electrical Safety
56.1 Electrical Safety and Withdrawing Unsafe Electrical
Equipment from Use
56.1.1 Purpose
56.1.2 Application
56.1.3 Legislation
56.1.4 References
56.1.6.1 Danger/Out of Service Tags
56.1.6.2 Electrical Safety Guidelines
56.2 Inspection and Testing of Electrical Equipment
56.2.1 Purpose
56.2.2 Application
56.2.3 Legislation
56.2.4 References
56.2.5 Definitions
56.2.6.1 Property & Buildings
56.2.6.2 Maintenance Manager
56.2.6.3 Maintenance Personnel / Contractors
56.2.6.6 Audio Visual Unit
56.2.6.8 Trained Electrical Testing Staff
56.3 Electrical Licenses
56.3.1 Purpose
56.3.2 Application
56.3.3 Legislation
56.3.4 References
56.3.5.2 Disconnect/reconnect workers license holders
56.3.5.3 Approved work areas
56.3.5.4 Head Electrician, Maintenance
56.4 Heating and Ventilation Installations
56.4.1 Purpose
56.4.2 Application
56.4.3 Legislation
56.4.4 References
Contents
163
163
163
163
163
163
164
164
164
164
164
164
165
165
165
165
165
165
166
166
166
167
167
167
167
167
168
168
168
168
168
168
169
169
169
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
170
xix
56.4.5.3 Occupational Health and Safety Committee
56.4.5.4 Head of Department / Department Manager
56.4.6.1 Air Conditioning
56.4.6.2 Heating
56.4.6.3 Air Quality
56.4.6.4 Air Contaminants
57 Mechanical
57.1 Safe Use of Ducted Fume Cupboards
57.1.1 Purpose
57.1.2 Application
57.1.3 Legislation
57.1.4 References
57.1.5.1 Laboratory, managers, department managers
and supervisors
57.1.5.2 Property Services
57.2 Plant Regulations
57.2.1 Purpose
57.2.2 Application
57.2.3 Legislation
57.2.4 References
57.2.5.1 Suppliers Including Importers
57.2.5.2 Supplier of Used Plant
57.2.5.3 Supplier of Hired Plant
57.2.5.5 Supervisor
57.2.5.6 Operators of Plant
57.2.6.1 Plant Registration
57.2.6.3 Risk Control Measures
57.2.6.4 Guarding and Emergency Systems
57.2.6.5 Certificates of Competency
xx
170
170
170
170
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
173
173
173
175
175
175
175
175
176
176
176
176
176
177
178
178
178
178
178
178
179
57.3 Withdrawl of Unsafe Equipment from Use (DRAFT)

57.3.1 Purpose
57.3.2 Application
57.3.3 Legislation
57.3.4 References
57.3.5.2 Staff, students, contractors and Visitors
58 Waste Disposal
58.1 Summary of Waste Disposal Methods
58.1.1 Purpose
58.1.2 Application
58.1.3 Legislation
58.1.4 References
58.1.6.1 Waste Packaging and Transport
58.1.6.2 Waste Categories for disposal
58.1.6.3 EPA Certificates and Prescribed Waste
58.1.6.4 Collection Points
58.1.6.5 Disposal Methods
58.2 Disposal of Hazardous Waste
58.2.1 Purpose
58.2.2 Application
58.2.3 Legislation
58.2.4 References
58.2.5.1 Laboratory Managers, Supervisors and Staff
58.2.6.1 Ethidium Bromide Waste
58.2.6.2 Other Hazardous Waste
58.3 Disposal of Chemical Waste
58.3.1 Purpose
58.3.2 Application
58.3.3 Legislation
58.3.4 References
58.3.5.1 Laboratory managers, departmental managers
and supervisors
Contents
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
181
181
181
181
181
182
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
184
184
185
185
185
186
186
186
186
186
186
186
187
xxi

58.3.6.1 Gases
58.3.6.2 Laboratory Reagents
58.3.6.3 Monthly Waste Solvent Disposal
58.3.6.4 Waste Oils
58.3.6.5 Chemical Information
58.3.6.6 Packaging, Labelling and Storage
58.3.6.7 Transport and Collection Points
58.3.6.8 Disposal of Chemicals down the sink
58.4 Disposal of Glass
58.4.1 Purpose
58.4.2 Application
58.4.3 Legislation
58.4.4 References
58.4.6.1 All Glass
58.4.6.2 Float Glass
58.4.6.3 Pyrex and Non Pyrex Glass
58.5 Disposal of Sharps
58.5.1 Purpose
58.5.2 Application
58.5.3 Legislation
58.5.4 References
58.5.5.1 Laboratory Managers and Supervisors
58.5.5.2 University Stationary Store
58.5.6.1 Use of Containers
58.5.6.2 Packaging and Labelling
58.5.6.3 Disposal
58.5.6.4 Cost
58.6 Disposal of Animal Carcasses
58.6.1 Purpose
58.6.2 Application
58.6.3 Legislation
58.6.4 References
xxii
187
187
187
187
188
188
189
189
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
191
191
191
191
191
191
191
191
191
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
193
193
193
193
193
193
193
193
194

58.6.6.1 Disposal through Mediwaste
58.6.6.2 Disposal through Cleanaway
58.6.6.3 Disposal through Pridham
58.6.6.4 Disposal of Radioactive Carcasses
58.7 Disposal of Radioactive Wastes
58.7.1 Purpose
58.7.2 Application
58.7.3 Legislation
58.7.4 References
58.7.5.1 Departmental Managers, Supervisors,
DRSOs
58.7.6.1 Definitions
58.7.6.2 Methods for Disposal of Radioactive Waste
58.7.6.3 Requirements for Waste Disposal Packaging
58.7.6.4 Labelling
58.7.6.5 Disposal
58.7.6.6 Disposal Concentrations
58.8 Disposal of Plant or Equipment
58.8.1 Purpose
58.8.2 Application
58.8.3 Legislation
58.8.4 References
58.8.6.1 Transfer of plant to a Third Party (Supplier
Duty)
58.8.6.2 Sale of In House Manufactured Plant
58.8.6.3 Special Risks
58.9 Laboratory Project Cessation
58.9.1 Purpose
58.9.2 Application
58.9.3 Legislation
58.9.4 References
Chapter 6
Emergency Response
Contents
194
194
195
195
195
195
195
195
196
196
196
196
196
196
196
197
197
198
198
198
199
199
199
199
200
200
200
200
200
200
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
202
203
205
xxiii
61 Emergency Management Plans June 2003

61.1 Purpose
61.2 Application
61.3 Legislation
61.4 References
62 Model Emergency Procedures
62.1 Purpose
62.2 Application
62.3 Legislation
62.4 References
63 Emergency Evacuation Procedure Duties
63.1 Purpose
63.2 Application
63.3 Legislation
63.4 References
63.5.2 Security Office
63.5.3 Traffic Office
63.5.4 Maintenance
63.5.5 Architectural Services
63.5.6 University Emergency Controller
63.5.7 Student Health Service
63.5.8 Deans or Heads of Academic and Administrative
Departments
63.5.9 Deans or Heads of Campus
63.5.10 Emergency Control Organisation
63.5.11 Building Emergency Controller
63.5.12 Building Emergency Controller Emergency
Action
63.5.13 Building Emergency Controller Nonemergency
Functions
63.5.14 Deputy Building Emergency Controller
63.5.15 Floor Wardens Emergency functions
63.5.16 Floor Wardens Nonemergency functions
63.5.17 Section Warden
63.5.18 Special Duties Officer
63.5.19 First Aid Officers
63.5.20 Staff, Students, Visitors and Contractors
xxiv
205
205
205
205
205
205
205
207
207
207
207
207
207
207
212
213
213
213
213
213
213
213
214
214
214
214
215
215
215
215
215
216
216
217
218
218
218
218
218
219
Emergency Response
Contents

63.6.1 Identification of Wardens
63.6.2 Emergency Management Team
63.6.3 Liability and Insurance
64 Evacuation of Mobility Impaired Personnel
64.1 Purpose
64.2 Application
64.3 Legislation
64.4 References
64.5.1 Floor Warden
65 Conducting Trial Drills
65.1 Purpose
65.2 Application
65.3 Legislations
65.4 References
65.5.3 Wardens
66 Policy on Clearways in Corridors
66.1 Purpose
66.2 Application
66.3 Legislation
66.4 References
67 Installed Fire Protection Systems
67.1 Purpose
67.2 Application
67.3 Legislation
67.4 References
67.5.1 Property planning and development
67.5.2 Maintenance
219
219
219
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
220
221
221
221
221
221
221
221
222
222
222
222
222
222
222
222
223
223
223
223
223
223
224
224
224
224
224
224
224
224
225
225
xxv
Chapter 7
xxvi
68 Portable Fire Fighting Equipment

68.1 Purpose
68.2 Application
68.3 Legislation
68.4 References
68.5.1 Staff Development and Training Unit
68.5.3 Maintenance
68.5.4 Departmental Managers
69 Safety Signage
69.1 Purpose
69.2 Application
69.3 Legislation
69.4 References
69.5.1 Property Planning and Development and Property
Services
69.5.2 Heads of Departments
69.5.3 Principal Biohazard Researcher
610 Spill Control
610.1 Policy
610.2 Application
610.3 Legislation
610.4 References
610.6.1 Undertaking Risk Assessments
610.6.2 Preparing for Spills
610.6.3 Cleaning the Spill
226
226
226
226
226
227
227
227
227
227
227
227
228
228
228
228
229
229
229
Specialised Hazards
237
229
229
229
229
231
231
231
231
231
232
232
232
232
232
233
233
234
Contents
71 Off Campus Travel and Work Policy Draft July 2003

71.1 Purpose
71.2 Application
71.3 Legislation
71.4 References
71.5 Definitions
71.6.1 Deans, Heads of Department
71.6.3 Supervisors
71.6.4 Staff & Students
71.7.1 Considerations for Travel
71.7.2 Maintaining Current Records
71.7.3 Insurance
71.7.4 Exchange Programs
72 Diving Safety Rules
72.1 Purpose
72.2 Application
72.3 Legislation
72.4 References
72.5.1 Department Managers and Supervisors
72.5.2 Staff and Students
72.6.1 Equipment
72.6.2 Diving Records and Certification
72.6.3 Diving Medical Certificate
72.6.4 Recommended Diving Practice
72.6.5 Dving Incidents
73 Requirements for Working in Confined Spaces
73.1 Purpose
73.2 Application
73.3 Legislation
73.4 References
73.5.1 Managers / Supervisors
73.5.2 All Staff
73.6.1 Definition of a Confined Space
73.6.2 Risks Associated with Confined Spaces
73.6.3 Risk Control for Confined Spaces
73.6.4 Confined Space Work Permits
237
237
237
237
237
237
237
237
238
238
238
238
238
238
240
240
240
241
241
241
241
241
241
241
241
242
242
242
242
242
243
243
243
243
243
243
243
244
244
244
244
244
245
245
245
xxvii
Chapter 8
xxviii
74 Driving Safety DRAFT June 2003

74.1 Purpose
74.2 Application
74.3 Legislation
74.4 References
74.5.1 Deans and Heads of Departments
74.5.2 Supervisors
74.5.3 Employees driving whilst on University Business
74.6.1 General Duties of Drivers
74.6.2 Accidents
74.6.3 Using University Fleet Vehicles
74.6.4 Using University Departmental Vehicles
74.6.5 Insurance Information
74.7 Safety Driving Requirements
74.7.1 Driver Safety
74.7.2 Avoid Fatigue
246
246
246
246
246
246
246
247
247
247
247
247
247
248
248
248
248
248
Occupational Health
81 Pregnancy
81.1 Pregnancy and Work with Certain Substances
81.1.1 Purpose
81.1.2 Application
81.1.3 Legislation
81.1.4 References
81.1.5.1 Laboratory Managers, Supervisors
81.1.5.2 All Laboratory or Workshop Employees
capable of being pregnant
81.1.6.1 Explaining Hazardous Chemicals
81.1.6.2 Limiting Exposure
81.1.6.3 Safe Work Procedures
81.1.6.4 Reproductive Hazards Posed by Workplace
Exposure
81.1.6.5 Notification of Pregnancy
81.1.6.6 Maternity Leave
81.2 Working with Ionising Radiation while Pregnant
(DRAFT)
81.2.1 Purpose
81.2.2 Application
81.2.3 Legislation
81.2.4 References
249
249
249
249
249
249
249
249
249
249
250
250
251
251
251
251
252
252
252
252
252
252
Occupational Health
Contents
DRSOs
81.2.5.2 Pregnant Worker
82 Workplace Health
82.1 Asbestos Policy
82.1.1 Purpose
82.1.2 Application
82.1.3 Legislation
82.1.4 References
82.1.5.4 Maintenance Staff / Contractors
82.1.5.5 Staff
82.2 Control of Legionnaires Disease
82.2.1 Purpose
82.2.2 Application
82.2.3 Legislation
82.2.4 References
82.2.5 Definitions
82.2.7.1 Property and Buildings Cooling Tower
Maintenance Program
82.2.7.2 Maintenance Schedules
82.2.7.3 Working on or near Cooling Towers
82.2.7.4 Location of Cooling Towers
82.2.7.5 Other sites where Legionella can be found
82.2.7.6 Communication Plan for Positive Legionella
Results
82.2.7.7 Education and Awareness
82.3 Smoking in the Workplace
82.3.1 Purpose
82.3.2 Application
82.3.3 Legislation
82.3.4 References
82.3.5.1 Heads of Departments
252
252
252
253
253
253
253
253
253
253
253
253
254
254
254
254
254
255
255
255
255
255
255
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
258
258
258
258
258
xxix

82.3.6.1 Smoking in the Workplace Policy Extension
1998
82.3.6.2 Smoking Bins
82.4 Thermal Comfort Policy
82.4.1 Purpose
82.4.2 Application
82.4.3 Legislation
82.4.4 References
82.4.5.1 Managers / Supervisors
82.4.6.1 Procedures to minimise thermal discomfort
82.4.6.2 Safety Information
82.4.6.3 Working Outdoors
82.4.6.4 Cessation of Work
82.4.6.5 Staff Suffering Heat Stress
82.5 Alcohol and Drugs in the Workplace
82.5.1 Purpose
82.5.2 Application
82.5.3 Legislation
82.5.4 References
82.5.5 Policy
82.5.6.1 Senior Staff
82.5.6.3 Colleagues
82.5.6.4 Students
82.5.7 Procedure & Guidelines
82.5.7.1 Staff in charge of University vehicles and
machinery
82.5.7.2 Staff Training
82.5.7.3 Further Action
82.5.7.4 Serving Alcohol at University Functions
(DRAFT)
82.6 Selection and Use of Personal Protective Equipment
82.6.1 Purpose
82.6.2 Application
82.6.3 Legislation
82.6.4 References
82.6.5.1 Department Managers and Supervisors
82.6.5.2 Property and Buildings Project Officer
xxx
258
258
259
259
259
259
259
259
260
260
260
260
260
260
260
261
261
261
262
262
262
262
262
262
263
263
263
263
263
263
263
264
264
264
264
264
264
265
265
265
265
265
266
Occupational Health
Contents

82.6.6.1 Conducting Risk Assessments for PPE
82.6.6.2 Basic PPE
82.6.6.3 Other PPE
82.6.6.4 Sterility Protection
82.6.6.5 Requirements for Health Monitoring
82.7 Workplace Cleanliness
82.7.1 Purpose
82.7.2 Application
82.7.3 Legislation
82.7.4 References
82.7.5.5 Contract Cleaning Staff
82.7.6.1 Eating Facilities
82.7.6.2 Change rooms
82.7.6.3 Washing Facilities
82.7.6.4 Drinking Water
82.7.6.5 General Cleanliness
82.7.6.6 Cleaning Procedures
82.7.6.7 Spillage involving human material
82.7.6.8 Incidents Involving Syringes
82.7.6.9 Waste Removal
83 Manual Handling
83.1 Manual Handling
83.1.1 Purpose
83.1.2 Application
83.1.3 Legislation
83.1.4 References
83.1.5.1 Heads of Department
83.1.6.1 Introduction
83.1.6.2 Identification
83.1.6.3 Assessment
83.1.6.4 Control
83.1.6.5 Training
266
266
266
266
267
267
267
267
267
267
267
267
267
268
268
268
268
268
268
268
268
269
269
269
269
269
270
270
270
270
270
271
271
272
272
272
272
272
272
272
272
273
273
273
xxxi
83.2 Ergonomic Principles for Screen Based Work

83.2.1 Purpose
83.2.2 Application
83.2.3 Legislation
83.2.4 References
83.2.5.2 Departmental Managers and Supervisors
83.2.6.1 Seating
83.2.6.2 Workstations
83.2.6.3 Computing Equipment
83.2.6.4 Access Spaces
83.2.6.5 Lighting
83.2.6.6 Other Ergonomic Considerations
83.3 Preventing Occupational Overuse Injuries
83.3.1 Purpose
83.3.2 Application
83.3.3 Legislation
83.3.4 References
83.3.5.2 Occupational Health Unit
83.3.5.3 Counselling Services
83.3.5.4 Sport and Physical Recreation Centre
83.3.6.1 Understanding Occupational Overuse
Syndrome
83.3.6.2 Preventing Occupational Overuse Injuries
83.3.6.3 VDUs and Radiation
84 Medical Services
84.1 Medical Surveillance Programs
84.1.1 Purpose
84.1.2 Application
84.1.3 Legislation
84.1.4 References
84.1.5.1 Occupational Health Service
xxxii
273
273
273
274
274
274
274
274
274
274
274
275
275
276
276
276
276
276
276
277
277
277
277
277
277
277
277
277
277
278
278
278
279
279
279
279
279
279
279
279
279
279
280
280
Occupational Health
Contents

84.1.6.1 Requirements to Disclose Information
84.1.6.2 Services of Occupational Health
84.1.6.3 Other Health Issues
84.2 Provision of First Aid Facilities
84.2.1 Purpose
84.2.2 Application
84.2.3 Legislation
84.2.4 References
84.2.5.2 Nominee (Usually BEC)
84.2.5.3 Supervisor
84.2.5.4 First Aid Personnel
84.2.6.1 Provision of First Aid Kits
84.2.6.2 Guidelines for Assessment
84.2.6.3 Sample Assessment for an administrative area
84.2.6.4 Sample Assessment for a Laboratory Area
84.3 Provision of First Aid Treatment
84.3.1 Purpose
84.3.2 Application
84.3.3 Legislation
84.3.4 References
84.3.5.1 Head of Department / Supervisors
84.3.6.1 Minor / Moderate Incidents
84.3.6.2 Major Incident During Work Hours
84.3.6.3 After Hours Incidents (after 5:00pm)
84.3.6.4 Off Campus Incidents
85 WorkCover
85.1 Occupational Rehabilitation Policy
85.1.1 Introduction
85.1.2 Definitions
85.1.3 Return to Work Policy
85.1.4 Return to Work Coordinator
85.1.5 Entitlements
85.1.6 Occupational Rehabilitation Plan
85.1.6.1 Rehabilitation Providers
85.1.7 Role of Staff
85.1.8 Role of Supervisors
85.1.9 Length of Rehabilitation Program
280
280
280
281
282
282
282
282
282
282
282
282
282
282
283
283
283
284
285
285
286
286
286
286
286
286
286
286
287
287
287
287
287
287
287
287
287
288
288
288
288
288
289
289
290
290
xxxiii
85.1.10 Offers of Employment

85.1.11 Assistance to Departments
85.1.13 Confidentiality
85.2 Rehabilitation for Occupational Injury or Illness
85.2.1 Purpose
85.2.2 Application
85.2.3 Legislation
85.2.4 References
85.2.5 Definitions
85.2.7.1 Alternative Suitable Employment
85.2.7.2 Rehabilitation Fund
85.2.7.3 Payments and Leave
85.2.7.4 Choice of Medical Provider
85.2.7.5 Medical and Related Expenses
85.2.7.6 Occupational Rehabilitation Program
85.2.7.7 Return to Work
85.3 What is WorkCover?
85.3.1 Purpose
85.3.2 Application
85.3.3 Legislation
85.3.4 References
85.3.5.1 Risk Management
86 Control of Noise
86.1 Purpose
86.2 Application
86.3 Legislation
86.4 References
86.4.1 Definitions
86.5.2 Supervisor
86.5.4 Employees
xxxiv
290
291
291
291
291
291
291
291
291
291
292
292
292
292
293
293
293
293
293
294
294
294
294
294
294
294
294
294
294
295
295
295
296
296
296
296
296
297
297
297
297
297
297
297
298
Occupational Health
Appendix A
Appendix B
Contents

86.6.1 Noise risk Identification Assessment and Control
86.6.2 Sample Noise Control Plan
86.6.3 Hierarchy of Control
86.6.4 Selection and use of Hearing Protection
86.6.5 Audiological Examinations
86.6.6 Hearing Protection Signage
86.6.7 Controlling Environmental Noise
86.6.8 Controlling Nuisance Noise
298
298
298
299
299
299
300
300
300
Forms
A1 Incident Report
A2 Quick Reference Sheet
A3 Training Requirements for EHS
A4 Office / Workstation Environment / Safety Inspection
A5 Laboratory Environment / Safety Inspection
A6 Workshop Environment / Safety Inspection
A7 Risk Assessment 2D Model
A9 Poisons Control Plan
A10 Fume Cupboard Clearance for Inspection, Maintenance
and Repairs
A11 Disposal of Hazardous Wastes
A12 Plant Hazard Identification
A13 Phone Threat
A14 Conducting Emergency Drills
A15 Manual Handling Identification
A16 First Aid Information
A17 First Aid Assessment Form
A18 Keyboard Workstation Assessment Checklist
A19 After Hours Person or Equipment Form
A20 Noise Hazard Identification
A21 Incident Reporting Flow Chart
A22 Chemical Assessment
A23 Medical Questionnaire for Off Campus Activities
A24 Overseas Travel Guidelines
A25 Communication Plan Legionella
A26 EHS Review Schedule Cyclic Events Checklist
301
301
301
301
301
301
301
301
301
301
301
Attachments
B1 Records Management
305
305
301
301
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
303
xxxv
Appendix C
xxxvi
B2 Internal Audit Schedule

B3 Academic Environmental, and Health & Safety
Representatives
B4 Administrative Area Environmental, and Health & Safety
Representatives
B5 Fume Cupboard Clearance Contacts
B6 Ergonomic Design Standards
B7 Information on Environment Health and Safety
Noticeboards
305
305
Legislation
C1 Agricultural Chemicals
C2 Amenity
C3 Autoclave
C4 Backflow Prevention
C5 Biohazards
C5.1 Disease Organims
C5.1.1 Airborne
C5.1.2 To Land
C5.2 Plant Disease
C5.3 Soil Disease
C6 Bunding
C7 Carcinogens
C8 CFCs
C9 Chemicals disposal
C10 Contamination
C10.1 Land
C10.2 Liability
C10.3 Management
C11 Control and Storage of Hazardous Materials
C12 Cooling Towers
C13 Deionised Water
C14 Discharge Regulation
C14.1 Internal
C14.1.1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985 (Vic)
C14.2 External
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
311
312
312
312
312
312
312
312
312
312
312
312
307
310
310
310
Legislation
Contents
C14.2.1 Environment Protection Act 1970 (Vic)

C14.2.1.1 To air
C14.2.1.2 To Water
C14.2.1.3 To Land
C14.2.1.4 Noise
C14.2.1.5 Odours
C14.2.1.6 Ozone depleting Substances
C14.2.2 Civil Law Liability
C15 Dust
C16 Electromagnetic Radiation
C17 Erosion
C18 Fieldwork
C19 Firefighting
C20 Fume Cupboards
C21 Fungicides
C22 Genetically Modified Organisms
C22.1 Environment Protection Act 1970 (Vic)
C22.1.1 Pollution
C22.1.2 Further Information
C23 Greenhouse Gases
C24 Groundwater
C24.1 Use
C24.2 Contamination
C24.3 Leachates
C25 Hazardous Material
C25.1 Disposal and Transportation
C25.1.1 Environment Protection Act (1970)
C25.2 Dangerous Goods Act
C25.2.1 Handling & Packaging
C25.2.2 Labeling
C25.2.3 Storage
C25.2.4 Transportation
C26 HCFCs
C27 Herbicides
C28 Heritage
C28.1 Movable Cultural Heritage
C28.1.1 Protection of Movable Cultural Heritage Act 1986
(Cwth)
C28.2 National Estate
C28.2.1 Australian Heritage Commission Act 1976 (Cwth)
C28.2.1.1 Buildings on Parkville Campus on with
National Estate Status
312
312
312
313
313
313
313
313
313
313
313
314
314
314
314
314
314
314
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
315
316
316
316
316
316
316
317
317
317
xxxvii
C28.3 Heritage Register

C28.3.1 Heritage Act 1995 (Vic)
C28.3.1.1 Buildings on Parkville Campus on Heritage
Register
C28.4 Buildings
C28.5 Indigenous Cultural Heritage
C28.6 Landscapes
C29 Intractable Waste
C30 Labelling
C30.1 Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals
C30.1.1 The Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals
(Control of Use) Act 1992 (Vic)
C30.1.1.1 Offences
C30.1.1.2 Penalty
C30.1.2 Premises
C30.1.3 Storage of Materials
C30.1.4 Dangerous Goods & Hazardous Substances
C31 Landfill
C32 Land Management
C32.1 Catchment and Land Protection Act 1994(Vic)
C32.1.1 General duties of land owners
C32.1.2 Contents of a notice
C32.1.3 Offence to disobey notice
C32.2 Pests
C32.2.1 Catchment and Land protection Act 1994 (Vic)
C32.2.1.1 Weeds
C32.2.1.2 Pests
C33 Land Use Planning
C33.1 Background
C33.2 Planning and Envrionment Act 1987 (Vic)
C33.3 Planning Schemes
C33.3.1 Introduction
C33.3.2 Overlays
C33.3.3 Application of planning scheme
C33.3.4 Enforcement
C33.3.4.1 Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic)
C33.4 Further Information
C33.5 The University of Melbourne
C33.5.1 Specific Provisions
C33.5.2 Zone
C33.5.3 Scope of Activities
C33.5.4 Applicable Overlays and Controls
C33.5.5 Relevant Planning Permits
C34 Litter
C34.1 Litter Act 1987
xxxviii
317
317
317
318
318
318
318
318
318
318
318
318
318
319
319
319
319
319
319
319
320
320
320
320
322
323
323
323
324
324
324
325
326
326
326
327
327
327
327
327
327
328
328
Legislation
Contents
C35 Nature Conservation

C36 Noise
C37 Noxious Weeds
C38 Nutrients
C39 Ozonedepleting Substances
C40 Pesticides
C40.1 Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of
Use) Act 1992
C40.1.1 Offence to use without certificate
C40.1.2 Application of relevant chemicals
C40.1.3 Damage by spray drift
C40.1.4 Regulations made under the Act
C40.2 Civil Liability
C41 Pests
C42 Planning
C43 Plant Disease
C44 Polyacrylamide Gels
C45 Pressure Vessels
C45.1 Transportation
C46 Quarantine
C47 Radiation
C48 Recycling
C49 Resource Usage
C50 Salinity
C51 Sewage
C52 Soil Conservation
C53 Soil Disease
C54 Smoke
C55 Spills
C56 Stromeyerite
C57 Suspended Solids
C58 Town and Country Planning
C59 Trade Waste
C59.1 Regulation 401 of the Water Industry Regulations
1995 (Vic)
C59.1.1 Trade Waste Definition
C59.1.2 Trade Waste Agreements
C59.1.2.1 City West Water Parkville Campus
C59.1.3 Trade Waste Quality Requirements
C59.1.4 Enforcement
C60 Transgenic Organisms
329
329
329
329
329
329
329
330
330
330
330
331
331
331
331
331
331
331
331
331
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
375
376
376
376
376
377
377
377
378
379
xxxix
C61 Underground Storage Tanks

C62 Urban Planning
C63 Vehicle Exhaust Emissions
C64 Waste Disposal
C64.1 Intractable Waste
C64.2 Landfill
C64.2.1 Disposal of material
C64.2.2 Management
C64.2.3 Subcontractors accreditation
C65 Waste minimisation
C66 Water Supply
C66.1 Standards
C66.2 Liability for interference with water supply
C66.3 Water Restrictions
C67 Weeds
xl
379
379
379
379
379
379
379
379
380
380
380
380
380
380
380
Environment Health and Safety Manual
Chapter 1. Introduction to Environment Health and
Safety
11 Introduction to the Environment Health and Safety Manual
Since 1996, The University of Melbourne has embarked upon two new initiatives for
managing health and safety of its staff, students, visitors and environment.
The first initiative has been participation in achievement of the Victorian Workcover
Authoritys (VWA) SafetyMAP (Safety Management Achievement Program). This is a
structured approach to providing an environment that is safe and without risks to health for
employees, students and visitors.
As a result there has been an increased focus on the individual contributions to maintaining
the integrity of the Universitys OHS Policy.
The second initiative has been a consideration of the Universitys impact on the
environment resulting in an initial environmental impact study, which was conducted in
1997. In line with SafetyMAP, a management system has been chosen as the most
appropriate vehicle in which to manage our environmental impact. Recommendation to
seek accreditation of a University Environmental Management System (EMS) to the ISO
14001 was accepted by council in December, 1997.
In December 1999 The University commenced implementation of a compliance program
based on the Australian Standard for Compliance Programs AS 3806. In this context both
the SafetyMAP and EMS are integrated sections of the total compliance program.
The EHS manual now reflects a system of people and environment safety within which
work units of the University operate. The Risk Management Office maintains coordination
of the central management of both systems. The EHS manual has been structured to
support this central coordination role. The web based University of Melbourne Environment,
Health & Safety (EHS) Manual now supports both systems.
Notification of updates will also occur electronically with details of version control
procedures detailed in section 1.6.2 of this manual. The manual should be used as the
primary EHS manual for all departments, who may supplement this manual with specific
work instructions relating to particular procedures. Details of integrating local work
instructions into the EHS manual structure can also be found in section 1.6.2 of this
manual.
The manual has been divided into 8 sections:
Section 1. Introduction to Environment Health and Safety
Section 1 provides the guiding structure for the EHS manual. The OHS and Environment
policies are the basis upon which the management structures of SafetyMAP and the EMS
operate. A description of these management systems is provided along with supporting
procedures for document and data control and records management. Environment, Health
and Safety Legislation is a major driving force for the establishment of many of the
policies and procedures within the manual. As a result details on how these legal issues
are addressed is provided in this prominent section.
Section 2 Structure and Responsibility
An essential requirement of these systems of control is identifying the structure the
University has adopted in which to make policy decisions and within these policies, staff
and student responsibilities. Responsibilities of the Risk Management Office (RMO);
Occupational Health and Safety Committee (OHSC) and the Environment Advisory
Committee (EAC) are also described in this section. The procedures detailing staff and
student responsibilities have been developed in conjunction with Human Resources.
Section 3 Identification, Assessment and Control
An important focus of Safety and Environment Management Systems is the use of the
risk management methodology to identify and then control potential safety and
environmental risks. Section 3 provides guidelines for the systematic identification,
assessment and control of people and safety hazards and possible negative impacts on
the environment.
Section 4 Communication and Reporting
Section 4 provides details of the mechanisms for effective communication of problems as
they occur and providing information about the processes within which we operate for
people and environment safety.
Section 5 Environment and Safety in the Workplace
Section 5 details Workplace safety information provided along the guidelines of Australian
Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories. Updates have included a focus on issues of
environmental concern, such as our responsibilities to ensure waste generated by the
University is disposed of appropriately.
Section 6 Emergency Response
A system of effective emergency response has been developed specific to the Universitys
needs arising from both a diverse geographical location and business activities. Section 6
provides details of these procedures.
Section 7 Specialised Hazards
A number of highrisk activities particular to aspects of the University operation have
required a separate section. It is intended that where particular activities pose significant
risks to the University population, they will be addressed in this section.
Section 8 Occupational Health
Personal health issues are the focus provided in this section. Services provided when an
injury occurs are also detailed.
Please forward any comments regarding this manual to the Manager, Risk Management
Office or email rmo@rmo.unimelb.edu.au.
Manager, Risk Management Office
12 Occupational Health & Safety Policy

12.1 Purpose
To define the responsibility of the University for Occupational Health and Safety.
12.2 Application
This Policy applies to all staff, students, visitors, contractors etc. in the University
environment.
12.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and safety Act 1985
12.4 References
Standing General Resolution of Council No: 3.40
12.5 Occupational Health and Safety Policy

12.5.1 Commitment
The University recognises its obligation to take all reasonable precautions to provide and
maintain so far as is practicable, an environment that is safe and without risks to health
for employees, students and visitors.
12.5.2 Safety Objectives
2.1
The absence or minimisation of risk also includes occupational health in the
prevention of accidental exposure to agents which may cause occupational diseases. Thus
ergonomics, industrial hygiene, toxicology, biological safety and radiation safety are all
part of the Universitys safety management programs.
2.2 To meet its obligations and to ensure legislative compliance, the University has
developed a safety management program, using the principles of quality and risk
management which aims to:
(a) observe and implement relevant statutory requirements;
(b) promote workplace safety by education, information, instruction and training;
(c) ensure that adequate instruction is given to employees in safe working
procedures and that they are informed of any hazard to their health which is known to be
associated with work, including offcampus activities in which they are engaged;
(d) ensure that situations or work practices which are unsafe or harmful are
reported immediately to the supervisor of the employee or student, so that corrective action
can be taken;
(e) encourage each person in the University to regard accident prevention as an
individual responsibility;
(f) require the head of each academic and administrative department to apply
relevant Policies and Procedures of the University, as published in the Environment Health
and Safety Manual, to the specific needs of the Department, including where students or
staff are located at another site in consultation with staff of the Risk Management Office
and local staff;
(g) establish procedures to check Environment Health and Safety (EHS)
standards in any other location or country that staff or students may be working;
(h) require that every hazardous incident in the University is reported and, where
appropriate investigated, and ensure any action necessary to reduce further risk is
implemented;
(i) establish procedures to minimise the risk of harmful effects of fire, explosion,
radiation, biological hazards and chemical release and ensure these procedures are
regularly monitored;
(j) maintain (in the workplace) proper control of harmful substances (i.e.
chemicals, radiation, fire hazards, biological hazards etc.), air pollution and noise;
(k) establish procedures for the evacuation of buildings in the event of fire,
explosion or other emergencies and ensure those procedures are appropriately tested;
(l) ensure that machines and equipment are maintained in a safe condition and
that necessary personal protective devices are available in the workplace;
(m) provide adequate occupational health services and monitoring programs;
(n) maintain proper control over the storage, use and disposal of hazardous
substances and dangerous goods;
(o) post clearly visible signs and notices as required;
(p) ensure that adequate professionally trained staff are available to coordinate
and supervise the Universitys safety management program.
12.5.3 Responsibilities For Safety
Safety is the concern of all employees and, in addition, certain groups within the University
community have specific responsibilities.
3.1
Staff with specific responsibilities
The following staff are responsible for occupational health and safety in
accordance with the requirements set out in Section 2.3 of the University of Melbourne
Environment Health and Safety Manual ("the EHS Manual") as amended from time to
time.
* Senior Executive Managers, Deans and Heads of Academic and
Administrative Departments;
* Managers and Section Heads;
* Academic Staff;
* Supervisors (any person who controls or directs others);
* Staff with special safety duties such as building emergency controllers,
radiation safety officers, biological safety officers, emergency team members, elected
health and safety representatives.
And, in addition to the requirements of section 2.3 of the Manual, these staff:
(a) are required, in association with appropriate personnel and the Risk
Management Office, to formulate and promulgate specific safety rules for activities
conducted within areas under their control;
(b) are responsible for reporting to the ViceChancellor any aspects under their
control which cannot meet safety requirements within the resources provided.
3.2
Employees
All employees (including those employees referred to in paragraph 3.1 above) are to
comply with the EHS Manual generally and in accordance with section 2.3 of that
Manual.
And, in addition employees:
(a) must take all reasonable care for their own health and safety and that of
others who may be affected by their conduct at the workplace;
(b) must no wilfully or recklessly interfere with or misuse anything provided in the
interests of health and safety or welfare and must cooperate with the University in
relation to actions taken by the University to comply with occupational health and safety
legislation;
(c) must not wilfully place at risk the health or safety of any person in the
workplace.
3.3
Students
All students are to comply with the EHS Manual generally, and in particular, in
accordance with paragraph 2.4 of that Manual.
And, In addition students:
(a) are responsible for adopting safe work and study practices;
(b) must not wilfully place at risk the health or safety of any person at the
University;
(c) must not wilfully or recklessly interfere with or misuse anything provided in the
interests of health and safety or welfare at the University and are responsible for adopting
safe work and study practices.
3.4
Contractors
All contractors are required to undergo appropriate induction training. Contractors

must adhere to all contractual requirements
of the University in relation to
occupational health and safety in addition to the Universitys occupational health and
safety requirements specified in the EHS Manual.
3.5
Visitors
Visitors are required to comply with all instructions given by authorised University
staff for the protection of their health and safety whilst on University premises.
12.5.4 Consultation
The University is committed to encouraging consultation and cooperation between
management and employees. For this purpose, it has established an Occupational Health
and Safety Committee ("the OHS Committee) which in turn encourages the election of
employee health and safety representatives who are consulted and involved in any
workplace changes which could affect health and safety.
This policy will be reviewed every three years by the Occupational Health and Safety
Committee, as part of the EHS Manual review.
The OHS Committee meets at least four times per year.
13 Environmental Policy
Guiding Value
The University of Melbourne, in its role as an international teaching and research based
University offering undergraduate and postgraduate education, is committed to embracing
environmental management goals
within University activities. These goals will
extend to providing community leadership on environmental issues through quality research
and education programs and to the provision of expert advice on environmental matters of
public interest.
Academic Programs
The University recognises its role in educating future leaders who will be in a position to
make decisions enhancing Australias environmental sustainability. As the University plays
a part in moulding environmental
values, Faculty Deans will be responsible for
ensuring that programs are made available to enable students and staff to be aware of
and to actively support environmental education programs and research.
Environmental Impact Reduction
Programs and quantitative targets will be established to minimise pollution and to meet
principal environmental challenges including improved efficiency of resource use,
minimising waste generation and reducing discharges to the environment from University
activities.
Management and Reporting
The University is committed to developing and sustaining a fully documented
Environmental Management System (EMS) in compliance with ISO 14001. This system
will provide the framework to comply with legislative requirements, contractual obligations
and the measurement of continual improvement targets and outcomes. The University
aspires to be an exemplary model for other institutions. The ViceChancellor will report to
Council on environmental performance at least twice yearly, and will provide an annual
environmental report available to the public.
Communication and Involvement
The involvement of regulatory authorities, suppliers, contractors, academic colleagues,
students and community groups will be sought in documenting and achieving environmental
objectives and targets. The University supports the promotion of environmental awareness
within the wider community.
Accountabilities
The ViceChancellor is accountable for communication of this policy and for compliance
with its undertakings. A Senior Executive Officer of the University will ensure effective
implementation, management and monitoring of the environmental management system
and its subsequent outcomes. Heads of budget divisions will provide necessary support for
environmental plans within their areas. The University will provide for staff and students of
the University community a process for identifying and managing environmental risks
associated with their activities.
14 Environment Health and Safety Objectives

14.1 Purpose
This procedure describes the process for the establishment of environmental and safety
objectives and the processes existing at the University of Melbourne for the continual
assessment of environmental, and health & safety objectives for currency.
14.2 Application
Objectives are set and reviewed in line with the current Occupational Health and Safety
and Environment Policies and in view of the current activities undertaken by the University.
Introduction to management systems EHSM 1.6.1 provides background information for the
management system structures within which environment heath and safety objectives and
targets are developed.
14.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985
Environment Protection Act 1970
14.4 References
AS/NZS ISO 14001: 1996 Environmental Management Systems
AS/NZS 4804: 1997 Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems
Introduction to Management Systems (EHSM 1.6.1)
Records Management (EHSM 1.6.3)
Occupational Health and Safety Committee (EHSM 2.2)
Environmental Advisory Committee (EHSM 2.3)
Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control (EHSM Section 3)
Incident and Hazard Reporting (EHSM 4.2)
Definitions
Continual Improvement (AS/NZS 4804, AS/NZS ISO 14001) process of enhancing the
occupational health and safety / environmental management system to achieve
improvements in overall environmental performance in line with the organizations OHS
and environmental policy
Occupational Health and Safety Policy (AS/NZS 4804) statement by the organisation of
its intentions and principles in relation to its overall occupational health and safety
performance which provides a framework for action and for the setting of its occupational
health and safety objectives and targets
Environmental Policy (AS/NZS ISO 14001) Statement by the organization of its
intentions and principles in relation to its overall environmental performance which provides
a framework for action and for the setting of its environmental objectives and targets
Environmental Objectives (AS/NZS ISO 14001) overall environmental goal, arising from
the environmental policy, that an organization sets itself to achieve, and which is
quantified where practicable
Environmental Target (AS/NZS ISO 14001) measurable results of the environmental
management system, related to an organizations control of its environmental aspects,
based on its environmental policy, objectives and targets
Environment Advisory Committee ( EHSM 2.2 )
Occupational Health and Safety Committee ( EHSM 2.3)
Risk Management Office (EHS 2.2.1)

14.6.1 Overview of Objectives and Targets
Establishing and reviewing objectives extends the risk management process of the
SafetyMAP and Environmental Management System detailed in EHSM section 3 hazard
Identification, assessment and control. The Risk Management Office centrally collects
this information via the processes detailed in Incident and Hazard Reporting (EHSM
Procedure 4.2). The Risk Management Process provides the information of safety hazards
and environmental aspects upon which the management systems are built. Established
objectives and targets are the dynamic framework that support this information database
as it expands to include all work units at the University of Melbourne.
14.6.2 Information used for the establishment of Objectives and Targets
Consideration of EHS Issues and Incidents
The Risk Management Office maintains a register of all reported safety hazards and
incidents. Regular incidents statistical reports are provided to departmental and faculty
EHS committees for consideration and action. The Occupational Health and Safety
Committee, and the Environment Advisory Committee receive minutes of department and
faculty EHS committee meetings. Issues of global University concern are assessed by the
Risk Management Office and included as agenda items at the next available OHSC or
EAC meeting.
Establishing and monitoring environmental objectives and targets
The Risk Management Office (RMO) provides central coordination for all input and
information relevant to the environmental management system. This includes all
information regarding environmental aspects and concerns. The associated responsibilities
of the RMO are detailed in EHSM section 2.1. Performance of individuals is monitored
through performance appraisals, refer to EHSM section 2.5 EHS Training and
Competence.
Incoming environmental aspects from departments participating in the EMS
Identification, Assessment and Control (Section 3 EHSM), details the process by which
environmental aspects are identified and their impacts assessed. This information is
forwarded to the Risk Management Office according to Incident and Hazard reporting
(EHSM Section 4.2).
The Risk Management Office has the following responsibilities upon receipt of risk
assessed environmental aspects and their associated impacts:
Inspection of the risk rating for consistency with similar University activities
previously risk rated.
Adding environmental aspects to the University Aspect Register.
Submitting ranked environmental aspects to relevant sub committees or working
groups of the EAC for further action.
Incoming concerns from all other areas of the University Community
Communication (EHSM Procedure 1.6.5) provides details of the available routes by which
all interested parties may submit issues of environmental concern or interest. The RMO
maintains a register for all environmental requests and concerns received by the University.
Relevant issues are forwarded to sub committees or working groups of the EAC for
consideration.
Environmental Assessments
The EAC and/or the RMO undertake environmental assessments to provide relevant up to
date information regarding the Universities position on a number of environmental issues.
RMO facilitates the submission of this information to the relevant sub committees and
working groups of the EAC.
14.6.3 Requirements of the EAC and its sub committees and working groups
The Environmental Advisory Committee (EAC) is responsible for the endorsement of
University environmental objectives and targets. EAC subcommittees are responsible for
annually proposing University environmental objectives and targets to the EAC and then
implementing and managing those University environmental objectives and targets that are
endorsed. (Details of these responsible units can be found in 1.6.1 introduction to
management systems.) Information regarding environmental impacts supplied to these
working groups for assessment during the objective review process is assessed primarily for
the management responsibility of its associated environmental aspect. Annual
endorsement of objectives and targets occurs at the first EAC meeting of the year.
Objectives and Targets Checklist
A number of issues must be considered before objectives and targets are submitted to the
EAC for endorsement. Documentation of this process occurs via completion of the
objectives and targets check list, which must be endorsed by the chair (or equivalent) of
the sub committee, working group or affiliated body. The following information provides
guidelines for the completion of the objectives and targets checklist. The form is divided
into three sections.
Section One
The first section of the form provides document control information. The completed record
is maintained according to Records Management (EHSM procedure 1.6.3)
Section Two: Significant and high frequency Environmental Aspects/Impacts
Section two deals with the consideration of environmental aspects submitted to the RMO
from departments participating in the University EMS. This section follows directly from
hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHSM procedure 3.2) and
incident and hazard reporting (EHSM procedure 4.2). The management responsibility of
incoming environmental aspects is assessed at this stage.
2A Significant and high frequency Environmental Aspects/Impacts table
All current significant environmental aspects must be considered when setting
environmental objectives and targets. In addition all aspects other than significant aspects
received from the University departments are reviewed for the number of occurrences of a
particular aspect from similar activities both within and between locations. If the
occurrence is high these aspects must also be considered. When assessing environmental
aspects/impacts it is preferable that the process is supplemented by an interview with a
representative from the relevant department / work unit from where the aspects have
been submitted.
Significant and high frequency environmental aspects/impacts are described and
considered as follows:
Questions i vi
Each considered aspect is assigned an identification number for the purposes of the
current review
The location of the University department / work unit from which the aspect has been
submitted is identified
The title, risk rating and number of occurrences of the aspect/impact by the submitting
department is noted
Sighting of the relevant risk assessment and significant environmental impact forms are
noted.
Question (viii) provides information on the management responsibility of the environmental
aspect. If the management of the environmental aspect is considered:
a) a University issue, then questions (ix), the relevance of the aspect to the environmental
policy and (x), the integrity of the risk rating are completed. Section 2C is completed if
either of the questions (ix) or (x) receive a no response.
b) a departmental issue, then section 2B of the form is completed. This acknowledges that
the committee has considered the individual departments control plan associated with the
environmental aspect and provided the department with a review date. This decision must
also be detailed in writing to the department responsible for the relevant environmental
aspect.
Section Three: Environmental objectives and targets considerations 3A.
Environmental objectives and targets considerations table
Environmental objectives and targets identified for submission to the EAC must be
reviewed as follows:
Each identified environmental objective is:
assigned an identification number, a title and a target(s) (i iii)
considered for its consistency with the environmental policy and its continuity from the
previous year. Any relevant issues or concerns must be recorded in section 3B. (iv & v)
considered for the impact of legislative requirements, technological options, financial and
business implications. Any relevant issues or concerns must be recorded in section 3B. (vi
viii)
considered in light of any relevant views of interested parties obtained from the register of
environmental requests and concerns. The Risk Management Office maintains a register
of environmental communications to facilitate this process. Any relevant issues or
concerns must be recorded in section 3B. (ix)
3B. Environmental objectives and targets consideration concerns table
Issues of concern highlighted in the completion of table 3A must be documented in this
section, with detailed actions arising and date for review.
15 Legislation
15.1 Environmental Legislation
15.1.1 Purpose
This procedure describes the process by which the University of Melbourne identifies, has
access to and understands all legal and other requirements to which it subscribes, directly
attributable to the environmental aspects of its activities.
15.1.2 Application
Departments and Faculties of the University involved in the University Environmental
Management System ISO 14001 certification process.
15.1.3 Legislation
10
15.1.4 References
University Compliance Manual
Lawlex Legislation Alert Service (RMO)

ANSTAT Legislation Update Service (RMO)
Environment Protection Authority (EPA) (website)
Environmental Health and Safety Objectives (EHS Procedure1.5)
Occupational Health and Safety Committee (EHS Procedure 2.2)
Hazard identification, assessment and control introduction (EHS Procedure 3.1)
Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS Procedure 3.2)
Incident and Hazard Reporting (EHS Procedure 4.2) Environmental Legislation (EHS
Appendix C)
Other Information University of Melbourne Environmental Aspects Register
Refer to Environment Health and Safety Manual Procedure 2.4.2 Staff Responsibility for
Environment and Safety.
15.1.6.1 Identification of relevant legal and other requirements
All environmental aspects submitted to the risk management office are included in the
University Environmental Legislation Manual (EHS Appendix C). Environmental aspects
are identified via Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS
Procedure 3.2) and reporting requirements detailed in Incident and Hazard Reporting
(EHS Procedure 4.2). During the assessment of environmental impacts via, Hazard
identification, assessment and control application (EHS Procedure 3.2), the
environmental legislation manual is consulted as well as other information sources
reviiewed by the RMO. Environmental impact risk assessments are made in light of the
legislative information contained within the environment legislation manual, and
information maintained by the RMO.
15.1.6.2 Management of legal and other requirements
All identified environmental aspects and impacts are reviewed by RMO, for evaluating
compliance and implications to the EMS. This information is subject to annual review and
included in the environmental legislation manual if applicable.
15.1.6.3 Monitoring of changes to legal and other requirements
The risk management office is responsible for the contracting of an update legal service
that provides notification for environmental legislative changes applicable to activities and
operations of the University of Melbourne. The Environment Project Officer monitors
information from regulatory bodies, such as the Environment Protection Authority to
supplement this process. The Risk Management Office quality system assigns individual
responsibilities for all EHS manual procedures. The assessment of implications of
legislative changes on EHS manual procedures resides with the individual responsible for
that procedure. If procedural changes are required the process detailed in procedure for
procedure (EHS procedure 1.6.4) must be followed. The assessment of implications of
legislative changes resulting in the requirement to create an EHS manual procedure resides
with the Environmental Project Officer in conjunction with the Risk Management Office.
Again if procedural changes are required the process detailed in procedure for procedure
(EHS procedure 1.6.4) must be followed. Procedure for procedure (EHS procedure 1.6.4)
identifies the University Occupational Health and Safety Committee as the authoritative
body for the endorsement of all changes to the Environment Health and Safety Manual.
15.1.6.4 Communication of relevant information on legal and other requirements
Departments and faculties participating in the environmental management system are

required to consult with the RMO and the Environmental Legislation Manual (EHS
Appendix C) when undertaking Hazard identification, assessment and control application
(EHS Procedure 3.2) of environmental impacts. The EHS manual procedures specify
associated legal requirements for a comprehensive list of University activities. Updates to
EHS manual procedures are notified to the University community as detailed in document
and data control (EHS Procedure 1.6.2).
15.2 Occupational Health and Safety Legislation

15.2.1 Introduction to OHS Legislation
Please find below a list of relevant Environment, Health and Safety legislation. The Risk
Management Office maintains a reference library (hardcopy and CDROM) of all
relevant legislation and this is complemented by the extensive university library network. A
synopsis of each item follows this list.
TERMINOLOGY
Acts set the general, broad terms to describe what is required of the community. The
Parliament includes in an Act provision which authorise Government to write Regulations
at a later date. If a person does not comply with an act or regulation they can be
prosecuted. The organisation and its directors and managers may incur penalties such as
fines and jail terms.
Copies of legislation are available for viewing at Risk Management Office, level 2 Old
Geology South in hardcopy and CDRMO. Also available on line Department of Premier
and Cabinet <http://www.dms.dps.vic.gov.au>. Copies are available for sate at Information
Victoria.
A Code of Practice is written to give people, especially employers, practical guidance on
how they can comply with a general duty under the Act, or an obligation under the
Regulations which is described in a general way. The Code should be followed unless it
can be shown that the duty in the Act can be achieved in another way. A person cannot
be prosecuted for not complying with a Code of Practice. But a Code of Practice can be
used as evidence that a person did not fulfil their general duty under the Act or their
obligation under the Regulations. To avoid prosecution a person would have to provide they
complied with the Act or Regulations in a way not described in the Code. Available on
Victorian WorkCover Authority website <http://www.workcover.vic.gov.au>
Australian Standards are prepared by committees under the control of Standards
Australia, an independent organisation. Standards reflect the latest scientific and industry
experience and establish national benchmarks for products and services. A person cannot
be prosecuted for not complying with an Australian Standard except for those standards
referred to in Regulations. However in the absence of other legal guidelines an Australian
Standard may be used to establish a benchmark in deciding whether due care was
exercised.
12
Australian Standards available online through University library, log on via

< http://buffy.lib.unimelb.edu.au/unimelbonly/saa>.
15.2.2 Victorian Acts of Parlaiment
Asbestos Regulations 1997
Certification of Plant Users and Operators Regulations 1994
Confined Spaces Regulations 1996
Incident Notification Regulations 1997
Manual Handling Regulations 1999
Noise Regulations 1992
Plant Regulations 1995
Issue Resolution Regulations 1999
safe plant and systems of work
safe storage handling and transport of plant and substances
provide and maintain facilities
provide information, instruction, training and supervision
monitor health, maintain records and provide advice
monitor environment
There is a very broad definition of employee to include employees of independent
contractors while under our control. While students and visitors are not specifically
mentioned in the act there is a requirement of the occupier to provide a safe workplace
and means of access to and from that workplace.
Dangerous Goods Act 1985
This Act controls the purchase, storage, use and disposal of chemical substances and other
potentially harmful substances. Carcinogenic substances are currently covered by this act
pending a 1998 review of this act and proposed new hazardous substances regulations
under OHS Act.
The objectives of the act are to:
promote the safety of persons and property in relation to the manufacture, storage,
transport, transfer, sale and use of dangerous goods and the import of explosives
into Victoria
ensure the adequate precaution against fires, explosion, leakages and spillages of
dangerous goods, and the reporting of such events
to ensure that information relating to dangerous goods is provided to relevant
authorities
to allocate responsibilities to occupiers and owners of premises to ensure that the
health and safety of employees and the general public is protected
to provide for licensing of specific holders of dangerous goods.
Health Act 1958
Radiation Safety Regulations 1994
13
Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of Use) Act 1992

This Act imposes controls on the manufacture use and sale of agricultural chemical or
veterinary products to protect the users of the product and the health of the general public.
A major initiative contained in the Act relates to the involvement of employees in all
decisions affecting their own health and safety. Details of issues broadly covered by the
Act are provided in the regulations and codes of practice.
Drugs Poisons and Controlled Substances Act 1981
This Act regulates the sale, supply, prescribing, administration, dispensing, transport and use
of drugs, poisons and controlled substances by health professionals, authorised persons, and
the general public. Licences and permits are required to keep these substances. This act
controls the use of class 1 human carcinogens.
Quarantine Act 1908 (federal)
The objective of this act is to ensure that notice is given of proposed importation of goods.
It also sets out quarantine guidelines that must be followed to prevent escape of foreign
biological material into the environment.
15.2.3 Regulations
Occupational Health and Safety (Incident Notification) Regulations 1997
These regulations require the immediate notification to the Victorian WorkCover Authority
of fatalities, specified serious injuries or dangerous occurrences which seriously endanger
the lives of the health and safety of people in the immediate vicinity.
Occupational Health and Safety (Plant Safety) Regulations and Code of Practice 1995
Plant is a broad term covering any mechanically operated machinery, equipment,
appliance, implement and tool. It does not cover plant which relies exclusively on manual
power for its operation, plant designed to be primarily supported by hand, boats or vehicles.
These regulations specify duties for designers, manufactures, importers, suppliers of plant
and employers to eliminate or reduce risks to health or safety associated with plant. Other
specified duties include the identification of hazards and the assessment of risks to health
or safety for each of the hazards identified. Certain items of plant such as pressure
vessels must registered with the Minister for Industry Services.
The Code provides practical guidance on the design of plant, duties of manufactures,
importers and supplier, the use of plant in Victorian workplaces. The code refers to a
number of Australian and overseas standards.
Occupational Health and Safety (Certification of Plant Users and Operators)
Regulations 1994
These regulations require that anyone who operates or uses certain highrisk items of plant
must have a certificate of competency. Employers must ensure that their employees have
the proper certification of competency for the plant they operate or use. Alternatively,
employees can work under the direct supervision of someone with the relevant certificate
of competency or equivalent qualification, to gain the necessary training.
Occupational Health and Safety (Issue Resolution) Regulations 1999
The objective of these regulations is to prescribe a procedure for the effective resolution at
workplaces of health and safety issues as they arise, where there is no agreed procedure
of resolution. This regulation replaces Issue Resolution Regulations 1989 with no changes to
content.
14
Occupational Health and Safety (Manual Handling) Regulations 1999 and Code of
Practice 1989
The objective of these Regulations is to reduce the number and severity of musculoskeletal
disorders associated with tasks involving manual handling. The employer must ensure that
any task undertaken, or to be undertaken, by an employee involving hazardous manual
handling is identified, assessed and controlled before any task involving manual handling is
undertaken for the first time in a workplace. Consultation with elected health and safety
representatives is required.
The Code provides practical guidance in the prevention, identification, assessment and
control of risk arising from manual handling activity in the workplace.
Occupational Health and Safety (Confined Spaces) Regulations and Code of Practice
1996
The objective of these Regulations is to protect people at work against risk to health or
safety associated with the entry to, work in and exit from confined spaces. The
Regulations put responsibilities on designers, manufactures, importers, suppliers, employers
and selfemployed persons.
The Code provides guidance on the identification of hazards and the assessment and
control of risks associated with entry and work in confined spaces in workplaces.
Occupational Health and Safety (Asbestos) Regulations 1997
The objective of these regulations is to prevent asbestos related disease among employees
working in process which use asbestos and among employees likely to be exposed to
airborne asbestos in workplaces. They require employers, occupiers and selfemployed
people to identify, assess and control risks arising from asbestos in buildings, structures,
ships and plant. They require employers who have employees working in asbestos
processes to identify, assess and control risks from asbestos, and to provide appropriate
training to enable employees to take the care of which they are capable.
Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations and Code of Practice 1992
The objective of these regulations is to reduce the incidence and severity of hearing loss
resulting from excessive exposure to noise in workplaces. They require employers to assess
and control risk arising from exposure to noise. Employers must consult with employees
prior to taking action to comply with the Regulations and to provide specified information
to employees. It requires the training of staff exposed to noise every four years.
The Code provides practical guidance in meeting the requirements of the Noise Regulations
for the prevention, identification, assessment and control of risks arising from noise
exposure in workplaces.
Occupational Health and Safety (Hazardous Substances) Regulations 1999 and Code
of Practice for Hazardous Substances 2000
These regulations have been introduced to protect people at work against risks to their
health associated with the use of hazardous substances. The Regulations set out specific
duties applying to employers, manufacturers, importers and suppliers. The basic requirement
of the regulations is that a documented risk assessment is carried out to assess the risks to
a person through the use of hazardous substances. This risk assessment should be based
on information provided in the material safety data sheet, a review of incident reports,
environmental and health monitoring. Material safety data sheets should be made
available and appropriate information, instruction and training provided to employees who
may be exposed to the substances. Records must be maintained for up to 30 years.
The Code provides practical guidance on how to comply with provisions of the Regulations.
15
Dangerous Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulations 2000

The objective of these Regulations is to provide for the sage storage and handling of
dangerous goods. The regulations require documented risk assessments for all dangerous
goods or processes using dangerous goods with evidence of suitable controls. The results of
these risk assessments must be communicated to those persons affected by the product
thorough instruction and training.
Where risk assessments and appropriate controls have been put in place to manage
hazardous substances that are also dangerous goods this is deemed sufficient for the
purposes of compliance Until 1 January 2002 compliance with the 1989 Regulations is
deemed sufficient. These regulations do not cover the handling of explosives, radioactive
substances or asbestos.
Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994
The objective of these regulations is to protect persons and the environment from exposure
to ionising radiation to the maximum extent possible while recognising the need for use of
radiation for medical, research and industrial purposes.
15.2.4 Codes of Practice
Code of Practice for First Aid 1995
First aid in the workplace is defined as the provision of emergency treatment and life
support for people suffering injury or illness at work.
The Code provides practical guidance on how to fulfil the employer duty to provide such
information, instruction, training and supervision to employees as are necessary to enable
the employees to perform their work in a manner that is safe and without risks to health in
relation to first aid equipment and ensuring appropriate training and provision of first aiders.
Code of Practice for Workplaces
This Code is to provide practical guidance to employers in meeting certain minimum
standards, facilities and amenities in workplaces, in prohibiting certain activities in
workplaces, in maintaining the workplaces in a safe and healthy condition.
15.2.5 Australian Standards
Australian Standards cited in Regulations
Table 11: AS2243 Safety in laboratories
16
AS2243.1 General
deals in a general manner with operational safety

matters.
AS2243.2 Chemical Aspects
covers operational safety when handling chemicals

without giving guidelines on the method of store or the
amount of chemical that can be store or used in
laboratories.
AS2243.3 Microbiology
sets out guidelines relating to safety where

microbiological work such as research, teaching,
diagnosis, quality control and regulatory analysis is
undertaken.
AS2243.4 Ionizing Radiations
sets out precautions needed to prevent unnecessary

exposure of both workers to sources of ionising
radiation in laboratories and persons outside the
laboratory from accidental or planned release of
radioactive material or external beams of radiation.
AS2243.6 Mechanical Aspects
sets out general principles and requirements of the

safe working practice relevant to mechanical
operations performed in laboratories.
AS2243.7 Electrical Aspects
sets out general principles for the use of electrical

equipment in all types of laboratories to promote
electrical safety and minimise personal injury and
prevent property damage.
AS2243.8 Fume Cupboards
specifies safety requirements for fume cupboards and

the methods of test to be used to determine their
performance.
AS2243.10 Storage of Chemicals
provides detailed specifications for the storage of

chemicals, including dangerous goods in laboratories.
it does not deal in the following dangerous goods
explosives, infections substances, radioactive
substances.
AS2982 Laboratory Construction

AS2982 is primarily intended for those aspects of laboratory building design and
construction which relate to the safety of the occupants.
AS1940 Storage and handling of flammable & combustible liquids
These regulations made specific reference to "AS 19401993" means Australian Standard
AS 19401993, "The storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids",
published by Standards Australia and so should be used as a primary reference when
considering control actions. This Standard sets out requirements for the design, construction
and operation of installations for the storage handling of flammable and combustible
liquids. It includes matters relating to operations and management of emergencies.
15.2.6 Other Codes and Guidelines
Australian Dangerous Goods Transport Code
Substances are defined as Dangerous Goods if they are explosive, flammable, toxic,
corrosive or exhibit chemical properties that are potentially dangerous to people or property.
They are divided into classes and packaging groups according to their main hazards. Each
class of Dangerous good is identified by a distinctive diamond shaped class label.
Building Code of Australian (BCA)
This Code provides minimum standards for building and construction. Part D deals with
issues of access and egress, particularly during emergencies such as fires and bomb
threats. The University has a policy that when 50% or more of a building is being
renovated the entire building will be brought up to current BCA standards. The emphasis of
the BCA is on evacuation rather than compartmentation.
Guidelines for Small Scale Genetic Manipulation Work 1995 (federal)
These guidelines apply to any experiment involving the construction and/or propagation of
viroids, viruses, cells or organisms of novel genotype produced by genetic manipulation
which are: either unlikely to occur in nature or likely to pose a hazard to public health or to
the environment.
15.3 Licenses and Permits

15.3.1 Purpose
This procedure explains licenses and permits, which must be held in accordance with State
and Commonwealth Legislation.
17
15.3.2 Application
This procedure is applicable to any Faculty or Department that holds licenses to undertake
activities or permits for purchase, storage, use or disposal of materials.
15.3.3 Legislation
Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances Act
Quarantine Act 1908
Health Act 1952
Excise Act 1901
15.3.4 References
Code of Practice for Confined Spaces 1997
Code of Practice for Hazardous Substances 2000
Code of Practice for Dangerous Goods 2000
Code of Practice for Plant 1995
Environmental Legislation as per EHSM 1.5.1
Occupational Health and Safety Legislation as per EHSM 1.5.2
Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures Manual
Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons 2000
University of Melbourne Compliance Manual
Definitions:
License: Authorisation from the Government or other legislative body to carry on an
activity.
Permit: Written order from a body giving permission for the handling of materials or other
activity.
Responsible for some of the Licenses and Permits held by the University:
* Approval to take delivery of concessional spirits through the Chemistry Department
* License to use unsealed radioactive sources
* Licence to perform medical or scientific research involving human volunteers
Oversee licences and permits under the control of Faculties and Departments within the
University.
Provide advice and support for Faculties and Departments undertaking license and permit
applications. For information contact the Safety Officer 8344 7010.
18
Report to appropriate Authorities such as Workcover the quantities, types and activities of
materials used within the University.
Responsible for the management of licenses and permits under their control, usually
confined to building works, maintenance and planning and development of University
property.
Must nominate a responsible member of staff to be the license / permit holder, and to
approve the documentation for submission to the appropriate Authority or the Risk
Management Office.
Ensure records are maintained of appropriate licenses, risk assessments and other
legislative requirements.
Notify the Risk Management Office immediately upon the arrival of new materials that
may require adjustments to the licenses or permits held.
15.3.5.4 Supervisor / Nominee
Ensure that all permits and licenses under their control are current and relevant to current
types, quantities and locations of the materials held, and any activities undertaken.
Ensure all materials and chemicals of a hazardous nature have a documented risk
assessment, and that any special provisions for first aid or other are in place, including the
purchase, use, storage and disposal of materials held under the agreement.
Ensure that appropriate procedures are followed when using materials under a license or
permit agreement.
15.3.6.1 Summary of Licenses and Permits
Central:
Risk Management Office

Concessional spirits
Radiation
Scientific
Research
Property and Buildings

Trade
Waste
Confined
Hot
Local:
Spaces
Work
Hazardous
Substances
Dangerous Goods
Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances
Plant and Equipment
Fume
Cupboards
19
15.3.6.2 Central Licenses for the Risk Management Office
Central licenses are only for specified users, new users are required to submit the
appropriate applications through the Risk Management Office. Contact the Safety
Officer: 8344 7010.
The Risk Management Office holds Central Licenses for:
Alcohol:
Refer Section 5.2.4 or the Excise Regulations 1901
The Australian Customs Service divides alcohol sales into three categories, two of which
require permits. These are administered by the Department of Industry and Commerce,
Australian Customs Service. The School of Chemistry retains the Universitys central
permit to supply alcohol to Departments on the main Parkville Campus.
Radiation:
Refer Section 5.4 and 5.5 or the Radiation Safety Regulations 1994
The Risk Management Office holds the Universitys site license for radioactive materials
and is the central register for all isotopes and other radioactive materials. The license is
held through the Department of Human Services.
When a Department introduces a new isotope, the Safety Officer must be notified to
ensure it is covered by the license. Appropriate procedures for storage, handling and
disposal must be implemented.
Australian Quarantine and Inventory Service (AQIS)
AQIS permits are required for the importation of biological or other material, and are the
responsibility of the Biohazard Safety Committee. The Department must seek permission if
there are new research requirements for the introduction of biological or other cellular
material.
More information is available from the University Compliance Manual
Gene Therapy:
Where research includes gene therapy, ie the alteration or mutation of cellular genetic
material, approval must be sought through the Biohazard Safety Committee. The
Committee is responsible for evaluating the proposed research plan and assessing any risks
or other conditional requirements.
Human Ethics:
A number of State and Commonwealth Acts and Codes govern human subjects in
research. These are designed to protect the health and privacy of subjects, and to ensure
staff and students follow established procedures to minimise risks to both the subjects and
the research staff.
15.3.6.3 Central Licenses for Property and Buildings
Trade Waste:
Property and Buildings Maintenance Department holds the Trade Waste License for the
University of Melbourne. In each case the Departmental Manager will sign for a particular
building.
A staff member within each building or Department is nominated to be responsible for day
to day trade waste management.
20
All correspondence with regard to Trade Waste should be directed to Garry Clarke,
Maintenance Department.
Confined Spaces:
A confined space is any area that satisfies the criteria set out in the Confined Spaces
Regulations 1996. Where maintenance or other work is to be carried out in a confined
space, a documented risk assessment must be completed before a permit to work can be
issued.
More information is available from Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures Section
2.07.
Hot Work:
Work such as welding and cutting is required to be carried out in defined workshops. An
authorised person will issue a Work Permit. This permit is designed to show the nature of
the hazardous work and ensure there is a clear definition of the activity to be undertaken.
Refer Section 2.05 Hot Work Permits in the Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures.
15.3.6.4 Faculty and Departmental License and Permits
Where Central licensing is inadequate or inappropriate, Departments and Faculties will be

responsible for the acquisition of permits in the following areas.
Hazardous Substances:
Refer Section 5.2.1 or the Occupational Health and Safety (Hazardous Substances)
Regulations 1999.
There are two categories of Hazardous Substances listed in the National Model
Regulations for the Control of Scheduled Carcinogenic Substances. Chemicals listed have
specific licensing requirements
Schedule 1: Laboratories must apply through the Victorian Workcover Authority for a
permit
Schedule 2: Laboratories are prohibited from having or using these substances.
Dangerous Goods:
In line with new Dangerous Goods Regulations, no license or permit is required to hold
Dangerous Goods. However all Departments must submit a manifest to the Risk
Management Office of the types and quantities of Dangerous Goods they hold.
Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances:
Refer Section 5.2.3 or the Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances Regulations 1995.
Poisons in Schedule 4,7,8 & 9 a permit is required from the Department of Human
Services.
The University of Melbourne is exempt from permits for poisons in Schedules 5 & 6.
Permits are not required for Schedules 1,2 & 3.
Plant:
Refer Section 5.7.2 or the Occupational Health and Safety (Plant) Regulations 1995
Legislation stipulates specific items of plant that must be registered. The Victorian
Workcover Authority provides forms for:
* Application for Registration of Plant
* Notice of relocation or change of ownership of registered plant
21
* Notification of alteration to plant design

Where a Certificate of Competency is required for plant operation then an application
must be made to the VWA with a notice of a satisfactory assessment. It is illegal for an
employee to work on certifiable plant without holding a Certificate of Competency, or an
equivalent qualification.
Fume Cupboards:
Refer section 5.7.1
The nominated Departmental Representative is to issue a Clearance Certificate before
any maintenance work is carried out.
16 Management Systems
16.1 Introduction to Management Systems
16.1.1 Purpose
Introduction and overview of existing management systems at the University of Melbourne
for SafetyMAP and the Environmental Management System (EMS). These two separate
systems for the environment and safety will eventually merge into the one management
system.
16.1.2 Application
A management system is a proactive approach to managing the issues of environment,
health and safety. It is about preventative action and setting of standard that continually
improves the environment, health and safety performance of the University of Melbourne.
A System provides a formal framework in which to identify and manage all of its
environment, health and safety risks and legislative requirements. This introduction
provides a framework within which procedures of the EHSM directly related to the
management systems of SafetyMAP and the EMS operate.
16.1.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
16.1.4 References
SafetyMAP 3rd Edition, Victorian Workcover Authority 1997
University Compliance Manual
Environment Advisory Committee ( EHSM 2.2 )
Occupational Health and Safety Committee ( EHSM 2.3)
Risk Management Office (EHSM 2.2.1)
Department and Faculty responsibilities for environment and safety (EHSM 2.4)
22

Safety and Environmental Management Systems
16.1.6.1 SafetyMAP
The implementation of the safety management system, commonly called SafetyMAP, is

managed by the RMO. This management system is an essential component of the
Universitys workers compensation selfinsurance license. In 1995 it was agreed to
introduce the management program in a staged manner, commencing with those Faculties
and Administrative Departments with the highest level of reported incidents. In March 2001
the University submitted an application to the Victorian WorkCover Authority (VWA) for
permission to act as a workers compensation selfinsurer from 2001 to 2005. As part of our
application to the VWA the agreed target for occupational health and safety
performance is formal accreditation against SafetyMAP initial level audit criteria.
While the management program is managed centrally by the RMO, departments are
required to identify local risks and to ensure that effective control activities are put in place
with regular monitoring and review. Guidance and assistance is available from the RMO.
16.1.6.2 Environmental Management System (EMS)
The University of Melbourne Environmental Management System (EMS) has been

designed to be managed from a corporate centre the Risk Management Office (RMO)
through which departments of the University can communicate and are directed. The
RMO facilitates and implements the EMS under direction of the Environmental Advisory
Committee (EAC). The EAC is the responsible authority for the EMS and the University
Environmental Policy. The Environmental policy and initial objectives and targets are
established from ongoing comprehensive environmental assessments. The EAC considers
broad environmental commitments directed by the Environmental Policy. Each area of
commitment is assigned a responsible unit to manage the development of objectives and
targets under particular issues. Table one summarises the University environmental
commitments and the responsible unit for establishing University objectives and targets to
date.
Importance is placed on implementing systems based on existing University management
responsibility and structure. When establishing environmental objectives and targets, each
responsible unit operates within the boundaries of University activities for which there is
central management responsibility. Responsible units have input into the control and
monitoring of University activities with identified environmental impacts for which the
management responsibility resides with individual departments or work units.
Departments are responsible for identifying and assessing environmental aspects and
impacts relating to their working environment and managing the aspects and impacts.
They shall also maintain procedures relevant to their operations and functions for the
purposes of supporting the Universitys Environmental Policy.
Table 12: University of Melbourne Environmental Commitments and
Responsible Units.
Commitment
Responsible Unit 2002
The education of future leaders who will be in a

position to make decisions enhancing Australias
environmental sustainability
Office of Environmental Programs (OEP)

http://www.oep.unimelb.edu.au/
Director of OEP Associate Professor Mark
Burgman
23
Minimise pollution and reduce discharges to the

Environment from University activities
Management of Substances Hazardous to the

Environment Sub Committee (MOSHE)
Chair MOSHE Professor Ian Rae
Improved efficiency of resource use, minimising waste 1. Reuse and Recycling Management Sub Committee
generation
2. Enery Working Group
Chair Reuse and Recycling Management Sub
Committee Alan Smith
Enery Working Group Katherine FinlayJones
Developing and sustaining a fully documented
Environmental Management System (EMS) in
compliance with ISO 14001

Project Officer Environment Danielle
RostanHerbert
The University supports the promotion of

EAC (in conjunction with its sub committees; OEP &
environmental awareness within the wider community RMO)
Chair EAC Peter McGrath
16.1.6.3 Integration of SafetyMAP and EMS
SafetyMAP and the EMS are currently audited separately and as a result have slightly
different requirements. In particular the differing audit requirements of both systems have
a large impact on the procedural requirements for the setting of objectives and targets.
SafetyMAP is currently audited in stages (initial, transition, advanced) with an associated
progressive audit requirement. The audit requirements of the EMS are more closely aligned
with advanced level SafetyMAP. The long term goal is to reach a stage where both
systems have equal requirements and are audited as one. At this time the audit
requirements for the EMS represent the maximum achievement and this level is reflected
in the procedures within this section. Audit requirement variations between initial &
transition SafetyMAP and the EMS, will be specified in relevant procedures where they
occur. In general the formal setting of objectives and targets integrating systematic risk
assessment information from work units throughout the University is a requirement only of
the EMS. Processes exist within the SafetyMAP system to mirror these in a less formal
manner.
16.1.6.4 Environmental Health and Safety Manual
The source manual for the EHS Management System is the University Environment
Health and Safety Manual (EHSM) http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ehsm/. The EHSM is a
publication of the RMO. The EHSM provides the University community with the corporate
systems, safety and environment information for SafetyMAP and the EMS. Systems
management of the EHSM including review, update and monitoring of procedures and
their content is the responsibility of members of the RMO staff. This process is managed
via the RMO quality system, internal auditing schedule.
Endorsement of the EHSM, including changes, deletions and additions of procedures is the
responsibility of the University Occupational Health and Safety Committee (OHSC) or the
EAC or both depending on the content of the particular procedure(s).
Committee Structure and Responsibilities
Communication EHSM 1.6.6
Occupational Health and Safety Committee EHSM 2.2
Environmental Advisory Committee EHSM 2.3
A requirement exists for all departments and faculties participating in the EMS to establish
committees responsible for environment health and safety matters. The local
environmental representative with associated authority remains the responsibility of Heads
24
of Departments and Deans of Faculties. This authority may be delegated to a staff

member who should be a member of the relevant environment health and safety
committee. The University Environmental Manager is the management representative of
the EMS, as defined in ISO 14001:1996. This position is occupied by a staff member of
the RMO and is the executive officer of the EAC. The EAC provides one avenue to
decisionmaking processes of senior executives.
Local environment health and safety committees have clear reporting requirements for
management of environmental aspects and impacts and measuring and monitoring of the
local EMS. In summary, departmental EHS committees provide reports to Faculty EHS
committees which in turn report to the EAC or OHSC. Details of internal communication
process can be found in EHSM procedure 1.6.5 Communication.
16.1.6.5 Integration of the EMS with other University Systems
The ability of any system to operate within the complexity of the University operations
relies on the efficiency by which it integrates with existing systems. Communication by
committees is one example of adopting University processes to achieve fundamental aims
of the EMS. The EMS has been developed to integrate the EMS into relevant processes of
Human Resources, Records Management, Information Technology and Financial Operations and
academic departments. Core University manuals including the EHSM now operate on the
web, which facilitates provision of information to departments, and document controls
issues.
Safety
The Risk Management Office maintains a register of all reported safety hazards and
incidents. Regular incidents statistical reports are provided to departmental and faculty
safety committees for consideration and action.
The Occupational Health and Safety Committee receives minutes of all department and
faculty safety committee meetings. Issues of global University concern are assessed by
the Risk Management Office and included as agenda items at the next OHSC meeting.
Environment
The Risk Management Office (RMO) provides central coordination for all input and
information relevant to the environmental management system. This includes all
information regarding environmental aspects and concerns. The associated responsibilities
of the RMO are detailed in EHSM section 2.1. The RMO quality system provides detailed
procedures for all identified responsibilities. Individual departments perform environmental
aspect and impact investigations of their constituent local work areas. Environmental
impacts are risk assessed and prioritised according to relevant issues at the local work
area level. Control plans are specified at the departmental level. Departmental
environment registers are forwarded to the RMO and incorporated into the University
Environmental Register. The University Environmental Register and the Environmental
Communication Register form the basis of the provision of departmental information and
concerns from the University community to the responsible units of the EAC.
Incoming environmental aspects from departments participating in the EMS
Identification, Assessment and Control (Section 3 EHSM), details the process by which
environmental aspects are identified and their impacts assessed. This information is
forwarded to the Risk Management Office according to Incident and Hazard reporting
(EHSM Section 4.2).
25
16.1.6.6 Auditing, Measuring and Monitoring the Management Systems
Auditing functions are essential to check that the management systems are working
correctly. They assess whether correct procedures and guidelines are followed in
accordance with legislation and guidelines provided by the University. The auditing tool
assists in the management of the environment and safety systems as they measure and
benchmark performance and gains external recognition for the systems.
The RMO arranges external auditing for accreditation of management system by use of
authorised auditing organisations. Internal audit, in conjunction with the RMO, provided an
extensive internal audit program for environment, health and safety. Departments are
expected to develop and maintain a schedule of regular internal reviews such as
laboratory inspections, manual update which measure and monitor the system
16.2 Document and Data Control

16.2.1 Purpose
To guide the management of system procedures and associated documents required for
the Environment Health and Safety (EHS) Manual.
16.2.2 Application
Document control includes publication, review, security and versioncontrol, and is the
management of procedures and associated documentation that require formal
authorization and/or version control. The aim of document control is to ensure that staff
who need to use these documents have access to uptodate versions, and to guard
against inadvertent use of obsolete documents.
16.2.3 Legislation
Not applicable.
16.2.4 References
ISO 14001: Clause 4.4.5, A.4.5
ISO 14001: Clause 4.3.3.2
University Records Management Manual
16.2.5.1 Responsible Committee
Has responsibility for approving or amending procedures brought to the committee.

The Risk Management Office is responsible for making changes to the EHSM in line with
current legislation and practices. Following appropriate authorisation from the responsible
committee the RMO is required to retain records of the changes.
16.2.5.3 Records Services
Records Services has responsibility for issuing electronic circulars alerting the University
community of revisions to the EHS manual, following notification by responsible officer.
26

Refer to Section 1.6.4 Procedure for Procedures for the requirements of the review of
procedures.
16.2.6.2 Approval of Documents
All procedures and associated documentation will be approved by the Occupational

Health and Safety Committee or the Environment Advisory Committee. This approval will
be documented if after 3 months of the procedure being in draft form on the web, that the
committee at its next meeting has no recommendations or changes. Except for policy
documents which require formal approval from Administrative Committee.
16.2.6.3 Issue of Documents
All procedures within the EHS manual are published on the Web in SGML format, this
format specifies the layout. Only the Risk Management Office will be able to make
changes to the controlled documents on this system, and records of authorization of all
changes to documents will be kept by the RMO.
1. In the last week of each month, Records Services shall be advised of any updates
which need to be included in the circular. The responsible officer of the manual should
email to circulars@unimelb.edu.au. The body of the email should include:
The name of the document
A list of the revised sections or a brief description of the changes since the previous
version
A link to the document on the University web site
A statement regarding who can be contacted for further information
The address block of the responsible officer.
2. When preparing this email note that:
The subject line should read: For Inclusion in the Update Circular or similar
Apart from this message in the subject line, the email should be written exactly as
it will appear in the update alert
Attachments should be avoided
Formatting should be kept to a minimum: avoid fancy fonts, colours or columns.
3. In the first week of the following month, Record Services will compile an electronic
circular and send it to the following lists:
Deans
Heads of Department (Academic and Administrative)
Faculty General Managers
Departmental Managers
Section Heads
Environment Health and Safety Representatives
Human Resources is responsible for advising of amendments to the membership of these
lists.
27
4. Records Services will forward a copy of the circular to the responsible officer. If
necessary, the responsible officer should maintain an additional distribution list to cover
members of staff who are not included on one of the above lists.
If there are any queries regarding the above contact Records Services on 8344 6996 or
8344 6405.
16.2.6.4 Availability of Documents
Documentation will be available to every staff member who needs to use them via the
Web, hard copies will be made available on request to staff who do not have access to a
computer. A list of the recipients of hard copies will be kept with the responsible officer of
the EHS manual. Hard copies will be made through Griff (editing tool in SGML) by
selecting View Presentation Print. The documentation is then reformatted by the
application of Frames so that it is suitable for publication. Every second month the
responsible officer will check with the recipients of hard copies to see if they still want to
receive updates.
16.2.6.5 Security of Documents
All current and retained documents will be secured against unauthorised tampering and
accidental loss. The University conducts a nightly data backup of all information on
computer file servers.
16.2.6.6 Retention of Documents
All obsolete procedures and associated documents are to be retained according to the
appropriate disposal schedule.
Obsolete procedures within the EHS manual shall be archived in
http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ehsm/archive.
This archive will be kept permanently.
16.2.6.7 Receipt and Control of External Documents
All authorised externallysourced documents (e.g. licences, permits, agreements, contracts)

received by the University of Melbourne will be directed to the appropriate section.
16.3 Records Management

16.3.1 Purpose
The EHS Recordkeeping Requirements is intended to cover operational records created,
received and maintained within University departments (related to Environment Health &
Safety). The records covered by this document include both paper and electronic formats.
The EHS Recordkeeping Requirements has been developed to deal with current and future
records created within University departments.
The aim of the EHS Recordkeeping Requirements is to provide continuing instruction to all
staff on which:
staff positions have EHS recordkeeping responsibilities;
records have restricted access requirements;
records have been identified as having continuing value;
records are considered to be of temporary value and therefore can be destroyed as
soon as there is no longer any administrative use;
records to transfer to Records Services when they are no longer required by staff.
28
This ensures :
proper creation and maintenance of EHS records;
records shall be legible, identifiable and traceable to the activity, product or service
involved;
appropriate levels of access to the records;
consistent, lawful and timely disposal of records;
that papers retained in the office environment are kept to a necessary minimum by
discarding periodically those deemed temporary and;
that records are retained for administrative, legal, financial and archival
requirements.
16.3.2 Application
The EHS Recordkeeping Requirements is a document issued by the University which lists
various classes of records and specifies their recordkeeping requirements. It is not a list of
file titles. It is designed to cater for the needs of all departments within the University to
satisfy legislative and audit requirements.
Departments are required to identify, maintain and dispose of EHS records under their
control. EHS records are identified from records generated by the use of EHSM
procedures and the various classes of records detailed in EHS Recordkeeping
Requirements. Details of the required maintenance and disposal of specific EHS records
identified by departments are provided according to the Terminology Used In The EHS
Recordkeeping Requirements section 1.6.3.4. References below.
16.3.3 Legislation
Established under Statute, The University of Melbourne is a public institution and
accountable to parliament for its actions. Documenting business activity by making
transactional records, and capturing them into recordkeeping systems, provides a basis of
organisational accountability. A record comprises recorded information in any form,
including data in computer systems, created, received and maintained by the University in
the transaction of business activities or the conduct of affairs and retained as evidence of
such activity. Inadequate records and recordkeeping can contribute to failures to meet
accountability and other organisational requirements.
There are various legislative requirements in the areas of Occupational Health and
Safety which require specific records to be created and retained. The Occupational Health
& Safety Act 1985 requires that records be created and maintained relating to the health
& safety of employees, proof of training made available to employees, records of
supervision, health monitoring & conditions monitoring as well as proof of the work of the
Occupational Health & Safety Committee and action taken to eliminate health risks
onsite and on entering & leaving the workplace.
Melbourne University Act
29
16.3.4 References
The University of Melbourne Records Disposal Schedule, Management Policy and
Procedures Manual (http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ExecServ/RMmanual/dispose.htm)
Records Disposal Schedule 15 and 18.
Terminology Used In The EHS Recordkeeping Requirements
Subject and Activity
The records are initially listed by broad subject/function, and then further defined into
activity types within each subject/function.
Custody and Transfer
Departmental responsibility for recordkeeping is attributed to the position which has the
task of ensuring the creation of the records. If the person in this nominated position
chooses to delegate the responsibility for maintaining the records to another position within
the department, the prime responsibility still resides with the initial position identified by the
EHS Recordkeeping Requirements.
Prime Source
This column specifies the University office responsible for maintaining the prime record
within the University, if it is not the department. The University office nominated in this
column has responsibility for maintaining the record for a longer period than the
department which be in accordance with their own separate legislative, financial,
administrative and archival obligations.
Retention / Destruction
This indicates how long records are to be retained by the department before being
destroyed or transferred to Records Services. This column uses an expression "Destroy
when superseded", which means that the records can be destroyed when new versions
are created . It also uses the term "Destroy if administrative use has ceased", which
means that the records identified can be destroyed when they are no longer needed.
To download and an example of a Records Disposal Schedule click here.
16.3.5.1 Head of Department (or delegate)
The Head of Department or delegate is responsible to ensure compliance with all records
schedules.
Supervisors are responsible to ensure that staff adequately document processes.

16.3.5.3 All Staff &/ Students
All staff and students are responsible to complete appropriate documents to record their
practices.
30

Identification of Records
Records have been identified in broad categories by Records Services, refer to example of
Records Disposal Schedule and
http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ExecServ/RMmanual/contents.htm. Each Department is
responsible for the identification and collection of records and for filing, maintenance and
disposal of records within their control. For assistance in the identification of records
contact Records Services.
Traceability, Storage and Availability of Records
Records shall be legible, identifiable and traceable to the activity, product or service
involved. Records shall be stored and maintained in such a way that they are readily
retrievable and protected against damage, deterioration or loss.
Electronic Records
In relation to electronic records, the appraisal of systems to identify records of continuing
value should be undertaken during the system design, upgrade or review. Recordkeeping
requirements and preferred methods of archiving should be identified, documented and
incorporated into systems management. Further information is available from Records
Services on extensions 46996, 44225 or 46405.
Electronic records should be securely maintained to prevent unauthorised access,
destruction, alteration or removal. Storage media and related technologies and practices
for maintaining electronic records must be specified, designed, operated and maintained in
such a way that records cannot be altered. All documents should be stored on a
networked drive and suitable security and backup measures should be implemented.
Websites which document departmental EHS policy and procedures should be updated
regularly to ensure currency. A copy of each revision of a departmental website must be
maintained to provide evidence of aforesaid policy and procedures which operated at
particular points in time.
Programming of Planned Disposal
To ensure effective control of noncurrent EHS records and to facilitate optimum use of
storage space, disposal action should be programmed as an annual activity. It should be
conducted at a time when staff resources are available to undertake either destruction or
transfer of records to Records Services.
Destruction Authorisation, Notification and Methods
There are broadly two classes of EHS records authorised for destruction which require
different methods of disposal:
restricted access or confidential
open access or normal routine
Restricted Access or Confidential records contain information about individuals,
information given in confidence or records related to investigations. At disposal these
sensitive records should be shredded or placed into confidential wheelie bins. The security
provided by the shredding of records depends on how fine the paper is shredded. For highly
sensitive records, cross shredding may be necessary. If the records have been shredded,
then they may be placed in the white paper recycling bins which have been issued to all
departments.
31
Confidential wheelie bins can be obtained by contacting the Manager, Cleaning

Services on x48221. The Cleaning Services has a list of a number of contractors
which provide secure destruction services. The confidential wheelie bins, which are
lockable, are provided to your department and then collected by the contractor for
appropriate destruction. The Manager, Cleaning Services will advise of the cost to
the department for this service.
Open Access or Normal Routine records can be destroyed using the usual methods of
white paper recycling.
* Records Services recommends that a list of all records destroyed in accordance with the
EHS Recordkeeping Requirements, be retained within the office filing system, as
reference.
Transfer of Records
Once records have been classified by the EHS Recordkeeping Requirements as
permanent, Departments should notify Records Services (x46996, x44225, x46405) prior to
listing and boxing for transfer to Records Services. Records Services will provide archive
boxes and Transferring Records to Intermediate Storage instructions. The instructions are
also available on http//www.unimelb.edu.au/CSD/image/unisec/transfer.htm
Note: If the Risk Management Office is listed as the prime source for a particular
record, Departments shall forward a copy of the record to the Risk Management
Office.
Amendment and Updating
The EHS Recordkeeping Requirements is a reflection of current practice and procedures.
Consequently it will need to be updated on a regular basis as the types of records being
created by the University will alter over time. Retention periods may need to be altered
due to legislative change and additions to the EHS Recordkeeping Requirements may need
to be made due to new activities or changes which effect the types of records created
and their retention periods.
Suggested inclusions, amendments and reviews of retention periods should be referred to
the Risk Management Office.
The EHS Recordkeeping Requirements will be regularly reviewed to ensure that it complies
with current practice and legislative requirements.
16.4 Procedure for Procedures

16.4.1 Purpose
Procedures of the Environment Health and Safety Manual are written guidelines for the
control of environment health and safety systems, to control activities within the University
where potential risks to environment health and safety exist.
16.4.2 Application
All Environment Health and Safety procedures contained in the manual are prepared
according to these guidelines, and it is recommended that this format is used for all Faculty
and Departmental EHS manuals. Policy matters are handled separately.
16.4.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
32
16.4.4 References
Document and Data Control (EHS Section 1.6.2)
Prepare and evaluate procedures for use within the Univeristys Environment Health and
Safety Manual, and advise on procedures developed for Faculty and Departmental safety
manuals.
16.4.5.2 Deans and Heads of Departments
The Dean is responsible for the implementation of environment, health and safety
procedures.
The Supervisor is responsible for identifying relevant training for staff and students and
ensuring procedures are adhered to.
Staff / Students are responsible for familiarising themselves with their responsibilities
contained within the environment, health and safety manual.
16.4.6.1 Outline of Procedures
Each procedure must contain the following headings:

Purpose a statement of intent;
Application defining the range of the procedure;
Legislation applicable legislation relating to the procedure;
References Codes of Practice, Australian Standards, etc.
Responsibilities details of duties and accountabilities of managers and employees;
Procedure and Guidelines direction and guidance on environmental, health and
safety issues.
16.4.6.2 Content of Procedures
The procedures should following the guidelines specified below:

Use clear, simple, direct wording in short sentences;
Write procedures as chronological sequences;
Use active voice; and
Use "shall" or "must" for mandatory actions and "should" for advisory actions.
Procedures should reflect current practice.
33
The Environment Health and Safety Manual shall be reviewed at three yearly intervals at
a minimum. Monitoring the currency of EHS procedures shall be the responsibility of the
assigned person, as per the Risk Management Office internal quality audit schedule.
The Risk Management Office may introduce new procedures from time to time, as to
address specific needs such as complementing regulatory changes or alerting staff /
students to new hazards. Normally, such procedures will be limited in scope. These
procedures require formal review at the upcoming scheduled Occupational Health and
Safety Committee meeting.
16.5 Auditing
16.5.1 Purpose
This procedure describes the internal audit process against AS/NZS ISO 14001 and
SafetyMAP criteria to ensure adequate implementation and maintenance of the
environment and safety systems.
16.5.2 Application
The procedure covers auditing of environment health and safety management systems
throughout the Universitys academic and administrative departments.
16.5.3 Legislation
Accident compensation Act 1985
16.5.4 References
VWA SafetyMAP user guide
AS/NZS ISO 14001:1996
AS/NZS ISO 14012:1996
Internal Audit Schedule
External Audit Schedule
Corrective Action Report Form

EHS Audit Work Book
OHS audit proposal (annual document approved by VWA)
Internal EHS Auditor
The Internal EHS Auditor reports to the Director, Internal Audit, and is responsible for the
overall quality of the audit and the audit report and where appropriate to update RMO
Risk/Aspect register.
The Internal EHS Auditor shall have appropriate training and expertise to undertake
auditing.
The Internal EHS Auditor shall be independent of Facultys/Departments.
34

The Risk Management Office (RMO) arranges and coordinates external auditing for
accreditation and surveillance of Environment Health and Safety Management Systems
by externally authorised auditing organisations.
Internal Audits
Internal EHS audits are scheduled in November for the proceeding year of each year. The
EHS Internal Auditor in consultation with the Manager, Management Systems and the
Environment Project Officer select the criteria to be audited. This information is added to
the Audit Schedule in Microsoft Project, which is maintained by the Manager,
Management Systems.
A Faculty/Department will be provided with dates and the criteria to be audited at least 2
months prior to the audit.
Gathering Information During the Audit
Prior to the audit the appropriate sections of the EHS Audit Workbook are printed ready
for use by the Internal EHS Auditor to record observations.
During the audit, information is gathered from a review of documentation, records,
discussions with individuals and observations in the workplace.
The auditor may seek assistance and advice from specialists and they will be responsible
for making their own observations and recording these observations for inclusion in audit
report. The Specialist may also be required to record the lead auditors observations.
Confidentiality
Information obtained during the course of the audit will be treated as confidential.
The Audit Report
The Internal EHS Auditor will discuss the audit findings with the Manager, Management
Systems prior to the preparation of the report.
Observations, recommendations and conclusions are recorded and attached to the audit
workbook. The audit report will consist of:
Title page;
Details page (outlining criteria audited, contact details, location, resources);
Corrective Action Report Form (where applicable); and
Workbook comments.
Within 2 weeks of the audit a bound audit report will be provided to the
Faculty/Department, at which time a presentation of the audit findings will be discussed by
the Internal EHS Auditor in conjunction with the appropriate person or committee in the
Faculty/Department.
Nonconformance and Corrective Action
The non conformances are regarded as the absence or inadequate implementation of the
system or part of the system, failure to follow the documented systems or procedures, or a
lapse in the system or procedure.
Non conformances raised during the audit are recorded on the Corrective Action Report
Form (CAR). The CAR Form identifies the reason for the non conformance and
determines the date for the corrective actions to be reviewed, maximum 4 months. This
review date will be added to the Audit Schedule in Microsoft Project for follow up by the
Internal EHS Auditor.
All outstanding SafetyMAP CARs and timeframe for remedial action are (or completed
corrective action) to be reported to VWA, with written certification, signed off by the
Senior Officer of the University within two months of the close of the financial year (June).
The CARs are then countersigned by both the EHS auditor and the auditee to confirm
acceptance. Any concerns regarding the audit process or findings should be reported
immediately to the Director, Internal Audit.
The original copy of the audit shall be kept on file in the Internal Audit Office.
16.6 Communication
16.6.1 Purpose
This procedure describes the process by which the University of Melbourne communicates
safety and environmental issues internally and externally.
16.6.2 Application
Departments and Faculties of the University.
16.6.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
16.6.4 References
Procedures
Hazard identification, assessment and control introduction (EHS Procedure 3.1)
Incident and Hazard Reporting (EHS Procedure 4.2)
Environmental Legislation (EHS Appendix C)
Regulatory Bodies
Victorian Workcover Authority VWA
Environment Protection Authority EPA
Department of Human Services DHS
Registers
University of Melbourne Environmental Aspects Register
University of Melbourne Environmental Communications Register
36
Risk Management Office (EHSM 2.1.2)
Occupational Health and Safety Committee (EHSM 2.2)
Environment Advisory Committee (EHSM 2.3)
Department and Faculty responsibilities for environment and safety (EHSM section 2.4)
The Risk Management Office (RMO) is responsible for the coordination of internal and
external communication relevant to the management systems of SafetyMAP and the
Environmental Management System (EMS).
The RMO maintains a Communication Folder for internal communication between the
various levels and functions of the University, which includes Faculty and Department
EHS meetings. The RMO also maintains documentation on receiving, documenting and
responding to relevant communication from external interested parties.
16.6.6.1 Internal Communication
Committees
The EAC and OHSC are the responsible authorities for the EMS and SafetyMAP
respectively, and as such provide the central communication point for all issues. The
communication process to these committees is facilitated by the RMO. Faculty and
Departmental committees responsible for safety and environmental issues must be
established. Communication between committees is as follows:
Departmental EHS committees must regularly report to the Faculty EHS committee
regarding
Identified safety and environmental risks, including the maintenance of an environment
and safety risk register which is submitted to the RMO;
Details of monitoring of SafetyMAP and EMS processes relevant to the department;
Measurement and monitoring of safety and environmental issues that are deemed the
management responsibility of a particular department.
Departmental EHS committees are also responsible for communicating safety and
environmental issues within their department Faculty EHS committees must regularly
report to the EAC and OHSC regarding
Safety and environmental issues from all departments;
Details of monitoring of SafetyMAP and EMS processes relevant to the Faculty.
OHSC and EAC
Respond in writing to submitted reports from Faculty (or administrative department) EHS
committees.
RMO
Provides statistical reporting regarding incident statistics to department and faculty EHS
committees; and
Facilitates the provision of information from departments and faculties to the OHSC and
EAC and from external sources
Other Internal Communication Process
37
Communication and Reporting (EHSM section 4) provide details of reporting requirements

in conjunction to reporting within the committee structure.
16.6.6.2 External Communication
The University will provide details of significant environmental aspects and impacts on
request from external parties. This information shall be facilitated through the RMO.
16.6.6.3 Communication with Regulatory Bodies
The following procedures of the EHSM provide details of all regulatory reporting
requirements
OHS Issue Resolution (EHSM 4.1) Occupational Health and Safety issues
Summary of Waste Disposal (EHSM 5.8.1) Prescribed waste and EPA certificates
Incident and Hazard Reporting (EHSM 4.2)
When a notice is received from a regulatory authority, (Victorian Workcover Authority
VWA; Department of Human Services DHS; Environment Protection Authority EPA) the
receiver should notify the Head of Department. A copy should be made of the notice and
kept at the department, a copy of the notice should also be forwarded to the RMO with a
covering note explaining the circumstances. Response to notice from Regulatory
Authorities shall be made in accordance with the time frame specified on the notice. If
the matter is deemed urgent or should require immediate action refer to Section 6
Emergency response.
38
Chapter 2. Structure and Responsibilities

21 Risk Management Office
21.1 Overview of Risk Management Office
21.1.1 Purpose
The Risk Management Office (RMO) is responsible for providing advice and service to the
University Community for all matters relating to the protection and conservation of the
human and physical assets of the University, and for promoting risk management as part
of the culture of the University through management systems. This includes environment,
health and safety, insurance, workers compensation and rehabilitation.
The Risk Management Office is accredited to the quality system ISO 9002 for the delivery
of quality services to the University.
21.1.2 Application
The University is committed to providing a healthy and safe work environment for the
University Community and actively seeks to ensure the prevention of workplace injury and
illness. The RMO is an integral part of this commitment.
On October 1 1990, the University of Melbourne became a self insurer for WorkCover.
WorkCover aims to prevent injury, compensate for injury and to rehabilitate. On August 1
2001 the University successfully renewed the Self Insurance Licence.
The various functions within the Risk Management Office are explained briefly below.
21.1.3 Legislation
The University must comply with a large number of legislative and statutory requirements,
standards and guidelines.
21.1.4 References
Not Applicable.
21.1.5.1 Director
Mr. David Lyons

Phone 8344 3362
The Directors responsibilities are to ensure that University policies and procedures comply
with the relevant statutory requirements; that the RMO publicises and promotes the
practice and benefits of risk management in the workplace; and contributes professional
expertise to the development of policy and standards.
39
21.1.5.2 Office Management & Executive Assistant
Ms. Debbie Wallace

Phone 8344 7702
Responsible for the successful operation and organisation of the RMO administrative
services, including budgetary and personnel management within the team. As Executive
Assistant to the Director, Debbie managers David Lyons diary and provides secretarial
support. As secretary to the Universitys Risk Management Committee (RMC),
Occupational Health and Safety (OHSC) and Environmental Advisory Committees (EAC)
Debbie is responsible for the coordination of these meetings.
21.1.5.3 Radiation Protection and Safety Officer
Mr. Steve Guggenheimer

Phone 8344 7010 Mobile 041 1111 265
Radiation Protection and Safety Officer provides guidance and advice for all aspects
relating to the provision and maintenance of a safe working environment, including safety
assessment of potentially hazardous activities, safety training, providing safety data and
operating a waste disposal service for dangerous substances, and the investigation and
reporting of serious or recurring incidents.
21.1.5.4 Acting EHS Systems Manager
Ms. Danielle RostanHerbert

Phone 8344 4769
Responsible for implementing and monitoring the Environment Health and Safety
Management System for the University. And providing guidance and advice, including;
Identification of EHS aspects, development of procedures and training.
21.1.5.5 EHS Advisor
Mr. John Carmichael

Phone 8344 7896 Mobile 0414 878 428
21.1.5.6 EHS Internal Auditor
On Maternity Leave until November 2003

Ms. Amanda Summers
Provides EHS internal audits and advice on EHS to the University of Melbourne Faculties
and Departments.
21.1.5.7 Green Office CoOrdinator
Mr. Alessandro Aggio

Phone 8344 3472
The Green Office CoOrdinator organises the University wide Green Office Program which
focuses on reduced resource consumption for all University staff, particularly in the areas
of energy, paper & waste.
40
21.1.5.8 Work Cover Claims Officer
Ms. Stephanie Lamb

Phone 8344 6149
The WorkCover Claims Officer deals with all claims for compensation for work related
injuries/conditions, effectively operating as the Universitys Claims Agent within the
guidelines of the Accident Compensation Act. Advice on WorkCover entitlement and
claims procedures.
Ms. Marina Harris

Phone 8344 6467
Rehabilitation procedures and programs. The Return to Work Coordinator is responsible for
the rehabilitation of employees on Workers Compensation leave into either their pre injury
position or a similar position within the University.
21.1.5.10 Acting Self Insurance Officer
Mr. Darren OBrien

Phone 8344 4224
The Self Insurance Officer is responsible for ensuring the self insurance (WorkCover)
program at the University of Melbourne. And that it complies with all legislative regulatory
requirements and that current procedures and policies are up tp date.
21.1.5.11 Acting Insurance Manager
Mr. Bill Boucher

Phone 8344 6111
21.1.5.12 Ergonomist
Mr. Mike Atherton

Phone 8344 7075 Mobile 0402 407 243
21.1.5.13 Claims and Finance Administrator
Ms. Elizabeth Gwynne

Phone 8344 7645
The Claims and Finance Administrator manages the finances for the Risk Management
Office, travel payments and assists in WorkCover issues.
Structure to be updated.
21.2 Insurance Guidelines and Information
41
21.2.1 Purpose
This information is designed to give a short description of the University Insurances.
The information has been prepared as a quick reference and does not include all the
Policy terms, conditions and exclusions which may apply to any one policy. any specific
issues should be directed to the Insurance Manager, Risk Management Office on 8344
4224. This section does not include WorkCover Insurance.
21.2.2 Application
The University of Melbourne has in place an Insurance Program that extends to cover the
assets and activities of the University.
21.2.3 Legislation
Not Applicable
21.2.4 References
General Information and Insurance Summary.
21.2.5.1 Insurance Manager, Risk Management Office
Responsible for initiating a due diligence review to ensure that insurance cover afforded to
staff, students, University assets and Operational exposures is adequate.
Evaluate insurance claims and queries to provide appropriate advice and information to
staff who may make a claim against the University for person or property.
Specific issues should be addressed to the Insurance Manager on 8344 4224.
21.2.5.2 Heads of Department / Departmental Managers
Ensure staff / students / volunteers and honorary members who are undertaking activities
are made aware of insurance requirements and limitations.
Ensure that where agreements are commenced with staff for work or other contracts to
undertake activities through the University that these activities are safe and without risk to
health.
Respond immediately to any incident, claim or other matter brought to you and act
accordingly to ensure that the information is forwarded to the Insurance Manager at the
RMO immediately.
21.2.5.3 Staff / Students / Others
Report all incidents involving property or personal damage immediately.

Provide information to the Supervisor or the Insurance Manager on request.
42
21.2.6.1 Employee Insurance Cover
An employee, is any person who has signed a contract of employment with the University,
or receives payment for providing a service or performing a task, where the University
deducts income tax and pays a WorkCover Insurance Levy.
These include:
* Full and part time continuing positions
* Fixed term positions
* Casual positions
21.2.6.2 Employee Travel Cover
An employee is covered by the Universitys Travel Insurance policy when they are
undertaking approved travel or absences from the University. This cover also extends to
spouses and children. The travel must be however, greater than 50% work related.
Visitors and students must ensure that they obtain their own travel insurance.
21.2.6.3 Non Staff Cover
Volunteer work arrangements should be documented, however they are not contracts of
employment, and therfore volunteers are not covered by Workers Compensation Insurance.
The University has in place Personal Accident Insurance which does provide a level of
coverage to volunteer workers. If a claim is made, the responsible department must
demonstrate that a University activity was being undertaken at the time.
Unpaid Honorary appointments (See Section 4.2 of the PPP) are also covered by Personal
Accident Insurance. Where staff from another University are invited to an honorary
position they should retain their cover through their original employer.
21.2.6.4 Professional Indemnity Insurance
The Universitys Professional Indemnity Insurance covers honorary research fellows,

visiting academics and volunteer works in addition to employees and students.
21.2.6.5 Student Insurance
Students undertaking regular course activities, or while on course related work experience
are afforded coverage through Personal Accident Insurance.
Postgraduate Students undertaking travel overseas for University purposes such as
presenting at conferences etc may purchase Travel Insurance through the Risk
Management Office or their Department.
21.2.6.6 Property Insurance
Personal Property brought to the University for personal use, where it is not of significant
value to the Department is not covered by the Univeristys Insurance Policy. Special
consideration may be made through the Head of Department for loss or damage in an
Emergency Situation to items of value belonging to a staff or student member.
43
22 Occupational Health and Safety Committee

22.1 Purpose
To describe the arrangement for employee consultation in the work place by establishing
and maintaining an Occupational Health and Safety Committee. To provide detail of
central University OH&S committee membership (as at 1 January 2002).
22.2 Application
The Committee is an advisory committee of the Council reporting to Council through the
Risk Management Committee.
22.3 Legislation
22.4 References
Occupational Health and Safety Policy
22.5.1 University Occupational Health and Safety Committee
Regular reports to the Council through the Risk Management Committee;
Receives reports from University officers with specific health and safety responsibilities,
from departmental health and safety committees, and from any specialist subcommittees
of the Committee;
Formulates, reviews and disseminates, as approved by the Administrative committee,
standards, rules and procedures relating to health and safety generally in the University, or
with respect to specific areas of the University; and
Faculties cooperation between management and employees and provides a forum for
participation by employees in developing and implementing measures designed to ensure
the health and safety of the University Community;
The Committee is responsible both for making recommendations on policy, and for taking
action with respect to:
occupational health and safety matters;
the promotion of a safe and healthy work and study environment for all University
staff and students;
approves the formation of designated work;
encourages the election of health and safety representatives;
the reduction of accidental injury;
the Universitys rehabilitation programs.
The Committee meets at least quarterly.
Half the members must be employee representatives
44
1. The Committee advises the council, through the Administrative Committee, on all
aspects of occupational health and safety in the University. It also acts on behalf of the
Council, subject always to its direction, to implement the policies of Council in the context
of the Universitys statutory responsibilities in the area of health and safety and organises
health and safety committees in the departments of the University;
2. The Committee may prescribe, subject to the approval of the Administrative Committee,
safety rules for particular areas of the University;
3. the Committee may impose restrictions on the use of equipment or materials by
members of staff or students in accordance with the safety rules, or in cases of
emergency;
4. The committee may prescribe, for the purpose of giving effect to the safety rules, the
wearing of certain clothing, footwear and other items, e.g.. safety helments, masks etc. as
a condition of undertaking certain work or entering specified areas of the University.
22.5.2 Chairperson
VicePrincipal Information, Helen Hayes
22.5.3 Employer Representatives
Deputy Principal Human Resources or nominee (J McQuillan)
Vice Principal Property & Buildings or nominee (K FindlayJones)
Dean of a laboratory based Faculty (Ivan Caple)
Director, Risk Management Office (David Lyons)
VicePrincipal and Academic Registrar or nominee (L Martin)
22.5.4 Employee Health and Safety Representatives
Six Health and Safety Representatives elected by the Health and Safety Representatives.
The term of office for other than exofficio members is two years;
Ms. L. Huq
Mr. J. Carmichael
Mr. R. Cappai
Dr. M. Wlodek
Dr. E. Smart
Mr. P. Edwards
22.5.5 Gender balance observers, if required

Vacant
22.5.6 Student Observers
Ms Nadine Richings (post graduate)
Vacant (Undergraduate)
22.5.7 Occasional Observers
Officials of Trade Unions with significant membership within the University.
The OHS Committee may appoint:
1. An executive committee to act on behalf of the committee between meetings of the
Committee, the members of which include the Chairperson of the committee as
chairperson, the Registrar (Academic), the Manager (RMO), and three (3) of the six (6)
elected health and Safety Representatives;
45
2. Such specialist subcommittees as it may from time to time determine to perform

specific tasks on behalf of the Committee, the membership of which include at least one
member of the Committee.

Not Applicable.
23 Environment Advisory Committee

23.1 Purpose
The Environment Advisory Committee is an advisory committee to Council reporting
through the Administrative committee and the Director of Internal Audit and Compliance
Officer. This procedure applies to the review of the environmental management system
and associated functions.
23.2 Application
23.2.1 Function and Accountabilities
The Committee will advise Mr. Peter Mcgrath, Director of Internal Audit and Compliance
Officer on the following:
periodic review of environmental policy
review of development and operation of the environment
(EMS) by the RMO, and attainment and maintenance of ISO 14001 certification
continuous improvement of the Universitys overall environmental performance in
line with the Environmental Policy
23.2.2 Membership
Mr. Peter Mcgrath, Director of Internal Audit and Compliance Officer
Manager, Risk Management Office (RMO)
Two Student representatives (one Undergraduate, one Postgraduate)
Three members of general or academic staff with expertise in environmental
management.
A nominee from each of the sub committees of the EAC, Property and Buildings and the
Office for Environmental Programs (OEP) to be a member of the EAC.
(The Committee may coopt other specialist members as appropriate.)
23.2.3 Meeting Structure
The Environment Advisory Committee meet quarterly to review progress of the EMS. Each
quarterly meeting includes as an agenda item, a report from each EAC Sub committee.
The EAC agenda shall contain the following headings, where applicable:
concerns from relevant interested parties
review of legislative/regulatory compliance
review of resource allocation
46
progress of sub committees

review of achievement against objectives and targets and for new initiatives
aspects of audit and corrective actions
suitability of the EMS in relation to changing conditions
ongoing suitability of Environmental Policy
Approval of annual report
At appropriate times of the year as determined by the Risk Management Office the
following items must be included in the agenda:
information and review of objectives and targets for the year
review of training and identification of new initiatives for the future year(s).
23.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
23.4 References
Not Applicable.
23.5.1 Environment Advisory Committee
The Chair of the EAC delegates responsibility for implementing the items raised at EAC
meeting. These shall be reviewed progressively at future meetings until resolution is
reached. Minutes of meeting shall be kept.
Regular reports to the Council through Administrative Committee.
Formulates, reviews and disseminates, as approved by the Administrative Committee,
standards, rules and procedures relating to the environmental issues within the University, or
with respect to specific areas of the University.
The Risk Management Office shall prepare relevant reports before each meeting relating
to the following agenda topics:
Environmental Management System audits, monitoring problems and reports
review of the progress of the Environmental Management System
Preparation of Environment Annual Report.
Shall prepare the agenda and distribute papers to EAC members approximately five days
before the meeting. On an annual basis, through the quarterly meetings, objectives, targets
and resource requirements will be reviewed as well as those items listed above.

Not Applicable.
47
24 Department and Faculty Responsibilities for Environment

and Safety
24.1 Departmental and Faculty Responsibilities for Committees
24.1.1 Introduction to Environment Health and Safety Committees
All Departments and Faculties participating in SafetyMAP and the EMS must establish
committees responsible for environment health and safety matters. In conjunction with the
University OHSC and EAC these committees provide the communication structure for
regular reporting and monitoring of the management systems. Communication and
reporting requirements of these committees should be clearly documented in the relevant
EHSM procedures and form the basis of the local committee terms of reference.
24.1.2 Committees
24.1.2.1 Departmental Environment Health and Safety Committees
Where established, must have an appropriate membership and terms of reference

Facilitate the identification of safety and environmental risks in local work units
Appropriate agenda and minuting structure to facilitate the document and records
management of SafetyMAP and EMS systems
Endorsement of safe work procedures in local areas
Regular reporting to faculty EHS committee
Management of safety and environmental issues that are deemed the management
responsibility of a particular department and the reporting of same to faculty and /or
University OHS / EAC committees
24.1.2.2 Faculty Environment Health and Safety Committees
Where established, must have an appropriate membership and terms of reference

Consideration of all departmental EHS committee reports
Quarterly reporting to the University OHS & EAC committees on relevant safety and
environmental issues
Responsible for endorsement of new procedures and policies for the faculty manual in
accordance with relevant guidelines from the University EHSM.
24.1.2.3 University OHSC and EAC
Respond in writing to submitted reports from facultys (or administrative departments)

RMO to report to OHSC & EAC regarding internal and external audits of department
and faculty systems
24.2 Staff Responsibility for Environment and Safety

24.2.1 Purpose
To provide generic statement of Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) responsibilities for
staff. These statements should be incorporated into existing human resources activities
such as position descriptions or duty statements as appropriate.
48
24.2.2 Application
All staff responsibilities must be documented in a way that is clearly defined for
individuals, such as position descriptions or duty statements. These documents must be kept
in accordance with records procedure.
The duties listed below may extend to nonemployees such as visitors, contractors, and
students.
Any delegations of these duties to other staff members must be within University
guidelines.
24.2.3 Legislation
24.2.4 References
University Statute 7.1
AS/NZS ISO 14001:1996 Environmental Management Systems
Environment and Safety is the concern of all employees and certain groups within the
University Community have specific responsibilities.
24.2.5.1 Authority for Staff
The Authority to make delegations affecting the University management and

administration is vested in council and to a lesser extent the ViceChancellor.
In order to facilitate administration and management, authorities are formally delegated
by Council to nominated officers. The formal delegations range from according Heads of
Department responsibility for environment and occupational health and safety in their
Departments, to authorities in relation to expenditure and personal matters.
The council must appoint staff in such categories and on such terms and conditions are
specified by regulation under statute 7.1.
As Senior Executive Officer of the University the Vice Chancellor will ensure effective
communication, implementation, management and monitoring of the environment and
safety management system.
24.2.5.2 Deans and Heads of departments
ensure adherence to legislation and University policies

integrate risk management into all planning processes and activities using
documented risk assessments as the basis for action
identify and provide resources required to develop and maintain EHS systems
review EHS data and evaluate EHS programs
ensure all reported incidents are fully investigated and preventative measures fully
implemented
ensure effective emergency procedures are in place and practiced regularly
ensure all EHS responsibilities are clearly defined and allocated in position
descriptions or duty statements
49
In association with appropriate personnel and the Risk management Office, to

formulate and promulgate specific EHS rules for activities conducted within areas
under their control
Responsible for reporting to the Chair of the Occupational Health and Safety
Committee any member of staff, student, contractor working in their area who by
refusal or neglect, fails to observe safety rules.
24.2.5.3 Managers and Section Heads
maintain compliance with all environment, health and safety policies and
procedures by regular performance review
conduct regular inspections to identify risks/aspects, implement corrective action
and arrange monitoring where required
ensure that all staff, including contractors under local control, are appropriately
inducted
provide relevant EHS information and ensure appropriate training;
identify health monitoring needs, in consultation with the Occupational Physician
maintain appropriate records as required by the Universitys Records Services
department
ensure consultative structures and staff participation by conducing regular section
meetings to discuss EHS issues
investigate all reported incidents and report to department head all action taken to
prevent a similar occurrence.
In addition, ACADEMIC STAFF are responsible for ensuring that an equivalent standard
of environment, health and safety is afforded to their students as is afforded to University
staff generally. Academic staff are deemed to have principal supervisory duty for
undergraduate and postgraduate student activities.
24.2.5.4 Supervisors (any person who controls or directs others)
develop new work procedures as required, in conjunction with relevant persons

provide all staff with relevant EHS information in an appropriate manner
provide personal protective equipment and clothing if hazards cannot fully
eliminated
provide adequate supervision through technical guidance and support
identify and control hazardous conditions
provide appropriate facilities for safe storage, handling and transport of hazardous
substances
ensure that all accidents and injuries are reported.
24.2.5.5 Staff
all employees (including those employees referred to above) are to comply with the
EHS Manual
adopt work practices that support EHS programs
take reasonable care for the safety of his/her own health and safety and that of
other people who may be affected by their conduct in the workplace
50
seek guidance for all new or modified work procedures to ensure that any
hazardous conditions, near misses and injures are reported immediately to
supervisor
must not willfully place at risk the health or safety of any person in the workplace
participate in meetings, training and other environment, health and safety activities
must not wilfully or recklessly interfere with or misuse anything provided in the
interest of environment health and safety or welfare
wear personal protective equipment as provided
use equipment in compliance with relevant guidelines, without willful interference or
misuse
must cooperate with the University relation to actions taken by the University to
comply with Occupational Health and Safety and Environmental legislation.
24.2.5.6 Contractor Responsibilities
All Contractors are required to undergo appropriate induction training, adhere to all
contractual requirements of the University in relation to Environment Health and Safety in
addition to the Environment Health and Safety requirements of the University in
accordance with University Policy and Procedures and/or agreed work method statements.
24.2.5.7 Departmental / Faculty Safety Officers
Appointed by Head of Department where required. Safety officers are usually the first
point of contact locally in a department on matters of health and safety and is able to
provide appropriate information and advice. The Safety Officer will liaise with other
departments and with the Risk Management Office to effect remedial action where a
hazard of unsafe working practice has been notified, although the responsibility for health
and safety within the department rests with the Head of Department.
Safety Officers must attend an approved training course or hold other relevant
qualification.
Responsibilities as delegated in writing by the Head of Department, for example;
undertake regular inspections of the workplace to ensure adequate housekeeping
and implement corrective action as required
provide safety advice and information to staff and students
arrange safety training where appropriate
ensure appropriate notification of accidents and hazards
control access to restricted areas
assess competency of equipment users
ensure equipment is maintained.
24.2.5.8 Elected Health and Safety Representatives (HSR)
The Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Act requires the involvement of employees in
decisions concerning their health and safety. This is central to the strategy for prevention
of workplace injury and illness. Employee involvement is achieved through the election of
Health and Safety Representatives (HSR) and the establishment of OHS committees.
51
24.2.5.9 Environmental Representatives
The local environmental representative with associated authority remains the responsibility
of Heads of Departments and Deans of Faculties. This authority may be delegated to a
staff member who should be a member of the relevant environment health and safety
committee. The University Environmental Manager is the management representative of
the EMS, as defined in ISO 14001:1996. This position is occupied by a staff member of
the RMO and is the executive officer of the EAC. The EAC provides one avenue to
decisionmaking processes of senior executives.
Manages the environmental management system within the department
Maintain operational control and document control
Auditing and reporting audit results back to the departments and the Risk
Management Office if appropriate
Faculty Environmental Representatives are nominated by the Dean of the Faculty
Appendix B.
Departmental Environmental Representative
environmental representatives for day to day communication of the EMS to staff
and students within their Department as required
in the absence of the Head of Department the environmental representative shall
be the authority to undertake decision making and initiate action as required
maintain pertinent EMS records relative to department activities and undertake
review of environmental aspects on a periodic basis
shall report aspects, risks and monitoring of the system to the Head of Department
on a periodic basis or in the case of a perceived emergency.
Department Environmental Representatives are nominated by the Head of Department,
refer to table of Environmental Representatives Appendix B.
reports directly to the Head of Department on all radiation issues

advise and report to the Department Safety Committee on all matters pertaining to
radiation safety
assumes control in any emergency involving radiation hazards and notifies the
Universitys Radiation Protection Officer
has the authority to shut down any process or laboratory that he or she considers to
be in violation of University policy until the issue is resolved.
Has the authority to enter all areas of the Department, including research areas, to
conduct tests required for monitoring safe handling and disposal of radiation
sources.
DRSOs must attend approved radiation safety training course.
52
24.2.5.11 First Aid Officers
Appointed by Head of Department where required.

To apply the accepted principles of basic life support with an injury or when
sudden illness occurs, using the facilities or materials available at the time and
within the scope of the training provided.
(Responsibility ends
when the casualty is handed over to the care of an ambulance officer, nurse or
doctor, other appropriate person.)
First aiders must hold current workplace level 1 or 2 first aid certificate and attend annual
CPR update.
24.2.5.12 Building Emergency Controller
The Building Emergency Controller adapts the model procedures in the University EH&S
manual to the needs of the building, appoints and organises training for Floor Wardens and
other designated emergency personnel who are members of the Building Emergency
Evacuation Team, organises evacuation drills, and takes charge in the event of an
evacuation emergency or drill.
Procedures need to cope with absences of staff. The Building Emergency Controller may
delegate extra duties to members of the emergency evacuation team, or to building
occupants.
BECs must be inducted by Risk Management Office.
24.2.5.13 Deputy Building Emergency Controller
In the absence of the Building Emergency Controller, the Deputy Building Emergency
Controller will take over these functions.
24.2.5.14 Floor Wardens
Floor wardens are appointed by the Building Emergency Controller to implement the
agreed emergency procedures as required.
Floor Wardens must be attend Emergency Preparedness training.
Responsibilities:
under direction of Building Emergency Controller undertake duties as required by
agreed emergency procedures
notify BEC of any personnel or local changes in the workplace.
The University of Melbourne has in place various insurance policies to cover the potential
liability arising from the various activities of the University. One such policy is the Public
Liability Insurance. The intent of the Public Liability Insurance policy is to cover the
"Insureds" legal liability for third party personal injury or third party property damage
caused by an occurrence in connection with the business of the University. Within the
definition of "Insured" under this insurance, employees of the University are included within
this definition "whilst undertaking activities at the request of the University". Therefore,
employees undertaking defined special duty roles such as of "Building Emergency
Controller" are afforded coverage under the Universitys Public Liability Insurance, subject
of course to the terms, conditions and exclusions of this insurance policy.
53
24.3 Student Responsibility for Environment and Safety

24.3.1 Purpose
To define student responsibilities for environment and safety.
24.3.2 Application
All students are to comply with the Environment Health and Safety Manual.
24.3.3 Legislation
24.3.4 References
University Occupational Health and Safety Policy
University Environmental Policy
Children on campus policy
24.3.5.1 Students
Students are responsible for adopting safe work and study practices, and are required to
comply with all University and Departmental rules and procedures which relate to
environment, health and Safety;
must report all hazard and injuries to their supervisor or sports centre;
must not wilfully place at risk the health or safety of any other person at the
University;
must not wilfully or recklessly interfere with or misuse anything provided in the
interests of environment, health and safety or welfare at the University;
The use of certain facilities may require that students provide some items of personal
protective equipment see Procedure 8.3.4 Selection and issue of Personal Protection
Equipment (PPE).
24.3.5.2 Student Union
Students should be made aware that the Melbourne University Student Union has
developed an Occupational Health and Safety Policy and Environmental Policy.
24.3.5.3 Academic Supervisors
Department should identify what equipment and in what location personal protection will
be required by students. Students should be informed of this through the enrolment
procedures.
Academic staff are responsible for ensuring that an equivalent standard of health and
safety is afforded to their student as is afforded to University staff generally. Academic
staff have a responsibility to ensure students are aware of the Universitys Environmental
Management System and conduct themselves in a manner which supports the system
when under their supervision (e.g. supervision in laboratories).
54

24.3.6.1 Children on Campus
Requests by students to bring their child(ren) to the classroom shall be treated

sympathetically by supervisors and teachers. Students should request permission to bring
their child(ren) to work from their lecturers. For more information see Personnel Policy and
Procedures manual section 10.25.
24.4 Health and Safety Representatives

24.4.1 Purpose
The Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Act requires the involvement of employees in
decisions concerning their health and safety. This is central to the strategy for prevention
of workplace injury and illness. Employee involvement is achieved through the election of
Health and Safety Representatives (HSR) and the establishment of OHS committees.
24.4.2 Application
HSR is Designated Work Group (DWG) representative. Employees of each DWG may
elect a staff member of the group to act on their behalf on health and safety issues that
may arise within the DWG. HSR are responsible only for the safety and health matters
within their specific DWG. HSR must be given reasonable time off work with pay to
perform their function, in consultation with their supervisor.
24.4.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Act 1985
24.4.4 References
24.4.5.1 University OH&S Committee
Setting up Designated Work Groups

In 1990, as a result of joint union and employer negotiations, over sixty Designated Work
Groups were established on a geographic, administrative or occupational basis. The
DWGs are reviewed and reorganised regularly. The most current DWG listing is found in
Appendix B.
Altering Designated Work Groups. The composition of DWG may be varied at any time by
representation to the University OHS committee.
24.4.5.2 HSR Functions
The functions of HSR emphasis the preventative role of ensuring employees are fully
informed about all aspects of the work environment. To achieve this the OHS Act provides
HSR with broad rights to regularly inspect the workplace, immediately investigate the
scene of an incident, be informed and consulted on safety and health issues in the
workplace and to report any hazards. The Act also provides a mechanism for solving
OHS issues; with HSR being involved in this mechanism.
A HSR may seek the assistance from any person, either internal or from outside the
workplace. A HSR should be aware of current Acts, Regulations and codes of practice
relevant to OHS. These are available for viewing in the Risk Management Office.
The HSR elect from within their number six HSR to represent all DWG on the Universitys
Occupational Health and Safety Committee. The term of office is two years with
provision to stand for reelection.
When requested by the HSR a department should establish an OHS committee within
three months. The HSR will be consulted on the composition and functions of the
committee. At least half the members of an OHS committee should be employee
representatives.
Authority:
Under the OHS Act staff within a designated work group may elect staff
member(s) to represent their interests on health and safety matters.
Heads of departments must arrange for appropriate facilities and assistance to be
given to elected representatives to enable them to fulfill their functions.
HSRs must attend approved 5day training course or hold other relevant qualifications.
Rights:
be involved and consulted in the incident investigation process
be given reasonable resources and time to carry ot the role of HSR
investigate complaints of health and safety nature
discuss health and safety matters with management as part of the OH&S
consultative procedures
carry out inspections of the workplace
receive information from management and external sources
attend meetings and interviews as required.
24.4.5.4 Management Health and Safety Representatives
Authority:
Nominated by the dean or head to negotiate OHS issues with the elected employee
representative.
Management nominees should attend approved 2day training course or hold other relevant
qualification.
Responsibilities:
receive notification from elected HSR of unsafe or unhealthy working conditions
and to effect remedial action
make sure HSR has access to facilities and assistance they need to perform their
function
provide HSR with information on hazards or potential hazards in the workplace
provide details in advance of proposed changes to the workplace that may affect
health or safety
notify HSR of any reported incidents
provide HSR with any reports relating to health and safety.
56
24.4.5.5 Deputy HSR
While there is no provision under the OHS Act for deputy HSRs, the University may
recognise such persons in the absence of the elected HSR.
24.4.5.6 Local Area Managers
The employer is responsible for making sure HSR has access to facilities and assistance
they need to perform their function such as:
information on hazards or potential hazards in the workplace
details in advance of proposed changes to the workplace that may affect health
or safety
notification of any incidents
any reports relating to health and safety
Material Safety Data Sheets
It is an offence under the Act for an employer to treat somebody unfavourably because
that person is or has been a HSR.
Where a HSR is elected it is essential that a management representative is nominated to
negotiate issues with the HSR. These management representatives should receive training
in principles of Risk Management.
For further information contact the Manager, Risk Management (8344 4006) or the
Convenor of The University of Melbourne Health and Safety Representatives.
24.4.6.1 Executive Services
Election of HSR
To become a HSR you must be elected by employees at your workplace. HSR
nominations and elections are arranged through Executive Services (8344 7935). To be
eligible, staff must work in the DWG for which they are nominating and have their
nomination form seconded by two current staff members in the same DWG. Calls for
nomination are published in UniNews. If only one nominee, that person becomes the HSR
for that DWG. If more than one nomination is received for any DWG, the University will
establish an electoral roll and print ballot papers. All employees in a DWG are entitled to
vote in an election.
24.4.6.2 Term of Office
The term of office is four years with provision to stand again. The most recent
campuswide elections were held in July 1998. Where a casual vacancy occurs or a new
DWG is established nominations are immediately called through internal.
A person shall cease to be a HSR if they resign, leave the DWG that elected them, if
DWG is altered, the term of office expires and they are not reelected, or if disqualified.
57
24.4.6.3 Staff Development and Training
The Act requires employers to provide paid leave to allow HSR to attend an approved
training course. The University also accepts responsibility for the cost of the approved HSR
training course. Details of training can be obtained from Human Resources, Staff
Development and Training. The HSR should be trained within twelve months of being
elected. Additional training in communication and negotiation skills is highly recommended
as OHS issues should always be resolved through consultation.
25 EHS Training
25.1 Purpose
This procedure is to provide guidelines for the identification of training needs of individual
staff and students, including mandatory training.
25.2 Application
An outline of responsibilities for training all staff and students is provided to ensure
competency in particular work areas.
25.3 Legislation
OHS Act 1985, Section 21
OHS (Noise) Reg 1992, Reg. 17(2)(a)
OHS (Plant) Reg 1995, Reg. 716
OHS (Manual Handling) Reg 1999 Dangerous Goods (Storage & Handling) Regs 2000
OHS (Hazardous Substances) Reg 1999 HS Act 1985, Section 21
25.4 References
Personnel files within Departments
Health Hazard Assessment Questionnaire (PS 15 part B)
Human Resources Induction kit PPP Manual
Quick Reference Sheet
Staff Development and Training Courses and Databases
Refer to Procedure 2.4.2 Staff Responsibilities for Environment and Safety.

25.6.1 Provision of Training
The Staff Development and Training Unit in conjunction with the Risk Management
Office provide a range of lectures, demonstrations and programs on environmental, health
and safety issues. Persons who are suitably qualified in the field of environment, health
and safety shall this provide information.
58
Training programs shall be continually modified to include evaluations from previous

courses, future departmental requirements and statutory/compliance obligations. If the
need for a course is identified and is not currently available, please contact the Staff
Development and Training Unit or the Risk Management Office. It may be possible to
organise a specific program to meet local requirement needs.
25.6.2 Employment of Staff
Staff are employed with expert knowledge in their areas of responsibility and these shall
be defined in their position descriptions, duty statements or equivalent. Expert knowledge
shall be evaluated by the local area Supervisor, and shall include one or more of the
following:
appropriate educational standards
prior work experience
references from prior employers
membership of professional bodies (if applicable)
technical expertise (if applicable)
Records of prior experience and qualifications of staff shall be kept in individual hard copy
personnel files.
25.6.3 Mandatory Training
Mandatory training shall include;
Induction The University has a formal induction procedure found in the PPP
manual. Departments should adopt this process for their specific requirements and
keep records on local personnel files. In particular EHS issues shall be included in
induction for all positions. Positions, which are likely to have a direct EHS
responsibility or contribute to significant EHS risk, shall be provided with additional
information. Recognition of prior learning to be assessed by supervisor. Induction is
performed on the commencement of starting a new position in the University.
Compliance briefings for Senior Management Staff, every three years.
Elected health and safety representatives to attend approved five day course at
Vic Trades Hall Council, within 12 months of election.
First Aid Training, every three years and annual update of CPR, for all First
Aiders.
Department Radiation Safety Officer to undertake three day ANSTO training or in
house equivalent, upon appointment.
BEC Induction, upon appointment.
Training in Hearing Protection in accordance with OHS (Noise) Reg 1992, Reg.
17(2)(a), every four years, for staff using hearing protection.
Training in Plant Hazards in accordance with OHS (Plant) Reg 1995, Reg. 716, at
least every four years.
Training in Manual Handling in accordance with OHS (Manual Handling) Reg
1999, at least every four years.
Training in Storage and Handling of Dangerous Goods in accordance with
Dangerous Goods (Storage & Handling) Regs 2000, at least every four years.
59
Training in Hazardous Substances in accordance with OHS (Hazardous

Substances) Reg 1999, at least every four years.
Frequency of training may be dependant on the use of skills by the staff or student and
changes in the workplace.
25.6.4 Identification of Training
The local area supervisor shall identify training and awareness needs in reference to
position description requirements at the time of annual performance appraisal. This will
include, consideration of any applicable changes in duties, legislation, technology and risk
assessments of activities of staff. In addition all staff whose work may create a
significant impact upon the environment, shall receive appropriate training.
Refer to guidelines on training requirements for EHS as a general indication of the training
to be undertaken by specific roles within the University. SDT and RMO will assist Faculties
with Training Needs Analysis on release of the annual SDT program.
Other training may be identified through:
departmental requests for specific and general training needs
identification of aspects with significant environmental impact on specific
departments and local area hazards
the need to understand relevant roles and responsibilities in maintaining
conformance to the Universitys Environment and Safety Management Systems
requirements derived from environmental objectives and targets.
25.6.5 Induction of Contractors
Property & Buildings induct principle building and maintenance contractors on an annual
basis, refer to Property & Buildings Management of Contractors.
25.6.6 Testing for Competency
The assessment of competence must be carried out by local area supervisor, which can
include:
previous experience and training
observation of technique
questioning of process and understanding
verification of use of relevant procedures
meeting minutes.
25.6.7 Records
Records of training, awareness and competencies shall be kept by the Staff Development
and Training Unit and/or on personnel files. Refer to Records Disposal Schedule.
25.6.8 Specific Environmental Training
All staff and students have the responsibility of minimising the environmental impact of
their activities. To fulfill this responsibility, they need sufficient awareness and training to
identify their ongoing and potential environmental impacts and use the knowledge and
procedures available to them to minimise these impacts. Training programs will inform all
staff and students of:
60
the importance of conformance with the Universitys Environmental Policy and

EHS procedures, and their roles and responsibilities in achieving this conformance;
significant environmental impacts (actual or potential) of their work activities and
environmental benefits of improved personal performance;
their roles and responsibilities in achieving conformance with the environmental
policy and procedures and with the requirements of the environmental
management system, including emergency preparedness and response
requirements;
the potential consequences of departure from specified operating procedures both
personal and environmental consequences.
61
62
Chapter 3. Identification, Assessment and Control

31 Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control
Introduction
31.1 Purpose
The Management Systems, SafetyMAP and The Environmental Management System
(EMS) have as essential components the Risk Management process of identification,
assessment and control of hazards. The process of hazard management becomes the
framework upon which the management systems are built. For maximum impact, the
hazard management approach must be consistent, relevant and applicable to all
University activities. The Management systems can therefore evolve within individual
work units and across the University by systematically addressing hazards according to the
associated level of risk they impose. An attempt has been made to integrate safety and
environmental hazard management.
A. Audit Requirements
B. Terminology
31.2 Application
This procedure provides an introduction and background to the process of how safety and
environmental hazards are identified, assessed and controlled at the University of
Melbourne. This procedure should be used in conjunction with Hazard identification,
assessment and control application (EHS Procedure 3.2). The aim is to provide
background information and an overview of the process required for utilisation of the
Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS Procedure 3.2). These
procedures to highlight the considerations required by ISO 14001 when assessing the impact
of environmental aspects and SafetyMAP when assessing safety hazards. An overview
of the process by which the University of Melbourne manages information and processes
regarding environment and safety hazards from all sources is provided.
31.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
31.4 References
AS/NZS 4360: 1999 Risk Management
Refer to Environment Health and Safety Manual Procedure 2.4.2 Staff Responsibilities for
63

31.6.1 Audit Requirements
The University has SafetyMAP Initial Level, and is currently audited in stages throughout
the University. The audit requirements of the EMS are more closely aligned with
advanced level SafetyMAP. The long term goal is to reach a stage where both systems
have equal requirements and are audited as one. Audit requirement variations between
initial & transition SafetyMAP and the EMS, will be specified in relevant procedures
where they occur.
31.6.2 Terminology
The terminology used to explain, describe and control safety and environmental hazard
management has developed uniquely within the two systems. The principles underlying the
terminology of cause and effect however, remain the same. In order to achieve optimal
communication, this terminology has been described and compared below:
Definitions
Cause (Oxford English Dictionary) that which produces an effect; that which gives rise to
any action, phenomenon or condition.
Consequence (AS/NZS 4360) the outcome of an event expressed qualitatively or
quantitatively, being a loss, injury, disadvantage or gain. There may be a range of possible
outcomes associated with an event.
Effect (Oxford English Dictionary) something accomplished, caused or produced; a result,
consequence.
Environmental aspect (ISO 14001 3.3 ) element of an organizations activities, products
or services that can interact with the environment. NOTE A significant environmental
aspect is an environmental aspect that has or can have a significant environmental
impact.
Environmental impact ( ISO 14001 3.4 ) any change to the environment, whether
adverse or beneficial, wholly or partially resulting from an organizations activities,
products or services.
Environmental aspects (ISO 14001 4.3.1) The organization shall establish and maintain
(a) procedure(s) to identify the environmental aspects of its activities, products or services
that it can control and over which it can be expected to have an influence, in order to
determine those which have or cannot have significant impacts on the environment. The
organization shall ensure that the aspects related to these significant impacts are
considered in setting its environmental objectives.
Event (AS/NZS 4360) is an incident or situation, which occurs in a particular place during
a particular interval of time.
Hazard (AS/NZS 4360) a source of potential harm or a situation with a potential to cause
loss Hazard identification (AS/NZS 4804:1997) the process of recognizing that a hazard
exists and defining its characteristics.
Incident (AS/NZS 4804: 1997) any unplanned event resulting in, or having a potential for
injury, illhealth, damage or other loss.
Likelihood (AS/NZS 4360) used as a qualitative description of probability or frequency.
64
Residual Risk (AS/NZS 4360) the remaining level of risk after risk treatment measures
have been taken.
Risk (AS/NZS 4360) the chance of something happening that will have an impact. It is
measured in terms of consequences and likelihood.
Risk Analysis (AS/NZS 4360) a systematic use of available information to determine how
often specified events may occur and the magnitude of their consequences.
Risk Assessment (AS/NZS 4360) the overall process of risk analysis and risk evaluation.
Risk Evaluation (AS/NZS 4360) the process used to determine risk management priorities
by comparing the level of risk against predetermined standards, target risk levels or other
criteria.
Environmental Advisory Committee (EHS Procedure 2.3)
31.6.3 Overview of Risk Management
The procedures within section three and identified supporting procedures follow the
guidelines of AS/NZS 4360 for risk management as follows:
a) Establish the Context Hazard identification, assessment and control introduction
(EHS Procedure 3.1)
b) Identify Risks Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS
Procedure 3.2)
c) Analyse Risks Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS
Procedure 3.2)
d) Evaluate Risks Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS
Procedure 3.2)
e) Treat Risks Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS
Procedure 3.2)
f) Monitor and Review Auditing (EHS Procedure 1.6.5); Incident and Hazard Reporting
(EHS 4.2)
g) Communicate and Consult EHS objectives (EHS Procedure 1.4); Communication
(EHS Procedure 1.6.6)
31.6.4 Establish the Context
The strategic context
The outcomes of the risk assessment process have different implications for the strategic
implementation of initial and transition levels of SafetyMAP and EMS. The input from
safety and environmental risk assessment to the global University strategies are detailed in
Environmental Health and Safety Objectives (EHS Procedure1.5).
Safety Management System
Identification of safety hazards and incidents are reported to departmental committees
responsible for the control of safety and other issues in particular work areas. Minutes of
these meetings are forwarded to the University Occupational Health & Safety
Committee, via the Risk Management Office, where items of global concern are
65
discussed and possible actions agreed upon. Regular reports on safety incidents are
produced by the Risk Management Office and tabled at both the University Occupational
Health & Safety Committee and the University Risk Management Committee.
Environmental Management System
All identified and assessed aspects and impacts are forwarded to the RMO. The
assessments are reviewed for consistency with like aspects and impacts and are collated
for tabling at relevant Environment Advisory Committee (EAC) Subcommittee meetings.
The RMO is responsible for maintaining a University wide Environmental Aspects Register.
In the first stage of the EMS implementation the RMO shall also take responsibility for
identifying relevant University objectives, assess the legal considerations associated with
identified aspects and where appropriate consideration for technological advancement for
managing aspects. A report will be issued back to the departments taking into account
those considerations from departments aspects. In the second stage it is planned that
Faculty and Administrative Departmental Committees will assume these responsibilities.
Environmental Health and Safety Objectives (EHS Procedure1.5) details the process by
which identified significant environmental aspects and their associated impacts are
incorporated into the Universitys strategic plan for environmental management.
31.6.5 The Organisational Context
The procedures identified above provide guidelines to the management of safety and
environmental risks at the University of Melbourne. The aim is a process that is consistent,
relevant and applicable to all University activities.
31.6.6 The Risk Management Context
The procedures provide systematic methods for identifying all causes of safety and
environmental incidents or potential incidents, ranking their effects and controlling these
effects and/or causes. The cause of a safety incident or potential incident is a HAZARD,
which has an associated PERSONAL SAFETY RISK. All safety hazards are identified
and their associated personal safety risk assessed. The cause of an environmental
incident or potential incident is an ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECT, which has an associated
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT. All environmental aspects are identified and their
associated environmental impacts assessed.
31.6.7 Risk Evaluation Criteria
A three level risk evaluation criteria is currently operating for both personal safety risks
and environmental impacts. All extreme/ significant risks are dealt with immediately or
with priority, in addition extreme and significant risks have specific reporting requirements
as detailed Incident and Hazard reporting (EHS 4.2). High, medium and low risks are then
considered as detailed in Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHS
Procedure 3.2).
66
32 Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control Application

32.1 Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to identify, assess and control hazards in a systematic
way that is consistent, relevant and applicable to all University activities. Specifically this
procedure will address the following components of the Risk Management process as
detailed in AS/NZS 4360.
Identify all HAZARDS and analyse their associated PERSONAL SAFETY RISK
Identify all ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS and analyse their associated
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
Evaluate the relative personal safety risks and environmental impacts using the risk
assessment form and prioritise them
Treat the personal safety risks and environmental impacts by controlling the
hazards and environmental aspects using the hierachy of controls method.
32.2 Application
Provides guidelines for the practical management of safety and environmental risks at the
University of Melbourne utilising AS/NZS 4360 as a source guide. In conjunction with
Hazard identification, assessment and control introduction (EHS Procedure 3.1), provides
preparation for the consistent monitoring & review and Communication & consultation
components of risk management
32.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
32.4 References
AS/NZS 4360: 1999 Risk Management
Related Procedures
Records Management (EHS Procedure 1.6.3)
Auditing (EHS Procedure 1.6.5)
Corrective Action (EHS Procedure 1.6.6)
Environmental Advisory Committee (EHS Procedure 2.3)
Hazard identification, assessment and control introduction (EHS Procedure 3.1).
Finance Policy and Procedures Manual Section 8.5 Environment, Health and Safety Issues in Relation
to Purchasing.
67
Refer to Environment Health and Safety Manual Procedure 2.4.2 Staff Responsibility for

32.6.1 Identification of Hazards and Environmental Aspects
Identify all HAZARD and their associated PERSONAL SAFETY RISK
Identify all ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS and their associated
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS.
32.6.2 Tools and Techniques: Checklists
The identification of hazards and environmental aspects must be comprehensive and
systematic. All activities within a work unit and all work units within a department must
be considered during the identification process. A number of checklists for common
activities at the University of Melbourne have been developed to guide the identification
process. Each broad work unit is divided into activities, representing potential hazards and
environmental aspects, and questions asked to prompt a consideration of possible
associated personal safety risks and environmental impacts. Control measures for the
personal safety risks and environmental aspects are prompted for consideration in the
checklists, and will be discussed below in section 4.2. These checklists are:
Office / Environment & Safety Inspection Checklist
Laboratory Environment & Safety Inspection Checklist
Workshop Environment & Safety Inspection Checklist
Plant Hazard Identification
Manual Handling Identification
Workstation Identification Checklist
These checklists may be developed further for particular work units. Or used as a guide to
develop checklists for particular work units. When developing checklists for particular
work units the following are useful tools: judgments based on experience and records, flow
charts, brainstorming, systems and scenario analysis.
32.6.3 Managing Tools and Techniques
To ensure that all work units are comprehensively considered by the identification tools and
techniques it is important to develop identification systems. These should include both
scheduled and ad hoc activities.
Scheduled
A planned schedule of all identification activities will be maintained in particular work
areas. This planned schedule may include:
Internal department inspections using checklists, these shall be scheduled on a
quarterly or six monthly basis.
External audits (University Internal Audit, Certification Bodies)
Six monthly incident statistics report
68
Routine monitoring and measuring process existing in individual work units

Ad Hoc
Ad Hoc activities are important to address immediate issues that must be addressed
outside the scheduled system and must include at least:
Incident report investigation
Inaction on a previous incident or non conformance
Risk assessment of a planned new activity.
32.6.4 Risk Assessment of Personal Safety Risks and Environmental Impacts
Analyse associated PERSONAL SAFETY RISKS
Analyse associated ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
by using the Risk Assessment 2D Model or Risk Assessment 3D Model .
The objectives of analysis are to separate the minor acceptable risks from the major risks,
and to provide data to assist in the evaluation and treatment of risks. Risk analysis
considers the magnitude of the consequences to personal safety of particular hazards and
environmental impacts of particular environmental aspects, and the likelihood that those
consequences may occur. Factors that affect consequences and likelihood may be
identified. The risk assessment 2D Model provides a systematic approach to risk assessing the
personal safety risks of a particular hazard and the environmental impacts of a particular
environmental aspect. Likelihood is evaluated via a five scale rank from rare to almost
certain. Consequence is evaluated via a five scale rank from, minor personal injury /
minimal environmental impact (insignificant) to death and /or multiple injuries / long term
environmental impact (Catastrophic). The risk analyses matrix combines both qualitative
measures of consequences and likelihood to provide a four tiered level of risk and
responsibilities as follows:
Table 31: Level of Risk
Level of Risk
Definition
extreme risk / significant risk; immediate action

required
high risk; senior management attention needed
moderate risk; management responsibilities must be

specified
low risk; manage by routine procedures

The Risk Assessment 3D Model is available as there are some people who prefer to use the
earlier numerical model as opposed to the graphical model above, however you are
recommended to use the 2D model in the first instance. The same definition applies to
Likelihood and Consequence. The 3D Model offers a further definition of exposure see
Table 5 (in the 2 D Model exposure is taken into consideration in Likelihood). The
exposure, likelihood and consequence are multiplied to provide a risk level as shown in
Table 4 Level of Risk.
69
Table 32: Exposure Level

Level
Description
Score
Continuously
Every 5 minutes
10
Frequently
> 1 per day
Occasionally
<1 per day
Infrequently
< 1 per week
Rarely
<1 per month
32.6.7 Legal Implications for Environmental Risk Analysis

The Environmental Legislation Manual (EHS Appendix C) is available as an integral tool
in the analysis of risks associated with environmental aspects and their impacts. It should
be consulted by referring in the manual to the environmental aspect/activity under analysis.
The information should be used as verification that all legal requirements of departments
are being met, and as a prompt to obtain further legal advice if necessary.
32.6.8 Consequences, Likelihood and Residual Risk
The magnitude of consequences of an event, should it occur, and the likelihood of the
event and its associated consequences, are assessed in the context of existing controls. By
considering existing controls the residual personal safety risk of a particular hazard and/or
the residual environmental impact of a particular environmental aspects is assessed. It is
important to define residual risk to promote its risk assessment to develop a consistent
approach throughout all activities at the University. Figure 1 describes the qualitative
measures of consequence or impact. Figure 2 describes qualitative measures of likelihood.
Table 33: Qualitative measures of consequence or impact
70
LEVEL
ENVIRON
MENT
REPUTATIO PERSONAL
N
TECHNOLO
GY
FINANCE
1 Low
Minimal
rate of
contaminati
on
Minimal
impact on
corporate
image local
complaints
low level short Minimal

term injury, no Network
treatment
difficulties
required
Minimal
Negligible
financial
disturbance to
loss. Less
operations
than $10000
2 Minor
Onsite
toxic
release
immediately
contained
minor media
attention,
adverse
effect on
reputation
Minor injuries
requiring
medical
attention
Infrequent
network
difficulties
Medium
financial
loss $10K
100K
Occasional
interruptions
to operations
3 Moderate
Onsite
toxic
release
contained
with outside
assistance
Adverse
publicity,
regulatory
critisicm
Moderate
injury or
disability
requiring
medical
treatment
Occasional
breakdown of
systems and
network
High
financial
loss
Moderate
damage to
operations or
production
$100K 10M
OPERATION
S
4 Major
Offsite
toxic
release with
no major
detrimental
effects
Public /
media
concern.
Possible
licencing
restrictions
Extensive
number of
injuries or
single fatality
Frequent
breakdown in
major systems
and network
Major
financial
loss $1
10M
Major
damage
requiring
corrective or
preventative
action
5 Extreme
Offsite
toxic
release with
detrimental
effect
Serious
media
coverage.
Reputation
severely
tarnished
Severe health
effects
leading to
multiple
fatalities
Complete
breakdown of
Universitywid
e network
Huge
financial
loss Over
$10M Major
fraud
Future
operations
affected,
urgent
corrective
action.
Cessation of
activities
Table 34: Qualitative measures of likelihood

LEVEL
DESCRIPTION
Is expected to occur in most circumstances
Almost Certain
B
Will probably occur in most circumstances
Likely
C
Might occur at some time
Possible
D
Could occur at some time
Unlikely
E
May occur only in exceptional circumstances
Rare
To minimise the subjective biases of estimating consequences and likelihoods the following
sources of information should be considered:
Past records incident reports
Relevant experience
Industry practice and experience
Relevant published literature
Techniques include:
Interview with experts in particular work units
Use of multidisciplinary focus groups
Comparison of individual evaluations
32.6.9 Risk Evaluation
Evaluate the relative personal safety risks and environmental impacts using the risk
assessment form and prioritise them Risk evaluation involves comparing the level of risk
found during the analysis process with previously established risk criteria. The following
steps provide the process for risk evaluation for personal safety risks and environmental
impacts.
A prioritized list of risks for further action should be produced from the analysis process.
1. Extreme/Significant Risks
71
All personal safety risks and environmental impacts evaluated as extreme/significant will
have clear actions detailed according to the hierarchy of controls and recorded on the risk
assessment form. This will include a date for completion. Risk assessment forms will be
included in the local audit schedule (Auditing EHS Procedure 1.6.5). All risks identified as
extreme / significant will be reported to the local EHS committee to effect monitoring of
the actions. Incomplete actions will be recorded on a corrective action form (Auditing
EHS Procedure 1.6.5)
2. Medium or High
All personal safety risks and environmental impacts evaluated as medium or high must
have included in the risk assessment form a detailed action plan. The implementation of
the action plan must in addition have associated an individual, with seniority associated
with level of risk, who is assigned responsibility for the outcome and monitoring of the
action plan. The action details will be included on the risk assessment form and monitoring
progress the responsibility of the local EHS committee.
3. Low
All personal safety risks and environmental impacts evaluated as low, such as an easily
removed obstruction, and can be resolved quickly and efficiently, should be done so
recording all actions on the risk assessment form. Longer term actions should be
developed considering the lower priority of these risks in terms of action time. The action
details will be included on the risk assessment form and monitoring of progress the
responsibility of the local EHS committee.
32.6.10 Hierarchy of Risk Controls
Treat the personal safety risks and environmental impacts by controlling the hazards and
environmental aspects using the hierachy of controls method.
Unless a particular hazard or environmental aspect is removed, the associated personal
safety risk or environmental impact can never be completely eliminated. It is important to
consider the possible risk control options available during the identification process to
provide guidelines for immediate action or further risk assessment to be conducted. These
decisions can be included in the comments / actions column of the checklist form.
The following is the preferred order of control methods described as the hierarchy of risk
control.
a) Elimination is a permanent solution and should be attempted in the first instance. The
hazard or environmental aspect is eliminated altogether.
b) Substitution involves replacing the hazard or environmental aspect by one that presents
a lower risk.
c) Engineering controls involve some structural change to the work environment or work
process to place a barrier to, or interrupt the transmission path between, the worker or
environment and the hazard or environmental aspect. This may include isolation or
enclosure of hazards or environmental aspects, machine guards and manual handling
devices.
d) Administrative (procedural) controls reduce or eliminate exposure, of individuals to a
hazard or the environment from an environmental aspect, by adherence to procedures or
instructions. Documentation should emphasize all the steps to be taken and the controls to
be used in carrying out the task both safely and with minimum impact to the environment.
e) Personal protective equipment relates only to hazards and their impact on personal
safety risks. It is worn by people as a barrier between themselves and the hazard. The
72
success of this control is dependent on the protective equipment being chosen correctly, as
well as fitted correctly and worn at all times when required.
In General
Once hazards and their personal safety risks and environmental aspects and their
environmental impacts have been identified three considerations need to be made.
i. Can the personal safety risk or environmental impact be eliminated immediately? If yes
this action should be taken immediately and recorded on the inspection checklist. If no the
following two questions should be considered during the risk identification process and after
the RISK ASSESSMENT of the personal safety risk and/or environmental impact is
completed
ii. Is the current control effective and should it be changed?
iii. Is there currently no control and therefore should a control mechanism be implemented?
32.6.11 Reporting
The complete process for risk management requires locally managed hazards and
environmental aspects to be appropriately monitored, reviewed and communicated.
Incident and hazard reporting (EHS Procedure 4.2) provides guidelines for the required
reporting procedures for safety and environment risks, identified and evaluated at the
University of Melbourne.
Identification completed checklists, risk assessment forms and consideration for significant
environmental impact forms are important records for local SafetyMAP and EMS
systems. These records should be managed according to the Records Management EHS
Procedure 1.6.4 paying particular attention to the retention period for your local work area.
33 Hazard Identification, Assessment and Control Monitoring

and Measurement
33.1 Purpose
Monitoring and Measuring provides a summary and details of the monitoring and
measurement and operational control aspects of the SafetyMAP and EMS.
33.2 Application
Departments and Faculties of the University involved in the Universitys SafetyMAP and
Environmental Management System ISO 14001 certification process.
33.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
33.4 References
Departmental and Faculty responsibility for environment and Safety (EHSM Section 2.4.2)
Hazard identification, assessment and control introduction (EHSM Section 3.1)
Hazard identification, assessment and control application (EHSM Section 3.2)
Incident and Hazard Reporting (EHSM Section 4.2)
73
Faculty and Departmental Environmental Health and Safety Committees
Environment Advisory Committee
Occupational Health and Safety Committee
The RMO shall provide instruments for monitoring workplaces and the environment or
engage consultants to carry out this work.
The instruments will require servicing and calibration on a regular basis.
The RMO will engage suitably qualified and NATA certified laboratories to calibrate the
instruments and ensure that any consultants engaged are suitably qualified and
experienced.

33.6.1 Monitoring and Measuring the Management Systems
The RMO arranges external auditing for accreditation of management systems by use of
authorised auditing organisations. Internal audit, in conjunction with the RMO, provided an
extensive internal audit program for environment, health and safety. Departments are
expected to develop and maintain a schedule of regular internal reviews such as
laboratory inspections, manual update which measure and monitor the system. Details of
the monitor and measuring processes must be reported regularly to the departmental EHS
committee which is responsible for reporting this information to the Faculty EHSC or EAC
depending on the relevant structure.
33.6.2 Measuring for SafetyMAP
A yearly internal, and triennial external audit schedule is drawn up by the RMO in
agreemnts with the VWA Self Insurance Unit. Departments and Faculties are asked to
participate in monitoring and measuring their SafetyMAP system. Results of audit
compliance an noncompliance are published in reports prepared by Internal Audit at the
completion of each surveillance audit.
Where nonconformances or opportunities for improvement have been issued, Departments
and faculties will be given time to improve and amend their system.
An annual report is submitted to the VWA outlining the outstanding nonconformances.
33.6.3 Measuring for Environmental Considerations
Measuring and monitoring activities include:
Establishment and regular review of an environmental risk/aspect register (EHSM
3.2).
Clear identification of environmental aspects considered significant.
Documented safe work procedures related to significant environmental aspects
including clear operating criteria for associated activities.
Once a Department carries out identification, assessment and control, the controls
in place shall be monitored to ensure that they are appropriate to the activity.
74
Regular reporting to the local EHS committee regarding impacts of significant

environmental aspects.
33.6.4 Notification and Review
Regular notification of suppliers and contractors regarding significant environmental
impacts and the processes of the EMS in the department. Purchasing is controlled by the
Finance Policy and Procedures Manual, Section 8. The University has significant central
purchasing to support activities of Departments, such as the Stationary Store, Chemistry
Store etc.
33.6.5 Review of Risk Assessments
The following is a list of assessments and the recommended review dates.
Table 35: Review Timetable for Assessments
TYPE
REVIEW
Keyboard Workstation Assessment Form
3 years or when workstation set up changes
Manual Handling Risk Assessment
2 years or when duties significantly change, or a new

staff member is conducting the activity
Hazardous Substances / Chemical Risk Assessments
2 years or when the process significantly changes
Environmental Aspects
3 years or when activity or product is altered
Training Needs Analysis
1 year, or when new staff member is introduced to the

area
Plant Identification
3 years or when plant set up changes
2D Risk Assessments
2 years or when activity changes
3D Risk Assessments
2 years or when activity changes
Poilicies and Procedures
3 years or when new requirements are considered
Incident Report Controls
3 months after initial investigation
Inspection Checklists
3 monthly for first year, 6 monthly thereafter if low

risk environment
Poisons Control Plan
At completion of licence, or when shcedules are

changed
Building Evacuation Trial
Yearly
First Aid Needs Assessment
3 years, or when requirements change
After Hours Activity Forms
2 years or when activity alters
Noise Assessments
2 years or when equipment is changed or introduced
34 EHS PrePurchasing (July 2003) DRAFT

34.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with legal obligations by informing Departments of
purchasing requirements for potentially hazardous materials, equipment, processes or
services.
75
34.2 Application
The procedure applies to any Department of the University purchasing: (the following list
provides examples only: it is not a definitive or prescribed list)
Table 36: Examples of Items Requireing an EHS PrePurchase Checklist
Dangerous Goods
Hazardous Substances.
Drugs and Poisons
Agricultural chemicals
Veterinary chemicals
Medicines
Radioactive materials
Equipment producing radiation
Plant requiring registration
Equipment requiring licensed

operators
Electrically or mechanically
powered equipment
Servicing or repair of equipment
Cleaning chemicals
Explosives
Carcinogens
Biohazards
Furniture
It may not apply to consumables such as stationary, computer software and other non
hazardous items but could (where they are bought in bulk) create a manual handling issue.
34.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Manual Handling)
Regulations 1999 Hazardous Substances Regulations 1999
34.4 References
EHS PrePurchase Checklist
List of Australian Standards

Code of Practice for Manual Handling 2000
Code of Practice for the Storage and Handling of Dangerous Goods 2000
NH&MRC Codes of practice relating to the use of Ionising Radiation
Australian Standards relating to the purchase of Ionising Radiation
Australian Standard 2243.110 Safety in the laboratory
76
34.5 Responsiblities
34.5.1 Heads of Departments, Administrative Divisions
Departments or divisions responsible for purchasing or selecting Preferred Suppliers on
behalf of the university must:
Ensure that the process for selecting preferred suppliers is compliant with universitys EHS
requirements.
Inform preferred suppliers of the EHS requirements of the university.
Pass on relevant EHS information (from the suppliers) to other departments in the
university.
34.5.2 Departmental Managers, Supervisors
Comply with all University policies and procedures relating to the purchase of services and
the storage, handling, use and disposal of hazardous materials or equipment.
Comply with all legal requirements relating to the purchase of services and storage,
handling, use and disposal of hazardous materials or equipment.
Ensure that all material and equipment has been assessed for EHS requirements prior to
purchase. This includes obtaining, reading and quoting any relevant Australian Standards
number or legislative requirements on any purchase documentation raised. Where the order
is with a preferred supplier or the order is a "blanket border" this is only required on the
initial purchase.
Ensure that all contractors engaged to service or repair equipment that is hazardous or
contains hazardous materials, have been assessed for EHS requirements (including
licenses, competencies and training) prior to engagement.
Ensure all equipment and chemicals purchased are labeled in accordance with the
appropriate legislative requirements.
Ensure that when chemicals, plant, equipment etc are delivered, that the item/s are
inspected for compliance with the specifications listed on the purchase documentation and
sign off compliance.
Ensure that Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for chemicals before first supply to the
site are obtained.
Ensure plant or equipment risk assessments are obtained from the manufacturer, supplier
or importer before the equipment arrives on site.
Ensure that MSDS and risk assessments are readily available to staff or students who will
use the chemical or equipment or may be affected by its use.
Read and carry out any recommendations or requirements contained in any MSDS or risk
assessments provided to them.
Follow university policies or procedures.
Not willfully misuse or mistreat anything provided for their safety or well being or cause
damage to the environment.
77

Consultation with various individuals or groups of people may need to take place before a
decision to purchase services, chemicals or equipment can occur.
Table 37: Examples of Consultation
Health and Safety Officer
Environment Representative
Managers or supervisors of the area where the item

will be installed
The end users of the item or material
Those installing and/or commissioning the item
Those cleaning or maintaining the item or area
Contractors
Government departments or external agencies
The need to obtain licenses to use or obtain the item, modify a current license, obtain
special qualifications to use, register the item with government authorities, notification that
the dept has the item/s etc must be considered.
An assessment of whether the item is a dangerous good, hazardous substance, plant that
requires registration, is covered by public safety legislation, a biohazard, requires guarding
to comply with regulations or Australian Standards, any special facilities to use, store or
handle etc must be carried out. This information can be obtained from the manufacturer,
supplier or importer via an MSDS or risk assessment.
An assessment of any need to obtain new or modify existing safety signage, instruction
manuals, information on safe use and training for staff or contractors who use, clean or
maintain the item etc must be carried out.
An assessment of the need to modify any internal procedure or process, carry out
environmental monitoring, health monitoring, provide special storage or access
requirements, provide special first aid training or equipment, purchase new or additional
PPE, modify fire protection equipment, modify or create waste disposal procedures,
quantify emissions to the environment etc must be carried out.
All assessments must be in writing and signed off by the area supervisor or other
appropriate person.
Copies of documentation showing the relevant assessments carried out by the relevant
supervisor should be kept with the purchase order or request to purchase for credit card
purchases.
Preferred Suppliers
A company may achieve the status of preferred supplier by meeting a combination of the
following requirements:
has demonstrated compliance with SafetyMAP, Quality System and EMS
guidelines
has compliance with Australian Standards where applicable
may be the sole producer/importer/manufacturer of the preferred product
supply a better quality product
have a reasonable or lower price
has the stock available when required
has good before and after sales service
specialises in a particular area of expertise
78
Preferred supplier status should not be conferred based purely on pricing. It should be
documented using a checklist similar to that used by
Medicine http://www.medfac.unimelb.edu.au/med/ehs/supplier.pdf Or
Chemistry http://store.chemistry.unimelb.edu.au/Stores/PSDeclaration.pdf
Where a company achieves preferred supplier status the requirement to complete a pre
purchase checklist for all purchases of the nominated products from that company does
not apply.
The faculty, school or department list of preferred suppliers should be reviewed and
updated on a regular basis.
MEANS OF ENCOURAGING BEST PRACTICE IN OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND
SAFETY published by the National Occupational health and Safety Commission
(WorkSafe Australia) at Element 5 Purchasing states the following
Through proper management of purchasing many potential health and safety problems
can be avoided. Purchasing decisions must be coordinated and those responsible for
selecting goods and services must be aware that senior management requires their
consideration of health and safety issues. Preferred suppliers should be considered as a
control mechanism. Auditing of suppliers is often more efficient than auditing the goods or
services themselves.
Audit Criterion
Incorporation of health and safety considerations into purchasing.
Possible Measures
% of purchase orders with OHS requirement specified.
79
80
Chapter 4. Reporting
41 OHS Issue Resolution Procedure
41.1 Purpose
The following action sequence is to be used where health and safety issues can be
resolved in a cooperative manner.
41.2 Application
These procedures should be read and understood to comply with the requirements of the
Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985 and in no way override the rights and
obligations of elected Health and Safety Representatives under the relevant legislation.
Using the steps outlined, the majority of safety issues should be capable of immediate and
preferably local resolution using line management and stopping at Step 3.
41.3 Legislation
41.4 References
Appendix B of the EHSM, Elected Health and Safety Representatives Listing
The Head of Department must respond to requests for issue resolution within 5 days.
41.5.2 Local Area Supervisor
The Local Area Supervisor must respond to requests for issue resolution within 5 days.
41.5.3 The Elected Health and Safety Representative
Refer to Section 24.2.5.6 Elected Health and Safety Representatives (HSR) EHS
Manual.

41.6.1 Issue Resolution
Step 1. The elected Health and Safety Representative/Employee identifies a safety issue
or problem in his/her designated work group. Note that the matter may have been referred
initially to the representative by another staff member or Health and Safety
Representative from another work group.
Step 2. The Health and Safety Representative/Employee brings the matter to the
attention of the supervisor of the work area involved (e.g. laboratory supervisor or
workshop manager) by the use of an "Incident Report Form (S3)". The representative may
have sought the prior advice of the Risk Management Office (RMO) in doing this. The
supervisor of the work area may also seek advice from the RMO upon receipt of the
Incident Report Form (S3).
Step 3. If, within 5 working days or less, the supervisor and representative can reach
agreement on the means to deal with the concerns raised, the matter is then regarded as
satisfactorily resolved at the local level. Satisfactory resolution would include immediate
settlement of this and any related concerns as well as an agreed plan and timetable for
future action if immediate action is not possible.
Step 4. If, however, the representative and the supervisor cannot satisfactorily resolve the
issue at the local level and the representative
believes that the issue
should be pursued, the representative should refer the issue involved to the head of
department responsible for the workplace in question. At this stage, the Health and Safety
Representative should formally advise the RMO.
Step 5. The head of department, representative and a member of RMO then engage in an
attempt to reach agreement in a satisfactory resolution of the issue within 5 working days.
If the head of department is not able to take part, for some reason, (and this would be
seen as an exceptional instance) an appropriate nominee with the delegated authority to
commit the department to any consequential undertaking may be nominated. Again,
satisfactory resolution includes immediate settlement or an agreed plan of future action.
Step 6. If no satisfactory resolution can be reached at Step 5 that resolves the issue, then
the Health and Safety Representative should further investigate the issuance of a formal
Provisional Improvement Notice as defined in OHS Act section 33.
Step 7. The employee(s) are to be informed of the agreed corrective action and timeframe.
41.6.2 Immediate Safety Hazards
However, there may be circumstances where a definite and immediate safety hazard is
perceived, and the issue is considered urgent and serious. In this case, the Health and
Safety Representatives will inform the supervisor of the area who should call an
immediate halt to the work whilst the issue is investigated.
In the event the supervisor fails to agree about the degree of risk present or the supervisor
is not available, the Health and Safety Representative will direct affected employees to
withdraw from the alleged hazard having regard to the health and safety of others and
will then inform the appropriate manager of the actions that have been taken pending a
full investigation. The Health and Safety Representative will immediately inform the RMO
of the action taken and the sequence of events listed above will start at Step 4.
Work will not resume until it has been agreed that the hazard has been controlled and no
longer presents an unacceptable risk to the safety and health of employees. Alternative
duties may be found for those members of staff affected, but no pay will be lost in the
event of a demonstrated safety hazard having been detected.
A written report of the situation and the actions taken should be prepared by the Area
Supervisor, and where appropriate the Health and Safety Representative, for the
Occupational Health and Safety Committee and the Risk Management Office.
82
Reporting
41.6.3 Hierarchy of Controls

Identified hazards should be controlled using the recognised hierarchy of controls:
Control of process
Elimination
Substitution
Isolation
Engineering control
Control of person
Safe work practices
Personal Protective Equipment and Clothing
41.6.4 Guidelines for Incident Categories
The following are a list of categories for reporting incidents and near misses:
* Equipment
maintenance, design, failure, location, personal protective equipment
* People
alcohol, drugs, physical condition, training, induction, criminal acts, fatigue
* Procedures
supervision, safe work procedures, maintenance, emergency response, purchasing, sales,
non compliance, lack of procedures
* Manual Handling
repetition, extreme force, prolonged posture, nature of object, work schedule
* Environment
road conditions, workplace layout, barriers, isolation, weather, housekeeping
42 Incident and Hazard Reporting

42.1 Purpose
It is a legal requirement under Occupational Health and Safety legislation and an
insurance requirement to report all workplace injuries and serious near misses. It should be
recognized that good reporting leads also to effective prevention.
42.2 Application
This sets out a procedure for reporting all incidents and potential hazards. The prime
responsibility for recognizing and removing or safeguarding hazards rests and remains with
each Department and Faculty.
83
42.3 Legislation
Incident Notification Regulations 1997
Environment Protection Act
Electrical Safety (Installation) Regulations 1999
Occupational Health and Safety Act
42.4 References
Incident Reporting Flow Chart
Australian Standard AS 1885.1 Measurement of occupational health and safety

performance Describing and reporting occupational injuries and disease
Incident/hazard report form (S3); refer to Appendix A
University OHS Policy
Report serious incidents to appropriate state government authority i.e. Victorian
WorkCover Authority (VWA), Police or Environment Protection Authority as
required.
Review all incident report forms and assess corrective action as required
Monitor incident trends and provides six monthly reports to managers and provide to
Council a quarterly report of EH&S performance.
Provide a yearly report for the University annual report
42.5.2 Head of Department or nominee
Head of Department or nominee
Ensure that staff are aware the incident reporting procedure.
Ensure that action is taken to eliminate or minimize risk. Sometimes it is obvious
what action needs to be taken. Other incidents are more complex because of
contributing circumstances and an incident investigation may need to undertaken to
identify appropriate action to prevent the event reoccurring. For further information
refer to procedure 3.1 hazard identification, assessment and control.
Ensure all incidents are reported according to regulatory and university
requirements.
If the serious incident occurs after hours you or the local area supervisor must ring
the VWA immediately on 0407 833 306, (please note that you will require access
to dial a mobile, if you do not have access please contact security on extn. 46666)
and provide the following information:
1. Incident Details: date and time of incident; location of incident; brief description
of incident including type of injury; witness to incident; medical treatment if any.
84
Reporting
2. Injured Person Details: Name, sex, home address and phone number of injured
person; job title; Department; work activity being undertaken at time of incident
3. Action taken to prevent recurrence
4. Your name and phone number
42.5.3 Supervisors
Supervisors
Ensure that any injured person receives first aid in the event of an injury. Initiate
clean up action as required following an incident.
Ensure that the person involved is given an Incident Report Form (S3).
Immediately notify RMO by phone 8344 6030 or 8344 4006 if a serious incident or
near miss occurs.
If incidents includes contact with unfixed human fluids such as a needle stick injury
please also refer to procedure 5.3.9 Personal Hygiene.
All Employees
Report all incidents and hazards immediately to the supervisor of the work area.
All injuries be reported within thirty days or workers compensation may not be
payable.
If medical treatment and/or time off work are required a claim for workers
compensation should be lodged. See procedure 8.5.3
42.5.5 Students and Visitors
Report all incidents and hazards immediately to the supervisor of the work area. Some
students are employed on a casual parttime basis and thus become an employee. Great
care must be exercised to determine in case of an accident if the person was a student or
an employee at the time. The basic test is was the person performing an activity on a
paid basis or performing an activity in pursuit of study.

Definitions
Incident An unplanned event which may cause injury to people and/or damage to
property and equipment, or has the potential to cause injury, disease or damage. The
terms accident and incident are interchangeable and include near miss situations.
Hazard Any obstruction, matter or event that has the potential to cause injury or an
accident.
Reportable incidents include:
death of a person
amputation
serious head injury
serious eye injury
separation of skin from underlying tissue, such as degloving or scalping
85
electric shock
a spinal injury
loss of a bodily function
a serious laceration
immediate hospital treatment as an inpatient
medical treatment within 48 hours of being exposed to a substance (such as
chemicals or biological material)
OR if there is a dangerous occurrence which creates an immediate risk to the
health and safety of persons in the immediate vicinity (a "nearmiss").
Notifiable dangerous occurrences are:
collapse, overturning, failure or malfunction of, or damage to
certain items of plant
collapse or failure of an excavation or of the shoring
supporting an excavation
collapse of part of a building or structure
an implosion, explosion or fire
escape, spillage or leakage of substances
fall or release from a height of any plant, object or substance.
43 Investigation of Incidents
43.1 Purpose
To prevent recurrence of incidents or injuries by gathering all relevant facts and setting in
motion any corrective action required.
43.2 Application
This procedure is applicable to all incidents. However the level of investigation will vary
depending on whether the incident has a significant or major impact to the University or
the individuals, or the environment. This procedure should be used in conjunction with
Section 3 of the EHSM: Identification, Assessment and Control.
43.3 Legislation
Accident Compensation Act 1985
86
Reporting
43.4 References
Definitions:
Incident: (AS/NZS 4808: 1997) Any unplanned event resulting in, or having a potential for
injury, ill health, damage or other loss.
Injury: (Accident Compensation Act: 1985) Any physical or mental injury including;
industrial deafness, a disease contracted by a worker in the workers employment whether
at or away from the place of employment or the recurrence, aggravation acceleration,
exacerbation or deterioration of any preexisting injury, where the workers employment
was a significant contributing factor.
Disease: (Accident Compensation act: 1985) Any physical or mental ailment, disorder
defect or morbid condition whether of sudden or gradual development, and the
aggravation, acceleration exacerbation or recurrence of any preexisting disease.
Hazard: (AS/NZS 4360) a source of potential harm or a situation with a potential to
cause loss Hazard identification (AS/NZS 4804:1997) the process of recognizing that a
hazard exists and defining its characteristics.
Risk: (AS/NZS 4360) the chance of something happening that will have an impact. It is
measured in terms of consequences and likelihood.
Risk management program: The process used to determine risk management priorities by
comparing the level of risk against predetermined standards, target risk levels or other
criteria.
The Incident Notification S3 form contains a section Action to be taken to prevent
recurrence for completion by the department head or nominated deputy. This section
requires an appropriate assessment of the incident and notification of corrective action
taken.
On each occasion of an incident occurring there shall be a detailed and thorough
investigation made of all causative factors to ensure corrective action is taken promptly.
This investigation process must be documented. Adequate detail must be gathered to
ensure that appropriate action is taken.
This completed S3 form and any additional investigation report must then be forwarded to
the Risk Management Office as per incident reporting procedure 4.2.
The elected employee Health and Safety Representative for the relevant Designated
Work Group has the right to be involved in the investigation.
43.5.3 Supervisors
Departmental Mangers and Supervisors should be involved in the investigation.
87

Provide professional advice and consultation, and assist in all investigations on request.
The Risk Management Office on receipt of the S3 form will review the incident and
evaluate the proposed corrective action.
Produce statistical analysis to the Head of Department to identify opportunities for
improvement for the equipment, work environment, people, and policies, procedures and
systems of work, collected from incident reports and other information.
Handle all documentation and communications through the department to the VWA.
Seek legal advice for issues concerning privileged information and other issues, and
cooperate with Inspectors and other Authority representatives.

43.6.1 Information Gathering
When collecting information for the purposes of an incident investigation, the following
details should be determined using the S3 form:
Involved / Injured person details
Witness names
Date, time place etc. of event
Brief description of incident
Facts relevant to the incident
This will allow the prioritisation of actions based upon the level of risk.
43.6.2 Environmental Incidents
Where incidents have the potential to affect the environment either by pollution or other
impact it is important to assess the severity of the impact, if significant, the Risk
Management Office should be notified immediately.
The Environmental Management System currently being implemented into the University
will require that certain steps are taken to reduce the impact on the environment following
the incident.
43.6.3 Incident Types
The requirements of the investigation team depend on the severity of the incident:
Insignificant:
Little or no potential loss
Minor injuries or minimal contamination
Team should include immediate supervisor and person(s) involved
Minor:
Minor loss or potential for minor loss
Multiple minor injuries or contained contamination
Team should include immediate supervisor and person(s) involved
88
Reporting
Health and Safety / Environmental Representative involvement is optional, but they must
receive a copy of the report
Moderate:
Potential loss of one to five days due to injury or illness
Potential for other reasonable costs to be incurred
Injuries requiring medical treatment or assisted contamination control
Team should include Supervisor, Departmental Health and Safety Officer and
Health and Safety / Environmental Representative.
Major:
Potential loss of more than five days due to injury or illness
Potential for other significant costs to be incurred
Extensive injuries or major contamination
Team must comprise of Supervisor, Health and Safety Officer, Health and Safety /
Environmental Representative, and the Risk Management Office.
Catastrophic:
Potential loss due to death or permanent disability
Potential for large financial loss
Death and multiple injuries or major contamination with toxic effects
Team must comprise of Supervisor, Health and Safety Officer, Health and Safety /
Environmental Representative, and the Risk Management Office, and the appropriate
Authority.
43.6.4 Control of Hazards
When planning how hazards are to be controlled and risks reduced, the Hierarchy of
Controls will be considered. In most circumstances, control solutions will incorporate a
combination of controls. Refer to Section 3.
89
90
Chapter 5. Environment and Safety in the Workplace
51 General
51.1 Australian Standards in Laboratories
51.1.1 Purpose
To provide guidelines in accordance with the Australian Standards Series 2243 for
Laboratories.
51.1.2 Application
This section is applicable to those Departments who have control over laboratory facilities.
Departments with staff who use laboratories not controlled by the Department should
endeavour to involve the laboratory owners. These guidelines do not apply to computer
laboratories.
51.1.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Hazardous Substances) Regulations 1999
51.1.4 References
AS 2243 Safety in Laboratories, Parts 1 10
AS 2982 Laboratory Construction
51.1.5.1 Department Heads
Ensure that adequate resources are available to provide for the safe operation of the
laboratories. These resources will include provision of training, information on materials
used and maintenance of equipment.
Make available for the laboratory users complete sets of the current Standards in the
Safety in Laboratory Code AS 2243. Departments should use the Laboratory Construction
Code AS 2982 as a guideline to requirements for a new or refurbished laboratory.
The Risk Management Office will undertake regular revision of the EHSM to ensure that
policies and procedures carry up to date information with regard to Australian Standards
and other legislation.
The RMO will also provide monthly notification to Departments of any revisions to the
EHSM.
91

51.1.6.1 Laboratories with Dangerous Goods
Laboratories which store, handle and use dangerous goods should at a minimum be
organised and managed according to the specialist advice contained in Australian
Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories. Part 1General, Part 2Chemical Aspects and Part
10Storage of Chemicals. If the laboratory is constructed after the commencement of the
2000 Regulations, ensure that the laboratory is constructed in accordance with the
requirement of AS 2982.
51.1.6.2 Using AS 2243 Safety in Laboratories
This Standard is now published in 10 parts, as follows:

Part 1: General
Part 2: Chemical aspects
Part 3: Microbiology
Part 4: Ionising radiations
Part 5: Nonionising radiations
Part 6: Mechanical aspects
Part 7: Electrical aspects
Part 8: Fume cupboards
Part 9: Recirculating fume cabinets
Part 10: Storage of chemicals
These standards, and others in the AS series are available on the web through the
Univeristys library system.
51.1.6.3 Understanding AS 2982 Laboratory Construction
This Standard sets out the requirements relating to the design and construction of buildings
which house laboratories. It applies both to new laboratories and where existing buildings
are converted to laboratory use.
51.2 After Hours Work and Equipment (February 2003)

51.2.1 Purpose
To ensure the health and safety of staff and students working after hours, and awareness
and compliances with legal obligations associated with equipment that is left running
unattended after hours within the University.
51.2.2 Application
To impose requirements on staff where research and teaching commitments will require
that facilities or equipment are used by staff or students outside the normal hours of 7:00
am 7:00 pm MondayFriday.
51.2.3 Legislation
Electrical Safety (Equipment) Regulations 1999
92
51.2.4 References
AS 2243 Safety in Laboratories Part 1: General Requirements
AS 2243 Safety in Laboratories Part 7 Electrical Aspects
Give written permission for staff and students to have access to buildings outside normal
working hours.
Summary Page Areas With Unsupervised and After Hours Access
Memorandum To Staff from Head of Department
Ensure that all after hours tasks are subject to a Risk Assessment, which addresses the
activity to be undertaken, the competency and training of the staff member or student,
and any possible emergency situations that may arise.
Ensure that a After Hours Person or Equipment Form is completed.
Ensure that any additional training or instruction necessary for a staff member or student
to work alone after hours is undertaken.
Persons working in the building after hours must have ID clearly showing they are staff
members or students entitled to be there after hours.
No one should work alone in a laboratory, outside normal hours without approval.
Follow safety procedures outlined when performing any operation on equipment and report
any faults to their supervisor.
Report any physical or other conditions that may give rise to a dangerous or life
threatening situation when working alone to their supervisor
51.2.6.1 Working out of hours or whilst on leave or special studies
Staff working outside normal hours are covered by Workers Compensation, subject to
verification by the Head of Department in the event of a claim being made. It is therefore
important that staff ensure that the HOD is informed of out of hours work arrangements
and that the arrangements are approved. Staff who are required to work while on leave
are also covered subject to verification.
Staff engaged in special studies programs are covered by Workcover, subject to
evidentiary requirements. In the event of a claim the RMO will investigate and confirm
details prior to the confirmation of the claim.
Further information can be located in Section 2.1.2 Insurance Summary.
93
51.2.6.2 Terms of Risk Assessments
Risk Assessments completed for long term projects, such as those for Honours and other
post graduate qualifications, may be completed for a 12 month period if the work is to be
similar for the term of that project. A review at the end of the 12 months must take place
to ensure that the controls implemented are effective and still relevant.
Risk Assessments completed for single instances such as a special experiment should be
maintained for a period of 2 years.
51.2.6.3 Unsupervised Student Laboratory and Study Areas
1. Areas open to students without supervision should be assessed for Security Camera
operation.
2. Security access to the area should be in the form of a swipe card or controlled Key
access, and swipe cards should be programmed with an expiry date for students.
3. Prior to the provision of a swipe card or key, students using a computer or other after
hours facilities should be advised of the appropriate safety and security procedures such as
how to contact Security, responsibilities of students etc.
4. Areas should have regular inspections using the University Office or Laboratory
Inspection Checklist. Completion of these checklists is the responsibility of the controlling
Department or Unit.
5. Signage indicating emergency evacuation routes, assembly areas, first aid kits and
emergency equipment should be prominently displayed in the area.
6. Security should be able to be contacted by Phone or Alarm Button at all times.
51.2.6.4 Laboratory and office Areas
1. Areas should have regular inspections using the University Office or Laboratory
Inspection Checklist. Completion of these checklists is the responsibility of the Supervisor of
the Facility.
2. A log book or white board should be provided for staff and students for recording their
name, location, time and date of entry after hours.
3. Staff and students should have access to a phone in case of emergency to call
Security.
4. Security is to be notified on 8344 4674 for staff or students to have their location details
recorded in case of emergency.
5. Staff and students should be advised of procedures such as keeping corridors locked,
switching on lights, etc.
6. Staff and Students must ensure that they carry their Identification Card at all times.
7. The need to have personal panic alarms for staff and students working in remote or
isolated areas such as animal houses or in facilities should be assessed.
8. Ensure that all non standard activities have a documented Risk Assessment and that no
High Risk activities are undertaken after hours. Control measure should be adequate to
reduce the risk of activities to a medium or low risk, (office work is excluded from this
requirement). Copies of risk assessments should be maintained by the Laboratory Manager
or Laboratory Supervisor.
94
51.2.6.5 High Risk Hazards (Not to be undertaken alone or after hours alone)
(a) Operate equipment or machinery capable of inflicting serious injury, such as chainsaws,
firearms, lathes and power saws.
(b) Handle venomous reptiles, insects, arthropods or fish.
(c) Work with or near, highly toxic or corrosive substances where there is a significant risk
of exposure to the substances, taking into account the volume used.
(d) Work with large animals other than for the purpose of feeding or observation.
(e) Use apparatus that could result in explosion, implosion, or the release or high energy
fragments or significant amounts of toxic or environmentally damaging hazardous
material
(f) Climb high towers or high ladders.
(g) Work with exposed energized electrical or electronic systems with powers exceeding
100 VA and voltage exceeding 40 V.
(h) Work with radionuclides requiring a high level laboratory.
(i) Work with microorganisms of Risk Group 3 and higher which require the use of a
Containment Level 3 facility or higher containment level.
(j) Operate lasers of Class 3 and above.
(k) Work in environments not at atmospheric pressure, such as SCUBA diving.
52 Chemical Management
The Risk Management Office provides access to CCINFO web:
http://ccinfoweb.ccohs.ca/
52.1 Chemical Management

52.1.1 Policy
Where any University activity requires the use of chemicals that are hazardous,
dangerous, flammable, toxic, corrosive, poisonous, carcinogenic or otherwise harmful to
health or the environment, certain requirements for the storage, handling, and disposal must
be met.
52.1.2 Application
Where chemicals and other substances are covered by specific legislation they have been
dealt with elsewhere in the EHSM. Personal items used for private purposes are excluded
from the requirements of the legislation.
52.1.3 Legislation
95
52.1.4 Definitions
Dangerous Goods may cause fire, explosion and major damage.
Hazardous Substances are directly harmful to human health.
Poisons and Controlled Substances have restrictions on their use.
There is also an overlap where some chemicals can fit into two or more categories:
Figure 51: Chemicals
52.1.5.1 Head of Department / Nominee
Identify all substances in use and, if suitable alternatives cannot be found, take
appropriate precautions in accordance with the prescribed guidelines using the hierarchy of
control.
Prepare and maintain a Register of all chemicals held in the area and provide access to
registers to all staff, students and visitors on request.
Assess requirements for personal protective equipment, as prescribed. Refer Section 82.6
Ensure all staff, students and visitors are aware of safe handling practices associated
with the use of chemicals and substances which they may come into contact with.
Assess training needs for staff and students and direct them to the appropriate courses.
Maintain records for permits and licences issued for the use of specialised substances.
Records must be available for inspection at any time.
In the absence of specific requirements, Departments must conduct safety audits at least
annually to determine nature, volume and storage requirements of all chemicals and
substances used or stored in the area. Audit details will remain the responsibility of the
department.
Ensure that disposal of chemicals and other potential hazardous material is consistent with
relevant legislation and University Policy. Refer Section 58
Comply with the requirements of all relevant State and Federal Legislation, Regulations
and Codes of Practice.
Can be consulted on all aspects of chemical management regarding purchase, licensing,

storage & handling, spill control, disposal and other relevant documentation.
Investigate incidents involving chemical substances
Attend any arranged training courses.

Follow procedures adopted by the Department and the University
Report any incidents, spills or exposure to any chemicals.
Must not deliberately damage or misuse any equipment provided for their protection.
96

52.1.6.1 Labelling
The label on a container should alert the user of the significant hazards associated with
the substance. The primary responsibility for labelling will rest with the Manufacturer /
Supplier, however some retrospective labelling may be required.
Departments who use imported chemicals should ensure the label is compatible with the
warning and class label system adopted in Australia.
Departments must develop procedures which provide adequate labels for substances which
are manufactured, decanted, mixed or diluted from their original form. Waste products
must also be labelled appropriately.
Labels should provide the following information in a legible, easy to read format:
* Product name (include strength of solution where appropriate)
* Chemical name printed in legible English
* Class label or signal words, e.g. Acid
* Hazard Class diamonds
* Risk and Safety phrases
* ID of the owner of the substance
NB: For smaller containers apply the label to the outer storage box.
52.1.6.2 Storage
Stored chemicals must comply with the relevant statutory requirements in regard to
quantities, segregation and warning signs.
Guidelines are provided in the Australian Standard 2243 Part 10 Storage of Chemicals.
For designated chemical storage facilities, this code should be consulted.
Where Class 3 Flammable Liquids are involved, AS 1940 Storage of Flammable Liquids
should be used as well.
Quantities of chemicals stored in the laboratory should be the minimum consistent with the
needs of the area.
Chemicals which are temperature sensitive should be kept in a controlled environment
Avoid direct sunlight on chemicals as this may accelerate the failure of the container, or
cause physical damage or change to the contents. during Summer months containers may
develop pressure when left in direct sunlight due to evaporation.
Where chemical storage is shelving above the benches, containers of more than 1 Litre or
1 Kilogram must not be stored above a height of 1.5 metres. (This does not apply to diluted
reagents used in gravity feed burettes)
Shelving must be able to carry the maximum load placed upon it, and shelves should be
compatible with the chemicals being stored. These conditions also apply for chemicals used
in photography, agriculture, cleaning and maintenance practices.
97
52.1.6.3 Quantities
Consistent with minimum quantities necessary for in use operation of the area, the
following restriction applies:
* Individual package size will not exceed 5 Litres or 5 Kilograms. If chemicals are stored
in a cabinet within the area this package size may be increased to 25 Litres or 25
Kilograms.
52.1.6.4 Segregation
Segregation is necessary to keep incompatible chemicals apart. The mixing of such

chemicals in an uncontrolled situation, e.g. a spillage may result in two or more substances
reacting together causing a fire or explosion to occur which may cause personal injury.
The segregation system is based on the recognition of the class that the chemical
substance belongs to, e.g. Class 3 Flammable Liquids.
52.2 Hazardous Substances

52.2.1 Purpose
To inform University staff and students of their legal requirements under the Hazardous
Substances Regulations, and to provide staff with support in fulfilling legal requirements.
To protect staff, students and visitors from any harmful effects associated with
Hazardous Substances under the Universitys control
52.2.2 Application
The policy applies to all departments that purchase, store, use or dispose of Hazardous
Substances.
Dangerous Goods, Biological Materials and Radiological Materials are excluded from the
Hazardous Substances legislation.
52.2.3 Legislation
52.2.4 References
Australian Standard 2243Safety in Laboratories Parts 110
NOHSC List of Designated Hazardous Substances, 2nd Edition
http://www.nohsc.gov.au/OHSInformation/Databases/HazardousSubstances/
52.2.5 Definitions
Hazardous Substances by common definition are:
* Harmful / toxic causing transient or permanent damage to body function
* Corrosive causing damage to living tissue
* Irritant causing local irritation to living tissue
* Sensitising causing an allergic reaction
* Carcinogenic causing malignant or benign tumour growth
98
* Mutagenic causing genetic damage

* Teratogenic Causing abnormalities to the foetus
* Genotoxic Causing interference with the reproductive process of cells
52.2.6.1 Health Services
Provide health monitoring for staff who are exposed to scheduled carcinogenic substances
and keep records of this monitoring for 30 years.
A letter detailing records of health monitoring is to be forwarded to staff who have been
exposed to scheduled carcinogenic substances on termination of employment.
52.2.6.2 Human Resources
Ensure that staff who have been exposed to scheduled carcinogenic substances receive
written statements with details of their exposure. This statement must contain: the name
of any scheduled carcinogenic substance that the staff member worked with, the period of
time over which the staff member worked with the substance, details of where records
are kept and a statement advising the staff member to have periodical health
assessments.
Provide information on the nature of hazards, risks and control measures associated with
Hazardous Substances and ensure medical and environmental surveillance programs are
in place where appropriate.
Ensure that records of any staff members exposure to scheduled carcinogenic substances
are maintained.
Report to the RMO any known or suspected unauthorised exposures of employees to
scheduled carcinogens immediately.
Where applicable apply for licenses and permits to hold scheduled Hazardous Substances.
Refer Section 15.3
Fill out appropriate forms when seeking a biosafety clearance for research grants
involving the use of carcinogens or highly toxic materials. Contact Convener, Biosafety
SubCommittee 45714.
Under Hazardous Substances Regulations, if the Department manufactures or repackages
materials, they may be deemed to be a supplier / manufacturer, with obligations to provide
Material Safety Data Sheets and correctly labelled containers for chemicals supplied to
outside Departments.
Ensure that legal requirements and NHMRC guidelines are met for warranted
carcinogenic and highly toxic substances.
Ensure an authorised person fulfils the duties set out in the Regulations:
* The authorised person shall inform all persons who may be exposed to a risk from the
substance about the precautions that should be taken to avoid such exposure.
99
Managers and Supervisors are legally obligated to implement the requirements of the
Regulations by seeking the Material Safety Data Sheet, identifying Hazardous
Substances, Documenting Risk Assessments and implementing appropriate control
measures. A register of Hazardous Substances must also be maintained within the area.
A copy of the register of carcinogenic substances and users of these substances must be
forwarded to the RMO.
Maintain records of exposure of staff members to scheduled carcinogenic substances.
These records must contain: the employees full name, date of birth, residential address at
the time of exposure, the name of each scheduled carcinogen the employee worked with
and the period of time over which the employee worked with the substance/s. These
records must be kept for 30 years from the date the staff member last worked with a
scheduled carcinogen.
Ensure that all scheduled carcinogens are stored in a secure, locked storage area with
restricted access. Records of purchase and amounts used must also be maintained.
Provide training which includes safe storage, handling and use or carcinogenic and toxic
substances. The training should also cover: emergency procedures, personal protective
equipment, waste disposal and spill response. A register of designated persons must also be
maintained within the area.
Provide prominent signs advising that the area is restricted to designated persons:
ENTRANCE TO CARCINOGENIC AREA in letters of not less than 40 mm high.
Inform as soon as possible any person who may have been, or could be exposed to a
carcinogenic substance. This must be reported in writing to the Risk Management Office.
Attend any training courses arranged for them.

Follow the procedures adopted by the Department and the University.
ensure only qualified, trained and competent staff carry out work with carcinogenic and
highly toxic substances.
Maintain a record of employees exposed to scheduled carcinogenic substances. Records

will contain name of employee and name of substances used.
Report to the Occupational Hygeine Unit of the Victorian Workcover Authority with in
seven days of an employee known or suspected of being exposed to scheduled
carcinogens.
The officers of the Risk Management Office will provide professional support through
coordination, advice and policy development.
The RMO in cooperation with Staff Development and Training will devise appropriate
training programs for the use, storage and handling of hazardous substances.
100

52.2.7.1 Licencing and Notification Requirements
All Hazardous Substances held in a Department are to be listed on a Departmental

Register. Where substances such as scheduled carcinogens are required to be used in a
workshop or laboratory, an Application for License / Notification to use a Schedule
Carcinogen form must be completed. These forms are available through the Victorian
Workcover Authority.
Schedule 1 Carcinogenic Substances are only permitted in laboratories after a licence has
been obtained from Worksafe Victoria. Use of these substances in workplaces other than
a laboratory is prohibited.
Schedule 2 Carcinogenic Substances are only permitted in workplaces other than
laboratories after a licence has been obtained from Worksafe Victoria, or in a laboratory
after Worksafe has been notified of the use of the substance.
52.2.7.2 Storage
Hazardous Substances held in a laboratory should be segregated and stored in

accordance with the relevant MSDS requirements.
52.2.7.3 Use
Before any Hazardous Substance is used within a laboratory or other facility, the MSDS
should be read and understood by all users, and any special precautions required for the
use or otherwise should be followed.
A Risk Assessment must be completed.
IF THE EXPOSURE TO A MEMBER OF THE UNIVERSITY IS SUCH THAT AN
ADVERSE EFFECT ON THEIR HEALTH IS REASONABLY LIKELY TO OCCUR,
THEN THE PROCESS OR PROCEDURE MUST BE TERMINATED.
52.2.7.4 Risk Assessment Process
1. Identify all Hazardous Substances from the MSDS

2. Obtain and review information on Hazardous Substances, specifically:
routes of exposure\
physical form and properties
harmful effects
3. Evaluate the nature of the work:
examine work practices and conditions
review information on incidents, illnesses and disease occurrences
training and competence requirements
4. Risk Evaluation
101
52.2.7.5 Scheduled Hazardous Substances
Schedule 1 Prohibited Carcinogenic Substances

2Acetylaminofluorene
Aflatoxins
4Amiknodiphenyl
Amosite
Benzidine
Bis(Chloromethyl) ether
Chloromethyl methyl ether
Crocidolite
4Dimethylaminoabenzene
2Naphthulamine (and salts)
4Nitrodiphenyl
Schedule 2 Notifiable Carcinogenic Substances
Acrylonitrile
Benzene
Chrysotile
Cyclophosphamide
3,3Dichlorobenzidine
Diethyl sulfate
Ethylene dibromide
4,4Methylene bis(2chloroaniline)
2Propiolactone
oToluidine
oToluidine hydrochloride
Vinyl chloride monomer
Schedule 3 Hazardous Substances requiring Health Surveillance
Asbestos
Crystalline silica
4,4 Methylene bis(2chloroaniline) MOCA
Vinyl chloride
Isocyanates
Organophosphate pesticides
Acrylotnitrile
Benzene
Cadmium
102
Inorganic Chromium
Creosote
Inorganic Mercury
Pentachlorophenol (PCP)
Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH)
Thallium
Carcinogenic Substances:
Benzidine and its salts
pBiphenylamine
Chloromethyl methyl ether
3,3dichlorobenzidine and its salts
symDichloromethyl ether
N2fluoroenylacetamide
1Naphthylamine 2Naphthylamine
NNitrosodiumethylamine
betaPropiolactone
Acrylonitrile Camphechlor
1,2Dibromo3Chloropropane
pDimethylaminoazobenzene
4,4Methylenebis (2Chloroaniline)
* Preparations containing 1% or more of any of the substances referred to above are
included.
NB: Health surveillance is only required where there is actual exposure of staff or students
to a hazardous substances.
A record of employees working with scheduled carcinogenic substances must be
maintained for 30 years.
Departments should note that the list of suspected carcinogenic chemicals given in
Appendix I of the NHMRC Code of Practice is more extensive that those in the current
Regulations. Departments are advised to use this list for guidance.
52.2.8 Guidelines for Carcinogens
Certain Chemicals are known to cause cancer in humans, these are listed above, and
have been listed from Appendix 1 of the NHMRC list of carcinogenic substances. Special
considerations for storage, handling, safety, protection, contamination and monitoring of
these substances are required. Every effort should be made to use noncarcinogenic or less
toxic chemicals in preference to carcinogenic or highly toxic ones.
103
52.2.8.1 Handling
Extreme care should be taken when handling these chemicals:

1. All persons using highly toxic chemicals should do so only with permission from the
laboratory supervisor.
2. The laboratory supervisor must perform a documented risk assessment to ensure that all
hazards associated with the chemical have been addressed to minimise risk.
3. Staff and students should be informed as to the requirements for personal protective
eqiupment, safety procedures and emergency first aid.
4. Suitable laboratory equipment should be used, such as centrifuges with containment
covers etc.
5. Procedures for handling and safety should be reviewed by the laboratory supervisor on a
regular basis to ensure that updated information is included.
52.2.8.2 Storage and Labelling
All carcinogenic / toxic substances should be stored in screw cap containers or ampoules
at the appropriate temperature and labelled clearly to indicate their carcinogenic risk.
Information on the label should also indicate handling procedures such as wearing gloves
and mask.
The chemicals must be stored securely in a segregated area from other general chemicals.
During transport these chemicals must be packages securely and sealed to prevent
accidental breakage or damage.
The carcinogenic status of a chemical should be included on the local inventory of
chemicals held in the area. A second list should also be held by the department to ensure
that all carcinogenic chemicals are recorded for their date of purchase, proposed use and
disposal requirements.
52.2.8.3 Safety in the Laboratory
Areas where carcinogenic or toxic chemicals are used should be signed with appropriate
signage such as:
CAUTION, CARCINOGENIC CHEMICALS IN USE
These signs are available from the Risk Management Office. Emergency contact numbers
should also be posted outside the laboratory.
Work surfaces should be covered with a protective bench coat that will absorb and trap
any spills of toxic or carcinogenic material. This coating should be replaced on a regular
basis, and after any spill.
Section 5.3.7 of the EHSM outlines the requirements for the types of containment cabinets
that are to be used for biohazardous materials. All experiments involving the creation of
dust, vapour or aerosols should be carried out in an appropriate hood.
A cytotoxic drughandling cabinet which complies with AS 2567 should be used in cases
where there is a need to maintain the sterility of the product. A standard biological cabinet
must not be used as personnel who maintain these cabinets are not trained to handle
carcinogenic substances.
104
52.2.8.4 Protective Equipment
All personal protective equipment should be assessed for its suitability for handling
carcinogenic and toxic substances, the equipment must be non porous. Rubber, PVC or
polyethylene gloves, coats and safety glasses should be worn as a minimum.
Approved respirators should be made available to staff where required if the process
cannot be adequately contained. Other control measures such as isolation of the area
while work is being undertaken should also be considered.
Cleaning of protective equipment should only be undertaken by a qualified company with
appropriate procedures for hanlding used equipment and clothing.
52.2.8.5 Contamination
The following procedure should be put in place to reduce the risks of cross contamination
of staff and facilities within the laboratory where carcinogenic substances are stored and
handled.
1. Always wash hands thoroughly after using carcinogenic materials.
2. Glassware and equipment should be washed thoroughly in an appropriate chemical
cleaner.
3. Contaminated benches should be wiped down regularly.
4. Any maintenance work required on equipment that has been in contact with
carcinogenic or toxic materials should be conducted only after decontamination has been
done.
52.2.8.6 Licensing and Monitoring
Staff or students using prohibited carcinogenic substances, or using any listed carcinogenic
substance on the NHMRC list must undertake biological monitoring and medical
examinations to detect any significant biological changes, or effects on their health.
52.2.8.7 Animal Experimentation and Carcinogens
Reference should be made to Section 5.3.1 Use of Animals.

Where animals are being treated with carcinogenic or highly toxic materials, care must be
taken that the cages, bedding, water and food waste are handled using personal
protective equipment.
52.2.8.8 Waste Disposal
Reference should be made to Section 5.8.2 Disposal of Hazardous Waste.

Laboratory supervisors should be aware of Environmental, Health and Safety legislative
requiprements for the disposal of carcinogenic and highly toxic waste.
Carcinogenic waste must be disposed of through University Contractors, and must be
stored prior to disposal in a segregated area to reduce the risk of exposure to staff.
Waste liquids must be packaged and sealed to prevent leakage or spillage. Appropriate
labels denoting the Carcinogenic status of the waste must also be affixed to the
packages.
Carcasses and other solid waste should be double bagged and labelled.
105
52.2.8.9 Emergency Procedures
Reference should be made to Section 6 Emergency Response, this section includes spill
response.
If a significant spill occurs, the area should be evacuated immediately. Trained personnel
only should be called in to clean up the spill.
The following procedure should be implemented in the case of an exposure to a staff
member or student:
1. Report contamination immediately to the laboratory supervisor or laboratory manager.
2. Report the incident via an S3 Form after medical treatment (if required) has been
administered.
3. Treat skin or other contact by washing the area with cool water for at least 5 minutes.
4. Check the Material Safety Data Sheet for other requirements.
52.3 Dangerous Goods

52.3.1 Purpose
To inform University staff and students of their legal requirements under the Dangerous
Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulations, and to provide University staff with support on
determining Dangerous Goods and relevant controls.
To protect staff, students and visitors and the environment from any adverse effects
associated with the purchase, use, storage and disposal of Dangerous Goods under the
Universitys control.
52.3.2 Application
This policy applies to all Departments that store and handle goods that pose an immediate
physical hazard.
This procedure should be used in conjunction with Section 5.2.4 Other Chemical Substances
Exclusions:
* Explosives
* Goods used in the manufacture of explosives
* Goods which are in batteries
* Goods in a fuel container which is fitted to a vehicle
* Goods in the form of an appliance
* Goods which are combustible liquids, but not classified as C1 or C2
* Goods in portable fire fighting or medical equipment
52.3.3 Legislation
Australian Dangerous Goods Code 6th Edition
106
52.3.4 References
AS 1940 Storage and Handling of Flammable and Combustible Materials
AS 2243 Part 10 Chemical Safety
AS/NZS 1596: 1997 Storage and Handling of LP Gas
52.3.5 Definitions
A material is a Dangerous Good if it is listed in the Australian Dangerous Goods Code
Volume 2 and has a United Nations (UN) identification number.
Dangerous Goods are divided into classes depending on their properties. The Classes are:
* Class 1 Explosives
* Class 2 Gases
* Class 3 Flammable liquids
* Class 4 Flammable solids
* Class 5 Oxidising substances
* Class 6 Toxic and Infectious substances
* Class 7 Radioactive materials
* Class 8 Corrosive substances
* Class 9 Miscellaneous Dangerous Goods and articles
Provide information on the nature of hazards, risk association and control measures and
ensure medical and environmental surveillance programs where appropriate.
Where applicable apply for licenses or permits. Refer Section 15.3
Maintain an inventory or register of the chemicals in the Department. A review should be
undertaken at least yearly.
The labelling of individual rooms may still be required where special risks are present, e.g.
radioactive substances, biological materials, carcinogenic chemicals. This remains a
Departmental responsibility.
52.3.6.2 Departmental Manager
Ensure storage arrangements comply with legislative requirements.

Ensure that all compressed gases are included in the Dangerous Goods Manifest.
Notify the Risk Management Office of any changes to the types and quantities of
dangerous goods stored and used.
Ensure that a Manual Handling Assessment is carried out on the handling of gas cylinders
and bulk containers.
Ensure that appropriate Personal Protective Equipment and materials handling equipment
is supplied and used by staff handling or using compressed gases or other dangerous goods.
107
Provide information regarding quantities and types of Dangerous Goods held in areas under
their control.
Abide by the requirements for the storage and handling of Dangerous Goods.
Provide advice to Departments on Dangerous Goods requirements

Maintain emergency information books at the Security Office through Departmental
manifest updates.
52.3.6.5 Security
Maintain Dangerous Goods books under their control.

Hand over information to appropriate authorities on request.
52.3.7.1 Register / Manifest
The Register should be held in a central location easily accessible to the fire brigade. The
usual place is in a folder in the emergency information box located near the fire panel.
52.3.7.2 Storage
Dangerous Goods held in a laboratory or workshop should be segregated into their

respective classes and stored as best as is practicible in separate locations to other classes.
Class 3 and 4 flammable materials should be stored in accordance with AS 1940.
The quantities allowed are:
* Class 2 Gases not restricted provided they are connected to a consuming device
(excluding LPG)
* Class 3 Flammable liquids
* Class 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 8 & 9 up to 100 litres or 100 kilograms
* Class 4.2, 4.3, & 5.2 up to 25 litres or 25 kilograms
Do not store or use flammable liquids in the close proximity of ignition sources such as
bunsen burners, portable electric heaters, furnaces, filament lamps, inside domestic
refrigerators, etc. as a spark may cause an explosion.
Where a domestic refrigerator is used for chemical storage, a warning sign
Flammable liquids must not be stored in this refrigerator is to be displayed on the door.
Or the temperature control mechanism moved to the exterior casing of the fridge, or
preferably any internal ignition sources removed.
Do not store flammable liquids with other incompatible liquids and / or classes of
dangerous goods such as explosives, corrosives, poisons, organic peroxides, spontaneously
combustible or radioactive substances. This also applies to waste flammable liquids
The Australian Standard for the storage of Dangerous Goods is available at:
http://www.nohsc.gov.au
All gas cylinders, unless specifically directed by the supplier, shall be kept in an upright and
secure position at all times. This applies to both full and empty cylinders.
108
52.3.7.3 Handling
Before any dangerous good is used within a laboratory or other facility, a risk assessment
should be carried out after reading the material safety data sheet. Any special precautions
required for the use or otherwise should be followed.
The Storage and Handling regulations impose management procedures to ensure the safe
use of chemicals on premises. Departments should note that packages should not be
opened in a storage area or in cabinets, but should be removed to a well ventilated area.
Flammable liquids should only be decanted in a designated area of a store or laboratory.
A fume cupboard may be suitable for this purpose. When pouring or decanting quantities in
excess of 20 litres, care should be taken to avoid static electricity discharge by use of a
grounding circuit.
When heating flammable liquids in glass vessels, steam or water baths should be used
rather than direct heat or flame.
52.3.7.4 Transport Across Campus
For Transportation of Dangerous Goods across campus, especially cylinders and large
volume chemicals, a trolley with a securing device must be used. Protective clothing and
footwear should also be worn for movement of chemicals within a building.
Winchesters and other containers must be transported either in the original Dangerous
Goods Packaging, or in sealable plastic containers. Wire framed carriers or baskets are
NOT to be used.
For large quantities, a licences Dangerous Goods Transport Vehicle must be used for
moving chemicals across the campus.
52.3.7.5 Dangerous Goods Risk Assessment Process
1. Identify all Dangerous Goods through the MSDS

2. Review available information
3. Evaluate the nature of the work
4. Undertake a risk evaluation
52.3.7.6 Special Requirements for Dangerous Goods
Training must be provided to all staff regarding specific hazards in the storage and
handling of flammable liquids
For transportation of Dangerous Goods, especially cylinders and large volumes, a trolley
with a securing device should be used, and protective footwear must be worn.
Departments should provide a location map along with the Manifest to the Risk
Management Office, and a second copy to go into the emergency information box next to
the fire panel, indicating where classes of Dangerous Goods are stored, noting special
storage facilities such as flammable cabinets etc.
Flammable Liquid Cabinets
AS 1940 specifies that steel cabinets of up to 250 litres capacity may be used for the
storage of flammable liquids in a laboratory. The cabinets are not fire proof, but fire
resistant which allows time to control a fire situation. Purchase of cabinets is a
Departmental responsibility, please check AS 1940 for the approved types.
Departments should note that the following conditions apply to the installation and use of
these cabinets:
109
* Each cabinet shall be labelled with a Class 3 Diamond sign, and a No Smoking, No
Ignition Sources sign together with the maximum capacity of the cabinet in litres
* The cabinet should not be located in the path used for the emergency escape of persons
in the event of an evacuation
* One 250 litre cabinet within any 250 m of floor space is allowed
* There must be a minimum separation of 10 metres between cabinets
* A cabinet should be at least 3 metres from any ignition sources
* A fire extinguisher with an 80B(E) rating should be installed in the area
* Only compatible substances should be stored in these cabinets, e.g. Class 3 Flammable
liquids only
* No Smoking, No Ignition Source signs or similar should be displayed at the entrance to
the area
* Adequate ventilation should be provided in the storage area, and area of use
* Glass containers of flammable liquids must not be stored in direct sunlight.
Table 51: Incompatible classes
Dangerous Goods Class
Incompatible Dangerous Goods Classes
4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2
4.2 or 4.3
3, 5.1, 5.2
5.1
3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.2, 6.1, 8
5.2
Any other class of dangerous goods
6.1
5.1, acids, hypochlorites and other incompatibles
8 Acids
8 alkalis
8 Acids
8 hypochlorites
8 Acids
4.3
8 Acids
6.1 Cyanides
8 Oxidising acids
3 flammables
Substances with Special Requirements

Acetylene gas
Ethidium bromide
Mercury metal
Ammonium nitrate
Hydrofluoric acid
Nitric acid
Hydrogen peroxide
Perchloric acid
Dichloromethane
Hydrogen sulphide
Potassium metal
Diethyl ether
Liquid Oxygen
110
Sodium cyanide
52.3.7.7 Placarding
Existing placarding has been deemed acceptable by the Victorian Workcover Authority.
When damaged it will be reassessed by the risk Management Office for replacement.
The Hazchem placard is displayed outside main entrances to buildings, and also internally.
This placarding, and also internally. This placarding provides information on the chemical
classes held within to any emergency service responding to a call.
52.3.8 Special Dangerous Goods
52.3.8.1 Flammable Liquids
The Regulations and Codes of Practice categorise flammable liquids into 4 subclasses
according to their flashpoints. The flash point is the temperature at which vapour from the
liquid will ignite in air given a source of ignition. The subclasses of Class 3 are:
* PG II liquid having a flash point up to, but not including 230C
* PG III liquid having a flash point of not less than 230C and up to and including 610C
* C1 combustible liquid having a flashpoint of more than 610C and up; to and including
1500C
* C2 combustible liquid having a flashpoint of greater than 1500C
52.3.8.2 Gases
Gases are supplied in 4 forms

* High pressure cylinders
* Liquified or dissolved gas in cylinders under pressure
* Liquified gas in insulated vessels at atmospheric pressure
* Piped in from an external pipeline
The Suppliers of gas cylinders retain overship and therefore maintenance requirements of
the cylinder according to a prescribed code. A monthly rental is usually charged for their
hire.
Departments are responsible for their safe use, and of any equipment connected to the
cylinders. Only equipment designed for use with gas cylinders should be used. The
equipment should also be maintained in accordance with instructions from the supplier.
Compressed gases are classified as Class 2 Dangerous Goods. This classification is divided
into 3 subcategories:
* 2.1 Flammable gases, e.g. Hydrogen, Acetylene
* 2.2 Non flammable and Non toxic gases, e.g. Helium, Nitrogen
* 2.3 Poisonous gases, e.g. Ammonia, Carbon Monoxide
Departments should endeavour where practicable to reticulate the gas supply into the
workplace from an outside storage area. All gas lines must be coloured and marked as per
AS 1345 Identification of the Contents of Pipes, Conduits and Ducts.
Only compressed gas cylinders connected to a consuming device can be stored in the
workplace. No spare gas cylinders full or empty are to be stored in the workplace. All such
gas cylinders must be stored outside the building in an approved location:
* Approved by the competent Authority
111
* Well ventilated and separate from openings to the building

* Labelled with appropriate HAZCHEM signage
* Provide segregation between subclasses of gases
* Secure location with restricted access to authorised personnel only
Departments should also note the following rules for the use of gas cylinders:
1. EMPTY cylinders should be left with slightly positive pressure, valve closed and marked
MT with the date
2. Regulators must be of an appropriate type
3. Valves should be opened carefully, no more than 23 turns
4. When shutting down the cylinder relieve the regulator pressure
5. Faulty valves, regulators and pressure gauges must not be used
6. Cylinders containing toxic gases must have adequate controls in place in case of
leakage or other emergency
7. Gas lines and connections should be inspected regularly.
TooDeep! Special Guidelines for Handling Inert Gases
Properties of Inert Gases are that they have the ability to displace oxygen from air,
thereby acting as an asphyxiating agent. This can occur when the oxygen concentration
drops below 18%. Symptoms of asphyxiation in this manner include; rapid breathing,
fatigue, nausea, vomiting, collapse.
Facilities which house or use large quantities of inert gases and liquid nitrogen should
undertake a risk assessment to determine whether oxygen monitoring could be required.
Storage of large volumes of liquid nitrogen has previously caused a fatality, and
departments are advised to regularly monitor these areas with either fixed or personal
monitors for staff.
Cylinders should be fitted with the appropriate regulator and checked regularly to ensure
that they are not leaking.
Transport of inert gases should ensure that the containers or cylinders are transported using
the appropriate trolley or container. Liquid nitrogen should be transported in a double
container to prevent the spill of liquid nitrogen to the atmosphere. Alternatively,
appropriately designed containers can also be used if the tops are gently taped down.
52.4 Poisons and Drugs

52.4.1 Purpose
To ensure compliance with the legislative requirements for the storage, handling, use and
manufacture of Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances.
52.4.2 Application
This policy applies to substances listed in the various schedules of the Standard for the
Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons. It includes substances used in a broad range of
areas, including medical, veterinary, biological, zoological and chemical research. It does
not include scheduled Carcinogens.
112
52.4.3 Legislation
Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances Act 1981
Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances Regulations 2001
Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (Federal Government)
52.4.4 References
Human Services Guide to preparing a Poisons Control Plan for a Permit to Purchase or
Obtain Poisons or Controlled Substances.
Ensure that the Department acquires / has the appropriate permits for all controlled
substances held on the premises. The Risk Management Office must be notified of any
changes to permits held by Departments.
Ensure that storage and security provisions (where applicable) of permits are met.
Ensure records are kept of purchase, use, and that End User Declarations (EUDs) are filled
out when a request for purchase is submitted for certain controlled substances.
Ensure all staff who purchase, use or have a responsibility for controlled substances
receive training which includes information on all associated procedures.
Nominate a responsible member of staff to be the permit holder (named on the permit) to
ensure the preparation and use of a poisons control plan within the area.
52.4.5.2 Permit Holder
Ensure compliance with the Poisons Control Plan, and ensure the conditions of the permit
are met.
Provide advice and guidance to Faculties and Departments on the preparation of a

Poisons Control Plan or Permit application.
52.4.5.4 Staff
Follow Departmental and University procedures on the use and disposal of controlled
substances.
Attend training on the requirements for the use of controlled substances.
52.4.6.1 Application for a Permit
Where laboratories are purchasing, using or disposing of poisons which are of Schedule 4,
7, 8 or 9, they must prepare a poisons control plan and apply to Human Services for a
permit to purchase or obtain poisons or controlled substances. Universities and other
educational facilities are exempt from the requirement to have a permit for Schedule 5 &
6 poisons.
To assist Departments in preparing a Poisons Control Plan, a template has been provided. This
plan must be completed with additional relevant details regarding purchase, storage, use
and disposal controls.
113
52.4.6.2 Preparation of a Register
All poisons and controlled substances held in an area are to be listed on a central register
held in a central location such as the Departmental Managers office.
52.4.6.3 Storage and Use
Poisons and Controlled Substances held in a laboratory should be stored in accordance

with the guidelines:
* Schedule 1 BLANK
* Schedule 2 Restricted area, no public access
* Schedule 3 Restricted area, no public access
* Schedule 4 Lockable cabinet in a secure area
* Schedule 5 Not Applicable
* Schedule 6 Not Applicable
* Schedule 7 Locked cabinet affixed to the wall or floor
* Schedule 8 Drug of Addiction cabinet affixed by bolts
* Schedule 9 Drug of Addiction cabinet affixed by bolts
All drugs, poisons and controlled substances must be used in accordance with the
manufacturers specifications stated on the Material Safety Data Sheets. Or in approved
laboratory and teaching experiments.
52.4.6.4 Disposal
For Disposal requirements refer to Section[*]

Special considerations for security are required for the disposal of Schedule 8 & 9 poisons.
52.5 Other Chemical Substances

52.5.1 Purpose
To comply with legal requirements to provide support in working environments within the
University to protect staff, students and visitors from the harmful effects of chemicals
substances under University control.
52.5.2 Application
This policy applies to all Departments and Faculties that purchase, store or use chemicals
which are not covered by specific legislation.
52.5.3 Legislation
Commonwealth Government Excise Act 1902
Commonwealth Government Excise Regulations
114
52.5.4 References
AS 2243 Part 10 Safety in Laboratories
AS 1894 Code of Practice for the Safe Handling of Cryogenic Liquids
AS 1345 Identification of the Contents of Pipes, Conduits and Ducts
AS 1337 Eye Protectors for Industrial Applications
AS 1596 The Storage and Handling of Liquified Petroleum Gases
52.5.5.1 Head of Department / Departmental Manager
Ensure appropriate identification, assessment and control measures are in place for
substances not covered by specific legislation.
Provide support and assistance for Departments to manage chemical substances.

52.5.5.3 School of Chemistry
The School of Chemistry has established a central store facility for the supply of
chemicals. Departments should encourage their staff to use this service in order to reduce
costs and, as an aid, to complete annual chemical safety audits. Chemistry also has
further information regarding storage and handling of chemicals on their website:
http://safety.chemistry.unimelb.edu.au/Safety.html
52.5.6.1 Alcohol
The Australian Customs Service divides alcohol sales into three categories, two of which
require permits. These are administered by the Department of Industry and Commerce,
Australian Customs Service. The School of Chemistry retains the Universitys central
permit to supply alcohol to Departments on the main Parkville Campus.
The two permit areas are:
1. Denatured Spirit
Commercial Methylated Spirits (permit not required)
Special Methylated Spirits (permit required) contains ethyl alcohol plus additives
2. Undenatured Spirit (permit required)
Ethanol of not less than 94% by volume with no other additives. Includes 95% Alcohol
and Absolute Alcohol
Departments holding an alcohol permit should provide a copy of the permit together with
any variations to the Risk Management Office.
Alcohol purchased on the Central Permit should be through the School of Chemistry supply
procedures.
Departments using Alcohol in quantities in excess of 25 litres per month are required to
keep records available for inspection by Officers of the Custom and Excise Branch.
Any Department which redistils alcohol must be registered with the Australian Customs
Service.
115
Any distillation setup with a capacity greater than 5 litres must also be registered with the
Australian Customs Service.
All Departments using alcohol shall take reasonable precautions to prevent over exposure
of staff and students to alcohol.
Alcohol and Methylated Spirits are Class 3 Flammable liquids. Appropriate storage and
handling procedures should be adopted.
Further information and advice can be obtained from the Chemistry Supply Manager 8344
4705 or the Risk Management Office 8344 4006.
52.5.6.2 Cryogenic Liquids
Staff using or handling cryogenic liquids must receive training which includes care selection
and use of protective equipment, and the specific hazards associated with its use, and
emergency procedures.
Low temperature fluids have the potential to cause suffocation, lung disorders,
coldcontact lesions and frostbite.
Some liquefied gases are flammable or can promote rapid combustion.
More common problems are due to explosion of the storage containers. Cryogenic liquids
evaporate to form clouds of gas, the evaporation can cause water vapour to condense on
the vent causing over pressurisation of the vessel.
Regular checks should be made to ensure that the venting mechanism on the container is
operable.
Suitable protective clothing should be provided with particular attention given to gloves and
eye / face protection. AS 1337 recommends that a full face shield be worn.
Transportation of containers of cryogenic liquids in confined areas such as cars of lifts
should only be undertaken if a risk assessment has been completed and the procedure is
approved.
The maximum capacity of a vacuum insulated container for holding cyrogenic liquids shall
not exceed 160 litres.
If flammable or poisonous cryogenic liquids are to be used in the laboratory, the container
volume shall not exceed 5 litres, and provisions must be made for special ventilation and
where applicable gas detectors.
Cryogenic liquids should not be stored in non ventilated areas such as cold rooms.
52.5.6.3 Cytotoxic Substances
Cytotoxic drugs may pose risks to health. These substances are highly toxic to cells, and
have the potential to interfere with normal cellular activities.
Staff preparing cytotoxic drugs for experimental purposes are at risk of dermatitix, allergic
reactions, cytogenic abnormalities, carcinomas, mutagenic effects to cells, etc. Therefore it
is important that adequate information is provided to staff handling these materials. This
information should also be used to conduct a documented risk assessment.
It is a requirement for staff regularly handling cytotoxic materials to undergo health
monitoring.
Some storage and handling hints and tips are:
* Outsource the preparation to an external specialist company
* purchase the drugs in preprepared syringes
116
* ensure drugs are in their most stable form

* ensure facilities meet recommended technical and safety standards
* ensure appropriate labelling, packaging and storage
* Provide secure waste store areas
* Ensure there is restricted access
52.6 Material Safety Data Sheets

52.6.1 Purpose
To ensure Departments obtain and keep current Material Safety Data Sheets for all
chemicals used within the University.
52.6.2 Application
All chemicals supplied to, and by the University must have a current MSDS available to
the end user. All MSDSs must be reviewed and updated every 5 years.
52.6.3 Legislation
52.6.4 References
BOC MSDSs http://www.boc.com.au/msds_internet/msds_frame.html
National Code for the Preparation of Material Safety Data Sheets (NOHSC: 2001)
52.6.5.1 Laboratory Managers, Workshop Managers and Supervisors
Ensure MSDSs are obtained and understood before any substance is used in the
workplace.
Ensure MSDSs are readily available within 5 minutes to all staff and students.
Ensure that special requirements are stated for a substance on the MSDS are met for
storage and handling.
Ensure written procedures take into account MSDS requirements and are accessible to
staff and students.
Provide advice on MSDSs and information on alternative sources for MSDSs.

Provide technical advice on any storage or safety recommendations stated in the MSDS.
52.6.5.3 Staff
Read the MSDS before storing, handling or using a substance for the first time, follow any
recommendations in the MSDS regarding personal protective equipment and any special
precautions.
117

Material Safety Data Sheets in print form are required for Hazardous Substances,
Dangerous Goods and Scheduled Carcinogens. Paper copies of MSDSs for all substances
used in teaching laboratories are also required.
A dedicated internet site should be bookmarked to provide immediate access to MSDSs.
An MSDS must be obtained before a substance is introduced into the workplace for the
first time, or where an MSDS has not previously been obtained, to assess general
requirements for the decanting, storage, handling, use and transport of the substance.
The following is an example of the standard format from the Worksafe Code of Practice
for the Preparation of an MSDS:
1. Introductory Details
2. Company Details
3. Product Identification
4. Use Specifications
5. Physical Description / Properties
6. Other Properties
7. Ingredients
8. Health Hazard Information
9. Precautions for Use
10. Safe Handling Information
11. Other Information
12. Emergency Contact Points
52.7 Labelling of Chemicals

52.7.1 Purpose
To ensure that legislative requirements are met for the labelling of all chemical substances
within the University.
52.7.2 Application
This procedure applies to all chemical containers whether original manufacturer supplied or
decanted products, including waste containers.
52.7.3 Legislation
118
52.7.4 References
Code of Practice for Hazardous Substances
Australian Standard 2243.10: 1993 Storage of Chemicals
Australian Standard 1216: 1995 Class Labels for Dangerous Goods
Provide information on the requirements for labelling of chemical substances in the

workplace
Ensure that labelling requirements are implented in all areas of the workplace where
chemicals are stored, decanted, used or disposed of.
Follow Departmental and University procedures for the labelling of Chemical Substances
52.7.6.1 Information on Labels
Where a container is supplied to the workplace, the following information must be

contained on the label. This information should be supplied by the manufacturer, importer
or supplier:
* Product Name in English
* Name, Address and Telephone number of manufacturer
* Information relating to each ingredient, ie chemical name or generic name
* Relevant Health and Safety Information, ie Risk/Safety phrases
* Dangerous Goods Class Diamond
* Packaging Group, ie I, II or III
* Denotion of Hazardous Substance or Carcinogenic status if applicable
* Poisons Schedule if applicable
The label must not be removed, defaced or modified in any way until the container has
been cleaned.
Empty bottles made from glass that are no longer required for the storage of chemicals
should be rinsed appropriately, have the label completely removed and be put aside for
disposal through the Disposal of Glass Procedure, Section 5.8.4.
119
52.7.6.2 Labels on Decanted Containers
Where a substance is supplied to the workplace, in a container other than the

manufacturers or importers original container, the following information must be contained
on the label. This information should be supplied by the original manufacturer, importer or
supplier:
* Product Name in English
* Name, Address and Telephone number of manufacturer
* Information relating to each ingredient, ie chemical name or generic name
* Relevant Health and Safety Information, ie Risk/Safety phrases
* Packaging Group, ie I, II or III
* Denotion of Hazardous Substance or Carcinogenic status if applicable
* Poisons Schedule if applicable
The label must not be removed, defaced or modified in any way until the container has
been cleaned.
Empty bottles made from glass that are no longer required for the storage of chemicals
should be rinsed appropriately, have the label completely removed and be put aside for
disposal through the Disposal of Glass Procedure, Section 5.8.4.
52.7.6.3 Labelling of Waste
Where waste is collected for disposal it must be stored in an appropriate container with a
waste label. The label must contain the following information:
* Chemical name, or mixture ingredients
* Departmental name and number
* Packaging Group
* Type of waste, ie organic solvent, inorganic solvent etc
* Volume
NB: Waste labels, Hazard Diamond etc are available through the Risk Management
Office, and through the Chemicstry Store.
53 Biohazards
53.1 Use of Animals
53.1.1 Purpose
To ensure the safety of staff and students working with animals, and to cover legal
compliance with the importation, use, transport and disposal of these animals.
53.1.2 Application
These guidelines provide a uniform code of practice throughout the University of Melbourne
and all its teaching areas for animal handling..
120
53.1.3 Legislation
Occupational Health & Safety Act 1985
Gene Technology Act 2000
Gene Technology Regulations 2001
Wildlife Act 1975
Fisheries Act 1968
53.1.4 References
University of Melbourne Animal Experimentation Ethics Committee. OHS and Zoonotic
Diseases
Australian New Zealand Standard 2243.3: Microbiology 1995
53.1.5.1 Deans and Heads of Academic and Administrative Departments
Implement such safety measures as are approved by Council following recommendation

by the Occupational Health and Safety Committee.
In association with appropriate personnel, formulate and publish specific safety rules for
activities conducted within areas under their control for work with animals.
For the protection of staff working with animals (investigators and technicians),
Departments must ensure immunisation with relevant vaccines is offered, and that
baseline serum samples be collected for "at risk" personnel.
Ensure the Animal Experimentation Ethics Committee approval is obtained to use the
laboratory for experimental work with animals and biological materials.
Make women of child bearing age aware of risks to the unborn child of exposure to
certain microorganisms.
Staff should be informed about the importance of hygiene, wearing appropriate protective
clothing and the safe handling of animals.
Where relevant, staff should be provided with information about hazardous, infectious,
radioactive, carcinogenic, anaesthetic drugs, or other substances with which they will be
working.
Ensure that all laboratory workers have received training in handling animals.
Ensure that all wastes or byproducts are transported according to relevant regulations.
Segregate all wastes as non infectious, infectious, sharps commingles and radioactive
material.
Use personal protective equipment where applicable. When handling animals, gloves and
respiratory protection should be worn.
Report all injuries and incidents. Immediate medical action is required after human blood or
body fluid exposure.
121
Should you become pregnant and work with any of the animals mentioned below, you are
required as a condition of employment to notify your department head or supervisor
immediately once aware of pregnancy. If you wish to obtain confidential medical advice,
you may contact the medical staff in the Student Health Unit.
53.1.6.1 Personal Protections for Working with Animals
Staff should be instructed in the safe operation of any equipment to be used; made
familiar with the equipment required by the provision of a written set of instructions and
have the opportunity to carry out a practice run before work commences.
Staff should be encouraged to attend any relevant short courses available. It is strongly
recommended by the Animal Ethics Committee that all students and staff involved in using
animals for teaching or research attend the "Laboratory Animal Science and Animal
Welfare" course run by the Staff Development and Training Unit.
Staff should be informed of the implicit risks of working with animals and the relevant
species, particularly with regard to allergy and zoonotic disease. In case of a problem
arising, staff should know where to seek advice.
Protection from contamination by animal faeces or urine should be provided. Adequate
washing facilities are essential.
Penetration of organisms through the skin, particularly from selfinoculation during
postmortem examinations and from contact with ectoparasites, is a real risk when
handling or inoculating animals. Even uninoculated animals may harbour organisms
dangerous to humans.
Any unusual personal reaction or allergy to animals should be reported to the supervisor so
that appropriate action can be taken.
All conventionally bred animals carry a wide range or organisms some of which can
cause severe diseases.
53.1.6.2 Special Consideration Animals
General procedures ensuring a healthy and safe workplace will provide protection in most
cases. However, for certain hazards e.g. handling infectious organisms in the lab or
experimental animals, there are special considerations including:
Cats Cats may harbour and excrete in their faeces the organism toxoplasma gondii. If
infection occurs during human pregnancy, abortion or congenital malformations may result
at any time during pregnancy. Congenital toxoplasmosis may develop following active
infection of pregnant women though there may be no apparent symptoms of illness.
Infants who survive infection are at risk of developing central nervous system symptoms.
Sheep during lambing Pregnant sheep may harbour the organism Chlamydia psittaci
which can infect humans handling infected material such as infected placental material or
uterine discharge. If infection occurs during human pregnancy, it may cause abortion and
severe illness in woman at any stage of pregnancy.
Large Animals e.g. Sheep and Cattle These may pose a problem to workers by causing
abortion from the organism Listeria monocytogenes.
122
53.1.6.3 Pregnancy and Work with Animals
If you are planning a pregnancy and your work exposes you to risk, confidential advice
may be obtained from the Student Health Unit. Advice from the Student Health Unit or
the Risk Management Office will be provided in conjunction with your doctor to help
ensure your rights in employment, with the University acknowledging its obligations under
health and safety and equal opportunity legislation. It is essential for the protection of the
foetus and because of the legal requirements that the Occupational Health and Safety
Act places on employers and employees, that you comply with these procedures.
Depending on the nature of your work and the risks involved, modified or alternative duties
may have to be provided during your pregnancy.
The Occupational Health Unit will be able to provide you and your department with advice
on wether any changes to your work will be needed during your pregnancy. Every effort
will be made by your department / faculty to ensure that if any changes are required they
will result in the new duties or the new job being of similar status and standing with
comparable prerequisites of training and experience within the University.
For further details on maternity leave, please refer to Personnel Policies and Procedures
section 9.2 Maternity, Paternity and Adoption Leave.
53.1.6.4 Work Requiring Immunisation
Certain work groups should be offered immunisation against certain infections (e.g.
tetanus, hepatitis B and Qfever). Hepatitis B and Q Fever immunisations are not
recommended during pregnancy.
For further information, please contact:
Animal Welfare Officer Office of the Deputy Vice Chancellor
03 8344 4070
Lyn Scott Animal Welfare Officer
53.1.6.5 Biological Permits
Departments should note that under the Wildlife Act 1975, only a few species of
Australian Fauna may be kept without a Wildlife Fanciers Licence issued by the fisheries
and Wildlife Division of the Ministry for Conservation and Natural Resources.
Also under the Fisheries Act 1968, Some limits are placed on the collection of marine and
freshwater organisms. Departments should ensure that they have the necessary permits
before undertaking collection of restricted material. Advice can be obtained from the
appropriate government agencies.
53.2 Biohazard Committee

53.2.1 Purpose
The Biohazard Committee produce guidelines that apply to all users of products containing
biological materials of animal, human, plant or microbial origin, to ensure legal compliance
with the importantion, use. transport and disposal of these materials.
53.2.2 Application
These guidelines are not intended to replace instructions in laboratories which have specific
risks but rather to provide a uniform code of practice throughout the University of
Melbourne and all its teaching areas.
123
53.2.3 Legislation
53.2.4 References
Biohazards Committee guidelines
53.2.5.1 Biohazard Committee
The University has established a Biohazard Committee which monitors any research or
work involving a potential biohazard within the guidelines established for Genetic
Manipulation Work. Any enquiries on the work and functions of this Committee should be
addressed to the Secretary, Biohazard Committee, The Office for Research on 03 8344
5533.
53.2.5.2 Biosafety Sub Committee
The Biohazard Committee has also established a Biosafety SubCommittee with the
following Terms of Reference.
The Biosafety SubCommittee is established as a specialist subcommittee of the
Biohazard Committee to:
provide advice on appropriate policy and procedures for the safe handling and
disposal of biological material, and the safe use of teratogens and carcinogens;
conduct, on behalf of the Biohazards Committee, inspections of PC2 laboratories,
transgenic animal facilities, infectious animal holding facilities and PH2
glasshouses for use in work involving genetic manipulation.
53.2.5.3 Gene Technology Committees
With the Advent of new legisltion for gene technology, 3 new government committees
have been established:
1. The Gene Technology Technical Advisory Committee (GTTAC) to provide the regulator,
or ministerial council with advice on scienctific and technical matters including: gene
technology, GMOs and GM products, and applications made under the legislation.
2. The Gene Technology Community Consultative Committee (GTCCC) to provide advice
on community concerns regarding gene technology and the need for, and content or, policy
guidelines and codes of practice to the development of the procedural and policy
documents
3. The Gene Technology Ethics Committee (GTEC) to provide advice on the ethics of gene
technology, appropriate ethics guidelines and any necessary prohibitive directives.
124
53.2.6.1 Biohazard Committee Activities
The Biohazard Committee has adopted the Australian Standard AS 2243.3 1995 Safety
in Laboratories Microbiology and requires that all work with microorganisms or hazard
equivalent to that designated by this Standard as Risk Group 3 or 4, shall be reported to
the Committee.
The Biohazard Committee requires that a Biosafety Officer shall be appointed in every
Department in which potentially hazardous biological research is being conducted. The
Committee will instruct and confer regularly with these Biosafety Officers, who will be
responsible to the Head of Department for disseminating information and implementing the
recommendations of the Committee.
Inquiries or requests for assistance with biosafety matters should be directed to:
Chairperson, Biohazard Committee or the Manager, Risk Management Office.
53.2.6.2 Gene Technology Requirements
The new legislation will regulate research, manufacture, production, commercial release,
and import of live, viable organisms that have been modified by techniques of gene
technology, including the progeny of such GMOs.
GM products not already regulated by an existing agency will also be identified under the
new legislation.
Every GMO will need to be licences by the Regulator under the follwing conditions:
Activities undertaken in contained facilities, overseen by institutional Biosafety
Committees
Licences will be based on a risk assessment and consultation with expert advisory
committees, Government Agencies, and the public
Certain GMOs used for study and research purposes may be exempt from licensing
agreements, where the risk has been assessed to be low risk, and there is no potential for
the release of any genetically modified organism into the environment.
53.3 Importation of Biological Materials

53.3.1 Purpose
To ensure the safety of staff and students working with biological materials and
equipment that have been imported to the local environment from external locations
outside Australia.
53.3.2 Application
The biohazards guidelines apply to all users of products containing biological material of
animal, human, plant or microbial origin.
53.3.3 Legislation
Dangerous Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulations 2000.
125
53.3.4 References
The International Air Transportation Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulation.
The Australia Post, Dangerous Goods and Packaging Guide
Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail.
Are required, in association with appropriate personnel, to formulate and publish specific
safety rules for activities conducted within areas under their control.
Ensure compliance with the requirements for the use of biological materials regarding
permits and other legal authorisations in areas under their control.
Ensure immunisation with relevant vaccines is offered. It is recommended that baseline
serum samples should be collected for "at risk" personnel.
Ensure that all laboratory workers have received training in handling microorganisms and
equipment use.
Ensure that all microorganisms wastes or by products are transported according to relevant
regulations.
Ensure availability of material safety data sheets.
material.
Treat wastes containing live microorganisms by autoclaving, chemical disinfection or high
temperature incineration prior to disposal.
Use personal protective equipment where applicable.
53.3.6.1 Importation Permits
To apply for an import permit for any biological material the importer must complete an
Application for Permit to Import Quarantine Material.
A lodgement fee must accompany the application.
A permit will then be issued which will list conditions of use. These conditions of use must
be strictly followed at all times.
Postal Address: Animal Programs Section Quarantine Operations Branch, AQIS c/o AQIS
Information Centre GPO Box 858 CANBERRA ACT 2601
Street Address:
126
Animal Programs Section

Quarantine Operations Branch, AQIS
Level 1 Bligh House
Bligh Street
BARTON ACT 2600
53.3.6.2 Local Authorisation
Where required obtain the Biohazards Committee approval to use biological materials.
Where required obtain approval to use the laboratory for experimental work with biological
materials.
53.3.6.3 Potential Problems Associated with the Importation of Biological Material
Imported diagnostic reagents and other biological products manufactured from human,
animal or plant material may be contaminated with pathogens including viruses.
Processing methods do not always ensure freedom from contamination. Information
concerning the multicountry origin, processing and innocuity testing of biological products is
frequently difficult to obtain.
While most imported biological products for invitro use pose only a minimal risk of
introduction of exotic disease into Australia, certain products, e.g. sera, are a high risk.
When products, even low risk products, are used invivo, they may become very high risk.
An example of AQIS concerns are the slow viruses, "Scrapie" and "Bovine Spongiform
Encephalopathy" which can withstand extreme temperatures (dry heat of 160C for 24
hours or autoclaving at 134C for 18 minutes). Provided products containing animal
material are only used invitro and are safely disposed of (e.g. by incineration), there is little
risk of introducing these or other exotic pathogens. Should this type of material be used in
invivo, the risk is magnified many fold.
A quarantine policy has therefore been developed requiring the safe use and disposal of
these products in Australia.
It is therefore, our responsibility to ensure that the methods of disposal in place in the
University are such that potential risks are eliminated.
53.3.6.4 Further Information
Should you have any queries or require further information, please contact:
Foodstuffs Officer Ph: (06) 2724518 Fax: (06) 2732097
Biologicals Officer (Assessment) Ph: (06) 2724578 Fax: (06) 2732097
Animals Officer Ph: (06) 2724454 Fax: (06) 2723110
Inquiries Officer Ph: (06) 3735385 Fax: (06) 2732097
53.4 Transport and Packaging of Infectious Material

53.4.1 Purpose
To ensure the safety of staff and students working with biological materials, and to ensure
legal compliance with the importation, use, transport and disposal of these materials.
127
53.4.2 Application
53.4.3 Legislation
53.4.4 References
Infection Control Guidelines, AIDS and Related Conditions Bulletin.
No. 7. Australian National Council on AIDS June 1990
WHO AIDS Series 9 Biosafety Guidelines for Diagnostic and Research Laboratories.
Working with HIV. 1991
WHO AIDS Series 2. Guidelines on Sterilisation and Disinfection. Methods Effective
Against Human Immunodeficiency Virus, HIV. 2nd Ed. 1989
Victorian AIDS Advisory CommitteeBlood and Body Substance Precautions. October
1989
Sterilisation and Disinfection Society Victoria Technical Bulletin No. 6. Revised 1989.
Prevention of Blood Borne Infections (HBV, NANBH, HIV)
Guidelines on Hospital Waste Management, Health Department Victoria. Second Edition.
May 1992
Circular 88/146. Infection Control Guidelines for the Handling of Human Tissues and Sera
Australian Standard 2647. Biological Safety Cabinets Installation and Use
Australian Standard 4031. Nonreusable containers for the collection of sharp medical
items used in health care areas.
Australian Standard 2182 1994 Sterilisers Steam Portable
The use of unfixed blood, blood products and human tissue for teaching and research
purposes circular No. 143, 1991
NH&MRC National guidelines for the Management of clinical and related wastes. 1988
The International Air Transportation Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulation
The Australian Post, Dangerous Goods and Packaging Guide
Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail
128

Ensure that procedures are written for the transport and packaging of infectious waste.
Ensure that all stqff have received training in handling infectious materials, and in the use
of the associated equipment.
Ensure that all microorganisms, wastes or by products are transported according to
relevant regulations.
material.
53.4.6.1 Transport of Infectious Waste
The International Air Transport Association (IATA), Dangerous Goods Regulations

regulates the transport of biological materials by air and in general also includes other
requirements from Australian Post, Road and Rail transport.
A shippers declaration for dangerous goods must be completed wherever infectious
material is transported.
53.4.6.2 Classification of Biological Materials
Biological materials are classified as:

1. Known not to contain infectious agents. They may be transported without restrictions.
2. Low probability of being infectious to humans or animals. They must be packaged
according to Packing Instructions No. 650 of IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations.
3. Genetically modified, but unlikely to be infectious to human or animals. They must be
packaged according to Packaging Instructions No. 913 of IATA Dangerous Goods
Regulations.
4. Infectious to humans or animals or generically modified and infectious to humans and
animals. They must be packaged according to Packaging Instructions No. 602 of IATA
Dangerous Goods Regulations.
129
53.4.6.3 Packaging of Infectious Waste
Refer to section 8 of AS/NZS 2243.3 1995 for procedures for the transport of biological
materials by air, road and rail. Atypical approved container is described in Figure 1 and
packaging instruction classifications are described in Figure 2.
Avoid contamination of Pathology Request Forms by keeping them separate from the
clinical specimens.
Close blood tubes tightly and place them upright in a rack which is then placed into a
waterproof plastic bag. Take care in the choice of stoppers and enclosures for blood tubes
and other specimen containers. There is potential for environmental contamination during
opening and centrifuging of tubes and containers. To reduce hazards during opening,
screwcaps are preferred to presson caps or plugin bungs for the blood tubes of
evacuated collection systems. With blood collection by syringe and needle, take care to
avoid blood contamination of the top and outside threads of tubes for screwcaps as this
results in streaks of blood down the outside of these tubes during centrifugation.
For transport between institutions, interstate etc., pack the primary specimen, surrounded by
sufficient material to absorb its contents, in a sealable inner container and provide a
sealable outer container of waterproof, robust material. Label in accordance with postal or
other transport regulations.
Where infectious aerosols are likely to be produced use a biological safety cabinet class I
or class II.
53.5 Laboratory Guidelines Sterilisation

53.5.1 Purpose
To ensure the safety of staff and students undertaking sterilisation of animal and
biological waste materials
53.5.2 Application
These guidelines apply to all users of sterilisation techniques for biological materials of
animal, human, plant or microbial origin. Further instructions are required in laboratories,
which have specific risk areas.
53.5.3 Legislation
53.5.4 References
WHO AIDS Series 2. Guidelines on Sterilisation and Disinfection Methods Effective
Against Human Immunodeficiency Virus, HIV. 2nd ed. 1989
Sterilisation and Disinfection Society Victoria Technical Bulletin No. 6. Revised 1989.
Prevention of Blood Borne Infections (HBV, NANBH, HIV)
Gardner, J.F., Peel, M.M. Sterilisation, Disinfection and Infection Control. Melbourne.
Churchill Livingstone, 1998
May 1992
130
Hazard Alert. No. 1. 1991. Worksafe Australia gluteraldehyde

Australian Standard 2182 1994 Sterilizers Steam Portable
NH&MRC national guidelines for the management of clinical and related wastes 1988
Ensure appropriate sterilisation and disinfection equipment and facilities are provided to
staff and students undertaking biological and animal experimentation, or other research
involving infectious materials
Ensure that all laboratory workers have received training in sterilisation and disinfection
techniques.
Ensure where certification is required for operation of autoclaves or other pressure
equipment, that appropriate staff members are trained.
material.
Sterilisation by Steam
Disinfection and Sterilisation by Heat
Disinfection by Chemical Agent
53.5.6.1 Sterilisation by Steam
Moist steam under pressure is the method of choice used for both sterilisation and
decontamination of infectious materials and waste.
The basic essential in steam sterilisation is that the whole of the load of materials to be
sterilised shall be in contact with saturated steam at the required temperature for the
necessary length of time. Each of these criteria is important. Saturated steam must be
used, otherwise the process virtually becomes a dry heat treatment for which different
temperaturetime relationships hold. There is also a well established temperaturetime
relationship that must be observed if reliable decontamination is achieved.
Implicit in the specification for team sterilisation is the need for sufficient time for the
whole of the load to reach the required temperature for the actual sterilising period to
commence. This varies considerably with nature and size of the load and the size and type
of the steriliser. That the required temperature for each autoclave has been reached can
be determined by the placement of a thermocouple, a biological indicator (spore strip), a
chemical indicator or a combination of all three in the centre of the load.
Steam sterilisation of microorganisms requires a temperature of 121C for 15 minutes or
134C for 3 minutes. The actual time allowed must be determined for each autoclave by
testing with the maximal desirable load. Once this timetemperature relationship has been
determined for a particular autoclave, these values are used, subject to monitoring.
121C FOR 15 MINUTES
134C FOR 3 MINUTES
53.5.6.2 Disinfection and Sterilisation by Heat
Disinfection by boiling water is a simple and effective means of inactivating HBV and
HIV; a period of 20 minutes is recommended.
Sterilisation by dry heat is appropriate for equipment that can withstand high temperature.
170C FOR 2 HOURS
Additional time should be allowed as appropriate for heat penetration.
53.5.6.3 Disinfection by Chemical Agent
It is the manufacturers responsibility to have the required tests performed on a product to

determine the use dilutions recommended on the label. It is most important that these
recommendations are followed and that fresh diluted solutions be prepared daily and any
remains of older solution discarded.
Disinfectants do not remain free of living microorganisms for ever and it is common for
some bacteria, e.g. Pseudomonas aeruginosa to survive and grow in many types of
disinfectants.
In order to minimise this problem the following precautions are recommended:
Prepare fresh dilutions daily
Use clean, dry containers
Use clean water for dilutions
1) Chlorine Releasing Compounds or Halogens
a) Sodium Hypochlorite Solutions
They are inexpensive, readily available as household bleach and nontoxic dilute solutions.
However they are also corrosive to a wide range of materials including stainless steel and
are inactivated by organic matter.
Solutions decompose on standing and fresh dilutions need to be prepared daily.
Recommended Concentrations
DISINFECTION OF SURFACES:
0.1% available chlorine (1000ppm)
DISINFECTION OF SPILLS:
0.5 to 1% available chlorine (5000 10000ppm)
b) Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate (NaDCC)
It releases hypochlorous acid when dissolved in water and is much more stable than
hypochlorite solutions.
c) Chloramine (Tosylchloramide Sodium; Chloramine T)
Chloramine is also more stable than hypochlorite solutions. However it should be protected
from humidity, light and excessive heat.
132
NOTE: Wear rubber gloves and eye protection when preparing solutions of chlorine
releasing compounds. Avoid contact with skin.
2) Glutaraldehyde
Glutaraldehyde is widely used to disinfect instruments and surfaces such as stainless steel,
and is available as a aqueous solutions of 2% w/v glutaraldehyde made alkaline with a
buffer or stabilised glutaraldehyde solutions.
It is noncorrosive to metalware but is very toxic; the vapour is irritant to the eyes and
mucous membranes.
Its Threshold Limit Value (TLV) is 0.2ppm.
Use personal protective equipment to prevent skin contact and inhalation and handle as
per HAZARD ALERT NO. 1, 1991 WORKSAFE AUSTRALIA.
3) Alcohols
Ethyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol are miscible with water and are usually used at a
concentration of 70% alcohol by weight for maximum biocidal action.
They are usually used for skin disinfection and surface decontamination of clean surfaces.
4) Iodophors
They are organic complexes containing iodine. An example is Povidone Iodine containing
10% w/w iodine. Iodophors are soluble in water or alcohols and are rapidly effective
against all forms or microorganisms. They are usually diluted to 1% w/v available iodine
and their most common use is for skin disinfection. They can also be used for the
disinfection of clean surfaces.
Free iodine combines with protein, therefore iodine solutions are not suitable for use in the
presence of organic matter.
Iodine based disinfectants decompose when heated above 40C.
5) Chlorhexidine
Chlorhexidine as gluconate is either diluted with water or alcohols in the range 0.02 1.00
per cent w/v. It is active in the pH range 5.5 8 and is practically free from toxicity and
has low potential for skin irritation.
Its main use is as a skin and mucous membrane disinfectant. In the even of accidental
contamination in the laboratory, it is recommended that alcoholic chlorhexidine be applied
to the skin.
6) Phenols
Phenols are used as disinfectants and most preparations contain mixed phenols and
emulsifiers because they are insoluble in water.
Organic matter has little effect on their biocidal activity. They are poisonous, have
objectionable odour and may stain some materials.
They are used for the disinfection of floors, walls, furniture, benches, etc.
7) Quaternary Ammonium Compounds
They are positively charged surface active disinfectants, the most common being
Cetrimide and Benzalkonium chloride. They have a fairly narrow antibacterial spectrum
and are inactivated by proteins in high concentration.
They have low toxicity and are used in food industries but of little use in laboratories.
DISINFECTION OF WORK SURFACES
133
Disinfect work surfaces when work is completed at the end of each day and whenever a
spill has occurred.
An effective all purpose disinfectant is a hypochlorite solution with a concentration of
0.1% available chlorine (1000 ppm).
53.5.6.4 Selection of Disinfectants
Table 52: Choosing a disinfectant

TYPE OF MICROORGANISM
EFFECTIVE DISINFECTANT
Gram positive bacteria (non sporing)
Any potent bactericide
Gram negative bacteria
Alcohols, halogens, phenolics
Acid fast bacteria
Alcohols, aldehydes, halogens, phenolics
Bacterial spores
Aldehydes, halogens (strong solutions)
Viruses hydrophilic and lipophilic
Viruses lipophilic only
Alcohols, chlorhexidine, phenolics
Fungi
53.6 Spill Response

53.6.1 Purpose
To ensure the safety of staff and students where a spill has occurred involving biological
materials or equipment.
53.6.2 Application
These guidelines apply to spills containing biological material of animal, human, plant or
microbial origin.
53.6.3 Legislation
Environment Protection Act 1970.
53.6.4 References
May 1992.
Australian Standard 2647. Biological Safety Cabinets Installation and Use.
Ensure compliance with the following requirements for use of biological materials:
Provide spill kits.
Ensure availability of Material Safety Data Sheets.
Ensure that all laboratory workers have received training in handling
microorganisms and dealing with spills.
Ensure that all microorganisms wastes or by products are transported according to
relevant regulations.
134
Where necessary obtain material safety data sheets.

Report all spills immediately, action is required after human blood or body fluid exposure.
53.6.6.1 Spills in Laboratory Areas
Where a spillage of potentially infectious material has occurred the area must be vacated
for at least 30 minutes for aerosol particles to be dispersed.
1. Put on a buttoned laboratory coat before entering the area of the spill.
2. Cover the spill with absorbent material (e.g. paper towels) soaked in disinfectant.
3. Pour the disinfectant solution around the spill and allow 1030 minutes to effect
disinfection.
4. Wipe surroundings likely to have been contaminated with aerosols using the disinfectant
solution.
5. Carefully mop up the spillage and disinfectant solution and transfer all contaminated
objects and liquids to a waste container for contaminated material.
6. Decontaminate boots, gloves and clothing.
7. Hypochlorite solution with a concentration of 1.0% available chlorine (10,000 ppm.) is
recommended for this procedure.
53.6.6.2 Spills Inside Biological Safety Cabinets
1. Ensure that the cabinet remains operating to retain aerosols.

2. Cover the spill and immediate area with solution of a suitable disinfectant and leave
untouched for a minimum of 10 minutes. Disinfect gloved hands, remove protective gloves
and clothing for sterilisation and wash hands and arms. Put on a clean set of protective
clothing and gloves for carrying out the remainder of the clean up.
3. After initial inactivation of the spillage, remove excess fluid with absorbent material and
discard into a container for removal. Discard culture bottles, petri dishes and solid material
responsible for the spill into the same container. Remove for sterilisation culture media and
disposable materials adjacent to the spill and contaminated by it.
4. Wipe down the work floor, cabinet work zone and remaining items of equipment with
fresh disinfectant solution. Disinfect the front grille and work floor within the cabinet.
Check that the spillage has not contaminated the sump. If contaminated, add sufficient
disinfectant solution to completely cover it. If the spill is large, use sufficient disinfectant to
dilute and inactivate the infectious material.
5. If the spillage is large or involves a highly infectious microorganism, consider whether the
cabinet should be decontaminated with formaldehyde gas before further use.
135
53.6.6.3 Spills Inside Centrifuges
If a breakage is obvious or suspected while the centrifuge is still running, switch off the
instrument. Always inspect centrifuge buckets for breakages of tubes through the
transparent rotor or bucket cover before opening.
1. If the rotor or bucket lid is removed before discovery of the breakage, replace lid
immediately.
2. Inform the Department Safety Officer of any centrifuge breakages.
3. Consult the centrifuge manual for directions on the removal of centrifuge rotor or carrier
with its cover still on.
4. Wear disposable gloves and mask.
5. Open rotor or carrier in a biosafety cabinet.
6. If appropriate, recover the contents of the unbroken capped tubes inside the biosafety
cabinet by carefully wiping the outside of the tubes with a suitable disinfectant and
placing specimens in clean containers.
7. Replace the rotor or carrier lid for transport to the autoclave.
8. Remove lid and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
9. Use forceps or cotton swabs to carefully pick up debris and discard into a sharps
container.
10. Clean centrifuge rotor with an appropriate detergent.
11. Disinfect the inner surface of the centrifuge with an appropriate disinfectant e.g.
glutaraldehyde.
12. Replace rotor.
Contact the Risk Management Office for guidance on 8344 4006.
53.7 Equipment for Handling Biological Materials

53.7.1 Purpose
To ensure the safety of staff and students working with equipment in Biohazard
laboratories.
53.7.2 Application
WARNING: Laminar flow cabinets (downflow or crossflow) are designed for product
protection only and must never be used for work with infectious material.
53.7.3 Legislation
Not Applicable
136
53.7.4 References
Australian Standard 2252 Part 1. Biological Safety Cabinet (Class I) for Personnel
Protection
Australian Standard 2252 Part 2 Laminar Flow Biological Safety Cabinets (Class II) for
Personnel Protection
Australian Standard 2647. Biological Safety Cabinets Installation and Use
items used in health care areas
Guidelines for small scale Genetic Manipulation Work. GMAC April 1995
Ensure regular inspection, testing and maintenance of equipment used in biohazard

laboratories.
Where required obtain approval to use the laboratory for experimental work with biological
materials.
Ensure that all laboratory workers have received training in use of equipment.
or class II.
Report all faults or other problems with equipment. Immediate action is required after
human blood or body fluid exposure.
53.7.6.1 Centrifuges
Centrifuges should be operated according to the manufacturers instructions.

Infectious airborne particles may be ejected when centrifuges are used even if placed in a
class I or class II biosafety cabinet.
Infectious micro organisms, blood or body fluids should be centrifuged only in sealed
buckets or sealed rotors which can be autoclaved should they become contaminated.
53.7.6.2 Refrigerators and Freezers
Should be signed with a Biological symbol and defrosted and cleaned periodically. If any
ampoule etc. has been broken during storage, personal protective equipment should be
worn and the broken material removed. The interior of the cabinet should then be cleaned
and disinfected.
All items in fridge and freezer should be clearly labelled. Unlabeled or obsolete materials
should be removed and autoclaved.
137
53.7.6.3 Biological Safety Cabinets
A biological cabinet class I (AS 2252) or class II (AS 2252.2) shall be installed and used as
recommended in AS 2647 where significant quantities of aerosols are likely to be produced
by e.g.:
Centrifugation
Vortexing
Sonication
Blending
Open ampoules etc.
The cabinet shall be located away from sources which affect containment such as
doorways, passageways, air diffusers or air conditioners.
It shall also be located so as to permit exhaust of decontamination gases to atmosphere.
Inspection and testing shall be conducted immediately prior to use routinely and at least
annually, and after any relocation or repair is carried out.
No biosafety cabinet shall be used unless a current NATA certificate of compliance with
Australian Standards is displayed on the cabinet.
The cabinets must be serviced and tested at intervals of not more than one year by a
NATA registered testing authority to ensure that they are operating to specifications.
Consult AS 2252. Parts 1 and 2, and AS 2647.
Biohazard Cabinet (Class I)
Mechanism
Non sterile air is drawn into the work zone from the front of the cabinet. Air from the work
zone is exhausted through an absolute filter which removes any biohazards material. This
cabinet protects the environment and the operator but does not provide a sterile work zone.
Use
May be used to handle all biohazards material but not suitable for sterile work.
Do not use for
Hazardous chemicals
Radioisotopes
Biohazard Cabinet (Class II)
Mechanism
A sterile work zone is maintained by blowing sterile (filtered) air onto the work surface
from above. The majority of this air is recirculated through the main filter but
approximately 15% is exhausted through a separated absolute filter. "Make up" air is
drawn in at the front of the cabinet to produce and air curtain between the work zone and
the operator / and environment, i.e. give barrier containment.
Use
For manipulations involving biohazards material (e.g. human blood, cells, tissue, infectious
agents), particularly when sterile conditions are required.
Do not use for
Hazardous chemicals
138
Radioisotopes
Biohazard Cabinet (Class III)
Class III biological safety cabinets are totally enclosed ventilated units, maintained at
negative air pressure to ambient. Input and exhaust air flows are HEPA filtered and the
operator works though gloves attached to the cabinet. There is therefore a physical barrier
between the work and the operator in the laboratory.
Class III cabinets offer the greatest degree of protection from splashes and aerosols but
because of their cost and difficulty of use, they are kept for handling the most dangerous
microorganisms.
Laminar Flow Cytotoxic Drug Safety Cabinets
Laminar flow cytotoxic drug safety cabinets (AS 2567) are openfronted ventilation units
with similar air flows to Class II biological safety cabinets. They are designed for handling,
preparing and dispensing cytotoxic drugs and to provide both personnel and product
protection. As these drugs may be mutagenic or carcinogenic, protection of maintenance
and testing personnel must be provided from residues which may contaminate filters,
mechanical components and other surfaces. For this reason the exhaust filter is situated
beneath the work floor and sump so that it may be sealed and removed without disturbing
contaminants adhering to it.
53.7.6.4 Servicing Equipment
Apparatus such as centrifuges, water baths, incubators, refrigerators, deep freeze

cabinets, ELISA readers and washers etc. should be cleaned and disinfected at regular
intervals and before being sent for repair or disposal.
It is most important that personnel who carry out servicing or repairs to equipment are not
exposed to biohazards agents. Therefore, any equipment or apparatus which requires
attention and which is suspected of being contaminated with material of human origin or
pathogenic microorganisms must be thoroughly disinfected before access is granted to the
qualified service or repair technician.
53.7.6.5 Malfunction of Equipment
Where equipment such as a centrifuge or biological safety cabinet ceases working

effectively while biological materials is being used, the following procedure should be
undertaken:
Stop working
Turn off all services in the cabinet
Leave the cabinet, remove gloves and wash hands
Fit a cover to the work access opening if available
Turn off the power supply to the cabinet
Inform your supervisor and call maintenance
Arrange for decontamination, if necessary
139
53.8 Work Practices

53.8.1 Purpose
equipment.
53.8.2 Application
To provide guidance for safe work practices for staff and students handling biological
materials.
53.8.3 Legislation
53.8.4 References
Australian New Zealand Standard 2982 (1987) Laboratory construction
Infection Control Guidelines, AIDS and Related Conditions Bulletin. No. 7. Australian
National Council on AIDS. June 1990
1989
The use of unfixed blood, blood products and human tissue for teaching and research
purposes circular No. 143, 1991

In association with appropriate personnel, formulate and publish specific safety rules for
activities conducted within areas under their control.
Where employees are to work with biological hazards, special risk are posed due to the
possibility of exposure to high concentrations or microorganisms, or through animal products
where there is a risk of transmission of disease. Staff undertaking these duties may be
required to receive immunisation through Student Health for appropriate vaccinations.
Reporting and investigating accidents that occur within areas under their control.
140
Are required to ensure that only authorised/legally obtained materials are used in
Laboratories under their control.
use of equipment.
Ensure availability of Material Safety Data Sheets.
53.8.5.3 Staff Students
or class II.
Staff and Students must acquire the necessary skills for the correct handling of potentially
infectious material of human origin and exercise these skills at all times. These materials
should always be handled with the assumption that the specimen may be infectious.
53.8.6.1 Laboratory Accommodation
Access to laboratories where human material is handled should be restricted to Staff only
and the laboratory door kept closed while work is in progress. When an office is located
within a laboratory, it is the responsibility of the head of the laboratory to ensure that
access is permitted only under safe conditions.
All bench surfaces should be nonporous and capable of regular disinfection.
The laboratory should be kept clean, neat and free from extraneous materials and
equipment.
Where laboratories have been certified as PC2 or 3, they must abide by the requirements
imposed by that certification for containment of materials, personal protective equipment
and waste products to ensure that cross contamination does not occur.
53.8.6.2 Safe Work Practices
Pipetting
Mouth pipetting is absolutely banned.
Use, preferably, mechanical type pipettes with disposable plastic tips.
Workbooks
Facilities, separate from the work bench, shall be provided for work books and report
writing. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that these materials do not become
contaminated before being removed from the laboratory.
Pest Control
An effective insect and rodent control program must be in place.
Protocol for Collecting Blood
a) Only staff experienced in venipuncture should collect blood specimens.
b) Staff collecting blood should wear disposable gloves. The patients arm should be placed
on disposable sheeting before specimen collection(s). At the conclusion, wrap all articles
(apart from syringes and needles) in the sheet for incineration.
141
c) Disposable syringes and needles should be used and discarded undetached, unbent and
uncapped into an approved sharps container. The recapping of needles is a potential
puncture hazard.
d) Close the filled collection tube carefully to prevent leakage during transportation. Then
place the tube in a suitably sealed plastic envelope for transportation (see section 6).
Opening Ampules containing Lyophilized Infectious Material
Always open ampoules in a Biological Safety Cabinet class I or II as they may be under
negative pressure and the inrush of air may disperse some material into the atmosphere.
Always decontaminate the outer surface of the ampoule before opening and add
suspension medium slowly to avoid frothing.
Ampoules containing infectious material are usually stored in freezers (20C) or ultra low
freezers (75C).
If required they may be stored in the gaseous phase of liquid nitrogen because cracked of
badly sealed ampoules may explode on removal if stored in the liquid phase of nitrogen.
53.9 Laboratory Hygiene

53.9.1 Purpose
To ensure staff and students are aware of hygiene requirements for working with
biological materials and equipment.
53.9.2 Application
53.9.3 Legislation
53.9.4 References
Infection Control Guidelines, AIDS and Related Conditions Bulletin. No. 7. Australian
National Council on AIDS. June 1990
WHO AIDS Series 2. Guidelines on Sterilisation and Disinfection. Methods Effective
Against Human Immunodeficiency Virus, HIV. 2nd Ed. 1989
1989
142
Are required, in association with appropriate personnel, to formulate and publish specific
use of equipment.

53.9.6.1 Handling Potential Sources of Contamination
All blood and bodily fluids are regarded as potential sources of bloodborne pathogens.
Blood borne pathogens may be transmitted by direct exposure via perforation of intact skin
by contaminated sharp objects and by contamination of open wounds, cuts and abrasions
or mucous membranes.
Handling human blood, body fluids or tissues poses a risk to Staff and Students from
infective agents such as Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) or any other blood borne
diseases, such as Hepatitis B virus (HBV), Hepatitis C virus etc. The risk also extends to
human blood, tissue derivatives and blood fractions.
The potential risks are much higher with Hepatitis B than with HIV but, while the level of
occupational risk with HIV is relatively low, the consequences of infection are extreme.
In the absence of a vaccine, safe work practices provide the only protection against
workrelated HIV infection.
53.9.6.2 Precautions for Laboratory Workers
1. Hand Hygiene
Any abrasion, wound or sore must be covered with a waterproof dressing.
Wash your hands immediately after any contamination and after work is completed using
soap and water or a chlorhexidine skin disinfectant.
If gloves are worn, wash your hands after removing the gloves.
2. Laboratory Gowns
Wraparound laboratory gowns must be worn at all times and must be removed.
3. Personal Hygiene
a) Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics or store food or personal items in the
laboratory.
b) Do not lick labels, stamps or envelopes or place pens in the mouth and avoid touching
the face.
4. Gloves
143
a) Gloves can be expected to reduce the bioburden on the hands, but they cannot prevent
penetrating injuries from needles or other sharp instruments.
b) Wear gloves when handling human materials or when there is a possibility of exposure
to blood, body fluids or tissues.
c) Gloves must be worn especially if there is any open skin lesion or dermatitis as these
conditions increase risk of infection.
d) Discard gloves whenever they are thought to have become contaminated, wash hands
and put on new gloves.
e) Do not leave your laboratory wearing gloves.
f) Replace damaged gloves immediately.
5. Removal of Gloves
A. Grasp the back of the glove and pull it forward, thus turning it inside out. Dispose of
glove into the appropriate receptacle.
B. Carefully insert the thumb of the ungloved hand under, the cuff of the remaining glove
ensuring that the clean hand does not come into contact with the contaminated glove.
C. Pull the glove forwards until partly removed, grasp the clean interior of the glove,
complete removal and dispose of glove into the appropriate receptacle.
Then: WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER OR PREFERABLY A
CHLORHEXIDINE BASED SKIN CLEANSER.
53.9.6.3 First Aid
In case of injury to skin:

1. Encourage bleeding with outwards squeezing at the site of injury.
2. Wash the affected area with soap and water or copious amounts of water.
3. Apply Betadine alcoholic skin preparation (which contains 1% available iodine).
In case of splashes with blood:
1. If blood gets on the skin, but there is no cut or puncture, wash with soap and water.
2. If the eyes are contaminated rinse gently (while open) with tap water (or sterile saline)
repeatedly over a period of 20 minutes.
3. If blood gets in the mouth, spit it out and then rinse mouth with water repeatedly for 10
minutes.
In all cases Without delay, contact Student Health Services for consultation with the
Occupational Health Nurse or a Doctor (03) 9344 7492 / 9344 6904.
NB: Urgent immunisation and/or medication may be indicated. Treatments with Hepatitis
B Immune Globulin and Triple drug therapy for HIV are most effective if given soon after
exposure.
53.9.6.4 Reporting Incidents
Needle stick/sharps injuries with contaminated instruments, and incidents involving splashes
of blood/tissue fluids, must always be considered as potentially infectious. All Staff and
Students are required to report to their supervisors all accidents of exposure to blood, body
fluids or tissues, including parenteral (needle stick or cut), mucous membrane (splash to the
eye, nose or mouth) or cutaneous exposures involving large amounts of blood or prolonged
contact with blood.
144
Complete an Incident Report Form (S3) as soon as possible and forward it to RMO.
Undergraduate students should not be exposed to human blood or tissues unless it is
considered an essential part of the course work by the Chairman of the Department and
agreed to by the Departmental Safety Committee. If needle stick injuries occur to students
they must attend the Student Health Service or the Royal Melbourne Hospital Accident
and Emergency immediately. The Director of Student Health should be notified on 03 9344
6904 to ensure appropriate follow up occurs.
54 NonIonising Electromagnetic Radiation, Including Sound

DRAFT
54.1 Protection for NonIonising Radiation
54.1.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with its legal obligations by informing Departments
and users of requirements when using equipment, that produces Non Ionising radiation.
54.1.2 Application
The procedure applies to any member of the University using or associated with equipment
that produces Non Ionising radiation.
54.1.3 Legislation
Health Act 1958
54.1.4 References
NH&MRC Codes of practice relating to the use of Non Ionizing Radiation
Standards Australia AS 2243 Part 5 Non Ionizing Radiation
Standards Australia AS AS2772 EMF
Standards Australia AS AS2211 Lasers
The World Health Organization deep body temperature
54.1.5 Definitions
NonIonizing Electromagnetic Radiation is radiation where the energy does not exceed 1
electron volt (1 eV).
Electromagnetic Radiation of a wavelength greater than 100 nanometres.
54.1.6.1 Managers and Department Radiation Safety Officers (D.R.S.Os)
The users of nonionizing radiation sources should be aware of:

The nature of any associated hazard and methods to assess and minimise that
hazard
the level of risk posed to staff / students, Property and the Environment by the
equipment prior to use
145
Requirements to reduce risks to acceptable levels using the hierarchy of control

Emergency Procedures for dealing with any health or environmental effects
Incident Reporting Procedures
54.1.6.2 Departments in Control of Equipment that emits NonIonizing Electromagnetic Radiation
The regulatory requirements for Departments that uses equipment that emits NonIonising
ElectroMagnetic Radiation are:
Required to adopt safe work practices.
To comply with all responsibilities entrusted to it by the University.
Obtain plant hazard assessment where necessary.
To provide adequate training (and licensing if applicable) of all staff who may use the
equipment or source of nonionising radiation and/or be exposed to the hazards associated
with it in their duties. The training should include:
The safe storage and handling of equipment;
Emergency procedures;
Personal Protective Equipment to be used;
First aid; and
Ensure that training records are kept.
Follow all safe working procedures when using equipment that emits nonionizing radiation.
Ultrasonic Radiation
54.1.7.1 Safe Guarding Requirements
General safeguards to consider are:

shielding the sources thus protecting individuals from direct or indirect exposure to
radiation;
maximizing the distance between the source and the operator;
minimizing the exposure time;
PPE (proper eye shields. Etc.)
54.1.7.2 Extremely Low Frequency Electric Fields (ELFEF)
Low frequency radiation is the portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with frequencies
between 0 300 Hertz.
The Unit for electric field strength are Volts Per Metre (Kv/m).
The unit for Magnetic Flux Density is the Tesla (T) or the Gauss (G).
HAZARDS:
ELFEFs act directly on the surface of the body as well as internally. At a cellular level
some frequencies can cause direct stimulation of excitable cells and accounts for persons
being able to perceive an external electric field, and experience electric shock. An external
146
field strength of 10 000 volts per metre can induce a current density (< 1 Ampere per
metre2) high enough to stimulate excitable cells.
ELf Magnetic fields induce electric fields in the body which result in current flow through
biological tissue. Normal biological processes produce current densities of 1 milliAmpere per
metre2. To induce a current flow, an external flux density of 65 uT or 650 mG would be
required.
PROTECTION:
ELFEFs are easily shielded by any properly earthed conducting enclosures. In addition, the
earthing of any metallic object in any electric field will reduce the possibility of induced
charges.
ELF magnetic fields are not as easy to shield, so exposure levels should be considered at
the design stage where equipment is likely to emit these fields. Alternatively, distance from
the source will greatly reduce exposure.
EXPOSURE LIMITS
The National Health and Medical Research Council guidelines on limits of exposure to
50/60 electric and magnetic fields are:
Table 53: Exposure Limits to Electromagnetic Fields

EXPOSURE TYPE
TESLA (mT)
GAUSS (G)
Occupational 24 hours
0.5
5.0
Occupational Short Term
5.0
50
NonOccupational 24 hours
0.1
NonOccupational Short Term
1.0
10
54.1.7.3 Types of Radiation
ULTRA VIOLET RADIATION

Most dominant form of radiation is sunlight. Exposure range from 290 nm to 4 um. About
10% of all light reaching the earth from the sun is in the ultraviolet range. The most
hazardous is the range below 325 nm which is responsible for sunburn and the formation
of skin cancers.
Energy concentrations found in artificial sources of radiation may be substantially more
than what is emitted from the sun.
Sources of UV Radiation
Sunlight
High pressure discharge lamps
Low pressure gas discharge lamps
Germicidal lamps
Xenon or mercury arcs
Carbon arcs
Plasma torches
Electric welding arcs.
UV Range
147
Table 54:
TYPE
WAVELENGTH
LOCATION ON SCALE
UVC* (Sometimes included in

UVC)
100 nm 180 nm
Vacuum Ultraviolet
UVC
180 nm 280 nm
Short Wavelength
UVB
280 nm 315 nm
Middle UV or Erythemal UV
UVA
315 nm 400 nm
Long UV or Near UV
Hazards
Maximum sensitivity to acute response in skin occurs between wavelength 290nm
to 300nm.
At a wavelength of 310nm, twentyfive times as much energy is needed for the
same effect.
The eye, the cornea and conjunctiva show maximum sensitivity at a wavelength
of about 270nm.
Recommended Exposure Limits
The maximum permissible exposure limits recommended by the International Radiation
Protection Association are:
UVA < 10Wm2(1mWcm2) for periods greater than 15 minutes.
UVB & UVC Exposure duration determined using Table 2.2 in AS 2243.5
INFRA RED RADIATION, RADIANT HEAT
Infra Red Radiation is electromagnetic nonionizing radidation transmitted to the body in
the form of radiant heat. Infra red Radiation (IR) occurs in wavelengths from 700 nm to 1
mm.
Sources of Infra Red Radiation
Sources of IR radiation include:
IR lamps
Furnaces
Heated objects.
Range
Table 55:
TYPE
NAME
WAVELENGTH
Near IR
700 nm to 1400 nm
Far IR
1400 nm to 1 mm
Hazards
May cause damage to tissues in the eye, or contribute to heat stress. Absorption of
IR in the tissues of the eye is wavelength dependent.
Near IR will be absorbed in the lens of the eye and may contribute to the
development of cataracts.
Far IR is absorbed at the surface of the eye and does not cause deep tissue
damage, however superficial burns may occur.
148
Heat stress (from radiant heat) can cause adverse health effects. The total heat
load to a worker consists of environmental heat, plux body heat. The World Health
Organisation suggests that a deep body temperature of 38C should not be
exceeded. (WHO bTRS 412)
Recommended Exposure Limits
To avoid possible delayed efects upon the lens of the eye, the irradiance of IR should be
limited to 100 W/m2.
Care should be taken when using an IR heat lamp or any near IR source where a strong
visual stimulus is absent.
RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION (INCLUDING MICROWAVE RADIATION)
Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation is considered to be that portion of the electromagnetic
spectrum with frequencies between 100 kHz and 300 GHz. The frequencies in the GHz
range are also commonly referred to as microwave radiation.
Sources of Exposure
Sources of exposure include:
AM/FM broadcast transmitters
VHF/UFH TV transmitters
Portable communication transceivers
Military and civilian radar
Communication equipment (mobile phones)
RF welders
Medical diathermy units
Microwave ovens
Range
100 kHZ to 300 GHz
Hazards
RF radiation can interact with human tissue in a number of ways:
thermal absorption of RF energy resulting in an increase of temperature in
bological tissue
Non thermal or athermal interaction at lower frequencies resulting in excitation of
nerve or muscle cells
Electric shock and burns, at low frequencies electrical charges can result in electric
shock or burns
Exposure Limits
Protection from RF Radiation by:
Restriction of access to areas where the permissible levels are exceeded by barriers and
warning signs
Microwave equipment such as ovens and generators shall be adequately shielded at any
accessible point around the unit.
Exposure Levels for RF Radiation are as summarised in Tables 5.1 & 5.2 in AS 2772.1
149
VISIBLE LIGHT
The visible light spectrum extends in colour from violet, at a wavelength of 380 nm to red
at a wavelength of 760 nm. The maximum sensitivity of the human eye occurs in the
green region around 555 nm.
Sources
The Sun
Electric arcs
Welding arcs
Incandescent lamps
High Intensity discharge lamps
Tungsten Halogen (quartz halogen / quartz iodine) lamps
High Intensity pulsed light sources (flashtubes)
Range
380 nm to 760 nm
Hazards
The eye has the ability to focus concentrated light onto very fine points on the retina,
cataracts can result from photochemical damage, particularly in the blue and ultraviolet
region of the spectrum.
Exposure Limits
No single safe exposure limit can be given for the amount of light reaching the eye, as the
hazard depends on the physical size and intensity of the source, and the duration of
exposure.
Where possible intense light should be completely enclosed from the observer.
Viewing windows should be fitted with darkened glass to attenuate prominent
wavelengths, both visible and invisible.
LASERS
Lasers differ from other sources of light due to differences in the mechanism of operation,
and the quality of light produced. Lasers emit light either as a continuous wave (CW) or
pulsed wave (PW). Laser light can be of high optical power, and range from the infra red
to the ultraviolet section of the EMS. Generally the beam is monochromatic with low
divergence.
Sources
Class 1: Considered safe under all conditions of exposure
Class 2: Low power, emit visible light. Use of eye protection recommended, not capable of
causing injury to the skin.
Class 3A: emission of higher levels of radiation than class 2 and require more stringent
precautions
Class 3B Restricted: Increased power density from class 3A, Refer to AS 2397 for
specificiations for use.
Class 4: High power, capable of causing injury to eyes and skin, diffuse reflections may
also be hazardous
150
Range
NA
Hazards
Lasers are capable of inflicting biological damage to the eye and skin, Lasers are
particularly hazardous to sight. The power density of the laser beam image on the retina is
in the order of 100 000 times the power density at the front surface of the cornea.
Exposure Limits
Refer to AS 2211 for information on classification of laswers and for additional
information for the use of high powered lasers.
Ensure the following:
Training for all operators of Class 3 and 4 lasers is undertaken
The power density oft he beam is kept as low as practicable
Shields are used to prevent reflections, and to stop the direct beam from going
beyond the area
Reflected beams from shiny objects are avoided
Baffles are placed near lenses or other shiny objects
Warning signage is posted
The laser beam is terminated in a shutter when not in use
SOUND
The human hearing range is from 20 to 20 000 Hertz. Non auditory effects of noise at
lower frequencies can often be felt. The ear responds to sounds of differing frequencies,
and sound levels in a complex manner. Measurement is undertaken using an A weighted
range (dBA).
Sources
Plant, equipment, or other machinery or other operable devices which emit sound
Environmental pollution from traffic in the working area
Portable equipment such as saws, drills, sanders etc
Exposure to loud noises such as music
Range
20 Hertz to 20 000 Hertz audible range
2000 6000 Hertz for normal conversation
Hazards
Temporary or permanent loss of hearing capacity
Interference with speech communication
Disturbance of concentration on tasks
Non auditory effects such as motion sickness from low frequency vibrations
Exposure Limits
Legal requirements for workplace exposure are governed by the Occupational Health and
Safety (Noise) Regulations 1992. These limits are set:
151
maximum exposure level 85 dB(A) measured over an 8 hour day

maximum upper exposure limit of 140 dB lin (instantaneous)
Methods of Protection from noise exposure:
Ensure sound level measurements are taken from all equipment which generates noise
Ensure staff using such equipment undertake audionometric testing on a regular basis
ULTRASONIC RADIATION
Ultrasonic Radiation, or ultrasound refers to the electro/mechanical vibrations at
frequencies above 16kHz.
Sources
Sources of exposure include:
Medical diagnosis and therapy
Nondestructive testing
ultrasonic cleaning.
Range
16 KHZ to 50 KHZ for the purposes of AS 2243.4
Hazards
Ultrasonic Radiation hazards can arise from both airborne and liquid coupled sources.
Interactions in tissue can cause local generation of heat
Cellular destruction associated with cavitation in tissue causing alterations in
membrane function
Ultrasonic vibrations may affect the diffusion of chemicals through cell walls
Exposure Limits
Table 56:
KHz
10
12.5
16
20
25
31.5
40
50
dB(A)
75
75
75
75
110
110
110
110
General safeguards to consider are:

shielding the sources thus protecting individuals from direct or indirect exposure to
radiation;
maximising the distance between the source and the operator;
minimising the exposure time.
55 Ionising Radiation (DRAFT)

55.1 Radiation Management Plan
55.1.1 Purpose
This Radiation Management Plan documents the Universitys Radiation practices, and
gives effect to the legislatively mandated requirements for safe use.
152
55.1.2 Application
This Policy and Procedure is designed to ensure that:
* Appropriate personnel within the University are made responsible for the management
of Radioactive substances and equipment
* Ensure staff and students (under the control of the University) associated with ionizing
radiation are compliant with dose limits set by health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994.
* Environmental impacts are examined and minimized by ensuring compliance with
disposal requirements of the Universitys Environmental Management System
55.1.3 Legislation
Health Act 1958
55.1.4 References
NH&MRC Codes of practice for the use of Ionizing Radiation
Australian Standards dealing with the use, storage and disposal of ionizing radiation
Radiation Safety Unit, Guidelines for the Development of a Radiation Management Plan
55.1.5.1 University Radiation Adviser
Responsible for the development and implementation of the Radiation Management Plan
for the University. By ensuring that all DRSO (Departmental Radiation Safety Officers)
are provided with adequate information and resources for the licensing, purchase, use and
disposal of radioactive substances within the Radiation Management Plan
1. Advise registered persons, or the licensees who own, posess or control ionizing radiation
sources/equipment, on matters relating to radiation safety including:
Radiation Monitoring Programs
Condition of and need for radiation monitoring and protective equipment
Action to be taken to reduce the radiation exposure of all staff and students to a level
that is both below the radiation protection limits prescribed in Schedule 1 of the Health
(Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 and ALARA (as low as reasonably achievable),
based on social and economic factors
Action to be taken in the event of an emergency or accidental exposure.
2. Oversee departmental safe work procedures with respect to radiation protection for use
in routine operation, or in an emergency or accidental exposure.
3. Be responsible for overseeing initial and continued instruction for staff / students in:
Radiation hazard reduction
Safe Work Procedures to ensure radiation protection
Proper use of radiation monitoring and protective equipment
Measures to limit radiation exposure
153
4. Monitor the implemented personal monitoring systems for the determination of effective
doses for any staff / student where required and ensure that radiation surveys are carried
out as required.
5. Assess the accumulated effective dose and committed effective dose of any staff /
student. Following an exposure to the body of a radioactive material.
6. Oversee the effective maintenance of sufficient radiation monitoring and radiation
protection equipment and ensure that equipment is calibrated, and in appropriate working
condition.
7. Investigate and make recommendations for controls for defects that may adversely
impact on:
Staff / students
Property
The Environment
8. Oversee that prescribed radiation signage is maintained in good condition and is located
in appropriate sites.
9. Monitor transport containers and ensure that they comply with Part 11 of the Health
(Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994.
10. Oversee and maintain records on all of the above matters.
55.1.5.2 Radiation Safety Committee
The Committee is required to formulate and review safe work procedures for areas
handling and storing radiation.
The Head of the Department who is to undertake radiation activities must appoint in
writing a responsible person to be the Departmental Radiation Safety Officer. This person
must be appointed in writing, and the appointment copied to the Radiation Safety Adviser
(Steve Guggenheimer) at the Risk Management Office.
Responsible for developing the Radiation Safety Plan for the Department to ensure that all
guidelines are being met.
1. Ensure that appropriate training is completed for the safe use of radioactive substances.
2. Administer the Radiation Policies of the University and the Department.
3. Advise the Univeristys Radiation Safety Adviser when plans are being formulated for
new radiation laboratory facilities, or for planned alterations to existing laboratories.
4. Ensure that suitable personal and other monitoring devices are provided where required,
kept in good working order, properly used, and calibrated at least once each year.
5. Prepare departmental procedures for dealing with foreseeable radiobiological incidnets
6. Report to the Universitys RSA any unsafe practices or incidents
7. Ensure that Procedures for Radioactive waste Disposal Section 5.8.7 are adhered to
8. Follow requirements as stated in Section 5.5.1 Radiation Management Plan
154
Ensure that all safe work procedures are followed according to University guidelines, and
those procedures formulated and implemented through the Department are abided by.
55.1.6.1 Assessment of Risk
All areas within the University using or holding radioactive substances or operating
machinery that produces ionizing radiation (as defined) must assess the specific radiation
risk to:
Persons associated with the substance/equipment
Property associated with the substance/equipment
To the Environment
55.1.6.2 Control Measures
Where risks have been identified within the University, appropriate risk controls must be
implemented. These measures should be documented within the Safe Work Procedures
Further Information is available in Section 3.3
All control measures should be reviewed on a regular basis through Committee Meetings,
Audits and Inspections.
55.1.6.3 Justification
It is a requirement that all activities involving the use of radiation be justified to ensure that
the benefits outweigh the risks. The justification is based on the following:
Victorian Legislation
Codes of Practice
Australian and International Standards
55.1.6.4 Training
Radiation Safety Training is provided to staff and students through the Staff Development
and Training Program, and the Risk Management Office. Contact the Radiation Safety
Adviser on 47010.
Training is mandatory for all staff and students that purchase, handle and dispose of
radiatioactive isotopes, substances or equipment.
55.1.6.5 Plan Requirements
Departmental Radiation Management Plans must be signed by the DRSO and the Head
of Department prior to approval by the Risk Management Office
The Plan should be reviewed on a regular basis to reflect the changing uses of radioactive
materials within the area.
55.1.6.6 Penalties
Departments and areas failing to comply with the requirements of the Radiation
Management Plan or other directives may face prosecution under the Health (Radiation
Safety) Regulations 1994.
155
55.1.6.7 Contact Details
Univeristys Radiation Safety Adviser 8344 7010

Department of Human Services 9637 4167
ARPANSA (Australian Radiaiton Protection and Nuclear Safety Agency) 9433 2211
55.2 Licencing Requirements

55.2.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with its legal obligations by; informing Departments
of licensing requirements with use of ionsing radiation.
55.2.2 Application
The procedure applies to any Department of the University using:
1. Nonsealed radioactive sources
2. Sealed radioactive sources
3. Equipment that produce ionising radiation.
55.2.3 Legislation
Radiation Safety Regulations 1994
55.2.4 References
Not Applicable
55.2.5.1 Radiation Adviser, Risk Management Office
Oversee compliance of the University Licensing requirements with respect to legislative and
other regulatory requirements.
55.2.5.2 Heads of Department / Departmental Radiation Safety Officers
Ensure that a comprehensive list of radionucleides and the approximate activity is sent to
the Risk Management Office.
This list will be sent to the Department of Human Services (Radiation Section) to be
placed on a central registry.
Comply with legal obligations under the applicable acts of legislation or other directives.
156
55.2.6.1 Management License
The Victorian Department of Human Services (Radiation Section) controls the use of
ionising radiation.
The procedure applies to any member of the University using radioactive materials and/or
equipment, which produce ionising radiation
The University holds a Management License (333500486) that covers the Schools and
Departments within the main campus (Parkville).
Departments outside the main campus are expected to apply through the Universitys
Radiation Protection Officer at the Risk Management Office 8344 7010 for a
Management License.
Any unsealed radionuclide that a School or Department may wish to use must be added to
the list of all the radionuclides covered by the Management License.
To modify license conditions the School or Departmental Radiation Safety Officer
(DRSOs) must fill out the appropriate form and submit it to the Universitys Radiation
Protection Officer at the Risk Management Office.
55.2.6.2 Operator Licenses
Operator licenses are required for equipment that emits ionising radiation.
If staff have medical, dental or veterinary qualifications they need obtain their own
licenses.
All other users at the University are covered by the Universitys Management License. This
includes the supervision of students who may be using ionising radiation in their studies.
55.2.6.3 Unit and Sealed Source Licenses
All equipment or sealed sources that emit ionising radiation must obtain annual registration:
Sealed sources Cs137, Co57 AmBr etc.
Irradiating equipment such as Xray machines, accelerators equipment etc,
55.3 Purchasing Procedures

55.3.1 Purpose
of purchasing requirements with use of ionising radiation.
55.3.2 Application
157
55.3.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Plant) Regulations 1995
55.3.4 References
Australian Standards relating to the purchase of Ionizing Radiation
55.3.5.1 Departmental managers, supervisors and DRSOs
Comply with all responsibilities entrusted to it by the University.

Ensure that all radioactive material/ionizing equipment has been assessed for EHS
requirements prior to purchase.
Ensure all equipment purchased is labelled in accordance with the appropriate legislative
requirements.
When purchasing radioactive material / ionizing equipment ensure that containers or
packages are inspected for damage, and appropriate action taken
When purchasing sources / equipment ensure that any damaged containers or packages
are returned to the supplier or otherwise disposed of safely.
Obtained Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) where necessary.
Obtained Plant hazard assessment where necessary.
Departments must comply with legal obligations. Further it must take into account The
Universitys OH&S, SafetyMAP and Environmental statements on the purchase of ionising
materials and equipment.
The regulatory requirements for schools / departments that use radioactive materials /
ionizing equipment are:
1. Where required register the equipment with the Department of Human Services
Radiation Section.
2. Obtain from the DHSRS a license for the use of the equipment
3. Make the payment of the appropriate license fee.
4. Conduct a hazard identification and risk assessment. When introducing new equipment
or a new source of radiation this will include:
Nature and severity of the hazard
Degree of exposure of staff, students, property and the environment
158
Control measures required to minimise the potential hazards to the above

5. Ensure a path of disposal for all radioactive material
6. Where required provide licensing to individual staff.
Advice if needed should be obtained from the Universitys Radiation Protection Officer at
the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010
55.4 Storage and Handling of Radionuclides

55.4.1 Purpose
of requirements with the storage and handling of ionising radiation including equipment.
55.4.2 Application
55.4.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Plant) Regulations
55.4.4 References
Code of Practice for the transport of Radioactive Substances 2000
Relevant Australian Standards for Storage and Handling of Radionucleides
Australian Standard 2243.5 Ionizing Radiation
55.4.5.1 Department Managers, Supervisors and DRSOs
Departments must comply with legal obligations and take into account the Universitys
OH&S, Safety MAP and Environmental Statements when working with ionizing radiation
sources.
Ensure that appropriate risk assessments have been documented and included in the safe
work procedures
Ensure that Safe Work Procedures have been written and understood by relevant staff
and students working with the radioactive sources.
Required to adopt safe work practices, which are covered in AS 2344.4 and set out in by
the Department of Human Services Radiation Section.
159

55.4.6.1 Training
It is a University requirement that adequate training be provided to all staff and students
who may use equipment or sources of radioactivity associated with their duties.
The training should include:
Description of the radiation hazards in the workplace
The working with and storage of equipment or sources;
Safe Work Procedures to avoid hazards when working with radiation
Minimization of radiation dose
Emergency Procedures such as First aid and Spill Response
Personal Protective Equipment to be used;
Procedures for disposal of radioactive sources
The Departmental Radiation Management Plan
55.4.6.2 Monitoring
Prior to commencement of work with any form of ionizing radiation, the DRSO should
ascertain the risks associated with the duties being carried out for the levels of exposure to
staff and students working in the area. The exposure should be as low as reasonably
achievable (ALARA).
A personal dosimeter may be appropriate to measure exposure where any person who is
likely to be exposed to a radiation dose in excess of 1mSv in any one year.
The occupational Exposure Limits are:
Whole body: 50 mSV in any one year or 20 mSV per year averaged over 5 years
Lens of the eye: 150 mSV per year
Skin: 500 mSV per year (averaged over 1 cm2)
University staff and students should ensure that their work practices limit exposure to
less than 1.0 mSv / year.
The University Radiation Adviser conducts regular checks on the badge monitoring results.
All TLD monitors (badges) are tested on a regular basis by ARPANSA.
55.4.6.3 Monitoring Equipment
Equipment designed to monitor either the source or the operator should be regularly tested
and calibrated through an approved repairer, or returned to the Manufacturer for service.
Records of these activities should be maintained by the Department.
55.4.6.4 Reduction of Hazards
When a risk assessment has been conducted for the control of radioactive sources, the
following should be taken into account when determining control mechanisms, using the
hierarchy of control Refer to Section 3 for further information.
Using nonradioactive sources for experimental and teaching activities
Using lesser strength radioactive sources for activities
Engineering shielding at the source
160
Ensuring staff have limited exposure times by instigating staff rotation

Personal protection by shielding of the operator
55.4.6.5 Transport and Storage
All radioactive materials must be transported incompliance with the Code of Practice for
the Transport of Radioactive Substances 2000 by a licensed carrier.
Radioactive sources, both sealed and unsealed must be stored and transported in an
appropriate manner ensuring:
Adequate signage with radiation stickers
Provision of Spill Kits
Availability of Material Safety Data Sheets
Emergency Contacts and instructions
55.4.6.6 Shielding
Where radioactive sources are shielded using either perspex or lead, the shielding must be
tested to ensure that it is working effectively. Testing records should be retained by the
Department.
Other mechanisms used to control exposure such as fume hoods, collimators, aprons etc
should be tested regularly. Operators should be trained in the use of this equipment.
55.4.6.7 Decontamination and Wipe Tests
Benches, counters, materials and other equipment should be regularly wipe tested as per
the code of practice. Records of the tests should be maintained by the Department.
Where areas are found to be contaminated, appropriate decontamination techniques must
be used to disinfect the surfaces and equipment, further wipe tests should be conducted to
ensure that the area has been effectively decontaminated.
55.4.6.8 Disposal
Please refer to Section 5.8 for appropriate disposal methods for radioactive sources.
Advice and information can be obtained from the Radiation Safety Adviser at the RMO
on 8344 7010.
55.5 Emergency Procedures

55.5.1 Purpose
of their requirements to implement sound emergency procedures for areas using ionising
radiation.
55.5.2 Application
3. Equipment that produce ionising radiation
161
55.5.3 Legislation
55.5.4 References
NH&MRC Codes of practice relating to the use and disposal of Ionising Radiation
Standards Australia AS 2344.4 8
The regulatory requirements for Departments that use radioactive materials are to adopt
emergency procedures which cover all eventualities with the use, storage and disposal of
ionising material in the Departments control.
Be aware of the emergency procedures associated with hazardous activities, and

participate in emergency training and drills.
the Risk Management Office 8344 7010.
55.5.6.1 Emergency Requirements
1. Formulate a list of contacts, including the Departmental Radiation Safety Officer

(DRSO), the Universitys Radiation Protection Officer (RPO).
2. Include contacts for any other emergency response that is required, such as MFESB,
EPA, ARPANSA etc.
3. List precautions that are required in the aftermath of a spill such as containment,
disposal of waste etc.
4. Complete an Incident (S3) form as soon as possible after any emergency and forward
to the Risk Management Office.
5. The Universitys Radiation Safety Adviser will notify the Department of Human
Services Radiation Section within 5 working days of the incident.
Conduct a hazard identification and risk assessment on the emergency procedure.

This will include:
nature and severity of the hazard;
degree of exposure to people in the workplace; and
control measures to minimise the potential hazards.
162
55.5.6.3 Possible Emergency Scenarios
There are several likely ways that radioactive sources may produce a hazard in an
emergency situation:
Loss of Shielding
Spilage of an unsealed radioactive source
Release of a sealed radioactive source
Fire, Flood etc
It is important to ensure that exposures are measured for all personnel involved in any
emergency scenario to ensure that occupational exposure limits are not exceeded.
55.5.6.4 Medical Care for Radiation Exposure Victims
Staff or students exposed to radiation during an emergnecy situation should be

immediately transported to an adequate hospital facility for treatment.
56 Electrical Safety
56.1 Electrical Safety and Withdrawing Unsafe Electrical Equipment from
Use
56.1.1 Purpose
To ensure a system is in place which will avoid the risk of injury to employees who
maintain, use or work on any form of equipment, tools or furniture which may expose them
to potential hazards.
56.1.2 Application
To ensure that all electrical installations and equipment are maintained and operated
safely, and to ensure that faulty equipment is isolated from use before repair or
maintenance is undertaken by using Danger Tags to decommission a piece of equipment
for safety or maintenance reasons.
56.1.3 Legislation
Electrical Safety Act 1998
Electrical Safety Regulations 1998
56.1.4 References
Australian Standard AS 2243.7 electrical safety in laboratories
163
Ensure that all equipment which is to be repaired or is to undergo maintenance is tagged

prior to the commencement of work, and that only trained or licenced personnel undertake
this work.
Inform staff and students of the procedure for reporting unsafe / broken equipment to the
appropriate person, and ensure Danger/Out of Service Tags are to be made available to
all staff, to ensure the removal of equipment, tools, furniture etc. for repairs.
Maintain records of all equipment tagged out, locked out or isolated.
Ensure that only trained, competent or licensed personnel undertake the maintenance or
repair of equipment.
Maintain records of all equipment that is serviced or repaired with details of the service or
alteration.
Ensure that the work area is kept tidy and clear.

Know the location of Danger/Out of Service tags, and be aware of the reporting
procedure for faulty / broken equipment
56.1.6.1 Danger/Out of Service Tags
Each Danger/Out of Service Tag must be complete and all information written clearly in
the spaces provided.
Ensure that the item is immediately removed from service.
Equipment shall NOT be used or operated if a Danger/Out of Service Tag is attached.
Ensure that the appropriate department supervisors are notified when equipment is out of
service for maintenance or repairs.
The placing of a Danger Out of Service Tag would normally be the responsibility of the
equipment operator; however, any person may place an Out of Service Tag to indicate a
piece of equipment should not be used.
Isolate faulty or hazardous equipment where possible, i.e. remove power source.
Where a near miss or an incident that causes injury occurrs an incident report ( S3 form)
should be completed and forwarded to the Safety Officer or appropriate person.
56.1.6.2 Electrical Safety Guidelines
* Do not locate equipment next to water taps or sinks unless it is designed to do so

* Ensure that powerboards and NOT double adaptors are used for extra power
requirements
* Regularly inspect equipment leads, casings and plugs for damage and wear and tear
* Do not locate equipment in potentially explosive atmospheres
* Do not locate flammable liquids or solids near equipment where a spark may occur
164
56.2 Inspection and Testing of Electrical Equipment

56.2.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with legal obligations associated with the
installation, use and maintenance of plant and electrical equipment, including portable
electrical equipment within the University.
56.2.2 Application
To impose requirements on University of Melbourne staff and contractors to undertake
regular inspections and maintenance of electrical equipment to detect any deficiencies
that may exist. This procedure is to be used as a guide only. If heavy plant is used please
consult the standard.
56.2.3 Legislation
56.2.4 References
AS/NZS 3760 2001 Inservice Safety Inspection and Testing of Electrical Equipment
AS/NZS 2243.7 1991 Safety in Laboratories. Electrical Aspects
AS/NZS 3820 1998 Essential Safety Requirements for Low Voltage Electrical Equipment
AS/NZS 4417 1996 Parts 1 & 2 Marking of Electrical Products to Indicate Compliance
with Regulations
56.2.5 Definitions
Plant and Non Portable Equipment:
Plant:
Stand alone equipment such as Centrifuges, Autoclaves, Fixed Workshop Equipment etc
are classified as Plant and as such have requirements for testing and Maintenance under
the OH&S (Plant) Regulations 1995. Portable Electrical testing and tagging is not required
for plant. Plant must be addressed using the Environment Health and Safety Manual
Section 5.7.2 Plant Regulations.
Non Portable Equipment:
Non portable equipment such as freezers, refrigerators, large photocopiers, fixed air
conditioning units, laboratory equipment that has been wired in, etc. If the equipment
cannot be carried or moved easily by hand, then periodic testing is not required, unless
significant flexing of the cord or other wear and tear is anticipated.
Portable Equipment:
Portable Equipment is equipment that is either designed to be portable, such as a laptop
computers, or can be made portable in the case of overhead projectors, urns, heaters,
balances etc.
165
Table 57: Portable Equipment

ITEM
RISK
TESTING
Practical Class Equipment for

student use
High
Yearly
Laboratory Equipment Exposed to

Water
High
Yearly
Extension Leads and Power

Boards
High
Yearly
*Workshop portable hand tools
Moderate
Yearly
Shared/Multiuse Laboratory
Equipment
Moderate
Yearly
Shared/Multiuse Kitchen Office

Appliances
Moderate
Yearly
Kitchen & Personal Appliances
Low
5 Yearly
Office Equipment
Low
5 Yearly
Large Portable Equipment
Low
5 Yearly
* Note: The standard states that in a workshop environment equipment should be tested
and tagged every 6 months, this is based on a manufacturing type environment. Taking
into consideration the nature of work conducted at the University yearly testing and
tagging for workshop portable hand tools is acceptable.
New electrical equipment purchased from reputable suppliers is not required to be initially
tested and tagged. The manufacturer or importer has the responsibility to ensure that it is
designed, built and shipped complying to current Australian design and safety Standards.
The Standard states that, Where the equipment is new the supplier shall be deemed
responsible for the initial electrical safety of the new equipment. Therefore testing and
tagging is not required upon purchase of new equipment.
Any equipment that has been repaired or modified must be tested before being returned to
service or used.
Ensure that contractors are inducted and are informed of the requirements to ensure that
all electrical equipment has been tested according to the regulations.
Ensure that restricted areas under Property & Buildings control such as electrical
switchboards and plant rooms have authorised access only.
56.2.6.2 Maintenance Manager
Allocate tasks to competent personnel with adequate experience, education and training.
Ensure that where qualified staff are required for tasks, that the qualifications are current.
Ensure maintenance staff and contractors under their control contact the appropriate
supervisor, Head of Department or Department Manager prior to commencement of any
work in an area.
Ensure notification is made to the Department concerned where work has been completed.
Issue permits to work where required by legislation to trained and qualified personnel.
166
56.2.6.3 Maintenance Personnel / Contractors
Ensure appropriate Safe Work Procedures are followed where required.

Ensure that all electrical equipment used has been tested in accordance with the
requirements.
Perform a site evaluation before work is to commence, including a documented risk
assessment.
Establish an induction program for visitors, maintenance staff and contractors performing
maintenance on electrical equipment within the area.
Establish the requirement for emergency shutdown procedures for all equipment that is left
running out of normal working hours.
Provide lockout/tagout cards for equipment not in service, and provide appropriate portable
test tags for equipment that has been tested in the area.
Ensure that specific items of equipment and plant that require authorised use are clearly
signed as such.
Ensure all staff owned equipment brought to the workplace is tested prior to use.
Ensure that all electrical equipment within their control is inspected and tested according to
the requirements.
Ensure all testing is undertaken by a competently trained member of staff.
Ensure any work to be conducted on electrical equipment is performed by a suitably
qualified, trained and competent person.
Provide local induction on particular laboratory procedures, and ensure that visitors,
maintenance staff and contractors are aware of specific hazards.
Make safe any equipment prior to commencement of maintenance, including isolation of
the power source, guards, etc. Use lockout / tagout procedures where required. Where
particular contamination risks for laboratories or equipment are present, undertake
decontamination procedures.
All hired equipment must be tested and tagged prior to each hire.
Maintain a list of trained, competent or licensed persons.
56.2.6.6 Audio Visual Unit
All audio visual equipment hired to internal/external users must be tested and tagged prior
to each hire.
Present all personally owned electrical equipment for testing and tagging prior to use in
consultation with head of department.
Follow safety procedures, and report any faults to their supervisor.
167
56.2.6.8 Trained Electrical Testing Staff
Where staff have completed the appropriate electrical inspection and testing course, and
have received a certificate of competency, they are able to undertake the task of
inspecting and testing portable electrical equipment in the department / area.
The staff member who has been allocated by the Head of Department to undertake
regular testing and tagging duties shall:
Inspect and tag any second hand or used equipment upon receipt where there is no
evidence that the equipment has been recently tested.
Undertake testing and tagging on all University owned portable equipment in the area
Undertake testing on all personally owned equipment that is authorised by the head of
department to be used in the department.
Maintain records of inspection and testing in a log.
56.3 Electrical Licenses

56.3.1 Purpose
To prescribe the electrical work requiring a disconnect/reconnect (D) license and methods
to be followed in carrying out this work.
56.3.2 Application
This procedure applies to all university staff and students undertaking electrical work
except Maintenance electricians. No high voltage work is permitted at any time.
This procedure does NOT apply to work on appliances with plugs, very low voltage
equipment (below 32) V or the testing or tagging of electrical appliances where no license
is required; see EHS manual procedure 5.6.2.
The Office of the Chief Electrical Inspector may issue a disconnect/reconnect workers
license to a competent person if the work function relates to low voltage electrical
equipment specified in Schedule 3 of the regulations and involves electrical installation
work that is incidental to the primary work function.
56.3.3 Legislation
Electrical Safety (Installation) Regulations 1999
56.3.4 References
Australian Standard AS 3000 SAA Wiring Rules
Australian Standard AS/NZS 3760 electrical inspection and test
"The Certificate of Electrical Safety System Explained" published by the Office of the
Chief Electrical Inspector.
168
To ensure that all electrical work is performed by competent persons. As there are strict
licensing requirements which apply to equipment connected to a mains supply all this type
of work must only be performed by a licensed electrician (A, B, or D license).
56.3.5.2 Disconnect/reconnect workers license holders
Licensed persons must follow the requirements of the Electrical Safety (Installation)
Regulations.
Electrical installation work can only be carried out with the prior approval of the Head
Electrician, Maintenance. This is to ensure that agreed circuits are clearly identified and
that earth leakage is provided in the test area. License holders are not allowed to initiate
any new electrical installations, only repair or other wise maintain existing systems.
Testing of electrical installation work: Electrical installation work must be tested after it is
completed to verify that the installation resistance of the wiring and equipment and the
resistance of earth; and the conduction switching operation of switches and circuit
breakers.
Recording of electrical installation work: A certificate of compliance must be provided to
the Office of the Chief Electrical Inspector. Within 4 working days after completion of the
work in the format required by the Office (These forms are only available to licensed
persons). A copy of this certificate must also be provided to the Head Electrician,
Maintenance.
Reporting of serious incidents: If a serious electrical incident occurs the unit supervisor
report, as soon as possible, all details of the incident to the Risk Management Office which
will in turn notify the Office of the Chief Electrical Inspector. Refer to EHS Manual
procedure 4.2.
56.3.5.3 Approved work areas
As of January 2000 the only approved are is the Chemistry Workshop in buildings #153.
56.3.5.4 Head Electrician, Maintenance
Responsible for providing preapproval of all electrical installation work by discussing

isolation procedures, identifying accessible circuits, and arranging earth leakage.
Maintenance must retain copies of connect/disconnect certificates for 3 years after the
date of the certificate.
Prescribed electrical work as defined by electrical Safety (Installations) Regulation 301:
1. Electrical installation work carried out on an electrical ordinarily operated at low voltage
or a voltage exceeding low voltage;
2. Electrical installation work required to carry out a class of primary work function
relating to low voltage fixed electrical equipment specified in Schedule 3 that involves: the
disconnection of that electrical equipment or a competent of that electrical equipment; and
the reconnection of that electrical or component or the connection of other equipment or
any component of equivalent power and current in the same location and without
alteration to existing cables;
3. Electrical inspection work of a class specified in schedule 4 of the Regulations.
169
56.4 Heating and Ventilation Installations

56.4.1 Purpose
To provide guidelines for the installation of heating and ventilation equipment within the
University.
56.4.2 Application
To ensure that set guidelines are followed in any area where air conditioning and heating
installations or modifications are to be completed
56.4.3 Legislation
56.4.4 References
AS/NZS 2243 Safety in Laboratories
Legionella Policy EHSM Section 8.2.2
Heat Policy EHSM Section 8.2.4
Australian Laboratory Design and Construction Code
Property & Buildings Project Management and Design Standards Manual 1999
Property & Buildings Safe Work Procedures 2.18 Ventilation
Ensure selection of equipment takes into account availability of spare parts and servicing
contracts. Equipment must be assessed for Environment, Health and Safety aspects.
Ensure that designs comply with the requirements of the Standards, Building Code of
Australia, and any other federal, state or local Authority.
Undertake responsibility for the repair and maintenance, and the measurements and
monitoring of temperature and airflow of fixed ventilation equipment within the University.
All contractors shall be approved by the University.
Provide advice and support regarding appropriate types of air conditioning installations
within the University. Undertake appropriate environmental assessments where requested
for air temperature, air flow, and air quality.
56.4.5.3 Occupational Health and Safety Committee
The OHSC has commissioned a report on the priority listing of air conditioning and heating
requirements for buildings within the University. This listing has been forwarded to the
Capital Projects Committee for further comments to determine feasible installations.
170
Ensure that equipment being installed meets the needs of the area, and has been assessed
for Environment, Health and Safety requirements.
Ensure there is feedback for employees and Health and Safety Representatives for the
selection criteria of electrical equipment that is to be used or installed in the workplace.
Provide induction for any contractors or maintenance staff who are to perform work in the
local area.
Ensure Risk Assessments are undertaken for all new equipment to be introduced into the
workplace.
Conduct appropriate operational and safety training for employees. This should cover the
following:
Induction
Operational procedures
Maintenance training (where applicable)
Hazard awareness
Emergency procedures
Indident notification
Observe the general rules for safe conduct and be familiar with any hazards associated
with the equipment, as well as undertaking training in the appropriate procedures.
Report any malfunctions or discomfort from the ventilation equipment to the supervisor.
Do not interfere with any fixed system of air conditioning.
56.4.6.1 Air Conditioning
Air conditioning should be considered for laboratories and workshops as part of

infrastructure costs at the design stage. Air conditioning units should maintain the
temperature at between 19 23 C. The design of the ventilation equipment shall be
approved by University Guidelines. Selection criteria is available from the Property &
Buildings Project Management and Design Standards 1999 Section 4.4
56.4.6.2 Heating
Where the temperature routinely falls below 20 C during work hours, a permanent form of
heating (not portable fans or heaters) should be provided. Where flammable or combustible
vapours are present, the heating must be of an indirect form only.
56.4.6.3 Air Quality
All areas should have adequate ventilation through natural or mechanical ventilation.
Where it is shown that natural ventilation is inadequate, mechnical means should be
installed.
In laboratory or workshop areas where there may be airborne contaminants such as heat,
dust, fumes or agents of a biological or chemical nature, specific air conditioning needs
must be addressed.
171
56.4.6.4 Air Contaminants
Where areas such as laboratories routinely use toxic, harmful or infectious materials,
appropriate air extraction and filtration systems should be installed.
57 Mechanical
57.1 Safe Use of Ducted Fume Cupboards
57.1.1 Purpose
This procedure has been prepared to provide information about the safe use of fume
cupboards at the University of Melbourne.
57.1.2 Application
The information contained in this sheet concerns the use of ducted fume cupboards. While
much of it will be relevant to the use of recirculating laminar flow or Biohazard cupboards,
specialist advice should be sought for their use.
57.1.3 Legislation
57.1.4 References
Australian. Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories Part 8 Fume cupboards
Fume Cupboard Clearance for Inspection , Maintenance and Repairs Form
Fume Cupboard Clearance Contacts
57.1.5.1 Laboratory, managers, department managers and supervisors
Ensure that all staff who use ducted fume cupboards receive training and information on
safe use.
Ensure that the procedures and guidelines are followed when staff or students use ducted
fume cupboards.
Ensure that fume cupboards that do not meet the require airflow requirements are
removed from service i.e. tagged out.
A copy of the Fume Cupboard Clearance for Inspection , Maintenance and Repairs Form
is attached to this procedure. This must be filled out before any maintenance work on a
fume cupboard commences. Departments should notify the Risk Management Office of
any changes to the Departments Authorised Persons list.
Departments should control the use of fume cupboards to ensure that the exhaust fume
discharges do not contain contaminants in excess of the level specified by the appropriate
regulatory authority. It is recommended the discharge level be set below the recommended
occupational exposure standard level.
172
57.1.5.2 Property Services
Ensure that all ducted fume cupboards are tested according to AS 2243.8 twice every 12
months.
Ensure that test results are forwarded to the responsible person in each department as
soon as possible.
Ensure that the test result for each cupboard is recorded on the fume cupboard as soon as
possible after testing, where it can be read by users.
Ensure that all procedures and guidelines are followed when using ducted fume cupboards.
Before using a fume cupboard for the first time:
check that the flow reading on the test certificate meets or exceeds the flow rate
requirement.
locate where the fan failure warning alarm is and what it will sound like.
locate the fire damper or emergency stop (if fitted) for use in the event of a fire.
locate the nearest phone, fire extinguisher/blanket, shower or eyewash station and
know who and where the qualified first aid providers are.
Regularly maintain the fume cupboard by
removing the contents of the cupboard and washing the walls and work bench.
keeping sinks and drains clear of refuse and checking them regularly.
labelling all containers in the fume hood appropriately.
ensuring waste bottles in the fume hood are capped when not in use and are
disposed of regularly.
Fume Cupboard Function and Usage
A fume cupboard is essentially a ventilated box with one side being moveable to provide
an adjustable opening. It provides air extraction to remove any fumes produced within the
box. It is designed to have laminar flow through the front opening, i.e. the flow is to be
even and nonturbulent through the open face of the cupboard.
To obtain even flow through the face of the fume cupboards baffles are generally
installed at the back of the cupboard. These baffles are set to extract the air from two or
more locations across the back of the fume cupboard. If the openings provided by the
baffles are blocked by items stored in the cupboard then the air low through the face of
the cupboard can become uneven.
Whenever anything is placed within the fume cupboard it introduces turbulence into the
cupboard which may affect the containment and extraction of fumes. If a fume cupboard
is not set up and used appropriately, fumes may escape out of the sash opening of the
fume cupboard towards the user, especially with heavier vapours such as formaldehyde or
chlorinated solvents.
Fume cupboards draw air out of the rooms they are installed in. There needs to be an
adequate volume of air available or the fume cupboard will not be able to draw a
sufficient volume of air to function properly.
173
Where the room is small or there are a large number of fume cupboards an additional
supply of air, other than the normal room ventilation, may be required. This additional air is
known as the makeup air.
If the makeup air supply is not adequate or the makeup air is switched off then the fume
cupboards may not be able to achieve the required face velocity. Alternatively if there is
no makeup air and the room ventilation is switched off, there may be insufficient air
volumes for the fume cupboards to achieve the required face velocity.
The incoming air can deflected off an item placed in this zone at enough speed to escape
from the cupboard. This can cause fumes to escape in to the lab. This is of particular
concern when fumes are generated within this zone as they may be captured by the
deflected air. A person standing in front of the cupboard increases the probability of fume
entering the lab.
The base of the fume cupboard area that must be kept clear to allow effective ventilation
of the work area.
The use of the screen will result in turbulence directly behind the screen. If the area behind
the work area is not kept clear there is a high potential for a "dead spot" to be created
which will increase the potential for fume escape.
Safe Work Procedures
Do not work within ten centimetres of the leading edge. The larger the item, the
further back it needs to be within the fume cupboard to overcome the turbulence
created.
Do not place storage items behind the area you are work rig in. This is particularly
important where a perspex screen or lead bricks are used for radioisotope work.
Minimise the amount of items stored within the fume cupboard.
Do not put large equipment, such as ovens in the fume cupboard, as they block the
baffles and produce regions of zero or low flow in the work space.
Minimise traffic past the front of the fume cupboard as this can cause turbulence
which may result in fume escape.
Do not use fume cupboards with a porous bench surface (e.g. terracotta tiles) for
work with radioactive material.
Do not open windows which may create draughts in the vicinity of the fume
cupboard.
If doors are within 1 metre of fume cupboards they should be kept closed during
the use of fume cupboard.
The makeup air supply and room ventilation should be on whenever the fume
cupboard is in use.
Fume Cupboard Performance
Fume cupboards are required to be constructed and maintained in accordance with
Australian Standard AS2243.8 Safety in Laboratories Fume Cupboards. This standard
prescribes an adequate face velocity of 0.5 cubic metres per second for the containment
of fumes and a methodology for testing. There are 2 types of test to be carried out: face
velocity and smoke testing at an interval of 6 months.
Face velocity is the flow of air measure at 5 or more points at the sash opening
with the sash opened fully. The flow is measured in cubic metres per second (cm/s).
An adequate face velocity is defined as being an average of greater than 0.5
cm/s across the face, with individual readings being within +/ 10% of the average.
174
The Australian Standard requires fume cupboard testing be done with a anometer
(air flow meter). A hot wire anometer should not be used where flammable liquids
are present.
Smoke testing is checking for eddys, irregular flow patterns or currents that could
have fumes flowing out into the laboratory.
The University of Melbourne has over 350 fume cupboards and a significant proportion of
these are over fifteen years old. Many of these cupboards were constructed and installed
prior to the introduction of the Australian Standard and thus not all of the fume cupboards
have been able to provide an adequate face velocity at full sash height. A maintenance
upgrade program is currently under way to bring all ducted fume cupboards up to the
performance requirements of the Australian Standard.
57.2 Plant Regulations

57.2.1 Purpose
To protect staff and students against the risks to health or safety arising from plant by
ensuring correct operation, training, licensing and maintenance.
57.2.2 Application
This procedure is applicable to any plant as defined in the Regulations, owned, used or
hired by the University of Melbourne.
57.2.3 Legislation
Certification of Plant Users and Operators Regulations 1994
57.2.4 References
Australian Standard AS 3920.1 Assurance of product quality Part 1: Pressure Equipment
Manufacture
Australian Standard AS 4024 Safe Guarding of Machinery Definitions
Australian Standard AS 4343 Pressure Equipment Hazard Levels
This Section relates only to plant that is defined as falling into one or more of the following
categories:
(a) plant that processes material by way of a mechanical action, but does not rely on
manual power or is primarily supported by hand:
(i) cuts, drills, punches or grinds the material e.g. woodworking saws, drill presses, bench
grinders, microtomes, paper punches
(ii) presses, forms, hammers, joins or moulds the material e.g: power presses, laminators
(iii) combines, mixes, sorts, packages, assembles, knits or weaves the material e.g:
centrifuges, packing machines
(b) plant designed to lift or move people or material e.g. trolleys, lifts, forklifts
(c) pressure equipment e.g. autoclaves, pumps
175
(d) tractors
(e) earth moving machinery
(f) lasers involved in cutting actions
(g) scaffolds
(h) temporary access equipment
(i) explosive powered tools
(j) turbines
(k) amusement structures.
The following list of equipment is not classified as plant however documented risk
assessments are recommended e.g. Shaking water bath, Magnetic heater and stirrer,
Spectrophotometers, Chromatographs, Biohazard / Laminar flow cabinets, Vortex mixers,
Photocopiers.
57.2.5.1 Suppliers Including Importers
Must provide documents associated with the safe operation of the plant, such as service
manuals and operations manuals. The health and safety information should be, wherever
possible, in plain English but maintain the accuracy and quality of the technical
information.
57.2.5.2 Supplier of Used Plant
Supplier of Used Plant The University Finance Policy and Procedures manual (section
13.8) should be referred to in the cases of equipment disposal.
If equipment is sold, the supplier must provide the health and safety information in their
possession which would have been provided if the equipment were new and any additional
information i.e. maintenance records. The supplier must also carry out a risk assessment.
Where equipment is identified as not being fully serviceable, the supplier should inform the
purchaser that the equipment should not be used until it is fully serviceable.
If plant is to be scrapped, the EHS manual procedure 5.8.8 Disposal of Plant or Equipment
must be followed.
57.2.5.3 Supplier of Hired Plant
Where plant is hired or leased for an extended period of time, the supplier should make
arrangements to have the plant inspected and maintained and keep records of the
inspections and maintenance.
Ensure that a hazard identification is carried out before plant is purchased or is used in the
workplace, before any alterations are made and before plant is used for any other purpose
than for which it was designed. If a hazard is identified then a risk assessment must be
completed taking into account the full life cycle of the plant from purchase and
commissioning to disposal, including: systems of work, layout and physical conditions,
capability of the user and any foreseeable operating conditions of the plant.
Ensure that any risk associated with the plant is controlled using the hierarchy of control.
176
The controls of the plant must be suitably identified, conveniently located and guarded.
Any items of plant that require or are supplied with guarding must be checked to ensure
that the guarding is appropriate.
57.2.5.5 Supervisor
Before plant is commissioned into the workplace the supervisor is required to ensure that
the area designed for the plant is appropriate. The supervisor must also check that
adequate information is supplied on:
Purpose for which the plant was designed
Hazards and risks identified and assessed
Testing on inspections to be carried out
Installation, commissioning, use, transport storage etc
Systems of work and competency requirements
Emergency procedures
Register all plant on the University of Melbourne Asset Register
Register specific high risk plant with the Victorian Workcover Authority as follows:
Boilers
Pressure vessels as identified in the Australian Standard AS 3920.1 Pressure Vessels
Tower cranes
Lifts
Building maintenance units
Amusement structures
Concrete placing units
Mobile cranes (with a safe working load greater than 10 tonnes)
Establish a maintenance / inspection schedule as often as is recommended by the
Manufacturers specifications, or incorporate into the regular quarterly inspection of
laboratories and workshops. Inspections should consider:
Layout, type and location of plant
Systems of work
Work conditions
Establish and document isolation procedures (lock out) and ensure Out Of Service tags are
used where necessary (see EHS manual Section 56.1 Withdrawing unsafe equipment
from use).
Establish the level of competency required for the use the plant and arrange training for all
persons involved in commissioning installations, testing, use, and disposal of plant.
Assess the need for Certificates of Competency required to operate and check validity of
certificates of competency before allowing work to commence the following items of
plant:
Scaffolds excluding scaffolding where a person can only fall less than 4 metres
Rigging
Cranes
177
Elevating work platforms (cherry pickers) If boom length 11 metres or greater

Materials hoists
Forklift trucks excluding pedestrian operated
Boilers excluding those in compliance with Schedule 2 of the Plant Regulations 1995
Turbines Steam engines
Escalators
57.2.5.6 Operators of Plant
Follow instructions provided for use of plant.

Obtain Certificates of Competency as required before operating plant.
Obtain relevant training as required before operating plant.
57.2.6.1 Plant Registration
Registration of Plant Legislation stipulates specific items of plant that must be registered.
The Victorian Workcover Authority provide forms for the:
* Application for registration of plant
* Notice of relocation of change of ownership of registered plant
* Notification of alteration to plant design
Australian Standard AS4343 must be used when determining hazard levels for the
purposes of registration or notification of pressure equipment to the Authority.
All existing plant and any new plant requires a documented risk assessment. (EHSM
Appendix A8). When considering more complex plant, may need to include specialist or
technical experts. If a hazard is identified, a risk assessment form (EHSM in Appendix
A5) must be completed to assess the risk posed by the plant. The assessment must take
into account:
* Systems of work associated with use
* Layout and physical conditions of the workplace
* Capability, skill and experience of the operator
* Any abnormal operating conditions of the plant
57.2.6.3 Risk Control Measures
The hierarchy of control must be used to reduce the risk as far as is practicable. Risk
assessments must be maintained for 2 years. Risk assessment must be reviewed if plant is
altered or relocated or used for another purpose.
57.2.6.4 Guarding and Emergency Systems
If guarding is to be used as a measure to control risk, then the guarding must be assessed
to prevent access to the danger point or area of the plant. Where there are operator
controls, these must be suitably identified, conveniently located, guarded to prevent
unintentional activation and able to be locked into the off position.
178
57.2.6.5 Certificates of Competency
Where it is found that a Certificate of Competency is required for an item of plant then an
application must be made to the Victorian Workcover Authority with a notice of
satisfactory assessment from an assessor. It is illegal for an employee to work on a piece
of plant that requires certification without holding a Certificate of Competency or an
equivalent qualification.
57.3 Withdrawl of Unsafe Equipment from Use (DRAFT)

57.3.1 Purpose
To ensure that a system is in place to prevent injury to employees who maintain, use or
work with or on any form of mechanical equipment, tools or furniture.
57.3.2 Application
This procedure applies to mechanical equipment, tools or furniture that are to be repaired
or disposed of via the university hard rubbish collection.
57.3.3 Legislation
57.3.4 References
Australian Standard 2211 Laser safety
Australian Standard 2243.6 Mechanical Aspects
Australian Standard 2243.8 Fume cupboards
Ensure that all equipment which is to be repaired, undergo maintenance or be disposed of

is tagged prior to commencement of work or disposal.
Ensure that procedures are in place to "deenergise" equipment to be repaired or disposed
of where appropriate and safe to do so. Examples are the release of compressed air or
gas, collecting and appropriately disposing of chemicals normally contained in the
equipment, disipation or release of an electrical charge.
Ensure that records of all equipment removed from service, tagged, locked out or isolated
are maintained.
Ensure that only trained or licensed and competent personnel undertake maintenance or
repair of equipment.
Ensure that records of all equipment serviced and repaired are maintained. These records
should contain details of parts replaced and any alterations to the equipment.
Ensure that information is provided to staff, students, contractors and visitors on how and
whom to report and remove unsafe equipment from service.
179
57.3.5.2 Staff, students, contractors and Visitors
Follow instructions and procedures for removing equipment from service.

To repair, modify or service equipment only if trained, licensed or authorised to do so by an
appropriate and authorised person.
Keep appropriate records of equipment tagged, modified or removed from service.
A "CAUTION DO NOT USE" tag is completed giving details of who placed the tag, their
department, date, time and the reason for the tag is placed on the equipment in a
prominent postion. If an injury or near miss occurred due to the problem an S3 incident
report has to be completed and sent to the RMO.
The area/lab or equipment supervisor is informed of the situation.
Equipment is made safe and deenergised where practicable and "quarantined" until
repair or disposal.
The equipment is repaired by qualified staff or contractor or disposed of via the hard
rubbish collection if appropriate or special arrangements are made. After repair the tag is
removed. A record of repair or modification is made and filed.
58 Waste Disposal
58.1 Summary of Waste Disposal Methods
58.1.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with the Universitys obligations to dispose of waste
items generated from research and teaching.
58.1.2 Application
This procedure is applicable to the waste generated by Departments including hazardous
waste, chemical waste, glass sharps, animal carcasses, radioactive wastes and plant or
equipment.
It does not apply to waste generated from food and beverage preparation and
consumption, paper and general waste.
58.1.3 Legislation
Victorian Occupational Health & Safety Act 1985
Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances (Commonwealth Standard) Regulations 2001
180

Health (Infectious Diseases Regulations 2001
58.1.4 References
Diseases.
Guidelines for small scale Genetic Manipulation Work. GMAC April 1995.
National Medical and Health Research Council Guidelines for Laboratory Personnel
working with Carcinogenic or Highly Toxic Chemicals Australian New Zealand Standard
2243.3: Microbiology 1995
Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 6th Edition
Australian Standard 4031: Nonreusable containers for the collection of sharp medical
Australian Standard 1940The Storage and Handling of Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
Australian Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories Part 2: Chemical Aspects
Australian Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories Part 4: Ionising Radiation Aspects
Australian Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories Part 10: Chemical Storage
Ensure that all staff involved with storage and handling of hazardous waste receive
training that includes emergency procedures, spill control and all hazards associated with
the waste.
Ensure the availability of Suppliers Material Safety Data Sheets that are less than 5 years
old.
Attend any training provided for the storage and handling of waste.
Follow department and university procedures for dealing with waste
Provide technical advice and guidelines concerning the various contracts for removal of
hazardous waste from the University Premises.
Provide information to Departments and Staff on safe and environmentally sound disposal
methods.
181

58.1.6.1 Waste Packaging and Transport
material.
Departments using radionucleides should scan all waste for radioactivity prior to disposal.
Ensure that all waste containers are appropriate for the types of waste.
Ensure that all waste containers are labeled and transported according to the requirements
of the relevant legislation and university procedures.
Where it can not be avoided, staff transporting the waste must be provided with
appropriate and adequate protective equipment and the vehicles used must be equipped
with a suitable fire extinguisher (2.0 Kg Dry Powder or the equivalent).
Spill kits must be carried for all types of hazardous waste being transported and the staff
trained and competent in spill clean up procedures.
Where metal drums are used for waste transport, they must be placed in spill containment
trays at all times to contain the waste in the event of a leak. Glass containers should be
packaged to minimise damage to the container. Glass winchesters should be transported in
polypacks.
58.1.6.2 Waste Categories for disposal
The following is a list of categories of Substances that must NOT be poured down the sink.
Ensure that the only substances disposed of "down the sink" are nonhazardous aqueous
solutions within the pH range of 6 to 10.
Ensure that substances that fall into the following categories are disposed of in a safe and
environmentally responsible manner;
Carcinogens, mutagens and teratogens
Drugs of addiction
Heavy metal suspensions or solutions
Pesticides and herbicides
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs)
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
Organic solvents
Toxic substances
Photographic chemicals
Unneutralised acids or alkalis.
58.1.6.3 EPA Certificates and Prescribed Waste
The coordination of prescribed waste removal from the University Campus is the
responsibility of the Risk Management Office and Property and Buildings.
Prescribed waste removal must be accompanied by an EPA Waste Transport Certificate.
Completion of Section A of the EPA Certificate is the responsibility of the University
Safety Officer, the University Plumber, Property and Building Property Managers or a
supplier of prescribed waste removal services who is an authorised accredited agent of the
University of Melbourne.
182
Departments must contact the Risk Management Office before hazardous waste is
removed from their area of control to ascertain its appropriate classification and
authorization for removal. Departments should keep a copy and forward to the RMO
any EPA certificate for which section A has been completed by a responsible authority of
the University as listed above or an authorised accredited agent of the University of
Melbourne. These records are maintained in departments and the RMO according to
Record Keeping EHSM procedure 1.6.3.
The University Safety Officer is responsible for the requirements of the waste producer as
detailed in the Environment Protection (Prescribed Waste) Regulations 1998 and/or their
delegation to an authorised accredited agent of the University of Melbourne.
Management of these responsibilities is controlled via the RMO quality system. Direct
queries to the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010.
58.1.6.4 Collection Points
There are several waste collection points around the Univeristy. Please contact the
Departmental Manager for the location nearest the building.
58.1.6.5 Disposal Methods
Refer to the following Sections for waste disposal methods:

5.8.2 Disposal of Hazardous Substances
5.8.3 Disposal of Chemical Waste
5.8.4 Disposal of Glass
5.8.5 Disposal of Sharps
5.8.6 Disposal of Animal Carcasses
5.8.7 Disposal of Radioactive Wastes
5.8.8 Disposal of Plant or Equipment
58.2 Disposal of Hazardous Waste

58.2.1 Purpose
To ensure University awareness and compliance with its legal obligations by informing
departments of the requirements for the correct disposal of hazardous waste.
58.2.2 Application
The procedure applies to the disposal of hazardous waste generated by laboratory
operations. Other areas such as workshops, maintenance and fieldwork may generate
similar waste and these guidelines should be used.
Types of waste include special waste such as: biohazards, scheduled drugs, carcinogens,
asbestos, mercury, PCBs and infectious waste
It does NOT apply to nonhazardous waste (paper, general rubbish) disposed of by Property
Services.
183
58.2.3 Legislation
The Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances Act 1981
The Drugs, Poisons and Controlled Substances Regulations 1995
58.2.4 References
Australian Standard 2243Safety in Laboratories Part 3. Microbiology
Australian Standard 2243Safety in Laboratories Part 2. Chemical Aspects
University OH&S and Environmental policy statements on the storage, handling and use of
hazardous materials or processes which produce hazardous waste.
working with Carcinogenic or Highly Toxic Chemicals.
Worksafe Australia List of Designated Hazardous Substances [NOHSC: 10005 (1994)]
Code of Practice for Hazardous Substances
58.2.5.1 Laboratory Managers, Supervisors and Staff
Ensure that all legislative requirements for hazardous substances are met regarding
disposal procedures.
Ensure that substances that fall into the category of being a hazardous substance are not
disposed of to trade waste (sinks and drains) in concentrations exceeding those specified in
the Universitys Trade Waste Licence.
Ensure that all waste containers are appropriate for the types of waste, and containers
are labelled according to the requirements of the relevant legislation and university
procedures.
Ensure that staff receive adequate training in handling hazardous materials and waste
and that it includes emergency procedures and spill control.
Ensure that current suppliers MSDSs are obtained before delivery of any hazardous
substance.
Staff must follow the appropriate University procedures for handling and disposal of
hazardous waste.
Ensure that they use all protective equipment, clothing or devices required by a procedure
when handling hazardous materials and waste.
Provide technical advice and guidelines concerning the various contracts for removal of
hazardous waste from the university premises.
Provide information to the departments and staff on safe and environmentally sound
disposal methods.
184

This policy concerns all substances which have the potential to cause harm to the health
or safety of persons in the workplace, or to the environment. They include but are not
limited to substances mentioned below. This policy concerns any Univeristy OH&S and
Environmental Policy statements on the storage, handling and use of hazardous materials
or process which produce hazardous waste.
Further information and advice can be obtained from the Risk Management Office on
8344 7010.
58.2.6.1 Ethidium Bromide Waste
Ethidium Bromide and concentrated solutions must be disposed of as cytotoxic waste. Gels
that have been destained may be discarded as laboratory waste and the rinsate from gels
may be washed down the sink.
A convenient way to remove Ethidium Bromide from buffers is by using a commercially
available kit. It is a one step filtration method using an activated carbon matrix.
For spills and leaks of Ethidium Bromide the area must be vacated. Appropriate PPE must
be worn. The spill must be cleaned up in a manner that does not disperse dust into the air.
58.2.6.2 Other Hazardous Waste
The following list of hazardous waste must be disposed of appropriately:

* Carcinogens, mutagens and teratogens
* Drugs of addiction
* Heavy metal suspensions or solutions
* Pesticides and herbicides
* Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs)
* Chlorinated hydrocarbons
* Organic solvents
* Toxic substances
* Photographic chemicals
* Unneutralised acids or alkalis
* Cytotoxic Drugs
At not stage should polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or other halogenated compounds be
mixed with other waste. These require special disposal through the Risk Management
Office.
A designated member of staff is to be allocated the responsibility of handling the waste
disposal with the following requirements:
1. The containers must be rigid and leakproof
2. The labelling must be correct and signify the department and a contact
3. Transport restrictions on Hazardous Waste apply, so ensure appropriate precautions are
taken
4. The storage area must be located away from drains and other sensitive areas
5. The disposal of the waste must be through an approved contractor.
185
58.3 Disposal of Chemical Waste

58.3.1 Purpose
To ensure University awareness and compliance with its legal obligations by informing
departments of the requirements for the correct disposal of chemical waste.
58.3.2 Application
There are three broad categories of chemical waste that require correct disposal
procedures:
Gases compressed or liquefied gases contained in pressurised metal bottles or cylinders.
Solids normally in the form of laboratory reagents.
Liquids may be laboratory reagents but more often take the form of waste or used
organic solvents, including radioactive liquids.
58.3.3 Legislation
58.3.4 References
Australian Standard 1940The Storage and Handling of Flammable and Combustible
Liquids
Australian Standard 2243Safety in Laboratories Part 2. Chemical Aspects
Australian Standard 2243Safety in Laboratories Part 10. Chemical Storage
Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 6th Edition
working with Carcinogenic or Highly Toxic Chemicals
Worksafe Australian List of Designated Hazardous Substances [NOHSC:10005(1994)]
The Code of Practice for Hazardous Substances
58.3.5.1 Laboratory managers, departmental managers and supervisors
Ensure that all staff involved with storage and handling of chemical waste receive training
that includes emergency procedures, spill control and all hazards associated with the
waste.
186
Attend any training provided for the storage and handling of chemical waste.
Follow department and university procedures for dealing with chemical waste.
Use and care for all equipment provided for their protection from chemical waste.
58.3.6.1 Gases
When using or generating gases care must be taken that the discharges from fume
cupboards or fume extraction systems do not exceed the Occupational Exposure Levels
(OEL) for that substance. See section 1.3.
Compressed or liquefied gases stored under pressure may develop leaks or valve faults
over a period of time. As an initial step, the Department should request the original supplier
to replace or dispose of the faulty or unwanted gas container. If this approach fails, the
Manager, RMO 8344 6030 should be contacted for advice.
Any cost involved in the safe disposal of unwanted gas cylinders will be charged to the
Department
58.3.6.2 Laboratory Reagents
Unwanted laboratory reagents in solid (or liquid form) are scheduled for removal in
January each year. Details of the collection service will be circulated in the preceding
months.
If Departments have unstable chemical material or toxic substances which they are
unable to store in a safe manner until the end of year collection, they should contact the
Risk Management Office (RMO) on 8344 7010.
Many departments generate chemical waste in the form of waste aqueous solutions and
organic solvents (chlorinated or nonchlorinated). If the liquid contains radioactive material,
see Section 4.5.7 Disposal of radioactive waste.
The use and disposal of explosives are covered by Victorian regulations. Advice on
disposal can be obtained from the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010.
The cost of the annual removal and disposal of unwanted laboratory reagents will be
charged to the Department.
58.3.6.3 Monthly Waste Solvent Disposal
Solvents can be separated into two broad categories: Chlorinated and Non Chlorinated
NB. The two categories should not be mixed as this may prevent later recycling of the
solvents
Non Chlorinated Solvents
This category may comprise the following:
Hydrocarbons
Alcohols
Ethers
Aldehydes
Ketones
187
Ethers
These chemicals are generally Class 3.1 and 3.2 Flammable liquids. Some may have the
subrisk of 6.1 (a) Poison or 6.1(b) Harmful.
Chlorinated Solvents
This category contains the common solvents such as:
Carbon tetrachloride
Chloroform
Methylene chloride (Dichloromethane)
1,1,1Trichloroethane
1Chlorobutane
2Chlorobutane
1,2Dichloroethane
Ethylene dichloride
These chemicals are generally Class 6.1(a) Poison or 61(b) Harmful but some may have a
subrisk of 3.1 or 3.2 Flammable Liquids. These should segregated from other waste whilst
in storage.
58.3.6.4 Waste Oils
These can generated by vacuum pumps, plant and machinery, oil based heating baths,
workshops etc
The oils should be segregated by type, placed in metal drums, correctly labelled and
delivered to the pick up point with the waste solvents.
NB: Used vacuum pump oil that has been used in a pump placing a distillation or chemical
reaction under vacuum can pick up hazardous chemicals during the process. Staff
responsible for servicing vacuum pumps should be aware of this.
The oils, solvents and chlorinated solvents listed above are the only chemicals that will
be accepted for the monthly pick up. All other chemicals such as pesticides, corrosives,
oxidising agents, poisons, carcinogens etc are a Departmental responsibility. See
Laboratory Reagents section.
The costs of the removal and disposal of organic waste solvents through this service are
met from central funds.
58.3.6.5 Chemical Information
When intending to dispose of any potentially hazardous material, the relevant information
including disposal procedures should be available and understood by all users before work
begins. This information is contained in a format known as a Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) see Section 5.2.13 for further information on MSDS.
MSDSs should be obtained from the supplier or manufacturer of the material to be
purchased. If the original manufacturer or supplier no longer exists, other sources of MSDS
are the Chemistry Store, Chemistry Safety Officer and sites on the Internet. If these
sources are not available or the information incomplete, please contact the Risk
Management Office for further advice.
188
58.3.6.6 Packaging, Labelling and Storage
All waste containers must be clearly labelled listing their contents, class hazard diamond
and department of origin. If the waste is incorrectly labelled it will not be accepted for
collection.
All waste must be stored segregated, according to type and class. chlorinated and
nonchlorinated are not to be stored together nor can either the be stored with cytotoxic or
sharps.
Departments are responsible for ensuring that any aqueous phase in waste drums is
neutralised. This can be done by adding sodium hydrogen carbonate to each drum and
observing any signs of a reaction. The drum must not be sealed until some hours after the
neutralisation process is completed.
The maximum size for containers used for the collection of chemical waste in is 20L. The
containers used must be of an approved type where the waste is a Dangerous Good. If the
incorrect container is used, the contractor will refuse to collect the waste. Waste
containers must be compatible with the contents e.g. Dont place highly acidic or alkaline
waste in metal drums.
There is a high cost penalty involved in disposing of chemicals in glass winchesters. If glass
winchesters are used consistently by Departments, a charge may be made to that
department. High Density Poly Ethylene containers are preferred or plastic screw cap
containers for those departments which have small amounts of waste for disposal.
Contact the RMO for details.
The number of waste containers allowed in an area will depend upon the size (floor
space), the operations undertaken and the overall chemical load in that area. Procedures
should be established to control spillage in all areas used for storage including waste
materials. Sufficient material must be available to make any spills safe staff trained in its
use. The environmental impacts of spillage should be considered as a key point when
establishing control procedures.
The permanent storage of chemicals and chemical waste, particularly toxic substances, in
fume cupboards is normally not allowed. However where small amounts are used on a
temporary basis this may occur. All waste containers must be capped. The practice of
evaporating wastes in fume cupboards is costly and environmentally damaging. A
ventilated storage unit should be used for long term storage of toxic substances.
Empty containers that have had hazardous materials stored in them must be free of any
residues and have any hazard diamonds or labels removed or made unreadable before
disposal. Clean glass containers may be placed in bins located on the loading dock at the
back of the Chemistry Building.
58.3.6.7 Transport and Collection Points
The collection points will be by arrangement with Departments. Waste solvent will be
collected from Departmental pick up points on the third Thursday of every month, except
January.
Spill kits must be carried for all types of hazardous waste being transported and the staff
trained and competent in spill clean up procedures. Fire Extinguishing media is required for
transport of chemicals in vehicles. Note: Transport of waste in motor vehicles is
discouraged.
Where metal drums are used for waste transport, they must be placed in spill containment
trays at all times to contain the waste in the event of a leak. Glass containers should be
189
packaged to minimise damage to the container, glass winchesters should be transported in

polypacks.
Where it can not be avoided staff transporting the waste must be provided with
appropriate and adequate protective equipment and the vehicles used must be equipped
with a suitable fire extinguisher (2.0 Kg Dry Powder or the equivalent).
58.3.6.8 Disposal of Chemicals down the sink
Departments are prohibited from disposing of any chemicals down the sink which are
Dangerous "Goods, Hazardous substances, Poisons or radioactive materials or the like.
Certain dispensations can be made for solutions that are pH neutral, such as buffers,
media (not containing biological materials), salt solutions and rinsate from cleaning of
chemical containers.
58.4 Disposal of Glass

58.4.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with its legal obligations with the disposal of
potentially hazardous waste or unwanted glass.
58.4.2 Application
This procedure applies to window glass, laboratory glassware and glass bottles used as
packaging for hazardous substances. It does not apply to glass used as food or beverage
containers. Glass food and beverage containers should be recycled.
Glass for disposal is classified into three categories:
Float or Window glass
Pyrex glass laboratory apparatus
Nonpyrex glass bottles etc
58.4.3 Legislation
58.4.4 References
Not Applicable
Ensure that glass is not disposed of in the general rubbish collection.

Contact the RMO on 8344 4769 for further information.
190

58.4.6.1 All Glass
If recycling, the glass must be decontaminated, labels and all nonglass attachments
removed. The glass must then, depending on the recycling contractor, be separated into
Pyrex and NonPyrex.
Departments wishing to recycle their waste glass should contact the Risk Management
Office (extn. 44769) for details of the glass/recycling agents.
58.4.6.2 Float Glass
Float glass must not be disposed of in the normal rubbish collection service. During
compacting the glass shatters and can cause possible personal injury.
To dispose of Float glass contact Property & Buildings on extension 46000 for advice on
the procedure to be followed.
58.4.6.3 Pyrex and Non Pyrex Glass
This glass will be contaminated with either chemical or biological agents. Laboratory staff
before disposal must decontaminate the glass before placing in bins at the loading dock at
the rear of Old Chemistry.
It may then be disposed of to land fill tips through Property Services or recycled.
58.5 Disposal of Sharps

58.5.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with the Universitys obligations to dispose of sharp
medical items used in research and teaching.
58.5.2 Application
In laboratories where biological and chemical or hazardous substances work is carried out,
sharps are normally contaminated with blood, other biological products or toxic chemicals
and are classified as contaminated waste and must be treated as a potential health
hazard.
This includes items such as razor blades, uncapped syringes and needles, scalpel blades,
but does not include large glass items which should be put in the appropriate container for
general disposal. It does not include pipettes and other items of glassware that have used
for chemical work and are not contaminated with biological material.
58.5.3 Legislation
58.5.4 References
Australian Standard 4031: Nonreusable containers for the collection of sharp medical
items used in health care areas.
191
Provide all staff handling or transporting sharps with training which includes emergency
procedures, first aid and information on hazards of sharps.
Ensure that sharps containers that meet legal requirements are used and are labelled
correctly.
58.5.5.2 University Stationary Store
Stock sharps containers for sale to departments that comply with the requirements of AS
4031 and meet the needs of departments for safe disposal.
Attend training provided for them on the safe handling, use and disposal of sharps.
Use all equipment provided to them for their health and safety when using or handling
sharps.
Not intentionally misuse or damage any equipment provided to them for their health and
safety when using or handling sharps.
Provide technical advice and guidelines to departments on disposal methods.

58.5.6.1 Use of Containers
Always use an approved sharps containers suitable for blades, syringes, needles etc,
available from the University Stationery Store.
Ensure that when disposing of sharps they follow safe work practices. Immediately after
use they should be placed in a dedicated, secure approved container which is clearly
labelled for this purpose and which complies with Australian Standard 4031.
Do not over fill sharps containers.
Note: Liquids should not be placed in sharps containers.
58.5.6.2 Packaging and Labelling
When delivering the sharps containers to the central collection point, the lid should be taped
down and the departmental code should be marked on the lid of the container. The gross
weight in Kg should also be marked on the container. When handling sharp containers
(during the collection and transport), staff should wear heavy duty gloves.
58.5.6.3 Disposal
Sharps will be picked up from the usual collection points on the 3rd Thursday of the month.
58.5.6.4 Cost
The cost of the purchase of the approved sharps containers is borne by the Department.
The disposal costs are met from central funds.
For further information contact the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010.
192
58.6 Disposal of Animal Carcasses

58.6.1 Purpose
equipment.
To ensure legal compliance with the importation, use, transport and disposal of these
materials.
58.6.2 Application
These procedures apply to the disposal of animal carcasses and other waste such as
bedding material which may have been contaminated by the animal.
These guidelines are not intended to replace instructions in laboratories which have specific
risks but rather to provide a uniform code of practice throughout the University of
Melbourne and all its teaching areas.
58.6.3 Legislation
58.6.4 References
Melbourne University Animal Experimentation Ethics Committee has developed a number
of policies of which Departments should be aware.
Diseases. (This will be a link to the section on the web)

Are required, in association with appropriate personnel to formulate and publish specific
Reporting and investigating accidents that occur within areas under their control.
For the protection of staff working with animals (investigators and technicians), Ensure
immunisation with relevant vaccines is offered prior to commencement of employment
against tetanus and hepatitis B, and a Mantoux Test.
It is recommended that baseline serum samples be collected for "at risk" personnel.
Staff should be informed about the importance of hygiene, wearing appropriate protective
clothing and the safe handling of animals.
193
Where relevant, staff should be provided with information about hazardous, infectious,
radioactive, carcinogenic, anaesthetic drugs or other substances with which they will be
working.
Staff should be informed of the implicit risks of working with animals and the relevant
species, particularly with regard to allergy and zoonotic disease. In case of a problem
arising, staff should know where to seek advice.
Ensure that all laboratory workers have received training in handling animals.
Ensure that all wastes or byproducts are transported according to relevant regulations.
material.
Three contractors are available and their services are described below:
For all contaminated waste including carcasses Mediwaste
For small quantities of noncontaminated waste including small laboratory
carcasses Cleanaway Service
For large quantities of noncontaminated waste, too large to be collected by
Cleanaway Pridham
58.6.6.1 Disposal through Mediwaste
The Mediwaste service is used to dispose of contaminated waste (this includes any
quarantined animals). The waste is picked up every Friday morning from several agreed
locations, which provides for the Departments that regularly use the service. Departments
which do not regularly use the service can also have their waste disposed of. This can be
done by contacting Mediwaste directly (9706 5421) and providing them with the following
information:
Name of Department
Location of pickup
Contact name
It is important to note that the waste must be contained in the required 60 litre Biohazard
bags which are supplied by Mediwaste. For those Departments which are not regular users
of the service, bags will have to be ordered when the request for the service is made (and
hence waste will have to be bagged during the pickup). For Departments which use the
service regularly, bags are replaced when necessary.
The Departments using the service will take on all costs involved.
194
58.6.6.2 Disposal through Cleanaway
The Cleanaway service can be used to dispose of noncontaminated waste which is small
in size. The waste merely has to be placed in one of the Cleanaway bins, which are
provided for every Department.
Only noncontaminated waste which fits in the Cleanaway bins can be disposed of
through this service.
It is important that all carcasses disposed of are double bagged before they are placed in
the bins.
58.6.6.3 Disposal through Pridham
Noncontaminated carcasses which are too large to dispose of through Cleanaway can be
sent to Pridham (a manufacturer of fertiliser).
Unfortunately Pridham do not provide a disposal service to the University (the University
uses Pridham very infrequently). Therefore, the delivery of carcasses to Pridham must be
organised and paid for by the Department disposing of the carcasses.
Organising a disposal to Pridham can be done by contacting their Laverton branch (9369
2844) and speaking to Mr. Ron Brown. He will advise whether the carcasses are suitable
for use by Pridham, and hence if they will accept the delivery.
It is important to note that Pridham are only interested in animal carcasses and not other
types of waste.
58.6.6.4 Disposal of Radioactive Carcasses
Advice on disposal of wastes should be discussed before any work on radioactive material
commences.
The preferred method for the disposal of carcasses is to allow for radioactive decay to a
safe level and then to dispatch by the standard method. For longer halflife materials or
special disposal contact the Radiation Safety Officer, Risk Management Office 03 8344
7010.
For further information, please contact:
Risk Management Office 03 8344 7702
Animal Welfare Officer MRIO 8344 4070
58.7 Disposal of Radioactive Wastes

58.7.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with its legal obligations by; informing Departments
of their requirements with disposal of radioactive material.
58.7.2 Application
3. Equipment that produce ionising radiation
195
58.7.3 Legislation
58.7.4 References
NH&MRC Codes of practice relating to the use and disposal of Ionising Radiation
Australian Standard 2243.4 Safety in Laboratories Part 4: Ionising Radiation
Australian Standard 2243.5 Safety in Laboratories Part 5: Non Ionising Radiation
Definition
58.7.5.1 Departmental Managers, Supervisors, DRSOs
The regulatory requirements for Departments that uses radioactive materials are to dispose
of radioactive material in a manner approved by the University.
Departments must adopt safe work practices, which are covered in the appropriate
Australian Standards when dealing with radioactive material. Departments should
consider:
The Disposal of waste needs before purchasing any radioactive isotopes. The
mechanisms of disposal for radioactive waste will depend on the isotope, its mass,
activity, half life and the form of the waste.
Projects that use radioactive isotopes need to have a disposal procedure in place
for their waste.
Sharps must be treated as a separate disposal item.
All other radioactive isotopes that have a long halflife or are toxic, need to be
treated as hazardous waste.
Obtain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) where necessary.
Be familiar with disposal procedures.

the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010.
196
Waste is deemed to be radioactive if it emits ionising radiation spontaneously and has a

specific activity equal to or greater than 30 becquerels per gram.
Waste of low toxicity and short halflife, whose active levels are below this prescribed limit
can be treated as nonradioactive waste.
Before radionuclides may be disposed of, the level of activity must be no greater than
those shown in the table below for commonly used Nuclides:
Table 58: Commonly used nuclides
Nuclide
Halflife
Maximum Activity for Disposal
3H
12.6 years
1x108Bq 2.7mCi
14C
5730 years
3.4x106Bq 0.09mCi
22Na
2.6 years
6.3x105Bq 0.17mCi
32P
14.3 days
8.3x105Bq 0.022mCi
35S
87 days
2.7x106Bq 0.073mCi
51Cr
27.8 days
5.3x107Bq 1.4mCi
125I
60.1 days
1.3x105Bq 0.0035mCi
131I
8 days
9.1x104Bq 0.0024mCi
58.7.6.2 Methods for Disposal of Radioactive Waste
Supervised burial
Solid waste, including animal carcasses, where appropriate.
The maximum activity of each package for disposal is determined by its half life and is
given in terms of its current Annual Limit on Intake (ALI) by ingestion for radiation
workers.
Incineration
Waste suitable for disposal by incineration includes combustible solids, animal carcasses,
vials containing organic solvents and bulk solvents.
Glass vials with closed metal caps are not acceptable, due to risk of explosion.
Contents of glass containers should be transferred to plastic containers for incineration.
Glass vials with plastic caps can be safely disposed of in limited numbers.
Plastic vials containing radioactive organic solvents are preferred.
Disposal to the atmosphere
When working with Isotopes be aware evaporation will take place for low vapour pressure
isotopes i.e. I125 , H 3 etc. This process should be limited whenever possible and should not
be seen as a convenient means of waste disposal.
Disposal of Sealed Sources
Sources should be returned to the supplier. From1987 the suppliers are legally required to
take responsibility for the sources disposal.
For sources which have been purchased before 1987, contact the Universitys Radiation
Protection Officer on 8344 7010.
197
58.7.6.3 Requirements for Waste Disposal Packaging
Things to remember:
Different solvents must not be bulked together.
Sealed containers e.g. glass vials with closed metal caps are not acceptable due to the risk
of explosion when incinerated.
Nonstandard drums will not be accepted as they will not fit the disposal agents vials
crushing machine
Wet Bags
For nonsharp dry materials, double lined garbage bags (wet bags) are recommended.
They may be obtainable from the University Porters on 8344 6229.
The bags should not be filled to more than 80% of their capacity.
They should be sealed with tape not staples.
The weight of the package should be less than 10 kgs.
Bags should have no protrusions that could cause the bag to rip.
20 Litre Bins/Drums
Vials, volatile liquids, solvents, scintillant, broken glass ware should be packaged in a 20
litre plastic bin or metal drum.
Plastic bins are available from the University RPO.
Sharps Containers
Sharps such as blades, needles, syringes etc. must be placed in a plastic sharps containers
not cardboard.
All such containers must be weighed before disposal and their weight recorded.
Glass containers
Glass containers are not acceptable as packaging for radioactive waste due to problems
of breakage.
58.7.6.4 Labelling
Bags and boxes containing 30 kBq or more use the approved label "Low level solid
radioactive waste". The Departmental code must also be recorded on the label in
permanent marker pen.
All waste organic solvent drums shall be marked with the standard label indicating
"Waste organic solvents low level radioactivity".
Further advice on aspects of radioactive waste disposal can be obtained from the
University Radiation Protection Officer.
58.7.6.5 Disposal
The Universitys waste contractor conducts the disposal of prescribed waste including low
level radioactive waste on the third Thursday of every month (except January). Waste
collection points are arranged by consultation by the Radiation Protection Officer on 8344
7010.
Requirements for waste removal are:
198
1. Departments having scheduled waste including radioactive wastes removed from areas
under their control must supply a manifest to the Radiation Protection Officer (via email)
48 hours before the waste is removed.
2. All prescribed waste (including radioactive) leaving a department must be labelled and
packaged appropriately.
3. All prescribed waste (including radioactive) leaving departments must be scanned and
signed off by department safety / radiation officer.
4. All prescribed waste (including radioactive) leaving departments must carry a
department code number.
5. All sharps and cytotoxic waste must be weighed prior to collection.
6. All paper work must be completed and in order prior to collection.
7. Copies of any EPA documentation must be forwarded to the Risk Management Office.
58.7.6.6 Disposal Concentrations
Radioactive waste should NOT be poured down the sink. Trace amounts of radioactive
material from washes maybe disposed of down the sink if the quantities are minimal.
Waste that is disposed of through University Contractor should have a radioactivity of no
greater than 10% of the Allowable Level Ingestion (ALI) for a radiation worker.
The surface of the waste container must NOT exceed 5 micro Sieverts per hour.
Common nucleide maximum activities for disposal are:
Table 59: Activity for Disposal of Common Nucleides
Nucleide
Bequerels
Curie
3H
1 X 10*8 Bq
2.7 m Ci
14 C
3.4 x 10*6 Bq
0.09 m Ci
22 Na
6.3 x 10*5 Bq
0.017 m Ci
32 P
8.3 x 10*5 Bq
0.022 m Ci
33 P
8.3 x 10*6 Bq
0.22 m Ci
35 S
2.7 x 10*6 Bq
0.073 m Ci
51 Cr
5.3 x 10*7 Bq
1.4 m Ci
125 I
1.3 x 10*5 Bq
0.0035 m Ci
131 I
9.4 x 10*4 Bq
0.0024 m Ci
58.8 Disposal of Plant or Equipment

58.8.1 Purpose
To identify the responsibilities of departments in meeting their obligations for occupational
safety and environmental considerations when disposing of equipment or plant.
These requirements may vary depending on whether the equipment or plant is being
scrapped or sold/transferred to a third party.
58.8.2 Application
This policy applies to University owned plant and equipment from Departments for
disposal. The Universitys Finance Policy and Procedures Manual should be referred to in
the cases of equipment disposal, Section 13.6 or where loan or hire of University equipment
is considered, Section 13.7.
199
58.8.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Certification of Plant Users and Operators) Regulations
1993
Industrial Waste Management Policy (Control of Ozone Depleting Substances)
58.8.4 References
University of Melbourne, Finance Policy and Procedures Manual
Refer to the University Financial Policy and Procedures manual for requirements of
equipment disposal (Section 13.8).
Ensure that the Central Inventory is amended to reflect items of plant and equipment that
have been disposed of, sold or tranferred.
If the items being disposed off have been manufactured in the department the
requirements of the "Plant" Regulations as a manufacture/supplier must be complied with.
58.8.6.1 Transfer of plant to a Third Party (Supplier Duty)
Departments wishing to dispose of plant to a third party who has a declared intention of
use of the plant should note that under the Occupational Health and Safety (Plant)
Regulations they will assume the responsibilities of a supplier. In the case of a trade in of
equipment departments should assume they have the obligations of a supplier also.
Where a department wishes to tranfer or sell, hire or lease plant to a third party, the
Department must ensure that the plant is inspected and maintained, and that records of
these inspections and maintenance are provided to the third party.
Departments then have Suuppliers obligations to provide all information required under the
regulations such as technical standards, operation manuals, maintenance schedules and
other records kept by the previous owners. The Department must also ensure that
information regarding the safe operation of the plant is provided to the third party.
In order to meet the requirements of the "Plant" Regulations departments should ensure
that details of the transfer of plant or equipment to a third party are available for 2 years
following the date of transfer. The records that are kept should contain the information on
the material supplied in regard to health and safety issues.
200
58.8.6.2 Sale of In House Manufactured Plant
Where plant has been designed or manufactured within the University, the obligations
under the legislation requires that the department assume the responsibilities or a supplier
and/or manufacturer.
Designers and manufacturers have a duty to ensure that hazards associated with the
plant or equipment are identified, assessed and controlled.
58.8.6.3 Special Risks
Disposal of Refrigerators or Freezers

Refrigerators or freezer units which are being scrapped should have there doors/lids
removed and the power lead/plug removed. Any harmful residues should be cleaned out
and if they contain an ozone depleting substances in the form of the refrigerant gas, this
should be removed before disposal. Departments should contact Mechanical Services,
Maintenance Department, Property Services for advice on degassing the units in a safe
controlled manner as required by the regulations.
Equipment Containing Radioactive Sources
Where equipment contains a radioactive source the requirements of the Health (Radiation
Safety) Regulations 1994 should be followed. Departments should consult with their
Departmental Radiation Safety Officer or the University Radiation Protection Officer
(8344 7010) on the requirements. Where possible the radioactive source should be returned
to the manufacturer/supplier and if the equipment is licensed through the Radiation Safety
Unit, Health and Community Services, Victoria, they should be notified of the
disposal/transfer together with the license or permit number. The Risk Management Office
should also be informed.
Equipment Containing Hazardous Products
Where equipment or plant contains asbestos or asbestos containing products or
ozonedepleting substances either the Occupation Health and Safety (Asbestos)
Regulations or the Environment Protection Act 1970 , Industrial Waste Management Policy
(Control of OzoneDepleting Substances) should be followed.
58.9 Laboratory Project Cessation

58.9.1 Purpose
This procedure provides guidelines for disposal of hazardous waste on completion of
project. It also ensures compliance with all legal requirements for disposal of any
hazardous wastes including unwanted chemicals.
58.9.2 Application
The procedure applies to all hazardous wastes generated (i.e. chemical, biological and
radioactive), as well as to the disposal of surplus or unwanted chemicals.
Unwanted or surplus chemical reagents may fall in to (but are not limited to) the following
categories;
Carcinogens, mutagens and teratogens
Drugs of addiction
Heavy metal solutions or suspensions
Pesticides & Herbicides
201
Expired use by date substances

Photographic chemicals
Thiols and mercaptans
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
Scheduled poisons
Other toxic or hazardous substances
58.9.3 Legislation
Dangerous Goods (storage & handling) Regulations 2000
Occupational Health & Safety (Hazardous Substances) Regulations 1999
58.9.4 References
Australian Standard 2243 Safety in Laboratories, parts 1 to 10
Australian Dangerous Goods Transport Code 6th Edition
List of Hazardous Substances 2nd Edition http://www.nohsc.gov.au/search/hazsub/
EHS Manual Section 5.8 Waste Disposal
Section 5.8.1 Summary of Waste Disposal Methods
Section 5.8.2 Disposal of Hazardous Waste
Section 5.8.3 Disposal of Chemical Waste
Section 5.8.4 Disposal of Glass
Section 5.8.5 Disposal of Sharps
Section 5.8.6 Disposal of Animal Carcasses
Section 5.8.7 Disposal of Radioactive Wastes
Section 5.8.8 Disposal of Plant or Equipment
Ensure waste chemicals are prepared for disposal and correctly segregated, contained and
labelled.
Render all plant and equipment to a safe state and mark accordingly.
Ensure all compressed gas cylinders that are not in use removed from the libratory areas
and returned to the supplier.
The cost factor of the disposal of hazardous substances should be factored into the project
prior to its commencement.
Provide advice on suitable storage methods, labelling and disposal options.
202

Before commencing any work in a laboratory, a written disposal procedure is required for
all waste that will be generated. Supervisors should include waste storage and handling
procedures in the project risk assessment. contact should be made with the chemistry Store
to ascertain whether surplus chemicals can be sold or donated.
All waste containers must be labeled with the appropriate labels which must contain the
following minimum information:
chemical name/s and hazard diamond/s
the responsible persons name, lab room number and Department code
Labels are available from the Chemistry Store and the RMO. These labels will have the
appropriate information and hazard diamond printed on them.
Where there are many chemicals for disposal, a file (in Microsoft on disk or by email) is to
be provided to the University Safety Officer for assessment of disposal route and costs
involved. It should contain the following information:
Box number, lab of origin and Department code
Full chemical name no abbreviations of formulas
Grade purity (if known or applicable)
Size total quantity in milliliters or grams
No. of packstotal number of containers
Opened do any of the containers still have the original seal unbroken
All cylinders should be safely stored, and cylinders not in use should be removed from
laboratory areas or returned to the supplier.
203
204
Chapter 6. Emergency Response

61 Emergency Management Plans June 2003
61.1 Purpose
To ensure effective procedures for all emergency situations which may cause harm to
persons, property or the environment.
61.2 Application
This procedure defines requirements for the development of an effective site emergency
plan. It applies to all sites operated and controlled by the university.
61.3 Legislation
Dangerous Goods Act 1985 Dangerous Goods Regulations 2001
61.4 References
University of Melbourne Environment Policy
Australian Standard 3745: Emergency control organisation and procedures for buildings,
structures and workplaces
Refer to procedures 6.2 for details for emergency procedure responsibilities.

Each site will develop a formal Emergency Management Plan appropriate to the level of
risk at the site in accordance with the template and taking into consideration:
the scope; the program shall identify and address all reasonably foreseeable on and off
site emergencies which could arise from the sites operations and where applicable shall
consider their impact on nearby sites;
the organisational structure for combating emergencies, including the roles of external
authorities and agencies;
the objectives of the program and their priority;
methods to combat foreseeable emergencies (including bomb threats);
communication requirements and potential barriers to communication during emergencies;
the impact of appropriate levels of staffing and availability of key people at different
times (including times when the site may be not be staffed); who will be responding to the
media;
205
emergency training requirements;

emergency exercise requirements;
The procedure for management of foreseeable emergencies shall be summarised in a site
Emergency Procedure. Model procedures for emergency scenarios are in Section 6.2.1 of
the EHSM. The Emergency Procedure shall include:
the objectives and priority for emergency response;
the levels of emergency and how they will be communicated;
how the alarm can be raised (both internally and externally);
who needs to be notified of emergencies and the required time of notification;
the resources required to respond to emergencies and identification of the resources which
are best provided by the site and those which will be provided by external agencies;
arrangements for communication during emergencies, including communication with
neighbours;
requirements for evacuation and role call of people (including contractors and visitors);
provision of First Aid;
how the "all clear" will be declared and who is responsible for the declaration;
requirements for preservation of evidence; and
investigation, recording and reporting the results of investigations
suitability of places for safe assembly.
The Emergency Plan shall be maintained under document control and shall be reviewed at
appropriate intervals.
Where applicable, copies of the Emergency Management Plan and/or other required
documentation shall be provided under document control to external support agencies and
statutory authorities.
All personnel (including contractors and visitors) shall be provided with relevant information
and training in the emergency procedure. Training shall be provided at induction and shall
be repeated at suitable intervals.
Personnel shall be trained at suitable intervals in relevant emergency response techniques,
taking into consideration their roles and the objectives of the Emergency Management
Plan.
Information regarding foreseeable emergency scenarios, their potential impact on the
surrounding community and the appropriate community response in the event of an
emergency shall be provided to the community.
Emergency response exercises will be conducted at defined intervals. Emergency exercises
will be conducted in conjunction with relevant external agencies at least annually.
Emergency response equipment will be registered and shall be maintained, inspected and
tested at defined intervals. Where applicable, the frequency, authority performing the
inspection and testing and records of inspection and testing shall be retained in accordance
with legislative requirements.
The scope of the emergency response program and arrangements for responding to
emergencies shall be periodically reviewed.
206
Emergency Response
62 Model Emergency Procedures

62.1 Purpose
To ensure effective procedures for all situations which may cause harm to persons,
property or the environment.
62.2 Application
The model emergency procedures apply to all sites under control of the university. Site
specific issues not covered below will require planning and procedures be developed and
implemented by the site emergency control organisation.
All departments should implement relevant emergency procedures with evaluation of their
effectiveness at least annually under the direction of the Building Emergency Controller.
62.3 Legislation
62.4 References
University of Melbourne Environment Policy
Australian Standard 3745: Emergency control organisation and procedures for buildings,
structures and workplaces
Refer to procedures 6.3 for details for emergency procedure responsibilities.

MODEL PROCEDURES listed below for:
Fire
Evacuation of lecture theatres, class rooms and teaching laboratories
Bomb threat
Chemical spill
Biological incidents
Gas leak
Threat of aggressive or violent behaviour, civil disturbance
Injury
Flood
Power failures
Motor vehicle incidents
207
Critical incident procedures

After hours procedure Suspicious Mail and Packages An incident report (S3 form) as well
as an evacuation report may also need to be submitted for the above situations.
FIRE
Any person discovering a fire should:
1. Activate the nearest break glass fire alarm switch.
2. Rescue any person in immediate danger, if it is safe to do so.
3. Isolate the fire (close doors), alert other people in the immediate area.
4. Contact Security on extension 46666 giving the following details:
Location of fire (building name and floor)
Extent of fire (or nature of incident)
Are there any injured persons (e.g. is an ambulance or medical assistance require
Name of person reporting the fire or incident. This call should be reported to the Floor
Warden.
5. Fight fire if safe to do so.
6. Take direction from the Floor warden.
EVACUATION OF LECTURE THEATRES, CLASS ROOMS AND
LABORATORIES
These areas require explicit organization because of the potential for large numbers of
people to be assembled in a small area. The person in charge of the class shall maintain
control of the class, and take direction from the Floor Warden.
Lecturers should assess class numbers prior to the commencement of the lecture. If aisle
ways are overcrowded, excess students (those without seats) should be requested to move
from the theatre. Student Administration may be able to assist if the theatre or class room
is consistently too large, or too small. Lecture theatres throughout the University have now
been fitted with emergency procedures fitted to all overhead projectors, which should be
displayed prior to commencement of the class, and again at the hearing of the fire
evacuation alarm.
UPON HEARING THE ALARM SIGNAL or WHEN NOTIFIED OF AN EMERGENCY:
The person in charge of the class should direct students to:
Stand fast and push chairs, large bags, etc under desks or benches.
Turn off electrical devices and laboratory operations that are not safe to be left
unattended.
In controlled sequence, move along gangways to main aisles and exit in an orderly
manner through the nearest appropriate exit.
These procedures are essential in an after hours situation (e.g. outside 8.45am to 5.00pm
Monday to Friday) when the normal support of the building emergency team will not be
available. In an after hours situation, the person in charge should ensure that on leaving
the building, the evacuated persons stay together as a group until contacted by the
emergency services Fire Brigade or Police or by the University Security service. This is
necessary to account for all persons in the building at the time. When directed to do so
recover any potential affects left in the building.
BOMB THREAT PROCEDURES
208
Emergency Response
Bomb Threat Checklist

Although most bomb threats are hoaxes aimed at causing disruption to the normal
daytoday routine of an organization, they must be taken seriously. The most common
form of threat is by telephone, warning that a bomb has been placed in a building. Faculty
and Departments Enquires Office, together with Heads of Schools have been target areas
to receive such calls.
Recording the Call
The more information you obtain from the caller, the better the threat can be assessed. As
an aid to recording the necessary information, a bomb threat checklist can be found in the
front of the internal telephone book. If a bomb threat call is received, it is important that
the person receiving the call try to remain calm and does not hang up even if the caller
hangs up. This open line may assist in tracing the origin of the call.
Reporting the Call
Immediately report the call using another telephone to the University Security Officer on
8344 6666 and the bomb threat to the area supervisor. If examinations are being held in
the building under threat the call must also be reported to the Director, Academic &
Student Services 8344 4784.
The University Security Officer, police or fire brigade will advise whether a building
evacuation is necessary. However, if there is any difficulty contacting the Security Officer
or Director, Academic & Student Services, or the bomb threat caller indicated that the
bomb will go off in the immediate future, the affected area (or building) should be
evacuated using the normal building evacuation procedures.
Unidentified Packages
If what appears to be a bomb is found e.g. an unidentified package then:
under no circumstances should it be touched;
clear the immediate area;
report the incident to the area supervisor;
ensure that the University Security Officers are alerted on extn. 8344 6666.
CHEMICAL SPILL: LIQUID OR SOLID
See section 6.9 of the EH&S manual for detailed information on chemical spills.
See section 5.5 of the EH&S manual for information on radioactive spills.
BIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS
Needlesticks, blood splashes, and other spills of potentially infective material (see Section
5.3) require that the Building Emergency Controller be notified. For small contained spills, a
solution of bleach and disposable paper towels can be used to clean blood and other
matter. Appropriate gloves should be worn. Waste materials should be disposed of in a
labelled biohazard bag. These items are available from Chemistry Store. For sharps,
needle sticks and other instrumentation that is contaminated, Security on 46666 should be
contacted. All Security Officers have access to sharps containers, and are trained in
disposal of sharps. The officer will remove the item to the sharps bin. It is the responsibility
of the BEC or delegate to arrange to clean the area with disinfectant. Cleaning Services
can be contacted for more major clean up requirements. Where infectious biological
material may require the evacuation or barricading off of an area, Maintenance should be
notified on 46000 to provide assistance. The BEC should remain in the area to prevent
entry by unauthorised personnel until proper barricading can be set up.
209
GAS LEAK
1. Rescue any person in immediate danger if safe to do so. Use of selfcontained breathing
apparatus is only appropriate for trained persons working in pairs.
2. Turn off gas at source if possible.
3. Isolate the area if hazardous volatiles are released by closing doors and windows. If
flammable vapours are released do not operate any electrical switches. Where fitted,
activate emergency shutoff or isolate possible ignition sources at switchboard.
4. The material safety data sheet will have information on the toxicity and flammability of
the gas, and provision of first aid.
5. Call security on 8344 6666 and maintenance on 8344 6000.
6. Consider evacuation:
Partial evacuation of floor by word of mouth
Building evacuation initiated by pressing a break glass alarm. (This alerts the Building
Evacuation Team, calls the fire brigade, and calls Maintenance to the building.)
7. The material safety data sheet will have information on the toxicity and flammability of
the gas, and provision of first aid.
8. Do no reenter area until advised by an emergency team member or other emergency
professional that it is safe to do so.
THREAT OF AGGRESSIVE OR VIOLENT BEHAVIOUR, CIVIL
DISTURBANCE
In the event of being confronted by an aggressive or potentially violent person:
1. Try to remain calm.
2. Alert supervisor.
3. Be firm but polite with the person and let them know that their behaviour is not
acceptable.
4. If the behaviour of the person is such that outside intervention is required, contact or
arrange to have contacted Security on 8344 6666.
5. You should not feel obliged to rectify the situation on your own. The Security staff are
trained to handle these situations.
6. Abusive phone calls: hang up the phone and notify your supervisor. If calls persist,
contact the Manager, Telephone Systems.
7. Security telephones, placed at strategic points on campus, are identified by a blue light
and connect direct to security at central control 24 hours a day.
INJURY
1. Move injured person away from danger if safe to do so.
2. Call ambulance on 0000. State the location clearly. Have someone from the ECO meet
the ambulance outside the building.
3. Security staff are trained in first aid extn. 46666, 24 hours a day.
4. Student Health can provide emergency assistance during the hours 8.45 am to 5.00 pm;
phone 8344 6904 or 8344 6905.
5. For first aid information refer to Appendix A.
210
Emergency Response
All injuries on campus need to be reported to the Risk Management Office using the S3
form. In addition, the employer is required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act to
report serious injuries, and incidents with the potential for serious injury, in writing to the
Victorian Workcover Authority within 48 hours. This will be undertaken by the Risk
Management Office. For further information refer to Section 8.5 of the EH&S manual.
FLOOD
1. Turn off water at source if possible.
2. If possible, isolate electrical sources at the switch board or call maintenace.
3. If available and considered useful, local spill kits should be used to restrict the flow of
water.
4. Isolate area by closing doors.
5. Call security on 8344 6666 and maintenance on 8344 6000.
Evacuation Team, and in most building also alerts the fire brigade and Maintenance)
POWER FAILURE
1. Contact maintenance on 8344 6000 to determine cause of failure
2. Call security on 8344 6666
Evacuation Team, calls the fire brigade, and calls Maintenance to the building.)
MOTOR VEHICLE INCIDENT
1. Contact emergency personnel on 000, as required.
2. Assist any injured people, until arrival of ambulance.
3. Prevent unauthorised persons from causing congestion at the accident scene.
4. Assist and liaise with authorities at scene. 5
. Move the vehicle from the carriageway and secure if possible. Be alert of hazards such
as other traffic and potential fuel leaks.
6. At scene of accident seek full details of any other vehicle(s) including registration
numbers, names and address of both drivers and/or owners.
7. Remain at scene until completely clear of people, vehicle and debris.
8. Admission of liability must not be made.
9. Report all damage immediately to Insurance Manager on 8344 6111.
CRITICAL INCIDENT PROCEDURE
Refer Academic Registrar.
AFTER HOURS PROCEDURES
Refer to section 5.1.2 (After Hours and Unattended Experiments) of the EH&S manual
manual. SUSPICIOUS MAIL AND PACKAGES
211
1. If the item is unopened, do not open it

2. If you have opened the item and it contains powder, liquid, or other substance DO NOT
HANDLE IT ANY FURTHER.
3. Avoid contact with the substance, and do not touch eyes, nose or mouth
4. If possible wash hands and lower arms with soap and cold water
5. Place the item in a sealed plastic bag or cover with a large container such as a rubbish
bin
6. Place any other items exposed to the mail or package in a second bag
7. Stay in the immediate area and prevent others from entering to reduce changes of
contamination
8. Call Security on 46666 and notify them of the situation giving details of location etc.
9. Notify the Area Supervisor or Head of Department
10. Notify Maintenance on 46000 to shut down any ventilation equipment
11. Await Security and the Emergency Services, they will take on responsibility of the
situation
12. Emergency Services will arrange decontamination of the areas exposed
13. Self decontamination should be conducted under the guidance of the emergency
services
14. Evacuate the building when directed to do so, ensure that staff stay in the assemble
area Identifying Suspicious Packages:
Oily, stained, discoloured or smelly envelopes
Protruding wires, foil or tape
Excessive postage or wrapping
Excessive weight
Poorly identified addressee
Lopsided or uneven envelopes
Postage that does not match the return address
Foreign or unexpected mail
ASSESSMENT OF POSSIBLE EMERGENCIES
The University shall review and revise, where necessary, its emergency response
procedures, in particular after the occurrence of accidents or emergency situations. The
University shall also periodically test such procedures where practicable. The model
procedures above have been selected as a result of an Assessment of Possible
Emergencies.
63 Emergency Evacuation Procedure Duties
212
Emergency Response
63.1 Purpose
Procedures are required for all University buildings to ensure rapid response to emergencies
which may need evacuation.
Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985 requires that employers ensure that the means
of access to and exiting from the workplace are safe and without risks to health.
63.2 Application
Duty statements for nominated officers of emergency response teams.
63.3 Legislation
63.4 References
Australian Standard AS 37452002 Emergency control organisation and procedures for
buildings.
The Risk Management Office provides advice and service to the university community for
all matters relating to the protection and conservation of human and physical assets of the
University and the environment, and provides assistance in identification, assessment and
control of risk which could result in an emergency.
The Risk Management Office will provide:
monitoring and recording of emergency evacuations and drills;
active intervention to facilitate the appointment of a Building Emergency Controller
for every building
training for designated emergency evacuation personnel
hats for designated emergency evacuation personnel
model emergency evacuation procedures
assistance to Building Emergency Controllers in adapting model procedures to the
needs of a building
coordination of provision of information for inclusion in the Building Emergency
Information Book.
facilitate audits of risk areas and training in management of risks.
63.5.2 Security Office
Maintain a 24hour presence on campus. All security officers are trained in first aid and
carry twoway radio.
The security office can be expected to call for appropriate internal or external assistance
and direct them to the emergency location, and attend the emergency location at short
notice.
213
On notification of an emergency situation Security will establish the details of the incident:
Location of the incident (Building name, floor level)
Type of incident (fire, gas leak etc)
Are there any injured persons (is an ambulance or medical assistance required)
Name of person reporting the incident
Has the evacuation of the affected area commenced.
Once the details are established the officer will:
Contact the appropriate public authority e.g. ambulance service, fire brigade.
Notify the office of the Universitys Emergency Controller of the situation.
Stand by for further calls from the building emergency control station until informed
that the emergency situation is over.
63.5.3 Traffic Office
On notification of an emergency situation the Traffic Office will:
Contact the duty Traffic Officer at the probable entry point for the emergency
services.
The appropriate duty Traffic Officer will try to minimise any congestion that may
restrict access of the public emergency vehicles onto the main campus.
the Traffic Office will organise available staff to assist in controlling the traffic in
the vicinity of the building affected by the emergency.
Contact the necessary supporting services in the University.
63.5.4 Maintenance
Maintenance responds to all emergency drill requests and follows up on any emergency
equipment deficiencies identified.
On notification of an emergency situation the Maintenance Section will:
Dispatch the necessary personnel to the building concerned.
On arrival at the building, Maintenance Staff will liaise with the Building
Emergency Controller over the operation of installed plant and equipment and
isolate services as necessary.
63.5.5 Architectural Services
Provide computer generated floor plans showing evacuation routes, location of dangerous
goods, fire indicator panel and external assembly areas on request.
63.5.6 University Emergency Controller
Ensure effective application of procedures and personnel during major incidents.
Review model procedures.
Annually review effectiveness of procedures.
Liaise with media.
214
Emergency Response
63.5.7 Student Health Service

During major emergencies Student Health Service can provide a Medical Team.
63.5.8 Deans or Heads of Academic and Administrative Departments
Appoint and support a Building Emergency Controller and Deputy for each
building*
Provide appropriate resources and authority to ensure implementation of their
function.
Ensure that at least one Emergency Evacuation drill is carried out per year in each
building.
(*For buildings with joint occupancy, all Departments/Sections shall contribute members to
the Emergency Control Organisation ECO in proportion of number of equivalent fulltime
staff in occupancy, or make other practicable arrangements).
63.5.9 Deans or Heads of Campus
Ensure that site specific emergency planning is carried out.
Ensure that a site ECO is appointed and receives appropriate training. Provide appropriate
resources and authority to ensure implementation of their functions.
63.5.10 Emergency Control Organisation
Ensure that the Emergency Procedures and supporting documentation which may be
required to combat an emergency are assembled in an Emergency Management Plan.
This is to be provided at locations in accordance with regulatory requirements. As a
minimum and where applicable, the information provided shall include:
a table of contents;
a location map;
the site layout, including the location of emergency response equipment;
a map of the site effluent and storm water systems;
emergency phone numbers;
a site dangerous goods and hazardous substances manifest and register where
applicable;
material safety data sheets for the chemical hazards on site;
description of the alarm systems;
emergency impact considerations;
any special arrangements for combating specific types of emergencies.

A Building Emergency Controller in each building adapts the model procedures in this
manual to the needs of the building, appoints and organises training for Floor Wardens and
other designated emergency personnel who are members of the Building Emergency
Evacuation Team, organises evacuation drills, and takes charge in the event of an
evacuation emergency or drill.
215
Procedures need to cope with absences of staff. The Building Emergency Controller may
delegate extra duties to members of the emergency evacuation team, or to building
occupants.
Staff undertaking duties as emergency personnel may be exposed to human products
where there is a risk of transmission of disease. Staff volunteering for these duties may be
required to receive vaccination through Student Health.
63.5.12 Building Emergency Controller Emergency Action
On sounding of the building fire signal the Building Emergency Controller shall:
1. Don a white hat
2. Proceed to the building emergency control station (usually at the Fire Indicator Board)
3. Check the Fire Indicator Board and take reasonable steps to ascertain the cause of the
alarm. (e.g. send a runner to the location.)
4. Ensure that Security has been contacted on 46666
5. Establish and maintain contact with the University Maintenance Officers in attendance
who have responsibility for the control of services (gas, water, and electricity)
6. Receive reports from Floor Wardens or Section Wardens on the state of evacuation of
their areas of responsibility
7. Direct the Floor Wardens to:
remain at the control point, or
go to a floor which has not been evacuated, or
proceed to the Assembly Point
8. Maintain control over the evacuation procedures until relieved by the Senior Public
Authority Officer
9. Advise the Senior Public Authority Officer of the state of evacuation of the building,
and liaise with the officer until the termination of the emergency
10. When the emergency is terminated:
Inform the building occupants at the Assembly Point to return to the building;
11. Prepare a brief written report based on Evacuation Checklist (Appendix A) and
forward to the Risk Management Office.
12. Convene a debriefing meeting of the Emergency Evacuation Team and relevant
personnel to assess and improve procedure.
13. Inform Maintenance of any problems that may be maintenance related, e.g.. failure of
systems, unsafe conditions, etc.
14. Implement recommendations from the meeting.
63.5.13 Building Emergency Controller Nonemergency Functions
Modify the University model emergency evacuation procedures for the building, and
document the procedures in the Building Emergency Information Book. This book must be
updated annually.
Determine the appropriate structure for the Building Emergency Evacuation Team.
216
Emergency Response
Appoint all members of the Building Emergency Team and arrange replacements as
occupancy of the building changes, in consultation with the appropriate Dean, Head or
Senior staff within the building.
Maintain a register of current members of the Building Emergency Team.
Coordinate the training for new members of the Building Emergency Evacuation Team as
they are appointed, in cooperation with the Risk Management Office.
Report obstructions to aisles, passageways, stairways and fire exits, and take such action
as they are able to correct the problem. Refer to section 6.5 for clear corridors policy.
Nominate times and dates of at least one emergency evacuation drill per year for each
building.
Prepare and mount notices regarding evacuation procedures and the duties of occupants in
the event of an emergency, in consultation with the Risk Management Office.
Determine the most appropriate evacuation routes for the building and ensure that Floor
Wardens advise occupants accordingly.
Report overcrowding of rooms to the person with management and control.
Maintain the Building Emergency Information Book in buildings with a Risk Rating 1, ie
have Dangerous Goods or large numbers of staff or students, developed with the Risk
Management Office, including a record of dangerous goods and equipment in the building.
Copies of all amendments must be sent to Security Office.
Determine the Assembly Point location in consultation with the Risk Management Office,
and take steps to make occupants aware of the location.
Construct a plan of action to deter persons from entering the building after the alarm has
sounded (e.g. delegate staff to stand at entrances to prevent entry).
Prepare an evacuation plan for the lecture theatres, class rooms and teaching laboratories
and implement action items (Evacuation of lecture theatres, class rooms, and teaching
laboratories.)
Responsibilities:
develop and maintain appropriate building evacuation procedures
appoint, in conjunction with management, members of the emergency control
organisation for the building
maintain a register of current members of the Building Emergency Team
ensure that such persons receive training in emergency procedures
undertake control of all emergency situations until relieved of duty by other
emergency professional such as MFB
maintain and update the Building Emergency Information Book (dangerous goods
buildings only).
63.5.14 Deputy Building Emergency Controller
In the absence of the Building Emergency Controller, the Deputy Building Emergency
Controller will take over these functions.
217
63.5.15 Floor Wardens Emergency functions

On sounding of the building evacuation alarm the Floor Wardens shall:
1. Don a yellow helmet
2. Enter each accessible room including toilets and direct occupants to leave the building.
Do not open doors which have hot handles or smoke coming from under door
3. Direct the Special Duties Officers to start prescribed duties
4. Report to the Building Emergency Controller on the state of evacuation of their floor
5. Take direction from the Building Emergency Controller
6. Prevention of re entry to building
63.5.16 Floor Wardens Nonemergency functions
The Floor Warden shall report to the Building Emergency Controller:
any obstructions to egress routes within building
local changes in the use of the building, hazardous goods or equipment, or members
of the emergency evacuation team;
fire isolating doors which are prevented from closing unaided;
faulty or missing fire extinguishers
Staff undertaking duties as emergency personnel may be exposed to human
products where there is a risk of transmission of disease. Staff volunteering for
these duties may be required to receive vaccination through Student Health.
63.5.17 Section Warden
Where the number of Floor Wardens is large (e.g. greater than ten) it may be appropriate
to appoint Section Wardens to whom a proportion of Floor Wardens report. The Section
Warden liaises with the Building Emergency Controller in planning and emergency
functions.
63.5.18 Special Duties Officer
Reporting to Floor Wardens, Special Duties Officers may carry out functions such as:
the security of large amounts of cash or other goods
making safe hazardous equipment or processes
escorting known handicapped persons from the building
63.5.19 First Aid Officers
Qualified first aiders should report to the Building Emergency Controller for direction.
If first aiders are made part of the ECO they can be identified by a yellow hard hat with
a sticker that has the first aid symbol of a green cross on a white background.
Staff undertaking duties as emergency personnel may be exposed to human products
where there is a risk of transmission of disease. Staff volunteering for these duties may be
required to receive vaccination through Student Health.
Authority:
Responsibilities following an incident:
218
Emergency Response
assess the situation

identify the life threatening condition and establish priorities of treatment
give immediate, appropriate and adequate treatment, bearing in mind that a
casualty may have more than one injury, and that some casualities will require
more urgent attention than others
arrange without delay for the casualty to be transferred to a doctor, hospital or
home, according to the severity of the injury or condition
report all incidents and treatment to supervisor.
Other responsibilities:
assess first aid kit needs and maintain first aid kits
63.5.20 Staff, Students, Visitors and Contractors
Follow university procedures.
Follow directions given by members of the Emergency Control Organisation.
Not wilfully harm or misuse anything provided by the university for their protection
or wellbeing.

63.6.1 Identification of Wardens
All emergency personnel are made readily identifiable to occupants and Fire Brigade by
the wearing of industrial safety helmets with the following colours:
Building Emergency Controller White
Floor Warden, Section Warden Yellow
Special Duties Officer Yellow
63.6.2 Emergency Management Team
Establishment of a building emergency team guidelines for desirable qualities of
members:
Persons involved in the emergency team should normally spend most of their
working day in that building.
Persons appointed should have some commitment to the task and have the
necessary aptitude to work as a team member under emergency conditions.
Consideration should be given to the nomination of team members based on the
position held, rather than the individual now available. That is, include a floor
wardens role as part of the duty statement for a particular position in the
department.
Emergency team members can carry out more than one role during the evacuation.
Deputy appointments should be made for all key building evacuation team members. All
emergency team members should be able and prepared to undertake the duties of any
other team member who is absent during an emergency.
219
63.6.3 Liability and Insurance

The University of Melbourne has in place various insurance policies to cover the potential
liability arising from the various activities of the University. One such policy is the Public
Liability Insurance. The intent of the Public Liability Insurance policy is to cover the
"insureds" legal liability for third party personal injury or third party property damage
caused by an occurrence in connection with the business of the University. Within the
definition of "Insured" under this insurance, employees of the University are included within
this definition "whilst undertaking activities at the request of the University". Therefore,
employees undertaking defined special duty roles such as of "Building Emergency
Controller" are afforded coverage under the Universitys Public Liability Insurance, subject
of course to the terms, conditions and exclusions of this insurance policy.
Personal Property brought to the University for personal use, where it is not of significant
value to the Department is not covered by the Univeristys Insurance Policy. Special
consideration may be made through the Head of Department for loss or damage in an
Emergency Situation to items of value belonging to a staff or student member.
64 Evacuation of Mobility Impaired Personnel

64.1 Purpose
To provide guidelines for the evacuation of mobility impaired personnel.
64.2 Application
To provide assistance where a person who cannot use stairs or has other disabilities needs
to move to a different level for emergency egress from a building.
64.3 Legislation
Occupational health and Safety Act 1985
64.4 References
Metropolitan Fire and Emergency Brigade recommended procedures
Commonwealth Fire Board Fire Safety Circular No 70
University of Melbourne Disability Liaison Office
64.5.1 Floor Warden
An able bodied person should be assigned to stay with that person until they reach
the Assembly Point.
The mobilityimpaired person should wait at the door of fire isolated stairs until
most stair traffic has passed that level, and then be assisted inside the fire isolated
stairwell, on the landing, to wait until assistance is available to enable the person to
be carried down the stairs.
The Floor Warden is responsible for informing the Building Emergency Controller,
who will be at the Main Emergency Control Point or Fire Board, that a mobility
impaired person needs assistance.
220
Emergency Response
Unless there is obvious danger at that location, the person should wait on the stair
landing for assistance from emergency personnel Fireisolated stairs are rated at a
minimum of two hours fire and smoke protection; (Fire isolated stairs can be
identified by (i) entry and exit via solid self closing fire doors; (ii) fire separation
from the rest of the building; i.e. not open stairways).
Where it is known that mobility impaired persons are regular occupants of a
building, it is prudent for the Floor Warden to bring this evacuation procedure to the
persons notice.
To be aware of evacuation procedure and location of fire isolated stairs.

Lifts must not be used for emergency evacuations. During an emergency, a fall down
crowded stairs would be of such consequence that all reasonable steps must be taken to
avoid it. Mobility impaired persons must be found a safe haven until appropriate assistance
is available (usually the Fire Brigade). A person must not be carried downstairs unless
sufficient people with sufficient strength and knowledge are present.
Unless there is obvious danger at that location, the person should wait on the stair landing
for assistance from emergency personnel. Fire isolated stairs are rated at a minimum of
two hours fire and smoke protection; in the event of a fire, this location is regarded as
quite safe until assistance arrives to carry the disabled person down the stairs.
65 Conducting Trial Drills

65.1 Purpose
To ensure that requirements of the Melbourne Fire Brigade are met by conducting annual
emergency drills.
65.2 Application
Emergency drills are an important part of the staff training associated with emergency
procedures.
65.3 Legislations
Not Applicable.
65.4 References
Australian Standard AS 37452002 Emergency control organisation and procedures for
buildings.
221
Emergency drills are activated by the Building Emergency Controller contacting
Maintenance, 8344 6000.
Coordinate the timing of the drill with Director or Head of School or Department and
Laboratory Manager of School or Department.
Where the Building Emergency Team is inexperienced, advance notice of the drill
(including date and approximate time) may be sent to all staff to assist their understanding
and cooperation. An experienced team can supervise a drill without notice to occupants so
that minimum interruption is caused to normal functions.
The Building Emergency Controller should download Conducting Emergency Drills Form
to record the time required to complete the drill, and note any problems and deficiencies.
Make a special effort to organise the drill when both the Head of Department and other
Manager(s) are present in the building.
The cooperation and active participation of senior officers in a building is essential to
ensure the wholehearted support of staff.
65.5.3 Wardens
After each drill, a debriefing meeting of Wardens should be held to evaluate the success of
the drill and to solve any problems that may have arisen.

Download Conducting Emergency Drill Form and follow the steps.
66 Policy on Clearways in Corridors

66.1 Purpose
The University is required, under various legal and other recommendations, to ensure that
corridors within buildings are kept free of obstruction to facilitate egress in case of
emergencies.
The Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985 requires that employers ensure that the
means of access to, and exiting from the workplace are safe and without risks to health.
66.2 Application
For the purpose of this policy, the term corridor includes stairways, landings and foyers.
222
Emergency Response
66.3 Legislation
The following two standards are referenced in the above regulations and are therefore
binding under Victorian law:
AS1940 Storage and Handling of flammable and combustible liquids
AS2243.1 Safety in Laboratories
66.4 References
Building Code of Australia Section D
It is the responsibility of Departments to comply with the above policy as far as
practicable. If any assistance is required, contact the Manager, Risk Management on
8344 6030.
Verification of the implementation of this policy will be checked by any of the following
means:
management system compliance audits
Internal audits conducted by Departments
Audits conducted by Internal Audit
Annual sign off on safety responsibilities by Heads of Department
Must not place items in corridors or use corridors as work space.

Irrespective of the width of the corridors :
Corridors and escape routes should not be used as work space;
Fixed and mobile appliances should not be positioned in corridors or escape routes;
Projection of objects into corridors and escape routes should be avoided;
Corridors and escape routes should be kept clear at all times and should not be
used as storage space for goods, furniture, equipment, and unwanted material,
even on a short term basis
Where seating is provided for the use of customers, or displays and plants are
placed in corridors, there should be a minimum width of 1.5 meters free space.
Details from legislative references:
223
indoor fireproof cabinets used for the storage of dangerous goods in excess of
minimum quantities should be kept clear of any passages, exits and ventilation
ducts (Regulation 405)
access and egress routes inside areas, rooms or buildings where dangerous goods
are stored or handled in excess of minimum quantities, are kept clear at all times
(Regulation 425 )
flammable and combustible liquids shall not be stored or used where they may
jeopardize escape from a building in the event of fire (AS1940 section 2)
all fireescape routes should be kept completely clear at all times (AS2243.1
section 1.5)
buildings with laboratories should have 1.5 metres clear width for corridors
(AS2243.1 section 2.1.3)
67 Installed Fire Protection Systems

67.1 Purpose
To provide information on fixed fire protection systems installed in university buildings.
67.2 Application
There are three major reasons underlying the legal requirements for the installation of fixed
systems in fire protection, these are:
Protection of property and equipment
Protection of personnel
Protection of or against special risks.
67.3 Legislation
67.4 References
Local Government regulations and accepted Australian Standards.
Building Code of Australia.
67.5.1 Property planning and development
All installed fire protection systems are maintained to comply with the legal requirements
including Local Government regulations and accepted Australian Standards.
67.5.2 Maintenance
The maintenance of such systems is under the control of the Maintenance Department,
Property & Buildings.
224
Emergency Response

All faults or anomalies should be reported immediately to Maintenance Department
extension 46000.
All building occupants should be familiar with the sound of their buildings fire alarm and
particular attention must be given to areas where difficulty in hearing the alarm exists e.g.
noisy workshops, darkrooms, sound proof rooms etc.
Fire doors which are fitted with a selfclosing mechanism should not be wedged open.
Fire stairways must not be used for storage, or contain any combustible material or objects
which will restrict the movement of persons in the stairway.

The Building Regulations require that where proposed alterations (together with other
alterations within the previous three years) represent more than 50% or the original volume
of the building, the entire building must be brought into compliance with current regulations.
The relevant Building Surveyor may consent to partial compliance if the safety, health and
amenity of persons accommodated in, or resorting to the building, or the risk of spread of
fire to or from adjoining buildings will not be substantially adversely affected by the
alterations.
In general terms, where existing buildings are refurbished, the Building Code of Australia
(BCA) requires that the floor area being refurbished is brought up to current standards.
This protection is achieved through the installation and provision of equipment or services
during the construction stage or during refurbishment of a building. The type of installed
system will depend upon the perceived risk of processes and tasks carried out in the
building, and the age of the building. The age of the building is relevant; at the date of
construction or major refurbishment the installed fire protection equipment will have
complied with the legal requirement, but will not necessarily reflect the latest technology.
The form of protection installed will either control a fire situation by extinguishing or
isolating it, detect that heat or smoke is present, or raise the building fire alarm system. In
any building, the installed equipment may combine these systems.
All fixed fire protection systems are connected to a fire panel which is part of a network
which relays the fire alarm signal to the Fire Brigade.
Alarm
The fire alarm is usually a bell installed on the outside of the building, and may include
repeater bells inside the building. Since 1986 it is a requirement for some class of new or
refurbished buildings to install a siren and warden communication points in a building to
supplement the external fire alarm bell.
The primary purpose of the alarm system is to notify the building occupants that a fire
situation has occurred. The activation of the fire alarm should be treated by all occupants
as a real event and the building evacuation procedure should be implemented.
Detection Systems
The detection system in buildings may sense either heat or smoke or a combination of
these. Smoke detectors are increasingly being used because of their earlier warning of an
emergency situation. Smoke detectors may also be used to activate fire doors to isolate
zones in the building.
Fire Doors
225
Fire doors are installed to minimise the spread of fire, including the passage of smoke
through a building.
Fire doors may be automatically operated by heat activated mechanisms or smoke
detectors. The securing of fire doors must be such that persons leaving an area via the fire
door can do so without the use of keys or similar at all times. Fire doors must not be
wedged open.
Fire Stairways
Fire doors are also fitted to fire isolated stairways which allow the safe egress from floors
within the building.
Fire Control Systems
Some buildings or sections of buildings are fitted with automatically activated sprinkler
heads. On activation, the sprinklers discharge a fine mist of water to extinguish/contain a
fire.
In other special risk locations such as flammable liquids storerooms, computer rooms (main
frames), flood systems are used to extinguish fire. Where gaseous flooding systems are
installed in normally occupied areas (e.g. computer rooms), a warning alarm is sounded
prior to the discharge of gas into the room. A warning notice instructing personnel what to
do should also be displayed.
Fire Hydrants and Hoses
Canvas fire hoses attached to or adjacent to fire hydrant points are installed only for use
by the Fire Brigade. They must not be used by untrained personnel as injury or excess
property damage may result.
The University has received a special dispensation on the requirements for canvas hoses in
buildings where there is no greater than a 30 m rise in a building, and the required mains
pressures are achieved.
68 Portable Fire Fighting Equipment

68.1 Purpose
To provide details of portable fire equipment provided in university building and vehicles.
68.2 Application
Portable fire fighting equipment are designed to provide the user with an appliance to
attend a small fire during its initial stage. When deciding to attack a fire, always designate
another person to raise the alarm and obtain a backup fire extinguisher.
68.3 Legislation
68.4 References
Fire Protection Association of Australia Chart.
226
Emergency Response
68.5.1 Staff Development and Training Unit
Provide Training Courses in conjunction with the Risk Management Office.
Provide advice, information and assistance where required.
68.5.3 Maintenance
Perform regular inspections and maintenance of portable fire units in buildings under the
control of the University.
Ensure that all staff and students receive the appropriate training, both at induction and
during their time in the Department.
The amount of combustible material in their area is kept to a minimum and have all
rubbish and excess packaging removed.
Keep all access routes to fire fighting equipment clear at all times.
Safety Inspections of Departments (See Section 10)
All emergency staff should be trained in the operation of the portable fire extinguishers.
All staff and students should be familiar with their buildings evacuation procedures and
with the use of installed fire fighting equipment.

Fire can erupt suddenly, without warning, at any time, causing damage to property or
people through heat, smoke or gases given off. For a fire to exist, three elements must be
present:
Fire / Air / Heat: the removal or control of one or more of these elements will stop the
fire.
Fire Hose Reel: Fire hoses are provided in all University buildings for use by University
staff on normal fires. Fire hose reels are permanently mounted on a wall or in a cabinet in
a readily accessible location, connected to a constant water supply. They are designed to
be operated by one person, and used only on carbonaceoustype fires such as wood, paper,
rubbish or textiles. They should never be used on fires involving live electrical
equipment.
To operate, turn on the water control valve before unwinding the hose. Discharge is
controlled at the nozzle end by a valve or twisting action.
Fire Blanket Where fire blankets are installed, they are used to smother the fire to exclude
oxygen. They are particularly useful if a persons clothing is on fire.
Fire Extinguishers Portable fire extinguishers are provided in all university buildings and
vehicles for use by University staff members. There are several types of fire extinguishers.
227
water Red in colour, it contains nine litres of water under pressure and is to be used
in an upright position. It is designed for use on carbonaceous solids such as wood,
paper, rubbish or textiles, and has a discharge period of 60 100 seconds. Water
extinguishers are unsuitable for flammable liquid fires.
foam Blue in colour, it contains nine litres of an aqueous filmforming foam
additive, and is to be used in an upright position. It is designed for use on flammable
liquid fires such as petrol, oils and paint and has a discharge period of 40 90
seconds.
wet chemical foam Gold in colour, it has a liquid alkaline extinguishing agent, and is
specifically designed for use in kitchens on deep fryer fires involving fat and
cooking oil.
These Extinguishers must never be used on fires involving live electrical equipment.
carbon dioxide Red in colour with a black band, it is designed for use on fires involving
flammable liquids and live electrical equipment. The discharge period depends on the size
of the extinguisher.
dry chemical Red in colour with a white band, it contains a bicarbonate based powder
and is suitable for fires involving flammable liquids and live electrical equipment. The
discharge period depends on the size of the extinguisher.
BCF (halon) Yellow in colour. These extinguishers have been withdrawn in accordance
with environmental guidelines since 1 January 1997. Please return any existing units to
Maintenance.
* Note: Departments shall be required to arrange the servicing of the fire extinguishers
fitted in their vehicles through the current contractor used by the University Maintenance. It
is recommended that servicing be carried out during the inspection visit in October of each
year. Departments can obtain confirmation of the onsite inspection dates from
Maintenance Department. The cost of servicing the fire extinguishers installed in motor
vehicles will be charged to Departments.
69 Safety Signage
69.1 Purpose
To ensure that safety signs are designed, purchased and installed. Signs will be installed in
compliance with current standards at the time of construction of the building, or in
accordance with the guidelines provided in the Building Code of Australia.
69.2 Application
All for permanently installed safety signs within or at the entrance to a building including
exit, emergency lighting, fire exit and directional signs. It does not list signs used for work in
progress in the grounds nor those required in the building on a short term basis e.g. building
works, experimental procedures.
69.3 Legislation
Not Applicable.
228
Emergency Response
69.4 References
Building Code of Australia
Universitys Project Management and Design Standards (refer Section 1, Clause 1.3.2)
Australian Standard AS1319 Symbolic Safety Signs
69.5.1 Property Planning and Development and Property Services
Install and maintain signage indicated on the signage schedule.
PP&D Project and Maintenance staff will ensure that contractors use the appropriate
signs in compliance with legislation and University requirements as specified.
Traffic and Security are responsible for traffic sign and monitoring the status of Hazchem
and information sign on campus.
Grounds staff will monitor and maintain the signs appropriate to their activities.
69.5.2 Heads of Departments
Departments are responsible for signage as indicated in the signage schedule
Departments are also responsible for temporary signage where required for research or
other working conditions.
69.5.3 Principal Biohazard Researcher
For biohazard PC2 laboratories, the principle researcher for the project is responsible for
the signs in conjunction with the Biohazard Committee who monitor the laboratories at
least annually.
Report any missing or damaged signs to supervisor.

Safety Signs In University Buildings Safety signage in buildings (including exit, emergency
lighting, fire exit and direction signs) will be installed in compliance with current Standards
at the time of construction of the building, or in accordance with the guidelines provided in
the Building Code of Australia.
The Australian Standard for safety sign specification is AS 1319. This standard and/or
current University standards should be used when designing, purchasing or installing safety
signs.
This policy is a requirement of the Universitys Project Management and Design Standards
(refer Section 1, Clause 1.3.2). Signage Schedule. The following schedule is for
permanently installed safety signs within or at the entrance to a building. It does not list
signs used for work in progress in the grounds nor those required in the building on a short
term basis e.g.. building works, experimental procedures.
229
Table 61: Permanently installed safety signs

Common to All Buildings (where service /
condition available)
Buildings with Laboratories or Workshops (or

where hazards exist)
No Smoking *
Hazchem (outer warning at entry gates) *
Do not use lifts in case of fire *
Composite Warning Notice for Dangerous
Emergency Exit *
Light
Goods (1)
Luminous
Building Entry
Direction Exit *
Internal Floors
Light
Danger Flammable Liquids
Luminous
No Smoking, No Naked Lights (Flammable Liquid

Stores (1))
Emergency Procedures
What to do
Exit Routes
Fire Hose Reel *
Fire Hose *
Fire Hydrant *
Fire Hydrant & hose reel *
Fire Extinguisher (location of) *
Fire Blanket *
First Aid
Danger No Entry Authorised Personnel Only
Danger Confined Space Entry by Permit Only
Danger No Entry Asbestos Fibres *
Emergency Shower
Emergency Eye Wash
Emergency Breathing Apparatus
Hearing protection must be worn in this area
Eye protection must be worn in this area
Safety footwear must be worn in this area
No eating or drinking
Radioactive Materials (1)
Laser Beam Type 3A or Type 4 (1)
Biological Hazard
Biohazard PC 2 Laboratory (2)
Electric Hazard
Warning Contains Asbestos *

Labelling of services, pipe work *
Notes on items in above table

Signs marked with * Installation and ongoing maintenance is responsibility of Property
and Buildings. Other Signs Installation by Property & Buildings, ongoing surveillance by
Departments, changes notified to P&B.
(1) Changes or additions should be notified to the Risk Management Office who will then
liaise with P&B to install or change the sign.
(2) For biohazard PC 2 laboratories, the principle researcher for the project is responsible
for the signs in conjunction with the Biohazard Committee who monitor the laboratories at
least annually.
Other Safety Signs
Traffic and Security are responsible for traffic sign and monitoring the status of Hazchem
and information sign on campus. Grounds staff will monitor and maintain the signs
appropriate to their activities. P&B Project and Maintenance staff will ensure that
contractors use the appropriate signs in compliance with legislation and University
requirements as specified. Departments are responsible for signage as indicated in the
signage schedule on the following page. Departments are also responsible for temporary
signage where required for research or other working conditions.
230
Emergency Response
Where a sign is a Property Planning and Services responsibility, they are to install it and
provide ongoing maintenance. Where it is a departmental responsibility it will be installed
by maintenance with the department providing ongoing surveillance of its relevance and
notifying the relevant section in Property Planning and Services of any changes required.
Where there are changes or additions to HAZCHEM, dangerous goods, radioactive
materials or Class 3 or 4 Laser beam signage the Risk Management Office should be
notified. They will then liaise with Property Services to install or change the sign. For
Biohazard PC 2 laboratories, the principle researcher for the project is responsible for the
signs in conjunction with the Biohazard committee who monitor the laboratories on a
minimum of a 12 month cycle.
610 Spill Control

610.1 Policy
To ensure copmpliance with all legal requirements for dealing iwth spills of chemical
substances on University premises, or premises under University control.
610.2 Application
This procedure applies to all areas of the University where chemical substances are
transported, purchased, stored, handled, or used, including vehicles of visitors or suppliers
who bring substances that are a potential hazard into the University.
A delivery vehicle may contain hazardous substances that do not belong to the University.
However, if a spill or leak from that vehicle occurs on University property and the
substance enters a storm water or trade waste drain, or causes injury, the University may
be liable for any subsequent action by a responsible Authority.
610.3 Legislation
Australian Dangerous Goods Code 6th Edition
610.4 References
NHMRC Guidelines for Laboratory Personnel Working with Carcinogenic or Highly Toxic
Chemicals
Code of Practice for Dangerous Goods 2000
AS 2243.10 Storage of Chemicals 1993
As 1940 Storage and Handling of Flammable and Combustible Materials
231
Ensure information is provided to staff and students to safely clean up spilled chemical
substances. This should include emergency services contact details, building evacuation
team contacts, and other staff as appropriate, and location of equipment and materials
such as self contained breathing apparatus or respirator locations.
Ensure that all supervisory staff are aware of the legal obligations regarding pollution from
spills
Ensure that staff receive training that includes spill control methods, appropriate waste
disposal methods and safe use of equipment used in spill control. See staff Training
Programs: Chemical Management.
Ensure that materials for spill control are available in all areas where chemical substances
are used, handled, stored or transported, and that the materials are clearly labeled and
signed.
Ensure appropriate equipment is cleaned, stored and maintained by qualified persons.
Provide information to Departments and Faculties on the legal requirements for spill control
and waste disposal.
Provide advice on disposal methods or spilled materials and disposal contractors.
Consult with Staff Development and Training to ensure that training about hazardous
materials is provided, and that the training includes spill control and clean up methods.
Put personal safety first keep clear of a spill unless trained in spill control and clean up.
Ensure only trained and competent staff attempt to clean up a chemical substance spill
Know where MSDSs are kept, or are available.
Attend training provided on spill control.
Follow written procedures provided for spill control
Use spill control equipment in the proper manner.
Store and maintain equipment as appropriate.

The following procedures and guidelines are for general guideance. Each laboratory,
department etc that uses Chemical Substances should have specific procedures for the
particular types of substances used within the workplace, or brought onto the premises
232
Emergency Response
610.6.1 Undertaking Risk Assessments

Who will clean up a chemical spill is determined by a risk assessment. The assessment will
involve 3 factors:
* The nature of the spilled chemical (High / Low Hazard material)
* The quantity spilled (Large / Small amounts)
* The location of the spill (difficult access, public site / bunded area)
When evaluating risks associated with spills, 3 questions should be considered:
* Is special training required to handle the situation?
* Is special equipment required to clean up the spill? (ie SCBA, PPE etc)
* Are special procedures required to clean up the spill (ie pumps, hoses etc)
The the response is HIGH to the first three factors, or YES to the second 3 questions then
the spill must be considered as HIGH RISK.
Generall spills of less than 1 litre of most chemicals can be considered LOW RISK.
All high risk spills should be handled by the Emergency Services Response Team.
Low risk spills may be handled by area workers under direct supervision.
610.6.2 Preparing for Spills
Know the Material Safety Data Sheet special requirements for spill control such as the
type of fire extinguisher required, incompatible substances, reactivity with substances such
as water or air.
Where a substance is unknown, or an experimental substance with no MSDS, always
treat as toxic.
Ensure there is:
* An amount of vermiculite sufficient to deal with a spillage of the largest container of
non corrosive liquids used in the immediate area should be on hand.
* A similar amount of Sodium Hydrogen Carbonate should be provided for spills of
corrosive liquids should be on hand.
* Sand "kitty litter" or an absorbent spill pillow should be available to prevent hazardous
substances entering drains or storm water systems.
* Appropriate PPE such as gloves, protective clothing, face shields, respirators or SCBA
should be readily available, depending on the hazards associated with the types of
substances used or stored in an area.
* A chemical resistant container with a close fitting lid that will hold at least the volume of
vermiculate and other contaminated material should be on hand for waste disposal of the
spilled material.
Wherever practicable, the storage and use of themical should be in an area which can
contain or restrict the flow from a spill site. On benches, this can be assisted by a raised lip
at the front of the bench, or by the use of spill trays.
In storage cabinets, trays should be provided that are compatible with the contents, and
will contain the contents of the two largest glass containers, or the largest metal or plastic
container.
233
For storage areas where liquids are involved, bunding should be considered. This is
mandatory for certain areas.
610.6.3 Cleaning the Spill
IMMEDIATE ACTIONS
* Clear the area
* Check for any persons involved
* Isolate the spill (if safe to do so)
* Contact the area supervisor or Safety Officer
The Primary concern is to protect health and safety. No action should be taken during an
emergency response that directly or indirectly violates this principle.
CONSIDERATIONS FOR EVACUATION
* Uncontrolled open flame
* Uncontrolled compressed gas release
* Any situation which poses imminent threat to human health or safety
When the alarm sounds, all persons should immediately exit the building an report to their
assigned assembly area. Elimination of potential sources of ignition should only be done if it
can be accomplished without personal risk.
HIGH RISK SPILLS
1. Contact the Emergency Services Team by calling 0000 or Security on 46666 and
explain the situation.
2. Determine who will take responsibility for the spill, ie Contractor, Fire Brigade, other
Emergency Service.
3. Ensure appropriate University Personnel are advised of the situation.
4. Follow any advice or information provided by the Emergency Response Team.
LOW RISK SPILLS
1. Have at least 2 trained workers to handle the spill
2. Use the proper protective equipment
3. Ensure fire protection is available for flammable spills
4. Control the source
5. Contain free liquids by damming, absorbing if appropriate
6. Place all spill residues in an appropriate manner
7. Decontaminate the affected area using an appropriate material
8. Decontaminate the salvage equipment
9. Analyse the area to ensure proper decontamination has taken place
10. Examine walkways, floors, stairs equipment etc for other hazards or damage
DEBRIEFING
All emergency personnel involved in the spill response should be debriefed after the spill has
been resolved.
234
Emergency Response
All spill control supplies should be restocked.

All damaged or used equipment should be repaired or refilled.
When the area is deemed clear, it can be reopened for operations.
235
236
Chapter 7. Specialised Hazards

71 Off Campus Travel and Work Policy Draft July 2003
71.1 Purpose
This policy sets out the Universitys requirements for making decisions about the
advisability of travel by University staff and students to off campus destinations.
71.2 Application
This policy applies where staff / students are undertaking activities away from University
campuses. This includes travel between the University campus and the site.
71.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety Act
71.4 References
Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade
PPP Section 14
FPP Section 8
71.5 Definitions
Workplace
The workplace is any location under management supervision. This locations to activities
offcampus.
Field Work
Is any work, study or research authorised by the University and conducted by staff or
students at an offcampus site
Remote Fieldwork
Is defined in terms of distance and inaccessibility e.g., Working off road more than 5 km
from a facility with phone or radio communication.
71.6.1 Deans, Heads of Department
Ensure implementation and compliance with this Policy for all staff and students within
their Faculty/Department.
Authorise all off campus work carried out within the Department and ensure appropriate
risk identification assessment and control measures have been undertaken.
Ensure that staff and students are competent and fit to undertake off campus trips, and
that the students are appropriately supervised during these excursions.
237
Ensure that information regarding the whereabouts and contact details of staff /students is
available for use by University staff on a needtoknow basis.
Obtain current and relevant student details, including medical information, emergency
contacts and any special requirements to be assessed prior to the activity taking place.
Ensure that adequate systems are in place for appropriate training and qualifications of
staff undertaking supervision of students on off campus activities.
Provide adequate documentation outlining safety and emergency procedures and other
environmental, health and safety issues to provide warnings and guidelines for staff and
students.
71.6.3 Supervisors
Conduct a risk assessment in conjunction with staff / students undertaking the off campus
activity and obtain relevant medical information and authorization forms.
71.6.4 Staff & Students
For local (within Australia) travel comply with Departmental Guidelines on travel and
fieldwork.
For overseas travel obtain DFAT Travel Risk advice on the location of intended travel and
seek relevant approval as detailed below.
Obtain medical advice to ensure fitness for participation in the off campus activity.
Ensure appropriate vaccinations have been undertaken where required.
Complete relevant authorization forms for travel.
Provide a current itinerary to the Department.
Immediately notify the Department of an incident, and report via an S3 form.
Comply with directions given by Senior University Staff as a result of any change to the
assessment of the level of safety of the destination.
Students are recommended to take out travel insurance.
Advice if needed should be obtained from the Risk Management Office on 8344 3444.

71.7.1 Considerations for Travel
Staff and students should take into consideration the following when traveling;
FITNESS FOR TRAVEL
Staff and students should consult their doctor or University Health Service to discuss any
conditions that may affect their participation in the activity and complete the Medical
Questionnaire for Off Campus Activities.
For staff or students traveling overseas where vaccinations may be required, they should
refer to
238
Specialised Hazards
Overseas Travel Vaccination Guidelines,
which sets out details of vaccines available. This form

should be completed and sent to the Occupational Health Nurse at University Health
Service for assessment to determine what vaccinations may be required. All information
submitted in this form will be kept confidential.
MODE OF TRANSPORT
Ensure mode of transport is appropriate, giving consideration to length of journey and
environmental aspects. Appropriate licenses should be obtained for specialist transport.
LOCATION
A system must be put into place to prevent or reduce the risk of injury to staff or students.
Consideration should be given to specific issues relating to location such as political and
environmental.
There must also be a system in place for the emergency management of an injured staff
member or student. If a student or staff member is injured, an incident form must be
completed documenting the event and the details of witnesses and other relevant
accounts.
Overseas Travel
Overseas Travel Approval Considerations for Students

Overseas Travel Approval Considerations for Staff
The University has in place procedures and an approval process to travel overseas.
The University procedure is based on advice issued by the Department of Foreign Affairs
and Trade (DFAT) in respect of the level of safety in overseas locations.
DFAT advice about individual countries contains descriptions of the current level of safety
and makes recommendations about particular activities, places and circumstances under
which varying degrees of caution should be exercised (refer
http://www.dfat.gov.au/travel/index.html). DFAT advice normally involves a range of
advice depending on the level of risk that has been assessed. This may range from a
reminder to be aware of personal safety to a recommendation not to travel at all for
countries with the highest level of risk.
All decisions regarding staff or student permission to travel to an overseas
destination for University related purposes must be based on advice from the
Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade (DFAT).
Determination of the essentiality of travel and exemptions from adhering to DFAT
advice may only be made by Deans of Faculty for faculty staff, VicePrincipals
for central administration staff and the VicePrincipal and Academic Registrar for
students.
The University will retain current and accurate information regarding the
whereabouts and contact details of students and staff members travelling
overseas for Universityrelated purposes and this information will be accessible at
short notice.
Students and staff who are overseas for Universityrelated purposes are required
immediately to comply with any direction given by the ViceChancellor, a Dean or
VicePrincipal as a result of a change in the assessment of the level of safety of
the particular overseas destination.
Deans, Deputy ViceChancellors and VicePrincipals are accountable for the
implementation and oversight of this policy.
ACTIVITIES
239
For all hazardous activities undertaken off campus, a documented risk assessment
should be performed using a risk assessment form located in Appendix A of this
manual. This should be reviewed periodically.
71.7.2 Maintaining Current Records
1. The Director, Risk Management Office has responsibility for maintaining an accurate
and current database of DFAT advice for overseas destinations that is accessible by all
staff and students and for providing advice about, and communicating any changes in,
DFAT advice to students and staff.
2. Heads of Department are responsible for furnishing the relevant Faculty General
Manager or VicePrincipal with details of travel itineraries and contact details for faculty
staff members travelling overseas for Universityrelated purposes.
3. Faculty General Managers and VicePrincipals are responsible for retaining current and
accurate information regarding the whereabouts and contact details of faculty staff or
central administrative staff respectively travelling overseas for Universityrelated purposes.
This information must be accessible for use by University staff on a needtoknow basis at
short notice.
71.7.3 Insurance
Staff and students, must have appropriate medical / travel insurance, and insurance of
equipment being taken off campus. This should be arranged through the Risk Management
Office, Insurance Manager.
Regular advice updates are available from the Risk Management Office website:
http://www.unimelb.edu.au/rmo/
Head of School
Departmental Manager
Poisons Information (24 hour)
13 1126
POLICE FIRE AMBULANCE
000
Police Search and Rescue Squad
03 9537 1006
Outside Metropolitan Area (free call)
1800 815 257
Water Police / Rescue Coordination Centre
03 9534 7361
Victorian State Emergency Services

floods) 24 hours
03 9696 6111
VicRoads Traffic Hazards

conditions)
240
(storms or
(emergency road
13 1170 (State wide)
Melbourne University Security Service
03 8344 6666 (use in emergency only)
VWA Incident Notification (for serious incidents /

spills only)
132 360
Specialised Hazards

The International Office organises exchange programs for students studying at the
University in a number of countries and institutions around the world.
The office can provide assistance with travel, accommodation and living costs.
For further information please contact the International Office on 8344 7452, or attend an
information session held every Tuesday and Thursday at 1:00 2:00 pm in the Conference
Room of the International Centre (John Smyth Building).
72 Diving Safety Rules

72.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with legal obligations by informing Departments of
Diving Safety requirements.
72.2 Application
The procedure applies to all member of the University (including staff working on contract
to the University) who participate in diving using SCUBA equipment for the purposes of
teaching, study or research.
72.3 Legislation
Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985
Confined Spaces Regulations and Code of Practice.
72.4 References
NH&MRC Codes of Practice relating to SCUBA
AS/NZS 2299.1 Occupational Diving Operations: Standard Operational Practice 1999
AS/NZS 2299.2 Occupational Diving Operations: Scientific Diving
AS/NZS 2299.3 Occupational Diving Operations: Recreational Diving
AS 2815 Parts 14: Training and Certification of Occupational Divers
AS 4005 Series: Training and Certification of Recreational Divers
72.5.1 Department Managers and Supervisors
Ensure that all staff participating in diving activities have current SCUBA or equivalent
diver qualifications.
Confirm all relevant staff and students have had an annual medical for fitness to dive.
Ensure that appropriate risk assessments have been documented, and that adequate
control measures are in place in accordance with Section 3.1 of the EHSM.
Designate staff to be a Record Supervisor, to be responsible for maintaining dive records.
241
Designate an Equipment Supervisor, to be responsible for the storage, maintenance, testing

and use of the equipment held by the Department.
72.5.2 Staff and Students
Comply with all directives issued by the department.
Pass an annual medical for fitness to dive carried out by a certified medical practitioner.
Report all incidents as defined Section 4 Communication and Reporting as soon as possible
after the event to the Dive Leader or Dive Coordinator.

Diving Safety Rules issued in 1983 by the Marine Science Advisory Committee and the
General Safety Committee have been adopted by the Council of the University of
Melbourne. These requirements have now been updated according to the Australian
Standards for Occupational Diving as required.
72.6.1 Equipment
All diving equipment should be tested according to the manufacturers specifications or
annually.
All testing and maintenance shall be recorded in the departmental equipment log book.
Equipment should be checked by users, and any deficiencies or defects reported to the
equipment supervisor immediately. This equipment should be removed from circulation to be
repaired or disposed of.
Staff and students are not permitted to use privately owned SCUBA tanks or vests
without the written authority from the Departmental Equipment Supervisor.
72.6.2 Diving Records and Certification
Departments who undertake diving activities must record these activities in a diving record
book which is maintained by the designated staff member.
The information to be recorded is:
* Date
* Place
* Time
* Water Depth
* Purpose
Logs of individual activities should also be maintained by the staff or student.
All divers must have appropriate training and certification to undertake the proposed dive
in accordance with the requirements for the level of complexity of the dive.
72.6.3 Diving Medical Certificate
This is a medical examination to ascertain the subjects suitability to undertake SCUBA
diving activities. This should be followed by a periodic check up. The examination is
designed to detect conditions which could cause problems where the staff or student is
under changing pressures, exertion or sudden uncionsciousness.
242
Specialised Hazards
The medical practitioner is required to maintain the records of the examinations. A

certificate of fitness where issued will be entered into the divers permanent record of
diving history.
Divers must be of a minimum age of 18 years to undertake diving activities at the
University.
72.6.4 Recommended Diving Practice
1. Maintain readiness in accordance with the diving schedule
2. Attend appropriate first aid courses and carry first aid kits
3. Know the location of the nearest medical aid
4. Plan the dive
5. Ensure all equipment is checked thoroughly, including communications equipment
6. Obey all boating and marine laws
72.6.5 Dving Incidents
Any diving incidents where a near miss or injury occurs must be reported to the Risk
Managemnet Office as per the incident reporting procedure in Section 4 of the EHSM.
73 Requirements for Working in Confined Spaces

73.1 Purpose
To protect University staff and students by preventing/controlling entry into confined and/or
poorly ventilated workplaces, and to ensure awareness and compliance with legal
obligations by satisfying legislative requirements when working in these spaces.
73.2 Application
The procedure applies to all staff working on or in properties under University control or
management which may contain confined spaces.
73.3 Legislation
Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act
Australian Standard AS2865
Confined Spaces Regulations 1996
73.4 References
Code of Practice for Confined Spaces 1997
AS 2865 1996 Safe Working in a Confined Space
243
73.5.1 Managers / Supervisors
Ensure only competent personnel are involved in working in confined spaces.
Ensure a risk assessment has been conducted fro the proposed work area by competent
and trained personnel.
Ensure copies of risk assessments are kept with the confined space Work Permit for a
period of 1 month after completion.
Prepare written procedures outlining safety and emergency actions.
Ensure appropriate lockouttagout systems are used and the area is isolated from
untrained personnel.
Ensure appropriate safety signage is located in the area.
73.5.2 All Staff
If you identify a space (which meets the definition in 7.3.4) please contact the Risk
Management Office so a comprehensive risk assessment can be carried out prior to work
commencing.

Advice if needed should be obtained from the University Safety Officer at the Risk
Management Office on 8344 7702.
73.6.1 Definition of a Confined Space
A space of any volume which;
is not intended as a regular workplace;
has restricted means for entry and exit;
may have inadequate ventilation and/or an atmosphere which is either
contaminated or oxygendeficient and;
is at atmospheric pressure during occupancy.
See Australian Standard 2865 1996 1.4.2. Confined place come in many sizes and
shapes, and can be found in heavy industry, food, chemical and petroleum processing,
utility and communications installations and constructions sites, to name only a few. These
spaces often are deceiving in appearance. For example, the interior of an opentopped
water tower is defined as a confined space, even though the top is open to the outdoor
environment. As a rule of thumb, the following areas are typically classified as confined
spaces, and should be treated with caution:
Storage Tanks
Pump Wet Wells
Degreasers
Sewers
Manholes
Tunnels
244
Specialised Hazards
Underground Vaults
Boilers
Silos
Vessels
Grain Elevators
Mixers
Opentopped Water Tanks
Water Towers
Enclosures with Bottom Access
Railcar Tanks
Blood Pits at Slaughter Houses
Opentopped spaces 1.5m deep without good ventilation
73.6.2 Risks Associated with Confined Spaces
* Loss of consciousness, injury or death due to the immediate effects of contaminants
* Fire or explosion from the ignition of flammable or combustible materials
* Asphyxiation resulting from oxygen deficiency
* Enhanced combustibility and spontaneous combustion resulting from an excess of
oxygen
* Asphysiation resulting from engulfment by stored materials, including grain, sand or
flour
73.6.3 Risk Control for Confined Spaces
Can the space be cleaned suing highpressure hoses inserted through an access hole
instead?
Can an object dropped into a space be retreived using a hook or chain instead of a
person?
Can the inside of a confined space be inspected using a video camera or mirror?
Can a reading device located inside the space be relocated to the exterior?
73.6.4 Confined Space Work Permits
The regulations require that a permit to enter is issued by a competent and trained person.
This permit is current only for the duration of the specified work. The work permit shall
address the following:
Names of personnel involved
Perparation for entry
Cleaning, purging and decontamination procedures for the space
Testing of the atmosphere
Personal Protective Equipment requirements
Emergency rescue procedures
245
Type of work to be carried out, and the expected duration
74 Driving Safety DRAFT June 2003

74.1 Purpose
Ensure that staff and students at the University exercise due care of themselves and other
road users when using University or personal vehicles for University work.
74.2 Application
This procedure applies to all staff and students who are required to drive a University
vehicle, or who use their own vehicle to conduct University work, and for the protection of
the general public.
74.3 Legislation
Road Safety Act 1986
Road Safety (Vehicles) Regulations 1999
Road Safety (Drivers) Regulations 1999
Road Safety (General) Regulations 1999
Road Safety (Road Rules) Regulations 1999
74.4 References
University of Melbourne Transport Policy http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ExecServ/Statutes/r171r10.htm
Personnel Policy and Procedures Manual Section 14 Travel Associated with University
Work http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ppp/docs/14.1.html
EHSM Section 7.1 Off Campus Guidelines http://www.unimelb.edu.au/ehsm/7.html#7.1
Vic Roads http://www.vicroads.vic.gov.au/ Transport Accident
Commission http://www.tac.vic.gov.au/
Royal Automobile Club Victoria http://www.racv.com.au/
74.5.1 Deans and Heads of Departments
In a Faculty or Department where a University vehicle has been purchased, those
responsible for the management of the vehicle must ensure that the following environment
health and safety provisions are met, as well as those outlined in the Transport Policy:
Maintain vehicle in a safe and roadworthy condition at all times in accordance
with the manufacturers recommended service schedule by an authorised service
provider;
Vehicle is operated only in accordance with the manufacturers instructions;
Maintain a Register of Authorised Users, and the vehicle is only used by those
Users;
246
Specialised Hazards
Only members of the University or other persons specifically authorised by the

Dean of a Faculty or Head of Department or their nominee travel in the vehicle;
Report any damage as a result of accidental or deliberate act to the Risk
Management Office as soon as practicable;
The vehicle contains a Vehicle Log and is maintained;
Smoking, administration of illicit drugs or consumption of alcohol is not allowed
while responsible for the vehicle.
74.5.2 Supervisors
Where a staff member or student intends to use a vehicle, approval for the vehicle and
any accommodation provisions must be provided prior to the activity.
74.5.3 Employees driving whilst on University Business
All staff and students must obey all federal, state and territory traffic laws. Authorised
Users will be required to complete an Authorised User Authority and Undertaking, as
amended from time to time, prior to first use of any vehicle.

74.6.1 General Duties of Drivers
Where students or staff will be using their own cars for University business or activities,
approval must be obtained from Head of Department. The onus is on the individual to
ensure that the vehicle is registered and roadworthy, and has at least third party property
insurance cover, if not full comprehensive insurance cover.
74.6.2 Accidents
If a motor vehicle is involved in an accident where any person is injured or any property
(including any animal) is damaged or destroyed, the driver must immediately stop the motor
vehicle and render assistance. Ensure the following is undertaken:
Exchange names and contact numbers of the involved vehicles
Collect witness contact details and their description of events
Obtain any other vehicles registration and identification details
Record the time, date, location and other information as required
Write a circumstantial description of the incident
Report as soon as possible to the police or other authority (only if a person has
been injured)
Report incident to the Risk Management Office
Do not accept liability for the accident it is the responsibility of the Risk
Management Office to evaluate the issue of legal liability.
74.6.3 Using University Fleet Vehicles
For the use of any University fleet vehicle, a booking will be recorded in an appropriate
Vehicle Booking Log for a specific period. At the completion of the period, the Authorised
User will complete the trip record in the Vehicle Log, provide any receipt of expenditure
and advise the current location of the vehicle.
247
74.6.4 Using University Departmental Vehicles

Depending on the Department, students may be permitted to use a Departmental or
Faculty car to undertake authorised journeys. Where students have been given permission
to use the car, they must be included on the list of authorised users, and provide the signed
declaration.
74.6.5 Insurance Information
The University keeps operative comprehensive and third party insurance for University
vehicles, which provides insurance cover and indemnity to authorised users of those
vehicles. The Universitys insurance cover does not apply to unauthorised use of vehicles or
where there is a breach of the Universitys Transport Policy see FPP
http://www.unimelb.edu.au/FinPPM/13.html#13.6.
Insurance Cover will be excluded if an employee is involved in an accident and it is found
that the employee is driving under the influence of alcohol (over the prescribed blood
alcohol concentration applicable in the specified state or territory) or using illegal
substances such as drugs.
The University will not accept liability for any damage, injury, loss or theft involving use of
a University vehicle where that damage, injury, loss or theft is not covered by the
Universitys insurance policies. For further clarification please refer to the RMO Insurance
Summary.
74.7 Safety Driving Requirements

74.7.1 Driver Safety
Where 4WD vehicles are used for activities off road, a risk assessment of the activity
should be conducted, and where necessary provision of appropriate risk control measures
such as drivertraining programs should be instigated.
Always obey speed limits and traffic signals
Follow road rules and signed directions
Ensure that any medications taken do not interfere with driving capabilities
Do not pick up hitchhikers
Be familiar with the routes to be taken
Ensure that seat belts are worn by all passengers
Take rest breaks on long journeys
Do not drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs
Do not use mobile phones or other electronic devices while driving a vehicle.
74.7.2 Avoid Fatigue
Staff should not drive if working hours including driving could exceed 10 hours in a day, or
14 hours of driving in a 24 hour period. Travel time to and from home should be included in
this calculation.
Journeys longer than 5 continuous hours should have more than one driver per vehicle.
Drivers should ensure that a 20 minute break is taken after 3 hours. Where there are two
drivers, it is recommended that a change of driver should take place every 3 hours.
248
Chapter 8. Occupational Health

81 Pregnancy
81.1 Pregnancy and Work with Certain Substances
81.1.1 Purpose
To provide guidelines and information to staff and supervisors of staff who may be
pregnant, or planning a pregnancy while working with potentially hazardous chemicals at
the University.
81.1.2 Application
This policy applies to laboratories or workshops where hazardous or potentially hazardous
substances are used. These guidelines are designed to provide information to staff and
supervisors on the nature of occupational exposures to hazardous chemicals, and their
potential effects to the unborn foetus.
81.1.3 Legislation
81.1.4 References
NHMRC Guidelines for the Use of Carcinogenic or Toxic Substances by Laboratory
Personnel
NIOSH: The effects of workplace hazardous substances on female reproductive health
Human Resources Personnel Policy and Procedures Manual Section 9.2.3
81.1.5.1 Laboratory Managers, Supervisors
Provide the following information to Staff members who inform them of their pregnancy:
Address concerns from employees regarding potential workplace reproductive hazardous
by undertaking appropriate risk management through risk assessments and control
measures.
Supervisors are required to determine whether substances used in the work area could
create a risk to pregnant employees. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be
obtained for all chemicals used or stored in a workplace.
81.1.5.2 All Laboratory or Workshop Employees capable of being pregnant
Employees should inform their supervisor of their pregnancy as soon as is practical.

If you have any concerns at all about exposure to chemicals at work, you should seek
advice from your supervisor, safety officer or health and safety representative, if you are
pregnant or considering pregnancy at any time in the future.
249

81.1.6.1 Explaining Hazardous Chemicals
Of major concern are Mutagenic or Teratogenic Chemicals A limited number of

chemicals are suspected of being mutagenic or teratogenic and exposure to these during
pregnancy may result in DNA changes to the developing foetus leading to congenital
abnormalities or abortion.
NB: For many chemicals such information is not available.
The risk to health is related to the level of exposure. Infrequent exposure to low levels of
chemicals is clearly less of a risk than frequent exposure to concentrated chemicals in
poorly ventilated areas. The risk is also greater during early pregnancy. In the typical
working environment at the University, exposure through inhalation is the most common
route of exposure.
Working in a fume cupboard which meets Australian Standard performance requirements
or in some other ventilation enclosure will prevent exposure by inhalation. Skin absorption
and ingestion are rarely significant routes of entry, provided that safe working practices
are observed.
The following is a list of commonly used chemicals. Some studies carried out on animals
have raised concerns about the use of these substances.
Table 81: Commonly used chemicals
Acrylamide Monomer *
Chloroprene *
Acrylonitrile *
Ethylene Oxide
Arsenic and its compounds
Fluorocarbons (some)
Benzene
Formaldehyde
Benzo(a)pyrene
Lead
Beryllium
Mercury and its compounds *
Cadmium and its compounds
Toluene *
Carbon Monoxide
Vinyl Chloride
Carbon Tetrachloride *
Xylene
Chloroform
* Note significant exposure through skin or membrane contact is possible.

Other disease causing agents are:
Cytomegalovirus
Hepatitis B virus
Human Immunodeficiency virus\
Human parvovirus B19
Rubella (German Measles)
Toxoplasmosis
Varicella Zoster virus (Chicken Pox)
250
Occupational Health
81.1.6.2 Limiting Exposure
Exposure to any of the above at levels below the recognised exposure limits as determined
by the ACGIH Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices 2001, should not
present a health risk to the unborn foetus. Where chemicals have warning labels indicating
carcinogenicity, further advice should be sought either from the MSDS for the substance,
the supplier or the Risk Management Office on ext. 8344 7010 or 8344 7896. MSDS should
be available for reference before use for all chemicals in the workplace.
81.1.6.3 Safe Work Procedures
1. Review the MSDS to become familiar with any reproductive hazards presented by a
chemical.
2. Use appropriate personal protective equipment such as gloves, gown and a mask.
3. Avoid contact by inhalation by only using chemicals in a containment hood.
4. Store chemicals in sealed containers when they are not in use.
5. Wash hands after contact with any laboratory reagents.
6. Participate in training and education programs provided for chemical safety.
Working in a fume cupboard which meets Australian Standards, or in some other
ventilated enclosure will reduce the chances of exposure by inhalation. Skin absorption and
ingestion are rarely significant routes of entry, provided that safe work practices are
observed.
81.1.6.4 Reproductive Hazards Posed by Workplace Exposure
* Menstrual cycle effects due to a disruption of the balance of hormone levels

* Infertility or subfertility due to damage to the ovaries, eggs or hormones * Miscarriages or
stillbirths due to abnormal development of the foetus
* Birth defects from damage caused by chemical exposure to growing tissues
* Low birth weight and premature births resulting from toxic chemical exposure
* Developmental disorders caused by damage to the brain or spinal cord from some
substances
81.1.6.5 Notification of Pregnancy
If you become pregnant and work in a situation where you may become exposed to
chemicals, you are advised to notify your department head or supervisor immediately. If
you wish to obtain confidential medical advice on any possible risk, you may contact the
medical staff in the Occupational Health Unit, extn. 47492.
The assistance available from the Occupational Health Unit or the Risk Management
Office will be provided in consultation with your doctor and will ensure your rights in
employment, with the University acknowledging its obligations under health and safety and
equal opportunity legislation. It is essential for the protection of your foetus and because of
the legal requirements that the Occupational Health and Safety Act places on employers
and employees that you comply with these procedures.
Depending on the nature of your work and the risks involved, modified or alternative duties
may have to be provided during your pregnancy. Any changes to your work will be of the
minimum reasonably necessary to protect health and safety during your pregnancy.
Alteration to work practices will only occur so far as it is reasonably necessary on health
and safety grounds. The OH Unit will be able to provide advice to you and your
department on whether any changes to your work will be needed during your pregnancy.
251
81.1.6.6 Maternity Leave
For further details on maternity leave, please refer to Personnel Policies and Procedures
section 9.2.3 Parental Leave.
81.2 Working with Ionising Radiation while Pregnant (DRAFT)

81.2.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with legal obligations regarding Departmental
responsibilities to pregnant staff and students using ionising radiation.
81.2.2 Application
81.2.3 Legislation
81.2.4 References
Standards Australia AS 2243 Part 4 Ionizing Radiation
The responsibility rests with the individual to declare herself pregnant, if/when she does the
department must insure that the person is not exposed to levels of ionising radiation above
that acceptable to members of the general public 1 mSv/yr.
The DRSO must assess the duties carried out by pregnant staff / student member.
If the staff / student member is exposed to neutron radiation a clearance must be sought
from the Universitys Radiation Protection Officer before working in this area.
81.2.5.2 Pregnant Worker
It is the responsibility of the individual to declare the pregnancy, if there are issues
associated, the Universitys Radiation Adviser can be contacted anonymously and
confidentially on 8344 7010.
Consult on activities with the DRSO if you are unsure about any aspect of your work.
252
Occupational Health

Be aware of potential hazards by:
Reviewing safe work practices.
Making sure safety requirements associated with isotopes being used are followed.
Check previous TLD badge readings as a guide to determine the hazard level of
the procedure being undertaken
Monitor the working area before and after use with a suitable meter. to ensure the
work area is clear of radiological hazards.
Monitor yourself after completion of every procedure.
Be familiar with all monitoring equipment in the laboratory and their limitations.
Advice if needed may be obtained confidentially from the Universitys Radiation
Protection Officer at the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010.
82 Workplace Health
82.1 Asbestos Policy
82.1.1 Purpose
To prevent asbestos related disease, resulting from exposure to airborne asbestos in the
workplace.
82.1.2 Application
To identify, assess and control risks arising from asbestos in the workplace.
The University has developed an Asbestos Management Plan. Control of asbestos is
through a written plan of action by removing, enclosing or encapsulating asbestos.
82.1.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Asbestos) Regulations 2003.
The National Model Regulations for the Control of Workplace Hazardous Substances
2000.
82.1.4 References
Property & Buildings Asbestos Management Plan
Instigate (part 5) asbestos audits identify asbestos products within the structure or fabric of
all University buildings on all properties.
Responsible for ensuring asbestos products identified in the audits are appropriately labelled
where practicable.
Coordinate removal of asbestos from University buildings, where required, consulting with
affected staff on the removal process.
253
Provide advice relating to asbestos

Provide advice on equipment likely to contain asbestos to departments and faculties.
Provide labels for the identification of asbestos.
Arrange disposal of asbestos containing equipment.
Ensure that equipment purchased do not contain asbestos products. (As of 31 December
2003 all asbestos products are prohibited for sale in Australia).
Ensure that all equipment under a departments control that contains asbestos is identified
and labelled.
Ensure that a register of all equipment containing asbestos is maintained. This register must
contain a description of the equipment, serial number (where applicable), location and type
of asbestos (if known).
Ensure that risk assessments are carried out on all equipment that contains asbestos and
are available to staff .
Arrange the disposal of equipment containing asbestos through Risk Management Office
monthly waste service.
82.1.5.4 Maintenance Staff / Contractors
Check the Asbestos Register in Property & Buildings before commencing any work
requiring access to any building spaces.
82.1.5.5 Staff
Staff should not bring asbestos products on to University property, nor cause such materials
to be delivered to the University.
Staff should not interfere with any asbestos materials on University property.
Staff should not attempt to collect samples for asbestos identification. If the composition
of the material is unknown but it is believed that asbestos may be present, the Risk
Management Office should be contacted on 8344 3444.
Faculties and Departments are responsible for identifying equipment under their control
that may contain asbestos.
Where practicable identify equipment that may contain asbestos. Where asbestos is
present the equipment should be appropriately labeled. An assessment of risk must be
conducted to determine (as far as practicable), the risk to persons in the area.
Equipment that may contain asbestos is usually old equipment (most likely pre1985) where
heat insulation was required. Some examples of this equipment are electric drying ovens,
furnaces, heater stirrers, bar heaters, distillation apparatus, heating mantles, heat resistant
mats and equipment made from Asbestos Cement sheet.
If the asbestos is fully encased and presents no risk, the equipment must be labelled as
containing asbestos and the information documented on an asbestos register.
If asbestos is not encased, the equipment needs to be labeled as containing asbestos and a
risk assessment conducted for possible exposure. The assessment should take into account;
254
Occupational Health
The type of asbestos.

The condition of the asbestos (e.g. is it friable or poorly bonded to the equipment).
The age and general condition of the equipment.
Whether using the equipment is likely to cause a disturbance of asbestos in the
equipment.
Any other factors that could affect the health of staff or students carrying out
their duties.
If the assessment indicates that asbestos in the equipment presents a risk to health,
disposal can be arranged through the Risk Management Office.
82.2 Control of Legionnaires Disease

82.2.1 Purpose
To reduce the risk of contracting Legionnaires disease associated with the operation of
cooling tower systems and warm water systems within the University.
Legionnaires Disease was proclaimed a notifiable disease in Victoria in 1979 and all cases
must be notified direct to the Department of Human Services Victoria.
82.2.2 Application
The Health (Legionella) Regulations 2001 have been implemented to reduce the risks of
contracting Legionnaires disease associated with the operation of cooling tower systems
and warm water systems.
82.2.3 Legislation
Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations 1990
Health (Legionella) Regulations 2001
82.2.4 References
"Guidelines for the control of Legionnaires Disease" Health Department, Victoria.
Australian Standard AS3666 AirHandling and water systems of buildings
Microbiological Control
Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures, 2.24 Air Conditioning
Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures, 2.25 Cooling Tower Sampling
Communication Plan
for first response of positive Legionella
82.2.5 Definitions
Legionnaires Disease is the term used for the disease caused by L. pneumophila;
legionellosis refers to the disease caused by any species of Legionella.
Bacteria in the genus Legionella are widely distributed natural inhabitants of waters. They
have been found in lakes, rivers, creeks and other bodies of water ranging in temperature
up to 600C. However, significant multiplication of these bacteria is generally restricted to
temperatures of 200C to 450C and particularly to the range 350C to 430C. Systems with
waters of this temperature range facilitate proliferation.
255
Responsible for maintenance of cooling towers and warm water systems in a way that is
consistent with the Guidelines for the Control of Legionnaires disease.
Ensure completion of risk assessments on all systems where there is the possibility of
contamination by legionella bacteria.
Where a service provider has been contracted to perform the service, Property & Buildings
must ensure that they have appropriate skills and training to perform regular maintenance.
Provide reports of monthly testing outcomes to the University Community. Contact the
Department of Human Services Victoria where a case, or suspected case of legionella is
identified in the workplace. Refer to Communication Plan for Positive Legionella Results
below. The results will also be provided to the Occupational Health and Safety Committee
Provide advice and assistance for personal protective equipment, procedures and other
information with regard to legionella.
Contact Maintenance 46000 for any queries regarding cooling tower maintenance
protocols.
Departments or individual persons who become aware of confirmed or suspected cases of
Legionnaires Disease among staff / students should immediately inform the Director,
Health Service on 8344 6905 or the Manager, Risk Management Office on 8344 6030.
82.2.7.1 Property and Buildings Cooling Tower Maintenance Program
Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures for the maintenance of air conditioning units
and the sampling of cooling towers for legionella bacteria outline the requirements for
regular testing, sample analysis, written reports of maintenance and documented risk
assessments.
Property and Buildings have a contractual agreement with an external company to
provide the maintenance and testing of all air conditioning systems and cooling towers
within the University.
The maintenance agreement will require that mandatory control measures are undertaken
for remedial action.
82.2.7.2 Maintenance Schedules
A comprehensive maintenance schedule is in place for all systems within the University
under the control of Property and Buildings. This program complies with the regulations in
the following:
* The system is maintained in a clean condition;
* The system is treated with biocides and cleaning agents on a regular basis;
* Regular addition of a chlorine based disinfectant to the water;
* Routine inspections and testing at least once per month for system operation;
* Sampling of the water in each system once per month for analysis
256
Occupational Health
Where a sample is received that has counts exceeding 100 000 CFU (colony forming units)
per ml for a heterotrophic colony count, or < 10 CFU per ml of Legionella, the water in the
system must be manually treated with a biocide and the program for the maintenance of
those units be fully reviewed.
82.2.7.3 Working on or near Cooling Towers
Departments should not set up equipment or request that activities be carried out in the
vicinity of cooling towers without consulting with Property & Buildings on 8344 6115.
Persons required to perform maintenance on the towers and other water systems are
required to wear the appropriate personal protective equipment. Advice on the types and
availability of personal protective equipment can be obtained from the Risk Management
Office on 8344 7010.
82.2.7.4 Location of Cooling Towers
To control the risks of legionella infection, all construction and maintenance activities
should ensure that cooling towers are located away from air intakes and sources of
organic material.
82.2.7.5 Other sites where Legionella can be found
Since human infection is normally by inhalation of aerosols containing legionella,

Departments should note that these aerosols may be generated in showers, and by the
impact of running water into wash basins and sinks under certain conditions. Advice on
this may be obtained from the stated guidelines, or from the Executive Manager,
Microbiology on 8344 5714.
82.2.7.6 Communication Plan for Positive Legionella Results
In the case of a positive test for legionella, the reporting structure outlined in the
Communication Plan, Attachment A will be applied.
Individual buildings will utilize strategies in accordance with the processes defined with
Section 6 of the EHSM Emergency Response. Gouped buildings in the Defined
Emergency Management Zones will be controlled by the Chief Warden who will liaise with
the Building Emergency Controllers.
82.2.7.7 Education and Awareness
Education and awareness should be included in the induction of staff and contractors
involved in the control of legionella.
Persons involved in the line of communication shall have appropriate training to their role.
82.3 Smoking in the Workplace

82.3.1 Purpose
Smoking is prohibited in all University buildings and vehicles, effective from January 1,
1990.
82.3.2 Application
The policy shall apply to all University buildings where activities take place which are
under the direct control of the University and where the University has responsibility for the
occupational health and safety of those who use the facility.
257
82.3.3 Legislation
82.3.4 References
Not Applicable
82.3.5.1 Heads of Departments
The policy shall apply uniformly. While no formal sanctions are currently proposed, all staff
and students are expected to honour the policy. Difficulties arising from implementation of
the policy should, as far as possible, be resolved by the Head of the Department.
The no smoking policy shall be advertised widely and appropriate signs will be displayed in
University buildings and vehicles.
Members of staff who smoke shall be offered support to attend an appropriate "Quit"
course, including time off from work and reimbursement of course fees up to $50.00.
82.3.6.1 Smoking in the Workplace Policy Extension 1998
The OHS Committee decision at its 1/98 meeting has extended the smoking policy. The
extension to the policy prevents smoking near ground level air intakes and main entrances
of major building on campuses.
Table 82: Main campus air intakes
258
Building
No.
Air intake areas
Arts Centre
199
rear entry level 1
Plaza Conference
Centre
172
north side of entrance
Doug McDonell
168
north side level 1 entry (3 x air

intake
grills)
Chemistry
153
Masson Road
Alice Hoy
162
west side in front of car parking

area
south side adjacent to car parking
area
Raymond Priestly
152
north east end
Old Commerce
132
east side between architecture
Architecture Building
and Planning
133
east side street level next to

stairwells
west side between Old Commerce
Physics
192
south side adjacent to Old

Pathology
Theatre
Redmond Barry
115
south side adjacent to car park
Zoology
147
west side near Agriculture and

Forestry
building
Occupational Health
Biochemistry
185
Trikojus theatre east entrance top

of
stairs
Baillieu Library
177
south side adjacent to the

Brownless
Library
north east side adjacent to
Professors
Court Caf.
82.3.6.2 Smoking Bins
Building 200 serving Earth Science and Thomas Cherry

Building 154 serving Chemistry and Old Geology
Building 152 serving Raymond Priestly
Building 177 serving Baillieu Library
Building 172 serving ERC Library, Plaza Conference Centre and Doug McDonell
The sites to be used at or near these locations with be subject Grounds Committee
approval and will be provided with a receptacle for the cigarette butts. The butt container
will be labelled with an appropriate health warning. The final location and detail of the
trial will be made public through various sources including circulars to the buildings
concerned, Environs and the Risky Business column in Uninews.
82.4 Thermal Comfort Policy

82.4.1 Purpose
These guidelines are to assist with the management of the work environment and the
comfort of staff during varying climate conditions.
82.4.2 Application
Thermal comfort is defined as: "that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with
the thermal environment". Each person is the expert on their own thermal comfort. A
persons perception of thermal comfort is affected by air temperature, air movement
(speed), humidity, clothing, activity level (i.e. the amount of physical work done), mean
radiant temperature (the average temperature of the walls, floor, windows, etc) and many
other factors.
82.4.3 Legislation
OHS Act 1985
82.4.4 References
Code of Practice for Workplaces 1989
NHRMC Effects of heat on health comfort and performance
Worksafe Victoria Guidance Notes 2001
DRAFT AIOH Heat Stress Standard 2001
259
82.4.5.1 Managers / Supervisors
Monitor the effect of heat on staff members during summer months.

Supervisory staff must be aware of forcast periods of excessive heat or cold, and arrange
work programs accordingly.
Notify supervisor if experiencing thermal discomfort.

Property and Buildings can advise on the design and construction of airflow, ventilation,
control of air conditioning plant and other building design factors.
82.4.6.1 Procedures to minimise thermal discomfort
The four most important environmental factors contributing to thermal comfort are air
temperature, humidity, mean radiant temperature and air speed.
For most office workers the optimum comfort levels occur between 21 26 C, with a 30
60 % relative humidity.
Work programs should be arranged to take into account extended periods of excessive
heat or cold. If practicable, work could commence and finish at times that avoid the
greatest heat.
Other considerations for thermal discomfort are :
the time staff are exposed to hot tasks is reduced through job rotation (frequent
brief exposures are less stressful than fewer longer exposures);
arranging extra ventilation to increase air movement is arranged;
doors and windows are closed to the heat for all or part of the day to prevent hot
winds entering the room or building;
heat generating equipment such as screenbased equipment photocopiers and
incandescent lights are turned off, where practicable;
windows are covered with either blinds or reflective coating;
fans are used in areas of low ventilation.
82.4.6.2 Safety Information
Staff are encouraged to take frequent cool drinks and discouraged from drinking alcoholic
or caffeine based drinks. Departments should ensure that there is cool water close to the
affected area.
Staff should be aware of compounding factors which can increase susceptibility to heat
stress, such as obesity, preexisting heart or circulatory problems, dehydration, fever or
diarrhoea.
260
Occupational Health
82.4.6.3 Working Outdoors
Staff that are most likely to experience thermal discomfort work in buildings without
adequate temperature regulation or are required to work outdoors on hot days. Heads of
Department and other managers have a responsibility to monitor working conditions and
when working in heat becomes difficult, to direct that certain tasks cease, allow staff to
go home or move to a cooler environment.
Outdoor workers should take the following precautions:
use protective clothing, particularly covering the head. Head coverings should be
wide brimmed hats rather than caps;
wear sun glasses (UV protective safety glasses) for eye protection;
use protective lotions on exposed parts of the body;
arrange work patterns that maximize work in shady areas;
avoid heavy work during the hottest part of the day;
use personal water canteens;
drink 250 ml of water every halfhour.
82.4.6.4 Cessation of Work
Although this policy does not specify the actual temperatures to be reached before work
should cease, managers should assess working conditions and the extent of staff
discomfort on a regular basis. This is particularly important on the third and fourth days of
periods where the outside temperature has been around 35C. On the basis of that
assessment managers have the discretion to either place limitations on the work of their
staff or to put a stop to work.
Where, after implementing procedures to minimise thermal discomfort, working conditions
continue to be adversely affected by prolonged, extreme heat, heads of department and/or
managers may, within their own discretion, decide to close the workplace and send staff
home under special leave arrangements (see PPP Section 9.4).
Please note that travelling home in hot conditions can also be hazardous. Heat distressed
staff should be encouraged to attend the Universitys Health Service or their own doctor.
82.4.6.5 Staff Suffering Heat Stress
Conditions in Melbourne during summer can be extreme. In some circumstances these

conditions may cause thermal distress which can lead to heat stress. This is especially true
if people do not take appropriate precautions.
Heat stress occurs in situations where a persons core temperature rises above 38C.
Body temperature is regulated by the blood flowing from the core (abdomen, heart, brain)
to the skin where the heat is dissipated by radiation, convection and evaporation to the
environment. Heat stress may occur in environments where there is a combination of two
or more of the following:
high temperature (e.g. summer);
high thermal radiation (e.g. foundries);
high humidity (e.g. mines);
a high level of activity (e.g. manual labour);
excessive or impervious clothing.
261
Under these conditions heat loss may no longer be in balance with heat production and
heat related illness such as heat cramps, heat exhaustion, heat stroke may occur. There
are very few work environments at this University that could give rise to heat stress.
If cases of heat stress do occur, the Director of Student Health Services, the Occupational
Health Nurse or your Departments qualified First Aider should be contacted for treatment
and advice. Certain medical conditions such as diabetes symptoms, vomiting or diarrhea
can increase during very hot weather. In addition, medical treatments, and medications
may increase the risk of heat stress from heat exposure.
Staff who are distressed by the climatic conditions should report to their supervisor. The
supervisor should consider:
moving the staff member to a cooler environment;
encouraging rest breaks in a less heatstressful environment;
allowing the staff member to go home under special leave provisions.
82.5 Alcohol and Drugs in the Workplace

82.5.1 Purpose
This entry covers the Universitys policy in relation to drug and alcohol problems. It has
been drafted within the legal framework of State and Commonwealth occupational
health and safety laws. The policy and program applies to all staff throughout all levels of
the organisation while they are working for, or representing, the University in any capacity.
82.5.2 Application
As one of Australias most used drugs, alcohol is widely promoted and accepted. Over 80
percent of Australian adults call themselves drinkers. However, the effect of alcohol in the
workplace includes absenteeism, poor performance, OHS costs due to accidents and
health care costs. 25 percent of accidents in the workplace may be related to alcohol as
even quite small amounts of alcohol may impair skills and judgement to a degree that
reduces production or increases the risk of accidents.
82.5.3 Legislation
Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985
82.5.4 References
Council Minutes October 1996
The University of Melbourne Personnel Policy and Procedures Manual
Interim Policy on Serving of Alcohol at Student Events 2002
82.5.5 Policy
While the University does not wish to intrude into the private lives of staff, if alcohol has a
direct impact on an individuals work performance or on safety standards, it is the
Universitys responsibility to students, other staff and the public to intervene.
The objectives of the policy are:
* to reduce alcohol and drug use at work;
* reduce costs of alcohol and drug misuse;
* address work factors contributing to alcohol and drug use;
262
Occupational Health
* provide access to information and education;

* provide access to counselling, treatment and rehabilitation.
The University is committed to maintaining and enhancing job performance and job safety
and, at the same time, has the responsibility for the welfare of each staff member. The
concern of the University in the treatment of alcohol and drug dependence, is to restore
and maintain satisfactory work performance. Assistance will end at this point unless the
staff member voluntarily seeks continued assistance through University or
communitybased support services.
Staff who feel that they can no longer fully cope without the need to use alcohol and/or
drugs must be encouraged to seek help through their supervisors or other appropriate
persons. Unfortunately, many people in need of assistance do not seek help.
82.5.6.1 Senior Staff
If the University subsequently determines that the staff member believed to be affected
poses a significant immediate risk to their own safety or that of any other person, the
University must direct that staff member to cease work immediately. If necessary, the
University must assist with arrangements to ensure the staff member arrives home safely.
Supervisors are responsible for monitoring the performance and conduct of staff who
report to them. If a supervisor has reasonable cause to believe that one of his or her staff
members performance or conduct is affected by alcohol and/or drugs, the supervisor
should address the matter with the staff member.
If a supervisor does not wish to address the matter directly with the staff member, the
supervisor should bring the matter to the attention of another, more senior staff member.
82.5.6.3 Colleagues
Staff members working in association with, or in close proximity to, a staff member whose
job performance they perceive to be adversely affected by alcohol and/or drugs, are
encouraged to support their colleagues in seeking appropriate assistance.
Attractive alternatives to alcohol (i.e. low or nonalcoholic drinks) should be offered at all
University functions and alcohol is always to be served in a responsible manner.
82.5.6.4 Students
Ensure that where Student Events have been organised that the Policy on Serving and
Consumption of Alchol is followed. A copy of this policy is available from Sue Collins on
47701.
82.5.7 Procedure & Guidelines
82.5.7.1 Staff in charge of University vehicles and machinery
Persons in charge of University vehicles and machinery, handling hazardous substances or

undertaking hazardous activities must not be under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs
and must at all times comply with relevant Victorian laws.
263
82.5.7.2 Staff Training
Preventative education, through the training of all staff is a vital priority for the University.
Induction courses must contain a segment providing information appropriate to alcohol and
drug dependence, and the subject is to be discussed in supervisor training, together with
advice on where support may be obtained and any sick leave implications.
82.5.7.3 Further Action
If the above strategies are not effective, and the staff members work performance
continues to be adversely affected by misuse of drugs or alcohol, the unsatisfactory
performance or disciplinary provisions of the relevant award should be invoked.
82.5.7.4 Serving Alcohol at University Functions (DRAFT)
The University has a duty of care to ensure that where alcohol is served at University
functions, that it is done so in a responsible manner. Departments organising functions
involving alcohol consumption should be aware of the following requirements:
* Staff and students at the function must be supervised at all times by a senior staff
member.
* The function must have a designated start and finish time
* There must be food of some description served
* Non alcoholic drinks must be provided for the duration of the function
* Alternative transport arrangements such as taxis or hired buses must be provided for
staff who are deemed unfit to drive.
* It is illegal to serve alcohol to an already intoxicated person
Senior staff may be held liable if an employee is injured, where the injury was a direct
result of the consumption of alcohol at a University function, and Workers Compensation
may be payable.
The duty of care extends to student functions arranged in Residential Colleges and the like
to ensure appropriate serving of alcohol and supervision of students.
82.6 Selection and Use of Personal Protective Equipment

82.6.1 Purpose
To ensure awareness and compliance with legal obligations by; ensuring Staff are aware
of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) selection issue and use.
82.6.2 Application
The procedure applies to all members of the University. Departments must comply with
their obligations under law by identifying hazards, determining risk and eliminating or
reducing risk using the hierarchy of controls and where necessary making sure that
personal protective devices are available and used properly in the workplace.
PPE as a control measure should be limited to situtations where other higher control
measures are not practicable, or where personal protective equipment is used in
conjunction with other control measures to increase protection.
264
Occupational Health
82.6.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Manual Handling) Regulations 1999
Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations 1992
Occupational Health and Safety (Confined Spaces) Regulations 1996
82.6.4 References
Code of Practice for Manual Handling
Code of Practice for Noise
Code of Practice for Asbestos
Code of Practice for Confined Spaces
Australian Standard 4501 Series Occupational Protective Clothing
Australian Standard 2161 Series Occupational Protective Gloves
Australian Standard 1800 Series Occupational Protective Helmets
Australian Standard 1269 Series Occupational Noise Management
Australian Standard 2210 Series Occupational Protective Footwear
Australian Standard 3765 Series Clothing for Protection Against Hazardous Chemicals
Australian Standard 1337: 1992 Eye Protectors for Industrial Applications
Ensure that adequate training and continuing supervision is available at all times to staff
using PPE.
Ensure that procedures are adopted for the maintenance of all PPE purchased by the
Department.
Ensure that clear and appropriate signs are positioned in locations where PPE must be
worn.
Ensure that procedures are followed for the use of PPE where required.
Where PPE is required by students department should identify what equipment and in what
location personal protection will be required. Students should be informed of this in the
enrolment procedures.
82.6.5.2 Property and Buildings Project Officer
Through the appropriate channels Project Officers will ensure that all contractors employed
by the University shall provide their employees with personal protective equipment that
conforms to appropriate standards.
265
Comply with all safety directives issued by the department.

Should be involved in assessment of PPE in their work area.
Advice if needed should be obtained from the University safety Officer at the Risk
Management Office on 8344 7010.
82.6.6.1 Conducting Risk Assessments for PPE
A risk assessment should be completed prior to the provision of PPE. Higher levels of control
should be identified before the issue of PPE. Departments are responsible for providing and
maintaining staff with suitable PPE to protect them from hazards in the workplace. The
equipment shall be free of charge to members of staff.
82.6.6.2 Basic PPE
Gloves
Chemical Resistance Guide, 6th Ed 1998: for permeation and degradation. Issues about
allergies are on their website: www.ansell.com.au. Available from Ansell Medical ph: 03
9264 0888, email: <anselmd@attglobal.net>.
Gowns
Are provided by the department free of charge to staff, and through the Chemistry Store
for purchase for all practical sessions for students. It is a requirement that gowns be worn
for all practical sessions where there is a risk from chemical, biological or other form of
contamination.
Gowns should be laundered at least every 2 weeks through the Departmental Laundry
Service. More often for highly contaminating or dirty procedures.
Goggles
Are provided by the department free of charge to staff, and through the Chemistry store
for purchase for all practical sessions for students. It is a requirement that goggles or
safety glasses be worn for all practical sessions where there is a risk to the eyes and face
from exposure to material, chemical, biological or other forms of contamination.
82.6.6.3 Other PPE
Boots
Masks / Breathing apparatus
Sports Protective Equipment
Helmets
Face Shields
Hearing Protection
Harnesses
Safety Vests
Coveralls
266
Occupational Health
82.6.6.4 Sterility Protection
Some PPE is worn to protect tissue culture or other sterile procedures from becoming
contaminated with human tissue, such as from the hands and face. It is important to note
that equipment worn in this instance is unlikely to protect the wearer from contamination
tothemselves. This is specifically in the case of wearing hair nets, paper booties or paper
gowns.
82.6.6.5 Requirements for Health Monitoring
Where staff are using PPE for protection of eyes, hearing or breathing, there may be a
requirement for that staff member to undergo regular health monitoring through
Occupational Health. Please refer to Section 8.4.1 Medical Surveillance Programs.
This may be the case where staff are using the following equipment:
Masks for working with animals
Masks for working with products producing dust or fumes
Hearing protection for plant or other equipment
Goggles for use with lasers and other bright equipment
82.7 Workplace Cleanliness

82.7.1 Purpose
To provide guidelines to meet minimum requirements for facilities and amenities in areas
under University Control.
82.7.2 Application
These guidelines apply to all staff, students and contractors using University facilities.
82.7.3 Legislation
82.7.4 References
AS 2243.1 Safety in Laboratories Part 1: General
Property and Buildings Project Management and Design Standards 1996
Special Conditions of Contract 1999
Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedures 2.30 Housekeeping
Property and Buildngs Contract Cleaning Specifications
Ensure staff are provided with adequate facilities for personal hygeine.
Implement measures to ensure that general cleanliness of the area is maintained
according to requirements of the OHSC or other legislative body.
267
Ensure staff and students have received instruction in procedures for keeping facilities and
amenities in a clean and hygienic condition.
Maintain the working environment in a clean and hygeinic manner.

Report all incidents to the Supervisor where the workplace is not being kept in a clean and
hygienic manner.
* Design and maintain facilities for University purposes

* Negotiate cleaning contracts in consultation with building occupants
* Supervise cleaning staff
* Ensure contractors and others maintain the worksite throughout the contract period in a
clean condition.
82.7.5.5 Contract Cleaning Staff
* Maintain premises and surrounds in a clean state and appearance

* Report areas of wear and tear such as carpets, stairs etc
* Ensure adequate supplies of materials are available for use, ie paper towel
* Ensure cleaning equipment and materials are stored in a safe and clean manner
* Ensure that faulty equipment, blown lights etc are reported.
82.7.6.1 Eating Facilities
Where work processes may cause risk to health, a separate dining room should be
provided that is protected from dust, fumes or noise arising out of the work process.
The area should be suitable for dining and enable easy cleaning. It should be kept free of
tool, materials, and vehicles and be protected from the weather.
Where employees are not working at one location all day, portable sealable food storage
facilities should be provided.
82.7.6.2 Change rooms
Where employees are required to change clothes before and after work, a change room
should be provided. It should be private and contain lockers for storage of personal
belongings. The door should also be capable of being locked.
82.7.6.3 Washing Facilities
Handwashing facilities should be located at each toilet and dining area, as well as in
areas where work processes require the cleaning of hands before entering or exiting the
area.
Paper towels, continuous roll towel or hot air dryers should be supplied with hand washing
facilities, as well as appropriate soap and cleaning agents.
Shoower facilities should be provided for each sex requiring them where the nature of the
work requires the employee to shower before or after work. Where the substances or
materials handled are contaminants, decontamination should be available.
268
Occupational Health
82.7.6.4 Drinking Water
A potable supply of drinking water is required at each workplace, the water should be
cool, clean and palatable. The facility is required to be separate from sanitary and
handwashing facilities.
82.7.6.5 General Cleanliness
Windows and skylights should be kept clean so that natural light is not restricted.
Cleaning products are available through Stationery Store on # 46230. Where cleaning
products are used the appropriate MSDS should be obtained from the manufacturer.
82.7.6.6 Cleaning Procedures
Contract cleaning staff are responsible for the following tasks.

Daily: Maintain walls, floors, walls, doors, entranceways, stairs and lifts to remove dirt
Weekly: Dust desks, tables, shelves, blinds and partitions
Monthly: Clean behind office equipment, disinfect telephones, remove dust from air vents
Vacation: Remove cobwebs and other matter, clean fire equipment and other fittings
Toilets: Twice per day cleaning where necessary during semester
* Duties for individual areas may vary dependent on the contractual agreement, which
differs due to the classification of the area, ie office, theatre, laboratory etc.
82.7.6.7 Spillage involving human material
Where a workplce has become contaminated with human material such as blood, faeces,
vomit etc the area should be cordoned off where possible.
Staff should wear appropriate gloves and use absorbent towelling (in the first aid kit)
soaked in detergent such as bleach to soak up and decontaminate the spill. The cloth and
gloves can then be wrapped in a plastic bag and disposed of via the normal rubbish. The
area should then be thoroughly mopped and disinfected.
Where staff feel unable to clean up the area, cleaning services can be contacted to clean
the area and remove any waste matter. Cleaners have been trained to handle potentially
infectious materials.
82.7.6.8 Incidents Involving Syringes
Where syringes are found the area should be protected and cordoned off. A suitable
sharps container, ie a metal box or other rigid container should be sought. Disposable rubber
gloves should be worn (in first aid kit) to pick up the syringe and place it into the container.
The gloves should then be removed inside out and placed in a waste bin. Hands should be
washed with an appropriate disinfectant such as Chlorhexidine.
Sharps containers can be taken to Student Health or the Risk Management Office for
disposal.
Where staff feel unable to remove the syringe safely, Security on #46666 should be
contacted. Security staff are trained in handling and removal of syringes. Security staff
cal also assist in the cleaning of the area to remove any contamination.
Syringe disposal units are now located at several sites on campus:
Education Resource Centre
Arts Centre
269
Architecture Building
Student Union Building
Student Health
82.7.6.9 Waste Removal
Rubbish is removed by cleaning services. Cleaning staff are not responsible for items
placed incorrectly in bins. Areas where bins are used as storage containers or otherwise
should be exchanged for an appropriate container.
* Rubbish is removed daily from bins containing black and white plastic bags
* Paper from visy recycling bins is removed daily
* Glass and plastics are removed daily
Ensure that bins are not too heavy for cleaning staff to manually handle. boxes over 10 kg
will not be removed. It is the responsibility of the Department to repack the waste in
smaller containers.
Larger items such as chairs, computers, etc should be packaged and labelled. A check
should be made for any chemical substances such as toner, sharp edges and electrical
hazards. Cleaning staff can remove these items at the end of the week. A weekly hard
rubbish collection is made from the University. The sites are located at:
Tin Alley behind the Redmond Barry Building
Rear of Doug McDonnell Building
Professors Walk at the rear of Old Arts
Medical Road at the rear of Baillieu Library
83 Manual Handling
83.1 Manual Handling
83.1.1 Purpose
To require supervisors to identify, assess and control hazardous manual handling activities
within University departments to reduce the number and severity of musculoskeletal
disorders associated with tasks involving hazardous manual handling
83.1.2 Application
Hazardous manual handling means having any of the following characteristics
repetitive or sustained application of force by using force repeatedly over a period
of time to move or support an object.
Lifting and stacking
Typing and other keyboard tasks
Pushing or pulling a trolley
Holding a trigger
Supporting materials
repetitive or sustained awkward posture where any part of the body is in an
uncomfortable or unnatural position.
270
Occupational Health
Reaching sideways continuously

Crouching or kneeling
Reaching
upwards
Leaning over items

Continually standing while operating foot controls
repetitive or sustained movement by using the same parts of the body to repeat
similar movements.
Painting
Lifting and stacking
Typing and other keyboard tasks
application of high force where the task is difficult to perform due to the effort
that it requires.
Lifting or carrying a heavy object
Pushing or pulling an object that is hard to move
Lifting a heavy item from a high shelf
exposure to sustained vibrations transferred from tools or machinery to the
operators body.
Using vibrating tools
Operating plant that vibrates during operation
Driving certain vehicles
handling of live people or animals where their movements cant always be
predicted.
Assisting patients to walk or move
Treating panicked animals
handling of loads that are unstable, unbalanced or difficult to hold if the load can
move or change suddenly, or is uneven.
Carrying liquids in open containers
Carrying large items
83.1.3 Legislation
Code Of Practice for Manual Handling 2000
Accident Compensation Act 1985 No.10191/1985 S.82
83.1.4 References
Guidelines for the management of employees with compensable low back pain, June 1996.
VWA Code of Practice for Manual Handling
http://www.workcover.vic.gov.au/vwa/vwacop.nsf/COP?Openview
SAA HB59 1994 Ergonomics, The Human Factor
271
83.1.5.1 Heads of Department
Ensure compliance with the Regulations by identifying, assessing and controlling all manual
tasks which may cause musculoskeletal disorders, before the task is undertaken.
Develop procedures to ensure that the level of risk associated with the task is reduced to a
point where it becomes acceptable to all concerned.
Undertake appropriate risk assessments for all manual handling duties.
The documented Manual Handling Identification checklist must be maintained until the task is
no longer undertaken.
All new employees must be asked about preexisting injuries with the necessary
information provided to the Director of Occupational Health who will determine what
medical surveillance may be required. This will then enable modification of work practices
or work places to avoid aggravating a pre existing injury. (HEALTH & HAZARD ASSESSMENT
QUESTIONNAIRE (HHAQ))
Staff and students are required to cooperate with their employer to reduce the risk of
injury. Employees should participate in the Hazard Identification, Risk Asessment and
Control process. Employees are required to cooperate with the employers actions to control
the risk of musculoskeletal disorders in the workplace.
Follow any information, training and instructions you have received, such as using correct
handling techniques and where required using mechanical aids.
Provide advice, information and training for staff undertaking manual handling tasks.
83.1.6.1 Introduction
Studies of Workers Compensation and injury statistics indicate that manual handling
injuries account for approximately one third of total compensation costs. In 1988 the
Victorian Government issued the Manual Handling Regulations and Manual Handling
Code of Practice.
The Manual Handling Regulations were modified in 1999 to more clearly define tasks
requiring assessment in the workplace and to place duties on designers and manufactures
to ensure that any risk of musculoskeletal disorder occurring when the plant and equipment
is properly used at a workplace is eliminated reduced so far as is practicable at the design
stage.
A Manual Handling Identification checklist has been prepared to assist in the identification,
assessment and control of Hazardous Manual Handling Tasks.
83.1.6.2 Identification
All hazardous manual handling tasks must be identified and assessed before the task is
undertaken. The person(s) undertaking the task must be consulted, and if practicable, the
designated health and safety representative should also be involved.
272
Occupational Health
83.1.6.3 Assessment
The level of risk to the person(s) involved with the task should be assessed where the level
of risk is moderate or higher, then risk reduction measures are required. The Manual
Handling Identification Form will assist you in completing and documenting the
assessment. The risk or a musculoskeletal disorder affecting an employee must be
eliminated, or if not practicable, reduced as far as practicable using the hierarchy of
control.
Particular attention should be given to posture, layout, conditions, and the task, and object
involved.
The task must be reassessed before any alteration is made to the objects being handled, or
a change to the workplace location. If additional information about a manual handling
task becomes available, it should also be incorporated into the assessment.
83.1.6.4 Control
Provision of information, training or instruction in manual handling techniques must NOT be

used as the sole or primary means of controlling risk unless the following ways of
controlling risk are not practicable
(a) altering the workplace,
(b) altering the environmental conditions, including heat, cold and vibration, where the task
involving manual handling is carried out,
(c) altering the systems of work used to carry out the task involving manual handling;
(d) changing the objects used in the task involving manual handling;
(e) using mechanical aids.
These controls must also be assessed for their short, medium or long term viability.
83.1.6.5 Training
For further guidance refer to the Code of Practice for Manual Handling 2000. This Code
of Practice deals in detail on how best to achieve the objectives of the Regulations. The
Code explains how to identify risks, e.g. posture and layout; task and object; workplace
conditions, and how to assess and control the identified risks.
The Risk Management Office can provide training in manual handling and ergonomic
workstation design as an hour session with small groups of staff. Further information or
advice can be obtained from the RMO on 8344 3444.
Staff Development and Training also provides sessions for EHS for the Office.
83.2 Ergonomic Principles for Screen Based Work

83.2.1 Purpose
To assist the University in creating and maintaining a safe work place to ensure that
ergonomic principals are adopted for all tasks involving workstations.
83.2.2 Application
This procedure applies to any work practice involving keyboard work that includes
computer aided design and programming, word and data process, or involving telephonist
duties.
273
83.2.3 Legislation
83.2.4 References
Worksafe Australia, Keyboard Workstation Assessment Checklist
Ergonomic Design Standards, David Caple and Associates Ltd, August 1999
Building Manual, Ergonomic Design Standards,, David Caple and Associates Pty Ltd,
August 1999
Property & Buildings Project Management and Design Standards
Code of Practice for Workplaces 1988
Ergonomics Unit, Worksafe Australia: Ergonomic Principles and Checklists for the
Selection of Office Furniture and Equipment.
Australian Standard AS 3590 1990, Part 2. Work station Furniture
Australian Standard AS/NZS 4442 1997 Office Desks
Australian Standard AS/NZS 4443 1997 Office Panel Systems Workstations
Australian Standard AS 1680.1 1990 Interior Lighting General Principles and
Recommendations
Australian Standard AS 1680.2 Interior Lighting Series
Australian Standard AS/NZS 3827 Lighting System Performance
Ensure that staff are provided with appropriate tools and materials for office work duties.
83.2.5.2 Departmental Managers and Supervisors
Ensure staff receive appropriate training on the correct usage of ergonomic equipment at
the commencement of work through the use of the Induction Checklist, and regularly
review the work site when changes in duty or equipment occur.
Cooperate with supervisors and other staff to assist in creating and maintaining a safe
work place where ergonomic guidelines are followed.
Advice and assistance relating to specific problems may be obtained by contacting the
Risk Management Office on 8344 7702 or The Occupational Health Service on 9344 7492.
Ergonomics is a specialised field, therefore these guidelines can only outline the basic
principles. Departments should follow these guidelines when purchasing new furniture and
in the planning stage for new accommodation. These guidelines will also be of use in an
initial assessment of work stations when staff report problems. Further details can be
obtained by pursuing Standards listed in the References. Prior to purchasing office or
furniture the Ergonomic Design Standards should be used.
274
Occupational Health
It is recommended that staff trial ergonomic furniture before purchasing to ensure

individual comfort.
83.2.6.1 Seating
Chair
* Seat height adjustable from 370 mm to 520 mm
* Effective se4at depth adjustable from 380 mm to 480 mm
* Vertical convexity of lumbar support area approximately 250 mm radius
* Lumbar support area between 200 mm and 250 mm top to bottom
* Backrest width between 360 mm and 400 mm
* Height of lumbar support adjustable from 170 mm to 250 mm above the seat
Ergo Balls
* Not recommended for use in open plan areas as balls can become trip hazards
* A physiotherapist or other medical practitioner should be consulted prior to use for safety
information
* Ensure that ergonomic set up of workstation is correct for height when seated on a ball
* Use only for prescribed time intervals as an exercise tool
* Ensure written permission has been obtained by the Head of Department to bring in
equipment from home
83.2.6.2 Workstations
Work station designed for computer use

* Height of the desk top surface between 690 mm 720 mm
* Desk top fully adjustable through 650 mm to 750 mm or greater
* Bench thickness; 25 33 mm
* Bench/Desk top surface depth minimum 900 mm for VDU use,
* Bench without VDU 600 800 mm for administrative/clerical work
* Free under desk leg space minimum of 800 mm width, 500 mm deep
* Keyboard section minimum width of 700 mm (with or without dropdown section)
* Hinges are greater than 500 mm apart (where installed)
Workstation designed for written or other tasks
* Ensure working height is comfortable, for the type of task, ie written, close work, design
etc
* Free leg space provisions of 800 mm x 500 mm
* Ergotilt provided where required for written tasks to reduce working angle
275
83.2.6.3 Computing Equipment
Screens
* Placement of screen avoids glare and reflections
* Screen is placed directly in front of operator
* The top menu bar of the screen is not above eye height
* Centre of screen about 15 degrees below the horizontal
* Distance from user to screen is at least 1 arms length
NOTE: These guidelines may vary where prescription glasses are worn for screen based
work.
Central Processing Unit
* Usually the best monitor support solution
* Not too large or high (100 to 120 mm high)
* Alternative is a properly constructed monitor stand
83.2.6.4 Access Spaces
* Minimum access space behind each operators chair at least 900 mm.
* Main aisles through a room (where aisle is required) should be a minimum of 1000 mm.
* Where computer stations are placed back to back minimum access space between
should be 1500 mm.
83.2.6.5 Lighting
* Ambient levels of illumination of 200 to 400 Lux,

* Range of 300 to 400 Lux being appropriate for reading or writing tasks.
* 320 Lux or greater for screen based tasks
The control of natural lighting to obtain the ambient levels may be a major problem in
some locations. Consideration may be given to venetian blinds or block out window film on
all external windows, or a combination depending on circumstances.
83.2.6.6 Other Ergonomic Considerations
Footrests
The use of footstools should be considered, as staff have individual requirements,
necessary instruction on the correct use/adjustment must be provided to staff.
Telephone Operations
Where staff are mainly on the telephone, they should be provided with a fitted headset.
83.3 Preventing Occupational Overuse Injuries

83.3.1 Purpose
To address concerns over health and safety matters associated with the use of equipment,
in particular ergonomic layout of screen based equipment which may contribute to OOS.
276
Occupational Health
83.3.2 Application
This procedure relates to types of equipment including personal computers, terminals used
for work and data processing and computer controlled analytical instruments.
83.3.3 Legislation
83.3.4 References
Ergonomic Unit, WorkSafe Australia: Ergonomic principles and checklist for the selection
of office furniture and equipment
Guidance note for the Prevention of Occupational Overuse Syndrome in keyboard
Employment NOHSC:3005 (1996)
Required to specify when completing the pre employment health questionnaire, the number
of hours a day the new employee will spend on screen based equipment
Establish ongoing systems to monitor for signs of muscle fatigue and the well being of
staff using screen based equipment.
Ensure new staff are given adequate training in the use of the computer system,
adjustment and layout of the work station
Understand the procedures to be followed if an eye injury does occur to a member of
staff, particularly the steps involved in rehabilitation of staff.
83.3.5.2 Occupational Health Unit
May recommend eye examinations for staff spending several hours a day using screen
based equipment.
83.3.5.3 Counselling Services
Provide training on stress management and assertiveness: call 8344 6929

83.3.5.4 Sport and Physical Recreation Centre
Provide workplace exercise programs, call 8344 5405.

Assist Departments with advice on aspects of working with screen based equipment, with
emphasis on preventing Occupational Overuse Syndrome and other musculoskeletal
injuries.
Report to their supervisor any physical discomfort they believe is associated with their
screen based equipment and seek advice from the Occupational Health Service 8344
6904, or Risk Management Office, 8344 7702.
Obtain advice of the preferred layout of their work station and work flow from the Risk
Management Office, on 8344 4006.
277

83.3.6.1 Understanding Occupational Overuse Syndrome
Occupational Overuse Syndrome (previously known as RSI, Repetitive Strain Injury).

Occupational Overuse Syndrome is a collective term for a range of conditions
characterised by discomfort or persistent pain the muscles, tendons and other soft tissues,
with or without physical manifestations. These injuries may be caused or aggravated by
work and are associated with repetitive movement, sustained or constrained posture and /
or forced movements. Psychosocial factors, including stress in the working environment
may also be important in the development of these injuries.
The muscles and tendons involved in these conditions may be in the wrists, forearm or
upper arm, shoulder, upper spine or neck of the person affected. Pain or discomfort may
exist in any one or group of these muscles or tendons at one time. The work done by
muscles may be active as in typing, handwriting, playing of musical instruments, use of
hand tools, playing of racquet sports or static work when the muscles are required to
maintain a posture. It is important to realise that the muscle fatigue rate varies between
individuals and in any one particular individual from time to time.
If an occupational overuse syndrome condition is allowed to develop unchecked, it may
cause the individual pain and loss of function and the department to lose human or
financial resources. Early recognition of the symptoms is essential to control or minimise the
effects of such injuries.
Individuals who have experienced any type of overuse injury will require careful supervision
and may be asked to attend the Occupational Health Service. Individuals who experience
symptoms such as pain, weakness or serious disturbance should seek advice from the
Director of the Student Health and Occupational Health Services.
83.3.6.2 Preventing Occupational Overuse Injuries
Prevention strategies will need to include elements of:

job design
work organisation
supervision and training
the role of the individual and
the ergonomic design of the work station.
Ensure that all positions incorporate a variety of tasks which allow variation in movement
and posture. A mix of repetitive or static work, and non repetitive work should be included
so that recovery from any muscle fatigue is made possible.
Endeavour to ensure that no employee is required to continually type or enter data for
more than 5 hours per day. Where the job involves a major component of keyboard work,
or other tasks using the same muscle group, frequent rest breaks should be taken. This
structuring of the task should be a matter of discussion and agreement between individuals
and their supervisors.
Allow an adjustment periof to the work rates after work absences or during a learning
period.
Try to avoid taking on new staff during holiday periods when key training personnel are
not available.
278
Occupational Health
83.3.6.3 VDUs and Radiation
Studies carried out in Australia and overseas have confirmed that the monitor units do not
pose a health risk to the operator. Any inquiries should be directed to the Safety Officer,
Risk Management Office on 8344 7010.
84 Medical Services
84.1 Medical Surveillance Programs
84.1.1 Purpose
To secure the health, safety and welfare of persons at work by early detection of any
adverse changes due to occupational exposure to any substance.
84.1.2 Application
The procedure refers to Pre employment assessments, and Health monitoring.
84.1.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations 1992
84.1.4 References
The University of Melbourne Health and Safety Policy Statement
Human Resources Policies and Procedures Manual
Health Hazard Assessment Questionnaire
Australian Standards 1470: 1986 Health and Safety at Work Principles and Practices
Accident Compensation (Miscellaneous) Amendment Act 1997 Act Number 701/1997
84.1.5.1 Occupational Health Service
The Occupational Health Service is responsible for conducting employment medical

assessments, occupational health monitoring, e.g. hearing and lung functions tests,
assessment of work related medical conditions and investigation of all matters relating to
occupational health in the University. The director of Occupational Health wil determine
the required health surveillance for employees, and will advise the supervisor on any
necessary workplace restrictions or modifications
Provide advice and guidance to departments on potential risks, which may be associated
with work processes, and undertake on request site surveys to determine control measures
to reduce hazards and risks in the workplace.
279
Ensure compliance with the University of Melbourne policy on Occupational Health and
Safety and the Occupational Health and Safety Act requirements.
Provide in writing to prospective employees the nature of the position they will be
undertaking and any possible exposure to workplace hazards that may occur. The
supervisor should also request the employee to disclose any preexisting condition or illness
that may be affected by their work. If this is done the prospective employee should be
informed in writing that failure to disclose such information will remove from the employee
any entitlement to compensation for recurrence or aggravation of the undisclosed
preexisting condition.
The University will also advise employees of vaccination requirements when they
commence employment, or where duties change. Employees will recieve notification of
vaccination requirements through the position description.
Should notify their supervisor and the Risk Management Office immediately if they
suspect a work related illness or disease, or if they are aware of a pre existing problem
which may be exacerbated by their work.
Employees should also declare any preexisting conditions, diseases or illnesses that may be
affected by their duties, prior to the commencement of work.
84.1.6.1 Requirements to Disclose Information
Section 82 (7) of the Accident Compensation Act 1985 became operational on 29 June
1998. It enables employers to request information from employees, before they commence
employment, regarding any pre existing injuries or diseases. Knowledge of pre existing
injury should be provided to the employer in writing.
84.1.6.2 Services of Occupational Health
The Occupational Health Service monitors the ongoing health of staff in three main areas.
These are hearing, lung function and biological monitoring as determined by the Director of
Occupational Health, and relevant legislation.
Hearing
All staff exposed to high noise levels as part of their work require a hearing test at least
every two years. Refer to the Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations 1992.
Allergy
Staff exposed to any hazardous substance, object or animal who may be developing a
possible work related allergy or have a history of any sort of allergy should consult with the
Director of Occupational Health or their own treating doctor, as soon as possible for
appropriate health surveillance.
Lung Function
All staff exposed to the following hazards as part of their work require a lung function test
on commencement of employment:
welding
operations providing dust and lung irritants
carcinogenic chemicals
280
Occupational Health
toxic substances
herbicides and pesticides
epoxy resins
substances of unknown toxicity
use or care of experimental animals.
Diving
Staff who are required to undertake diving with scuba equipment as part of their work
require a diving medical. Please contact the Student Health Service on 9344 6905/4 for an
appointment. No staff may dive with scuba equipment for the University until medical
authority has been obtained and documented.
Lasers
Staff working with 3 class or 4 lasers are required to attend the College of Optometry for
a specific examination. This is arranged and paid for by the employing department.
Radioactive Iodine
All employees who are exposed to radioactive iodine as part of their work will receive
regular monitoring by the Radiation Protection Officer.
Vaccination
Employees will receive notification of vaccination recommendations through the position
description.
Staff who have biomedical, laboratory, first aid, catering, childcare, plumbing or other
duties where there is a risk of contact with human or animal matter, or disease, should be
offered immunisation.
Staff requiring immunisation should arrange an appointment with Student Health, or their
medical practitioner prior to commencement of duties.
Some vaccine preventable diseases are:
* Hepatitis A & B
* Tuberculosis
* Q Fever
* Leptospirosis
* Tetanus
* Measles / Mumps / Rubella
84.1.6.3 Other Health Issues
The Director of the Student Health Service /Occupational Health Service is available for
consultation about any health problem which may be work related (9344 6905/4 for
appointments). A relationship between employment and illness may only become apparent
when information from many individuals and work places is collated. The Director would
like to receive information about the occurrence of illnesses such as infectious diseases,
malignancies and immune deficiency states and such information will be treated with the
strictest confidence.
Certain infectious diseases are notifiable to the Health Department by the treating doctor
and the laboratory which confirms the diagnosis. It is important that the Occupational
281
Health Staff are also aware of the occurrence of infections such as tuberculosis, which
might spread to other staff members.
Other conditions such as overuse injuries may result from inappropriate work practices or
the use of equipment which is not a good fit with the individual concerned. Advice on work
stations can be obtained from the Return to Work Coordinator, RMO, 8344 6467, the
Occupational Health Nurse, 9344 7492 or the Safety Officer, RMO, 8344 7010.
84.2 Provision of First Aid Facilities

84.2.1 Purpose
To provide practical guidance for staff at the University to undertake risk assessments for
the identification, installation and review of first aid requirements.
84.2.2 Application
The University has adopted the Code of Practice for First Aid in the Workplace as the
basis for its policy regarding the provision of first aid facilities for departments on and off
campus for staff and students.
84.2.3 Legislation
Code of Practice for First Aid in the Workplace 1995
84.2.4 References
AS 1319 Safety Signs for the Occupational Environment
Personnel Policy and Procedures 11.1.12
Human Resources Staff Development Unit annual program
Must delegate a responsible staff member to perform an assessment and annual review
of first aid requirements and facilities for the department or area.
84.2.5.2 Nominee (Usually BEC)
Must determine the appropriate first aid facilities for the workplace by a documented risk
assesment. The outcome and any changes that occur over time must be discussed and
documented at regular departmental/faculty meetings when reviewing incident records.
84.2.5.3 Supervisor
Ensure employees are inducted and are advised on the location of first aid kits and are
able to identify qualified first aid personnel.
Consider the most appropriate location of first aid kits and ensure that they are clearly
identified and accessible to employees. Also ensure first aid kits are regularly maintained
and replenished. First aid supplies are available on an internal order through Stationery
Store 8344 6230.
Ensure there are no scheduled drugs or sharps in first aid kits. Advice should be sought
from Health Services 8344 6904 or a registered medical practitioner regarding all forms of
medication.
282
Occupational Health
Will have instruction on arrangements regarding first aid facilities:

Location of first aid kits
Name, Location and Contact number of first aid personnel
Student Health Service
Ambulance, security and other emergency numbers
This instruction must be updated whenever there are changes to the first aid provisions.
84.2.6.1 Provision of First Aid Kits
Container:
Should protect the contents and be easily recognisable with a green cross on the exterior.
(Stickers are available through the Risk Management Office 8344 7896)
Contents:
Requirements will vary depending on the level of first aid facilities required
Note: No treatments allowed in Basic Kits i.e.. antiseptics, aspirin etc.
Basic Kit:
Emergency telephone numbers and locations of first aiders
Basic First Aid notes
Bandaids
Eye pads
Sterile pads
Triangular Bandages
Safety Pins
Wound Dressings (3 sizes)
Adhesive tape
Crepe bandage
Disposable gloves
Scissors
Disposable rescusitation mask
Additional Requirements:
Eye Modules: Laboratories and workshops that handle chemicals in liquid or powder form,
or where there is a risk of flying particles from cutting, machining or welding should have
the provision of an eye module.
Burns Modules: Areas where heat, corrosive chemicals or flammable liquids are used
should have the provision of a burns module.
Antibacterial Modules: Areas where biological contamination from fungus, spores and
animal materials are used should have Betadine as an antibacterial agent.
283
Remote Locations Kits:

Emergency reference manual containing emergency medical treatment numbers
Comprehensive first aid notes on treating bites and stings from other animals
Broad crepe bandages for bites and stings
Drinking water
Cervical collar
Large clean sheeting
Thermal blanket
Whistle
Torch
Notepad and Pencil
84.2.6.2 Guidelines for Assessment
The First Aid Assessment Form provides generic risk assessments for general first aid hazards
and provides guidelines for determining the level of risk in a particular area. Completing the
form will assist with determining the level of first aid required and the number of first
aiders required.
Step 1 Identification of potential hazards
Inspection checklist to identify potential causes or work injury and illness
Review reported incidents, types and frequency
Consultation with staff and students
Specialist advice from the Risk Management Office
Step 2 Assessment of potential hazards
Risk Assessment of hazards in the workplace (note severity)
Material Safety Data Sheet information on first aid treatment for chemicals
Consideration of size, location and type of workplace
Calculation of staff and student numbers in the department or area
Step 3 Determination of first aid facilities
Calculate the number of first aiders required
Evaluate competency requirements, i.e. level 1, 2 or higher
Nominate number of kits required
Evaluate the contents required for the kits
Ensure that first aid facilities and contents of kits are reassessed yearly, or whenever there
is a significant change to the size or content of the workplace, or there are alterations to
the type of work being undertaken at the site.
284
Occupational Health
84.2.6.3 Sample Assessment for an administrative area
Step 1: Identification
Inspection of area: no potential causes or work injury or illness
Incident report review: minor cuts, strains from slips trips and falls
Consultation with staff: no special requirements for first aid facilities
No specialist advice was sought
Step 2: Assessment: LOW severity of Hazards
MSDSs review: no significant hazards posed by chemicals in the workplace from toner,
detergents, cleaning agents etc.
Location is adjacent to a hospital and Security is available 24 hours a day
Non student area, staff only
No after hours work of an experimental nature is conducted
Step 3: Determination: LOW risk
Suggests a requirement of 1 certified first aider per 50 staff
First Aiders require competency of LEVEL 1 (Emergency First Aid)
1 Kit is required per first aider
First Aid Kit should require Basic items only
84.2.6.4 Sample Assessment for a Laboratory Area
Step 1: Identification
Inspection identified the following hazards:
Chemicals: corrosives and poisons
Burns: chemicals, heat, cryogenic fluids
Cuts: scalpels and needlesticks
Bites: animal handling
Manual Handling: lifting and moving items
Review of Incidents showed strains, chemical burns, bites and superficial cuts
Consultation revealed concern with work practices for work out of hours
Specialist advice regarding provision of special chemical treatments was sought
Step 2: Assessment: MEDIUM severity of Hazards

MSDSs showed significant chemical hazards as revealed during the inspection
Special requirements of spill kits for: Mercury, Cyanide and Hydrogen Fluoride.
Location is adjacent to a hospital and Security is available 24 hours a day
Workplace 80 staff and students in a combined laboratory and office environment.
Step 3: Determination: MEDIUM risk
Suggests a requirement of 1 certified first aider per 50 staff, plus one first aider in all
student lab/workshop areas
285
First Aiders require competency of LEVEL 2 (Basic First Aid)

1 Kit is required per first aider
First Aid Kit should require Basic items plus eye and burns modules.
Laboratory may require after hours support from Security Office 8344 6666.
84.3 Provision of First Aid Treatment

84.3.1 Purpose
To provide practical guidance for staff at the University to ensure that staff and students
are informed of the procedure for the provision of first aid treatment.
84.3.2 Application
The University has adopted the Code of Practice for First Aid in the Workplace as the
basis for its policy regarding the provision of first aid for departments on and off campus
for staff and students.
84.3.3 Legislation
Code of Practice for First Aid in the Workplace 1995
84.3.4 References
Personnel Policy and Procedures 11.1.12
Human Resources Training and Development Unit annual program
84.3.5.1 Head of Department / Supervisors
Ensure employees are inducted and are advised on the location of first aid kits and are
able to identify qualified first aid personnel. Also ensure that staff are instructed on the
appropriate procedures to follow in the event of an incident.
Ensure that appropriate competency training through staff development and training is
undertaken for workplace level 1 or greater. The training is current for three years.
Training costs should be covered by the Department. Staff members who are currently
registered as medical practitioners or nurses are deemed to be qualified to provide first aid.
First Aid personnel should be willing to receive appropriate vaccinations, i.e. Hepatitis A
and B. Immunisations can be arranged through Student Health at cost to the Department.
Following an incident where first aid treatment has been provided, advise the involved
person to complete an S3 Incident form or fill one out yourself on behalf of this person. This
form should then be passed to the Head of Department for authorisation, to indicate the
appropriate action taken. This form should then be forwarded to the Risk Management
Office.
Ensure that all treatment given to the involved person is recorded on the back of a
departmental copy of the S3 incident form and kept in a secure place. This copy should
be signed by the first aider.
286
Occupational Health
Should ensure they know the following:

Location of first aid kits
Name, Location and Contact number of first aid personnel
Student Health Service
Ambulance, security and other emergency numbers
Staff and students are also responsible for filling out an S3 form where an incident has
occurred.
84.3.6.1 Minor / Moderate Incidents
Minor / Moderate Incidents Treat initially by first aider, refer involved person to student
health or their local doctor.
84.3.6.2 Major Incident During Work Hours
Immediately call an ambulance on 0000 and clearly state the building location. Ensure a
person is sent to meet the ambulance at the entry to the building. Call nearest first aider,
security officer or student health to provide interim treatment. Notify the Risk Management
Office.
84.3.6.3 After Hours Incidents (after 5:00pm)
Minor incidents treat initially by first aider if available. Call Security if no first aiders are
available to send a security officer 8344 6666. Notify Workcover for serious reportable
incidents, see Section 42 Incident and Hazard Reporting.
84.3.6.4 Off Campus Incidents
Where staff are required to work off campus emergency procedures should be considered
in the planning stages. A documented Risk Assessment should be completed covering:
Requirements for communication by radio or telephone
Extra first aid requirements if travelling to remote areas
First Aid training requirements
85 WorkCover
85.1 Occupational Rehabilitation Policy
85.1.1 Introduction
The University is committed to effective occupational rehabilitation of injured employees
and has developed principles with the aim of establishing a comprehensive approach to
rehabilitation.
287
85.1.2 Definitions
Rehabilitation is defined as the restoration of injured employees from occupational ill
health to the fullest physical, mental, social, vocational and economic usefulness of which
they are capable. It incorporates a multidisciplinary range of skills in addition to the
medical management of an injury, e.g. physiotherapy, occupational therapy, psychology,
ergonomics and counselling. Rehabilitation begins at the moment of injury or ill health and
continues until the employee is as fully rehabilitated as possible. The University of
Melbourne is a self insurer for the purposes of WorkCover Insurance.
85.1.3 Return to Work Policy
The objectives of the Universitys return to work policy are to:
Take action to assist injured employees to stay at or return to work as soon as safely
possible in a manner consistent with medical and or other professional advice;
Enable any employee injured or suffering an illness because of their work to be returned
to work in the shortest possible time, provided it is safe and practical to do so, or;
Provide suitable alternative work which does not jeopardise the well being of the
rehabilitee, or that of any other worker;
Facilitate participation in an occupational rehabilitation return to work program that will
not prejudice the staff member.
85.1.4 Return to Work Coordinator
The Universitys Return to Work Coordinator is currently Marina Harris (8344 6467).
85.1.5 Entitlements
1. Injured or ill staff who are in hospital or at home will maintain their security of
employment and continue to be paid at their normal base rate for a period of up to 52
weeks.
2. Staff members are entitled to standard leave provisions during their period of
rehabilitation, subject to the normal approved procedures.
3. Staff members should seek advice on any superannuation entitlements from the
Superannuation Officer within Human Resources.
4. If aggregate periods of incapacity extent for more than 52 weeks, benefits will be
reduced to a proportion of notional weekly earnings, subject to annual indexing. Annual,
sick and long service leave will cease to accrue after 52 calendar weeks.
5. Injured or ill staff (full and part time only) with an accepted WorkCover claim are
entitled to accident make up pay. Make up pay is the difference between payments
determined by the Victorian WorkCover Authority and the employees usual salary.
6. A staff member whose WorkCover claim has been accepted will have all reasonable
medical and like expenses associated with the claim paid by the University
85.1.6 Occupational Rehabilitation Plan
1. Where an injured employee has been incapacitated, as a result of a work related injury,
for a period of 20 days or more, a return to work plan will be prepared. This return to work
plan will comply with the requirements of the Accident Compensation (Occupational
Rehabilitation and Risk Management) Regulations.
288
Occupational Health
2. Staff members may choose their own treating doctor. Treatment may also be provided
by registered occupational therapists, physiotherapists, psychologists, acupuncturists and
osteopaths.
3. Staff may choose to use the services of the Universitys Return to Work Coordinator to
assist in their rehabilitation program or may choose an approved rehabilitation provider.
Such providers are groups registered by the Victorian WorkCover Authority for various
occupational rehabilitation services.
4. The Return to Work Coordinator will explain the occupational rehabilitation process to
the staff member and provide if requested, written information on the system.
5. A staff member may choose to have another person present at any meeting regarding
occupational rehabilitation and may have access to a current copy of their occupational
rehabilitation program.
6. Staff should be involved in all decisions regarding their occupational rehabilitation
program and may seek advice before signing any documents.
7. On advice from the staff members treating practitioner that they are able to return to
their pre injury duties and hours, the staff member will be placed in their former substantive
classification or academic rank. When this is not possible because of the injury or
incapacity, the following option will be pursued, in the listed order of priority:
return to modified duties and or work station;
return to alternative duties with appropriate training.
8. In implementing these options, account will be taken of any award provision.
85.1.6.1 Rehabilitation Providers
1. Cedar Court Health South Hospital

888 Toorak Road
CAMBERWELL ,VICTORIA 3124
Professor Peter Disler, Director, Victorian Rehabilitation Research Institute
Phone: 9805 4255 or 98092444
Fax:
9809 6756
2. Dr. Clayton Thomas, Professor / Clinical Director of Rehabilitation Services, Royal

Melbourne Hospital and Western Health Care Network
Consultant in Rehabilitation Medicine
499 Springvale Road
GLEN WAVERLEY, VIC 3150
Phone: 9566 2733
Fax:
9562 0832
85.1.7 Role of Staff

All injured staff are required to cooperate in their occupational rehabilitation program, the
agreed primary goal being return to work.
289
85.1.8 Role of Supervisors

1. Supervisors will assist the Return to Work Coordinator in developing and implementing
an appropriate safe and meaningful return to work program. The program should take
account of the relevant medical restrictions, monitor the staff members capabilities with
the itemised work restrictions and provide regular feedback to the coordinator on progress
and any problems.
2. Supervisors should discuss with the staff member and the coordinator: duration in work
area, level of competency and attitude to work. Supervisors will provide support and
assistance when a staff member returns to work and take action, where appropriate, to
prevent recurrence of injury. Such actions may include modification to the workplace. They
should liaise with the Manager, Risk Management Office on the safety of work practices.
3. Training in the aims and objectives of occupational rehabilitation is included in training
courses for supervisors and further specific information is provided during the development
of specific return to work programs.
4. Supervisors should keep a copy of the occupational rehabilitation information available
and must ensure access to the Personnel Policy and Procedures manual.
85.1.9 Length of Rehabilitation Program
As soon as your doctor says that you have some capacity for work, your employer must
offer you suitable employment if it is available. But your employer only has to do this if
you have a work capacity within 12 aggregate months from when you became unable to
do your normal work. "Suitable employment" means work that suits the nature of your
injury and your current work capacity.
If you cannot work at your normal job while the injury heals, your doctor and your
employer may be able to arrange other duties for you to do while you recover.
If you have fully recovered within the twelve month period, your employer must give you
your old job back, or offer you an equivalent position.
Your WorkCover benefits may be stopped if you refuse to participate in rehabilitation
services or your return to work plan, or if you refuse to look for suitable employment
elsewhere if your employer cannot provide it.
If, at the expiration of the make up pay period, the original employing department is unable
to provide meaningful work, the faculty or administrative section will be required to provide
alternative employment wherever possible.
85.1.10 Offers of Employment
The University, subject to a joint meeting of the Return to Work Coordinator, the
rehabilitee, the supervisor and a representative of the rehabilitee if requested, will make all
offers of suitable alternative employment in writing. The offer will include a description of
the job, the conditions and the remuneration applicable. The staff member is required to
sign a copy of the letter, to signify receipt and understanding of the duties involved in the
job offer.
No alteration of the agreed duties will be made without prior consultation between the
rehabilitation provider and / or the treating doctor and other qualified person nominated by
the employee and the Universitys return to work coordinator.
290
Occupational Health
85.1.11 Assistance to Departments

Where an injured employee is in an occupational rehabilitation program and not capable
of full time effective work, the Rehabilitation fund may, on application to the Manager,
Risk Management Office, be used to pay for not more than 50% of the weekly payments
to casual or part time staff employed to complete the rehabilitees work. The injured
employees original employing department will pay the remaining cost. The length of the
period of reimbursement will be determined on the merits of each case and reviewed each
month. All requests for payment should be made on an Internal Order.
The University requires that all accidents be reported to RMO on an S3 Incident form. An
accident resulting in an injury will be investigated by the Department in consultation with
the Manager, Risk Management Office, and appropriate action taken to prevent
recurrence.
85.1.13 Confidentiality
At all times, information relating to an employees rehabilitation will be kept confidential.
85.2 Rehabilitation for Occupational Injury or Illness

85.2.1 Purpose
To provide effective occupational rehabilitation for injured employees with the aim of
establishing a comprehensive approach to rehabilitation.
85.2.2 Application
This applies to all employees of the University.
85.2.3 Legislation
Accident Compensation Act, 1985
85.2.4 References
The University of Melbourne Rehabilitation Policy
Personnel Policy & Procedure Manual
85.2.5 Definitions
Occupational rehabilitation is defined as the restoration of injured employees from
occupational ill health to the fullest physical, mental, social, vocational and economic
usefulness of which they are capable. It incorporates a multi disciplinary range of skills in
addition to the medical management of an injury, e.g. physiotherapy, occupational therapy,
psychology, ergonomics and counselling. Occupational rehabilitation begins at the moment
of injury or ill health and continues until the employee is as fully rehabilitated as possible.
291
Assist injured employees to be maintained at work wherever practicable or to return to

suitable employment as soon as possible if safe to do so after injury or illness.
Ensures that a return to work plan including an offer of suitable work is established for
every employee who has an injury that involves twenty or more days of total incapacity
for work.
Liaises with any party involved in the treatment or occupational rehabilitation of an injured
employee.
Monitors the progress of the return to suitable work of any injured employee with an
accepted WorkCover claim and of any occupational rehabilitation services by outside
consultants.
Ensures that an injured employee is referred, where appropriate to an approved
occupational rehabilitation provider.
Liaises at the earliest convenience with the WorkCover Claims Officer.
Ensures the confidentiality of personal information which is provided while coordinating
return to work activities, organising referrals to approved occupational rehabilitation
services or in other claims management activities.
Ensures that information is transferred to all relevant staff to reduce the risk of recurrence
to the injured employee or to reduce the possibility of injury to other staff members.
Will assist the Return to Work Coordinator in developing and implementing an appropriate
safe and meaningful return to work program. The program should take account of the
relevant medical restrictions, monitor the staff members capabilities with the itemised work
restrictions and provide regular feedback to the coordinator on progress and any problems.
Departmental Managers should discuss with the staff member and the coordinator;
duration in work area, level of competency and attitude to work. Departmental Managers
should also provide support and assistance when the staff member returns to work and
take action, where appropriate, to prevent recurrence of injury. Such actions may include
modification to the workplace. They should also liaise with the Safety Manager on the
safety of the work practices.
All staff are required to cooperate in their rehabilitation program, the agreed primary goal
being return to work. Failure to cooperate could jeopardise their entitlement to
compensation.
All staff must attend an examination by a recognised medical expert nominated by the
University, if and when requested by the Risk Management Office. Failure to do so may
result in a suspension of benefits.
292
Occupational Health

85.2.7.1 Alternative Suitable Employment
If, at the expiration of the make up pay period, the original employing department is unable
to provide meaningful work, the Faculty or Administrative section is obliged to try to
provide alternative employment.
The University, subject to a joint meeting of the Return to Work Coordinator, the
rehabilitee, the supervisor and a representative of the rehabilitee if requested, will make all
formal offers of suitable alternative employment in writing. The offer will include a
detailed description of the job, the conditions, and the remuneration applicable. The staff
member is required to sign a copy of the letter, to signify receipt and understanding of
duties in the job offer. This is required if an employee is permanently incapable of ever
returning to his or her previous work in any capacity. No alteration of the agreed duties will
be made without prior consultation between the rehabilitation provider and/or the treating
doctor and other qualified person nominated by the employee and the Universitys return to
Work Coordinator.
85.2.7.2 Rehabilitation Fund
Where an injured employee is in a rehabilitation program and not capable of full time
effective work, the University of Melbournes rehabilitation fund may, on application to the
Manager, Risk Management Office, be used to pay for not more than 50% of the weekly
payments to casual or part time staff employed to complete the rehabilitees work. The
injured employees original employing department will pay the remaining cost. The length of
the period of reimbursement will be determined on the merits of each case and will be
assessed each month on receipt of a medical certificate of capacity
The rehabilitation fund is only available for University of Melbourne staff and is entirely
separate from any WorkCover payments.
85.2.7.3 Payments and Leave
Injured or ill staff who are in hospital or at home will maintain their security of employment
and continue to be paid at their normal base rate for a period of no greater than 52 weeks
from their original date of cessation.
Staff members are entitled to standard leave provisions during their period of occupational
rehabilitation, subject to the normal approval procedures.
If the period of incapacity exceeds the make up pay period of 52 weeks, benefits will be
reduced to either 60% ( if you have a current work capacity) or 75% ( if you have no
current work capacity) of your pre injury earnings. This can be determined through medical
evidence provided by your treating practitioner. Annual, sick and long service leave will
cease to accrue after the expiry of the make up pay period.
Injured or ill staff with an accepted WorkCover claim are entitled to make up pay for a
period of no greater than 52 weeks. Make up pay is the difference between payments
determined by the Accident Compensation Act, and the employees usual salary.
85.2.7.4 Choice of Medical Provider
Staff members may choose their own treating doctor. Treatment may also be provided by
registered occupational therapists, physiotherapists, chiropractors, psychologists,
acupuncturists and osteopaths.
Staff may also choose an approved occupational rehabilitation provider, and may change
the provider at a later date if issues of concern have not been resolved. Approved
Occupational Rehabilitation Providers are groups registered by WorkCover to employ
occupational rehabilitation coordinators and other professionals who will assist staff in
returning to work. Alternatively, staff may choose to use the services of the Universitys
return to work coordinator to assist in returning to work.
85.2.7.5 Medical and Related Expenses
Staff whose claims have been accepted will have all reasonable medical and like
expenses related to the injury paid by the University.
85.2.7.6 Occupational Rehabilitation Program
The Return to Work Coordinator will explain the rehabilitation system to the staff member
and provide written information on the system, if requested.
Staff may choose to have another person present at any meeting regarding rehabilitation
and may have access to a current copy of their rehabilitation program.
Staff should be involved in all decisions regarding their rehabilitation program and may
seek advice before signing documentation.
85.2.7.7 Return to Work
On advice from the staff members treating practitioner that they are able to return to their
pre injury duties and hours, the staff member will be placed in their former substantive
classification or academic rank. When this is not possible because of the injury or
incapacity, the following option will be pursued, in the listed order of priority:
Return to modified duties and/or work station;
Return to alternative duties with appropriate training.
85.3 What is WorkCover?

85.3.1 Purpose
To provide suitable and just compensation to an employee who has been injured at work or
as a direct result of their employment.
85.3.2 Application
This applies to all employees of the University.
85.3.3 Legislation
Accident Compensation Act 1985
85.3.4 References
85.3.5.1 Risk Management
To manage all WorkCover claims relating to University of Melbourne Staff in accordance

with the Accident Compensation Act, 1985.
294
Occupational Health
All work related injuries/illnesses are reported within the prescribed time frames using a S3
Incident report.
All WorkCover claims to be forwarded to the Risk Management Office within 24 hours of
receipt or immediately if the injury is serious.
Must ensure that they document all issues relating to an employees work performance, e.g.
Work ethic, absenteeism, etc.
Must report any injury they sustain whilst in the course of their employment within 30 days
of becoming aware of it.
HOW TO LODGE A WORKCOVER CLAIM
Claims for weekly compensation can be made by completing a WorkCover Claim for
Compensation form which is available from the Risk Management Office or Australia
Post. This claim must be accompanied by a WorkCover medical certificate which is
provided by your treating practitioner. The claim form and medical certificate must be sent
to the Risk Management Office within 5 days of becoming aware of your condition. If you
are claiming for medical and like expenses only, a Medical Certificate is not required to be
submitted with the WorkCover claim form.
HOW ARE WORKCOVER CLAIMS ASSESSED?
Once the Risk Management Office receives your claim for compensation , you and your
department will receive a letter acknowledging receipt of your claim. You may be
contacted by phone to discuss any matters that require clarification. The Risk
Management Office has 28 days to assess your claim for weekly payments and 60 days
for medical and like expenses claims. During this assessment period you may be requested
in writing to attend a medical practitioner who is a specialist in dealing with the particular
injury at hand. If there are any difficulties in attending the required medical examination,
you must contact the Risk Management Office immediately so a further date can be
arranged. If you fail to attend the medical examination, your entitlement to compensation
may be suspended. An interpreter can also be arranged , if required.
You may also be consulted by an insurance loss assessor to discuss the circumstances
which surround your WorkCover Claim.
If your Claim for Compensation is accepted, you will receive a letter advising you of what
your WorkCover entitlements are. If your Claim for Compensation is not accepted, you will
receive a letter advising you on the grounds which your claim was rejected on and what
your appeal rights are.
NOTICE OF INJURY
An employee must now advise the University of Melbourne of an injury that may entitle
them to compensation within 30 days of becoming aware of that injury. If this injury is not
reported with the prescribed time frames, their entitlement to compensation may be
jeopardised.
The University of Melbourne must also now acknowledge in writing the giving of notice of
an injury, when an Incident report (S3) has been received by The Risk Management
Office.
WHAT ENTITLEMENTS ARE AVAILABLE UNDER WORKCOVER?
295
Permanent Disability Claims. (For injuries sustained prior to 12 November 1997). This
includes "Claim for Compensation of Permanent Disability, including Hearing Loss or Pain
and Suffering"
Non Economic Loss Claims. (For injuries sustained after the 12 November 1997)
Common Law. ( For injuries sustained prior to 12 November 1997 only)
( You must consult a solicitor if you wish to make a Common Law claim)
Death Claims. "Claim for Compensation In the Event of Death of a Worker".
Time Lost Claims
Medical and Like Expense only Claims.
If you wish to make a claim for any of the above, please contact the Risk Management
Office on 8344 6149.
WHO IS AN EMPLOYEE?
Any person who has signed a contract of employment with the University of Melbourne or
receives payment for providing a service or performing a task for whom the University
deducts income tax and pays a WorkCover Levy. This would normally include all full time,
part time and casual staff.
WHAT IS A COMPENSABLE INJURY?
Any injury or disease which occurs whilst in the course of your employment would normally
be classified as a compensable injury. Employment must always be a Significant
Contributing Factor to the development of your claimed injury or condition, e.g. Lower back
injury due to lifting 15kg boxes all day.
If a WorkCover Claim for Compensation relating to Stress, Anxiety and Depression is
lodged with the University of Melbourne, it must be proven that reasonable action has been
taken in a reasonable manner by the University of Melbourne to demote, transfer,
discipline, redeploy, retrench or dismiss an employee, if liability is to be denied.
86 Control of Noise
86.1 Purpose
To identify and control of noise in the University, and to minimise noise pollution.
86.2 Application
This procedure applies to all members of the University exposed to noise levels, which
exceed statutory limits.
86.3 Legislation
Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations 1992.
Environment Protection (Residential Noise) Regulations 1997.
296
Occupational Health
86.4 References
Australian Standard 1217, Determination of sound power levels of noise sources.
Australian Standard 2659, Guide to the use of sound measuring equipment.
Code of Practice, Noise. http://www.workcover.vic.gov.au/vwa/vwacop.nsf/COP?Openview
Property and Buildings Safe Work Procedure 2.02 Noise Control .
86.4.1 Definitions
Decibel: Level of sound pressure. The decibel is the unit on this scale and is abbreviated to
dB.
Frequency: The number of vibrations per second and is expressed in units of Hertz (Hz).
Audible sounds lie between 20 Hz and 20 000 Hz.
Daily Noise Dose: 8 hour equivalent continuous sound pressure level of 85 dB(A).
Maximum Noise Exposure: peak sound pressure level reading of 140 dB(lin).
Must ensure that all requirements for noise assessments are completed and where
appropriate a noise management plan is implemented. A hearing conservation program
for all staff who are exposed to noise should be supported.
Ensure that goods purchased comply with statutory requirements and do not exceed the
specified levels. Where equipment has noise emissions above the thresholds then
appropriate shielding and noise control measures will be implemented.
Where employees are exposed to noise the Head of Department shall ensure that all
training, audiometric testing and information is supplied to the staff concerned.
86.5.2 Supervisor
Supervisors responsible for staff working in areas where there are noise levels that are
above the statutory thresholds shall ensure that staff wear the prescribed hearing
protection and shall ensure that each employee has received adequate training in the
wearing and maintenance of that protection.
Ensure that the results of noise assessments are available for consultation to determine
appropriate control measures.
86.5.4 Employees
Can request sound level surveys to be conducted if they have concern about noise levels.
Must report any hearing problems to their supervisor.
Must wear the appropriate PPE where directed by their Supervisor, or by signage.
297

Are able to provide services for the assessment of noise levels in the workplace. The Risk
Management Office is responsible for the inspection, calibration and maintenance of the
noise monitoring equipment held at the Risk Management Office.
Shall provide to the supervisor requesting the assessment a comprehensive report
comprising the evaluation of the readings taken and recommendations for control of noise.

86.6.1 Noise risk Identification Assessment and Control
Firstly: identify if there is a risk to employees from exposure to noise from plant or
equipment, or from the normal work environment using the Noise Hazard Identification Form.
This process must be documented.
Where a risk has been identified the Risk Management Office should be contacted to
conduct a documented noise assessment.
Where an assessment has been completed and shows that there is an unacceptable noise
level in the workplace, the employer must ensure that the employees exposure to the noise
is controlled so as to minimise risk to health and safety. The Hierarchy of Control must be
used. This must be done in consultation with the employee and the Health and Safety
Representative.
The surveys shall be regularly reviewed, either every 5 years, or when the job process
changes.
Where an employee has been, or is to be exposed to noise, or must wear hearing protection
devices the employer must provide for audiometric testing. Testing is available through the
Occupational Health Service.
Where an employee has been provided with the appropriate hearing protection device or
other noise control measure, and has been trained in the general fitting and maintenance,
the employee must use those control measures in accordance with that training. Training
shall be conducted every 4 years.
86.6.2 Sample Noise Control Plan
Step 1 Identify Risks
Fill in the Risk Identification Checklist
If any answers are yes then a key risk factor has been identified
Further assessment is required
Step 2 Assessment of Risk Factors
A noise assessment is required to be undertaken
Contact Safety Officer at the Risk Management Office on 8344 7010
Measurements using a noise meter will be conducted in the workplace
A report outlining the exposure will be provided
Step 3 Noise Control Plan
298
Occupational Health
A written plan needs to be drawn up outlining the steps that will be taken to reduce the
noise exposure of the employees. The plan could include: addressing the Hierarchy of
Control to reduce noise:
86.6.3 Hierarchy of Control
Elimination
Can the process, task or substance be removed from the workplace?
Substitution
Can the process, task or substance be changed for something safer?
Engineering Controls
Can guarding, controls, isolation or ventilation reduce the hazard?
Can mechanical aids be implemented to reduce the hazard?
Can maintenance programs improve equipment?
Can the operator or the equipment be isolated?
Administrative Procedures
Can procedures to reduce the exposure to the hazard through job rotation or time limits be
implemented?
Can signage for restricted access be used?
Can documentation of work procedures and risk assessments be done?
Can training and supervision be used to control the risk?
Personal Protective Equipment
Can PPE be properly selected for the task?
Can PPE be maintained properly to provide proper protection?
Can PPE create other hazards?
The following are some ideas for controlling the risk using the hierarchy of control:
Selection of equipment with lower noise emissions
Design of new work areas to include engineering noise controls
Procedures for preventative maintenance on existing equipment
Procedures for monitoring usage of hearing protectors
Identification of hearing protection zones
86.6.4 Selection and use of Hearing Protection
Refer Section 8.2.5 Selection and Use of PPE
86.6.5 Audiological Examinations
Audiological examinations are recommended for employees where testing indicates that
an employee has a hearing threshold which equals of exceeds in:
(i) 25 dB at 30 years of age or less
(ii) 35 dB at 45 years of age or less
(iii) 50 dB at any age
299
Or where a difference in hearing levels of an employee between an audiogram and a

subsequent audiogram equal to or exceeding 15 dB.
86.6.6 Hearing Protection Signage
Where hearing protection is selected to control the risk, appropriate signage must be
introduced into the workplace to identify areas and equipment where hearing protection
must be worn.
The sign should include the following phrase:
HEARING PROTECTION MUST BE WORN
Or have a pictograph depicting a person wearing hearing protection.
86.6.7 Controlling Environmental Noise
Where noise is produced, there are limitations on the times that production of that noise
can occur. Generally activation of noise producing equipment is prohibited during
weekdays before 7 am and after 8 pm. Weekends before 9 am and after 8 pm.
Where there is contract work to be carried out that requires generation of unacceptable
noise levels for the general working day, these operations shall be carried out outside of
working hours as per the Special Conditions of Contract Clause for Contractors through
Property and Buildings.
86.6.8 Controlling Nuisance Noise
Where noise levels are not controlled by legislation, i.e. noise levels produced are below
exposure standards the noise can be inferred as nuisance noise. This can be continuous or
intermittent, but the effect is such that there is a material interference with property, or the
personal comfort or quality of life of an employee.
Where a noise problem has been identified then an assessment must be made to determine
the type of noise, its effect on the affected person, its times of operation, and methods
available for reducing the noise to an acceptable level.
Contact must be made to the responsible department to advise of the production of
nuisance noise by the plant or equipment. Where the noise has been deemed to be
excessive to the level of nuisance noise then controls must be put into place to reduce the
noise levels.
300
Appendix A. Forms
A1 Incident Report
Incident Report S3
A2 Quick Reference Sheet

Quick Reference Sheet
A3 Training Requirements for EHS

Training Requirements for EHS
A4 Office / Workstation Environment / Safety Inspection

Office / Workstation Environment / Safety Inspection
A5 Laboratory Environment / Safety Inspection

Laboratory Environment / Safety Inspection
A6 Workshop Environment / Safety Inspection

Workshop Environment / Safety Inspection

Risk Assessment 2D Model

Risk Assessment 3D Model
A9 Poisons Control Plan

Poisons Control Plan
A10 Fume Cupboard Clearance for Inspection, Maintenance

and Repairs
Fume Cupboard Clearance for Inspection, Maintenance and Repairs
A11 Disposal of Hazardous Wastes

Disposal of Hazardous Wastes
A12 Plant Hazard Identification

Plant Hazard Identification
301
A13 Phone Threat

The Phone Threat form is to be used in the case of threatening phone calls.
A14 Conducting Emergency Drills

Conducting Emergency Drills
A15 Manual Handling Identification

Manual Handling Identification
A16 First Aid Information

First Aid Information
A17 First Aid Assessment Form

First Aid Assessment Form
A18 Keyboard Workstation Assessment Checklist

Keyboard Workstation Assessment
A19 After Hours Person or Equipment Form

After Hours Person or Equipment Form
A20 Noise Hazard Identification

Noise Hazard Identification Form
A21 Incident Reporting Flow Chart

A22 Chemical Assessment

Chemical Assessment Form
A23 Medical Questionnaire for Off Campus Activities

Medical Questionnaire for Off Campus Activities
A24 Overseas Travel Guidelines

Overseas Travel Guidelines
A25 Communication Plan Legionella

Communication Plan for first response for positive Legionella
302
Forms
A26 EHS Review Schedule Cyclic Events Checklist

EHS Review Schedule Cyclic Events Checklist
303
304
Appendix B. Attachments
B1 Records Management
Example of Records Disposal Schedule
B2 Internal Audit Schedule

Internal Audit Schedule
B3 Academic Environmental, and Health & Safety

Representatives
Table B1:
Academic Departments/Faculties
DEPARTMENT
Health & Safety

Representative
Management
Representative
Environmental
Representative
EHS Coordinator
Architecture (D)
Peter Ashford
Marian Costelloe
Dean Mundey
Lisa Dougherty
Old Arts Bld (D)
Lynne Wrout
Asleigh Rees
Christine McIntyre
Languages (D)
Julie Madjarevic
Vicky Aikman
Sally Jones
Vicky Aikman
Creative Arts (D)
Lynne Wrout
Stephen Cottrill
Geography &
Enviro (D)
Wayne Stephenson
Mark Ellaway
Mark Ellaway
Mark Ellaway
FACSA (D)
Jan Heale
John Medley (D)
Lynne Wrout
Lynne Wrout
MIALS (D)
Robyn Borg
Lynne Wrout
ARTS
Criminology (D)
M Chaitra
Louisa Stewart
Louisa Stewart
Economics &
Commerce (D)
Amanda
Kalbrunner
Suzanne Dixon
Suzanne Dixon
Suzanne Dixon
Education (D)
Rae Bernaldo
C Prideaux
Jo Lang
Admin
"
"
Filocha Haslam
C Prideaux
LED
"
"
Sally Godinho
Kay Faunce
Policy & Mngmnt
"
"
Darren Kiefel
LLAE
"
"
Paul Kennedy
Lil Kennedy
Science & Maths
"
"
Helena Anderson
S Goldstraw
Elise Everest
Julie Gill
David Young
Julie Gill
Engineering
Admin (D)
Chemical Eng (D)
Michelle Mackay
P Rutherford
P Rutherford
P Rutherford
Computer Sci (D)
Cindy Sexton
Cindy Sexton
Cindy Sexton
Electrical Eng (D)
Greg Boyle
Karl Cirulis
Karl Cirulis
Karl Cirulis
Civil & Enviro (D)
Lloyd Macey
B. Wilson
Lloyd Macey
Lloyd Macey
Geomatics (D)
George Fox
Michele Velik
Nghiem Tran
George Fox
Mechanical Eng
(D)
Steve Adams
Mike Barry
Mike Barry
Mike Barry
School of
Graduate Studies
(D)
Ellen Smith
Fiona Zammit
Jeanette Fyffe
Fiona Zammit
305
ILFR
Administration (D)
Burnley (D)
Greg Moore
Creswick (D)
L Cheeseman
Mark Stewart
L Cheeseman
Dookie (D)
Howard Hanna
Ailsa Rogers
Howard Hanna
Ailsa Rogers
Gilbert Chandler
(D)
Sue Pepper
Melanie Hass
John Near
Sue Pepper
Glenormiston (D)
Peter Templeton
Louise Nunn
Jeff Lawes
Sally Parker
Longrenong (D)
Peter Howie
Allan McKenzie
Allan McKenzie
Gavin Drew
McMillan (D)
Nick Dudley
John Barnes
Luke Prime
John Barnes
Parkville (D)
R Timpano
Louise Wilson
S Elefteriadis
Louise Wilson
Law Faculty (D)
Peter Jones
Penny Swain
Sonia Iesue
Sonia Iesue
Medicine
Administration (D)
A HuntSturman
Mary Wlodek
A HuntSturman
Darrell Mead
General Practice
(D)
Jane Sims
Mal Hart
Rhian Parker
Vanessa Ho
Physiotherapy (D)
Guy Zito
Guy Zito
A HuntSturman
Anat & Cell Biol

(D)
Effie Karavitis
Bill Kaegi
Effie Karavitis
Bill Kaegi
Behavioural Sci
(D)
Ian Taylor
Ian Taylor
Ian Taylor
Biochemistry (D)
John Down
Michael Tuohy
Michael Tuohy
Michael Tuohy
Dental Science (D)
Patricia Lissel
Michael Burrow
Dennis Rowler
Laila Huq
Microbiology (D)
Diane Lightfoot
John Gorry
John Gorry
John Gorry
MDU
Diane Lightfoot
John Gorry
Chris Scane
Chris Scane
Pathology (D)
Robert Cappai
Colin Masters
Denis Cahill
Denis Cahill
Pharmacology (D)
D Wallace
James Angus
C Schofield
Victor Iwanov
Physiology (D)
Mary Wlodek
Stephen Harrap
Chris Bramich
Chris Bramich
PG Nursing (D)
Brad Cooper
Brad Cooper
Pop Health (D)
Kim Dorrell
Terry Nolan
CSHS
"
"
R Stoneham
KCWH
"
"
Joni Law
AIHI
Lyn Duncan
"
Geelong Hospital
(D)
Jason Hodge
Obs&Gyn
Mercy/RWH (D)
Harry Georgiou
Harry Georgiou
Otolaryngology (D)
Frank Nielsen
John Huigen
Frank Nielsen
John Huigen
Medicine O/C
Ophthalmology (D)
Judith Carrigan
Psychiatry RMH
(D)
Wendy Currie
Allan Brown
Allan Brown
Paediatrics RCH
(D)
Angela Khoury
Angela Khoury
Rural Health (D)
Clinical Sch
Rosa Poon
Medicine
Sharon Lockhart
Helen Dedman
David Casley
Helen Dedman
ARMC (D)
306
Attachments
Surgery
C Watson
Clinical Sch (D)
Cheryl Piotrowski
D Apostoloudas
Medicine (D)
Lorraine Parker
Lorraine Parker
Surgery (D)
C Hovens
Dr Ulrike Novak
Radiology (D)
Angela Alexiou
Brian Tress
Angela Alexiou
Angela Alexiou
M Solomons
RMH / WH
St Vincents
Clinical Sch (D)
Medicine (D)
G Dragicevic
G Dragicevic
Surgery (D)
Melb Business Sc
(D)
Janet Wee
Music Faculty (D)
Peter Liddlelow
Robert Northey
Robert Northey
Administration (D)
Daryl Hepburn
Andrew Drinnan
Daryl Hepburn
A Drinnan
Botany (D)
Alex Laizans
Graeme Close
Graeme Close
Graeme Close
Chemistry (D)
Dr Peter Lehman
George
Papadopetras
George
Papadopetras
Earth Sciences (D)
Wayne Noble
A Gleadow
Richard Young
Richard Young
Genetics (D)
Lisa Ireland
Veronique Bergeron Jill Williams
Lisa Ireland
Info Systems (D)
Cindy Sexton
Cindy Sexton
Maths & Stats (D)
Lisa Dyson
Averil Newman
Averil Newman
Averil Newman
Optometry (D)
Guido Tomisich
Adam Robertson
School of Physics
(D)
Steven Prawer
Keith Nugent
Albert Cimmino
Meg Anderson
Zoology (D)
Joanne Wedgwood
Terry Beattie
Terry Beattie
Terry Beattie
Carol Bradley
Ivan Caple
Melba Mahoney
Melba Mahoney
Science
Cindy Sexton
Vet Science
Werribbee (D)
Parkville (D)
Brendan Kehoe
Ivan Caple
Liz Lightfoot
Liz Lightfoot
Animal
Technicians (D)
David Taylor
Lyndal Scott
Note: (D) denotes Designated Work Group
B4 Administrative Area Environmental, and Health & Safety

Representatives
Table B2:
DEPARTMENT
Health & Safety

Representative
Management
Representative
Environmental
Representative
EHS Coordinator
Development Div
Catherine Daniels
Roger Peacock /
Anne Braganza
Catherine Daniels
Catherine Daniels
Development Office v
Roger Peacock /
Anne Braganza
Chris Hajisava
ASIALINK
Roger Peacock /
Anne Braganza
Aaron OShannessy Uyen Tran
Communications
Roger Peacock /
Anne Braganza
Chris Hajisava /
Emma Brimfield
Chris Fargher
307
International
Relations
Roger Peacock /
Anne Braganza
M Hoppach
M Hoppach
Ian Potter Museum
Nigel Baldwin
Sarah Epskamp
Sarah Epskamp
International House
Cavell Ferrier
Don Stewart
Information
Division (ID)
Karen Kealy
Business
Management
David Bugeja
"
Systems and IT
Infrastructure
Les Ridge
"
Client Services
Appy Laspagis /
Robin Penman
"
IT Strategies &
Developments
(Emerging
Technologies)
Gavin Trigg
"
TeLARS
Ian Shiel
"
Info Resources
Access
Mary Ann Gibson
"
ID Swanston
Street: (D)
Rae Langfield
Rae Langfield
Rosemary OShea
Rosemay OShea
Rosemary OShea
John Cain
John Cain / Appy

Laspagis
John Cain
Joanne Bowman
Joanne Bowman
Joanne Bowman
Paul Donald
Paul Donald
Paul Donald
Kamala Lekamge
Kamala Lekamge
Thomas Cherry,
ITC, Earth Science
Library
ID North: (D)
TeLARS in Old
Pathology Bldg.,
Architecture,
Chemistry, Maths,
Physics, Telephones
ID Central: (D)
ERC, Law,
Engineering,
Student labs.
ID Baillieu Ground:
(D)
Information
Acquisition &
Organisation 780
Elizabeth St
ID Baillieu Other:
(D)
Baillieu Libary
ground, 1st, 2nd, 3rd
and 4th floors,
Giblin Library,
Brownless
Biomedical Library,
AV Unit, Web
Centre
ID Off Campus: (D) Kamala Lekamge
ILFR Pville,
Grainger, Vet. Sci
Parkville, Vet. Sci.
Werribee, Archives
Repository, UCS.
308
Attachments
Melbourne Uni
Press (D)
John Meckan
MRIO (D)
Melbourne
Theatre Co (D)
Rudi Pavani
Glen Swafford
Margaret Bourke
Ian Cooksley
Margaret Bourke
Margaret Bourke
Old Geology
Building and
Stationary Store
(D)
Bruce Greenwood
Kim Wettern
Sharon Dixon
David Swinson
Maintenance (D)
Jeff Smith
K FindlayJones
Wayne Williams
David Swinson
Property &
Buildings
Grounds (D)
Virgina Mcnally
K FindlayJones
Wayne Williams
David Swinson
Property Services
(Facility Services,
Design & Print
Centre and Traffic
& Security) (D)
Tony Campbell
Doug McGregor
Sharon Dixon
David Swinson
Penny Hatzis
Academic Services
Lin Martin
Access (D)
Leslie Dundon
Lachlan Cameron
(Deputy)
Information Cent
"
"
Brigitte Taylor
723 Swanston St
"
"
Tanya Clarke
Caroline Gatenby
Disability Unit
"
"
Tanya Clarke
Caroline Gatenby
John Smyth Bld
"
"
Joanne Doyle/Leslie Joanne Doyle/Kay

Dundon
Stevens & Kris Day
Central (D)
Maria Ferella
Garry Thomson
(Deputy)
Raymeond Priestley "

Bldg
"
Catherine
Lee/Michael Ellis
Catherine
Lee/Kiera Stevens
TT/VCM
"
"
Chris Adamidis
Sandi Robertson
Counsellin Services
& Chaplaincy
"
"
Mike Flattley
Mike Flattley
Di Elderfield
Di Elderfield
Luke Murray
Luke Murray
Health Services
CIE
"
"
Services (D)
Jason Brown
Jenny Stephens
(Deputy)
Baldwin Spencer
Bldg
"
"
Anita Narayan
Jason Brown
MU Sport
"
"
Anna Bentley
AnnaBentley
Childrens Services
"
"
Cathy
Simpson/Kylie
Smith
Cathy
Simpson/Kylie
Smith
Human Resources
(D)
Liz Bare
Liz Bare
Financial Ops (D)
Elizabeth Mast
Bryan Rossi
VC & Office (D)
Ian Marshman
Diana Avent
Corporate
Services
309
University
Secretarys
Department
"
Donna McRostie
Donna McRostie
Management Serv v
(D)
Risk Management
"
"
D RostanHerbert
D RostanHerbert
Internal Audit
"
"
Compliance Office
"
"
Note: (D) denotes Designated Work Group
B5 Fume Cupboard Clearance Contacts

Fume Cupboard Clearance Contacts
as at October 2001
B6 Ergonomic Design Standards

Ergonomic Design Standards, David Caple, and Associates Ltd, August 1999
B7 Information on Environment Health and Safety

Noticeboards
Noticeboards should contain the following information:
Incident Reporting Poster (Available from the Risk Management Office)
Names of Employee and Employer Health and Safety Representatives
Emergency Personnel BEC, Wardens, Frist Aiders
Reference to the University of Melbourne Manuals:
Personnel Policy and Procedures Manual
Finance Policy and Procedures Manual
Location of local procedural manuals
Information on contacting Human Resources for personnel issues
Other Emergency or other contact details
Meeting minutes (If not circulated by email or other)
Environment, Health and Safety Updates such as Workcover Alerts
Noticeboards should not contain:

personal advertisements
flyers, brochures etc not relating to Environment Health and Safety
310
Appendix C. Legislation
C1 Agricultural Chemicals
pesticides
C2 Amenity
Land Use planning
C3 Autoclave
Pressure Vessel
C4 Backflow Prevention
Water Supply
C5 Biohazards
C5.1 Disease Organims
C5.1.1 Airborne
C5.1.2 To Land
C5.2 Plant Disease

C5.3 Soil Disease
Genetically Modified Organisms
C6 Bunding
Hazardous Material
C7 Carcinogens
Discharge Regulations
C8 CFCs
C9 Chemicals disposal
Trade Waste
311
C10 Contamination
C10.1 Land
C10.2 Liability
C10.3 Management
C11 Control and Storage of Hazardous Materials

Hazardous Material
C12 Cooling Towers

C13 Deionised Water
Trade Waste
C14 Discharge Regulation

C14.1 Internal
C14.1.1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1985 (Vic)
C14.2 External
C14.2.1 Environment Protection Act 1970 (Vic)
C14.2.1.1 To air
SEPP air
C14.2.1.2 To Water
Water Quality Criteria

Legislation
The discharge of water to Victorian waterways is regulated by the
Environment Protection Act (1970) in compliance with the State
Environment Protection Policy (Waters of Victoria) 1988.
Penalties
It is an offence to discharge or emit waste into any waters in breach of
any declared State Environment Protection Policy. The Penalty is up to
$20,000 plus $8,000 for each day the offence continues after conviction or
after service by the EPA of a notice of contravention.
Quality Criteria
312
Legislation
The main quality standards for water discharges to general surface

waterways are shown below. See the State Environment Protection
Policy (Waters of Victoria) for a full list of quality criteria.
Table C1: Quality standards for water discharges
Dissolved oxygen
minimum 5 g/m3
Number of E.Coli
<1000 orgs/100 mL
Temperature
Light penetration
within 2 oC of receiving environment

no reduction to the detriment of beneficial
uses
pH
between pH 6.0 & 9.0
floatable matter
no visible floating matter
Settleable Solids
lowest practicable level
Heavy Metals :
Chromium
0.3 ppm
Copper
0.2 ppm
Iron
5.0 ppm
Zinc
0.5 ppm
Oxygendemanding substances
5day BOD 40 ppm
Turbidity
(see State Environment Protection Policy

Schedule E)
Residual chlorine
1ppm
Total Dissolved Solids
not prejudicial to existing beneficial uses
Nutrients and Biostimulants
Aesthetic Characteristics
levels not to cause nuisance plant growth,

changes in species composition or
detrimental to protected beneficial uses
no objectionable colours or odours.
C14.2.1.3 To Land
C14.2.1.4 Noise
C14.2.1.5 Odours
C14.2.1.6 Ozone depleting Substances
C14.2.2 Civil Law Liability
C15 Dust
C16 Electromagnetic Radiation

Radiation
C17 Erosion
Land Management
313
C18 Fieldwork
C19 Firefighting
C20 Fume Cupboards
discharge regulations
C21 Fungicides
pesticides
C22 Genetically Modified Organisms

C22.1 Environment Protection Act 1970 (Vic)
C22.1.1 Pollution
GMOs are not easily brought under existing environmental regulation. It is clear however,
that they can be included in the concept of pollution under the Environment Protection Act
1970 (Vic). For example, section 45 provides
Pollution of land
(1) A person shall not pollute land so that the condition of the land is so changed
as to make or be reasonably expected to make the land or the produce of the
land
(a) noxious or poisonous;
(b) harmful or potentially harmful to the health or welfare of human beings;
(c) poisonous, harmful or potentially harmful to animals, birds or wildlife;
(d) poisonous, harmful or potentially harmful to plants or vegetation;
(e) obnoxious or unduly offensive to the senses of human beings; or
(f) detrimental to any beneficial use made of the land.
Similar provisions apply to pollution of the atmosphere and water. Under section 4
"pollute" includes causing or permitting pollution, and "polluted" means the
condition of the environment described and referred to in section .... 45(1) as the
case may be.
"Waste" is defined to include "(a) any matter whether solid, liquid, gaseous or
radioactive which is discharged, emitted or deposited in the environment in such
volume, constituency or manner as to cause an alteration in the environment."
A release of GMOs with the effects described in the pollution provisions such s 45
could thus attract prosecution under the Act by the Environment Protection
Authority.
314
Legislation
C22.1.2 Further Information

Release of GMOs is overseen by the expert Genetic Manipulation Advisory Committee
[GMAC] established by the Commonwealth government.
Note also establishment of the Interim Office of the Gene Technology Regulator
http://www.health.gov.au/tga/gene/genetech/iogtr.htm
The GMAC implements Guidelines for handling GMOs
http://www.health.gov.au/tga/gene/gmac/gmacguid.htm. As an example, the Guidelines
for the Deliberate Release of Genetically Manipulated Organisms, April 1998,
(at http://www.health.gov.au/tga/gene/gmac/prg98.pdf) provide that proposals to release
GMOs into the environment must be analysed and approved by the GMAC.
Section 34 of the Biological Control Act 1986 (Vic) attempts to limit the possibility of legal
action concerning the release of an agent organism made in accordance with the Act.
This provision mirrors section 36 of the Biological Control Act 1984 (Cwth). Courts interpret
such provisions as narrowly as possible. There are strong possibilities of civil liability under
common law doctrines such as nuisance and negligence where the enjoyment of property
is interfered with or economic loss is caused.
C23 Greenhouse Gases

C24 Groundwater
C24.1 Use
C24.2 Contamination
C24.3 Leachates
C25 Hazardous Material

C25.1 Disposal and Transportation
prescribed waste
C25.1.1 Environment Protection Act (1970)
C25.2 Dangerous Goods Act

C25.2.1 Handling & Packaging
C25.2.2 Labeling
C25.2.3 Storage
315
C25.2.4 Transportation
trade waste
C26 HCFCs
C27 Herbicides
pesticides
C28 Heritage
C28.1 Movable Cultural Heritage
C28.1.1 Protection of Movable Cultural Heritage Act 1986 (Cwth)
The Protection of Movable Cultural Heritage Act 1986 (Cwth) aims to prevent the
removal of the movable cultural heritage of Australia, which is defined in section 7 to
include objects that are of importance to Australia, or to a particular part of Australia, for
ethnological, archaeological, historical, literary, artistic, scientific or technological reasons,
being objects falling within one or more of the following categories:
(a) objects recovered from:
(i) the soil or inland waters of Australia;
(ii) the coastal sea of Australia or the waters above the continental shelf
of Australia; or
(iii) the seabed or subsoil beneath the sea or waters referred
to in subparagraph (ii);
(b) objects relating to members of the Aboriginal race of Australia and
descendants of the indigenous inhabitants of the Torres Strait Islands;
(c) objects of ethnographic art or ethnography;
(d) military objects;
(e) objects of decorative art;
(f) objects of fine art;
(g) objects of scientific or technological interest;
(h) books, records, documents or photographs, graphic, film or television material or
sound recordings;
(j) any other prescribed categories.
Section 8 establishes a control list, and section 9 makes it an offence to export controlled
movable cultural heritage of Australia, punishable by a fine not exceeding $100,000 or
imprisonment for a maximum period of five years, for a natural person; or a fine not
exceeding $200,000 for a body corporate. See also Indigenous Cultural Heritage (in this
section)
316
Legislation
C28.2 National Estate

C28.2.1 Australian Heritage Commission Act 1976 (Cwth)
The Register of the National Estate is maintained under the Australian Heritage
Commission Act 1975 (Cwth)
C28.2.1.1 Buildings on Parkville Campus on with National Estate Status
The following buildings on the Parkville campus have National Estate status
1888 Building
Bank of New South Wales Facade
Clarke Building
Trinity College (including Leeper Building and Chapel)
Conservatorium of Music and Melba Hall
Newman College,
Old Quadrangle and Law School Buildings
Percy Grainger Museum
For more details see the web site of the Australian Heritage Commission at
http://www.environment.gov.au/heritage/register/index.html See also Heritage Register
and Land use planning.
C28.3 Heritage Register

C28.3.1 Heritage Act 1995 (Vic)
The Victorian Heritage Register is maintained under the Heritage Act 1995 (Vic).
C28.3.1.1 Buildings on Parkville Campus on Heritage Register
The following buildings on the Parkville Campus are listed on the Victorian Heritage
Register. They are also included on the Heritage Overlay of the Melbourne Planning
Scheme: see Land use planning.
Ormond College (H728)
1888 Building (H1508)
Beaurepaire Centre (H1045)
Conservatorium of Music and Melba Hall (H925)
Gate Lodge (H919)
Grainger Museum (H875)
Janet Clarke Hall (H100)
Law School and Old Quadrangle (H920)
Main entrance gates, pillars and fence (H916)
Newman College (H21)
Old Arts Building (H24)
317
Old Pathology Building (H992)

Old Physics Conference Centre & Gallery (H923)
Old Zoological Building (H921)
Underground Carpark (H1004)
Wilson Hall (H1012)
If a permit has been granted under the Heritage Act 1995 (Vic) or it is exempt under
section 66 of the Heritage Act 1995 (Vic), no land use planning permit is required to effect
any of those changes to these buildings which are regulated under the heritage scheme:
paragraph 43.011 Melbourne Planning Scheme [see Land use planning]
C28.4 Buildings
C28.5 Indigenous Cultural Heritage
C28.6 Landscapes
C29 Intractable Waste

waste disposal
C30 Labelling
C30.1 Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals
C30.1.1 The Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of Use) Act 1992 (Vic)
Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals. The Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals
(Control of Use) Act 1992 (Vic) contains many requirements for labelling chemicals which
it covers, such as section 18
C30.1.1.1 Offences
18. Offences involving labelling requirements

(1) A person must not sell a veterinary chemical product, fertiliser or stock food
unless at the time of sale or delivery the veterinary chemical product, fertiliser or
stock food is accompanied by a label or advice note which
(a) complies with the regulations; or
(b) if the veterinary chemical product, fertiliser or stock food is a prescribed
veterinary chemical product, fertiliser or stock food or is included in a
prescribed class of veterinary chemical products, fertilisers or stock foods,
complies with any requirement that is prescribed.
C30.1.1.2 Penalty
Penalty: In the case of a corporation, 400 penalty units. In any other case, 200 penalty
units. It is also an offence to use them not in accordance with labels.
C30.1.2 Premises
318
Legislation
C30.1.3 Storage of Materials

C30.1.4 Dangerous Goods & Hazardous Substances
C31 Landfill
waste disposal
C32 Land Management

C32.1 Catchment and Land Protection Act 1994(Vic)
C32.1.1 General duties of land owners
Section 20 of the Catchment and Land Protection Act 1994 (Vic) establishes a general
duty of land owners
20. General duties of land owners
(1) In relation to his or her land a land owner must take all reasonable steps to
(a) avoid causing or contributing to land degradation which causes or may
cause damage to land of another land owner; and
(b) conserve soil; and
(c) protect water resources; and
(d) eradicate regionally prohibited weeds; and
(e) prevent the growth and spread of regionally controlled weeds; and
(f) prevent the spread of, and as far as possible eradicate, established pest
animals.
C32.1.2 Contents of a notice
The Act is enforced through the service of land management notices
38. Contents of a notice
(1) A land management notice may do all or any of the following
(a) prohibit or regulate land use or land management practices;
(b) require specified action to be taken to improve land management
practices, prevent or minimise land degradation or rehabilitate degraded
land;
(c) contain any other provision that the Secretary considers necessary to
deal with the issue that led to the service of the notice.
(2) A land management notice must state the time within which it is to be
complied with.
(3) At the land owners request before the end of the compliance period or
extended compliance period, the Secretary may, by notice served on the land
owner, extend or further extend the compliance period.
(4) A land management notice may apply to land owned by different land owners
only if it deals solely with the control of noxious weeds or pest animals or both.
319
(5) If a land management notice requires the use of chemicals dangerous to

human beings to eradicate or control the spread of pest animals, it must
(a) state the chemicals to be used; and
(b) describe the area where they are to be used; and
(c) contain the prescribed information; and
(d) require the land owner to
(i) notify each land owner of land adjoining the land to which the
notice applies; and
(ii) display on or near the land where the chemicals are to be used a
sign warning that they are to be used there.
C32.1.3 Offence to disobey notice
Failure to obey a notice is an offence
41. Offence to disobey notice
(1) A land owner served with a land management notice must comply with it.
Penalty: First offence: 10 penalty units. Subsequent offence: 20 penalty units.
Additional penalty for each day offence continues after conviction: 4 penalty units.
(2) Subsection (1) does not make the Crown, a Minister or the Secretary liable for
an offence. Interim land management notices may be served in urgent cases:
section 43. It is possible to appeal against notices in defined circumstances: section
48.
C32.2 Pests
C32.2.1 Catchment and Land protection Act 1994 (Vic)
Section 58 of the Catchment and Land Protection Act 1994 (Vic) provides for the general
classification of pests into pest animals and noxious weeds. These classifications are
declared by the Governor in Council and published in the Government Gazette.
C32.2.1.1 Weeds
Under section 58 plants may be declared to be

"state prohibited weeds"
"regionally prohibited weeds"
"regionally controlled weeds"
"restricted weeds"
As defined in section 3, these are all "noxious weeds" Sections 70 and 71 provide for the
control of noxious weeds.
Controlling noxious weeds
(1) The Secretary may, by instrument served on a land owner, give directions to the
land owner
(a) to eradicate or prevent the growth or spread of noxious weeds; or
320
Legislation
(b) to restrict the movement of grain, fodder, equipment or animals that the
Secretary considers likely to spread noxious weeds from, on or to the land
owners land
(2) A land owner served with a direction must comply with it.
( 3) A land owner must bear the cost of complying with any direction
served on the land owner under this section.
Spread of noxious weeds
(1) A person must not
(a) remove machinery, implements or other equipment from land on
to road without first taking reasonable precautions to ensure that
the equipment is free from
(i) the seeds of any noxious weeds; and
(ii) any other part of a noxious weed which is capable of
growing; or
(b) without a permit from the Secretary, buy or sell anywhere in
Victoria
(i) the seeds of a noxious weed; or
(ii) any other part of a noxious weed which is capable of
growing whether or not packed or mixed with the seeds or
parts of any other plants; or
(c) without a permit from the Secretary, remove or cause to be removed or
sell soil, sand, gravel or stone which contains or is likely to contain any part
of a noxious weed, or which comes from land on which noxious weeds
grow; or
(d) without a permit from the Secretary, remove or cause to be removed or
sell fodder or grain which contains the seeds or any other part of a noxious
weed that is capable of growing; or
(e) without a permit from the Secretary, sell or hire, or offer for hire, a
substance or machinery that is used or intended to be used in primary
production and which contains the seeds or any other part of a noxious
weed that is capable of growing; or
(f) without a permit from the Secretary, sell an animal which is carrying
seeds of a noxious weed; or
(g) without a permit from the Secretary, wilfully bring or cause to be
brought into Victoria or transport within Victoria the seeds or any other part
of a noxious weed whether or not for sale; or
(h) without a permit from the Secretary, deposit on land
(i) a noxious weed; or
(ii) the seeds of a noxious weed that are apparently capable of
germinating. Penalty: First offence: 5 penalty units. Subsequent
offence: 10 penalty units. Additional penalty for each day offence
continues after conviction: 2 penalty units.
Section 71 (3) (5) provides for the grant of permits.
321
A person granted a permit must comply with its conditions or risk prosecution and
a penalty, on the first offence, of 5 penalty units. On subsequent offences this rises
to 10 penalty units. There is an additional penalty for each day an offence
continues after conviction of 2 penalty units.
Section 72 provides for Orders requiring destruction of noxious weeds
C32.2.1.2 Pests
Under section 58 animals may be declared to be

"prohibited pest animals"
"controlled pest animals"
"regulated pest animals"
"established pest animal"
Sections 74 77 of the Catchment and Land Protection Act 1994 (Vic) provide for the
control of pest animals.
73. Control of established pest animals
(1) The Secretary may, by instrument served on a land owner, give
directions to the land owner to prevent the spread of and, as far as
possible, eradicate established pest animals.
(2) A land owner served with a direction must comply with it.
(3) The land owner must bear the cost of complying with a direction served
on the land owner under this section.
75. Offence to import, keep or sell pest animals
(1) A person must not bring into Victoria, keep or sell a prohibited pest
animal. Penalty: 50 penalty units. Additional penalty for each day
offence continues after conviction: 20 penalty units.
(2) A person must not bring into Victoria, keep or sell a controlled pest
(3) A person must not bring into Victoria, keep or sell a regulated pest
animal. Penalty: 20 penaltyunits. Additional penalty for each day offence
continues after conviction: 4 penalty units.
(4) A person must not bring into Victoria, keep or sell an established pest
(5) Subsections (1) to (4) do not apply to
(a) the keeping of a pest animal in accordance with section 76; or
(b) the bringing into Victoria, keeping or sale of a pest animal in
accordance with a permit under this Division, other than in
circumstances to which paragraph (f) applies; or
(c) the bringing into Victoria or keeping of a controlled pest animal
or regulated pest animal
(i) by or on behalf of the Zoological Board of Victoria; and
322
Legislation
(ii) if kept at a zoological park within the meaning of the

Zoological Parks and Gardens Act 1995 or brought into
Victoria to be so kept; or
(d) the sale or loan of a controlled pest animal or regulated pest
animal
( i) by the Zoological Parks and Gardens Board; and
(ii) to the holder of a permit under this Division; or
(e) the bringing into Victoria of a regulated pest animal by the
holder of a permit under this Division to keep that animal; or
(f) the keeping of an established pest animal in accordance with
the regulations; or
(g) the keeping of a pest animal
(i) for medical, veterinary or biological research purposes;
and
(ii) by an institution licensed as a research establishment
under the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act 1986, in
accordance with that licence; and
(iii) in accordance with a permit under this Division.
Sections 76 and 77 provide for obtaining authority to keep pest animals. Further
Information For further information see the Natural Resources & Environment Ministry
web site at http://www.nre.vic.gov.au/plntanml/pests/index.htm
C33 Land Use Planning

C33.1 Background
Land use planning is the public function of guiding development and activities on public
and private land in an area. It is used to achieve a range of objectives in community
development, including environmental objectives. The authority for relevant state
government authorities to engage in land use planning is found in the Planning and
Environment Act 1987 Vic).
C33.2 Planning and Envrionment Act 1987 (Vic)

The Objectives of Planning set out in section 4 (1) include
(a) to provide for the fair, orderly, economic and sustainable use, and development
of land;
(b) to provide for the protection of natural and manmade resources and the
maintenance of ecological processes and genetic diversity;
(c) to secure a pleasant, efficient and safe working, living and recreational
environment for all Victorians and visitors to Victoria;
(d) to conserve and enhance those buildings, areas or other places which are of
scientific, aesthetic, architectural or historical interest, or otherwise of special
cultural value;
323
(e) to protect public utilities and other assets and enable the orderly provision and
coordination of public utilities and other facilities for the benefit of the community;
...
(g) to balance the present and future interests of all Victorians.
In addition to objectives in legislation and policies and standards in Planning
Schemes, Planning Law also has some basic common law principles, such as the
principle that a new development must enhance the amenity of an area and if it
will not, then Planning Permission should be refused unless there is some highly
persuasive reason why it must go ahead. The amenity of an area means the
features or advantages of the locality or neighbourhood which are considered
desirable to preserve or encourage, including the residents own values, such as the
ambience of a heritage streetscape.
C33.3 Planning Schemes

C33.3.1 Introduction
The main legal instrument for implementing land use plans is the Planning Scheme.
Planning Schemes are a form of delegated legislation in the way that regulations, local
council bylaws and court rules are. A Planning Scheme comprises
a set of maps of the relevant locality, with different areas designated for different
purposes, and
a text, which is sometimes called "the ordinance".
The uses to which the designated areas may or may not be put are set out in the text,
divided into three major sections
1 activities on the land which may be pursued without permission
2 activities on the land for which Planning Permission is required, and the general
conditions under which such activities may be pursued
3 prohibited land uses.
Planning Schemes are divided into State and Local sections, with the State Government
and Local Councils being largely responsible for the creation and implementation of their
respective sections.
C33.3.2 Overlays
Planning Schemes may also contain Overlays which generally address discrete issues in
the development of land, and particularly arising from an inate characteristic of the land
itself, rather than its location or proximity to other land. Relevant Overlays and controls
include
Environment and Landscape Overlay, to signify
environmental significance
vegetation protection
significant landscape
Heritage and Built Form, to signify
heritage
324
Legislation
design and development

incorporated plan
development plan
Land and Site Management, to signify
rural floodway
land subject to inundation
special building
erosion management
salinity management
potentially contaminated land
Applicable provisions include restrictions on certain activities without a Planning
Permit such as the external painting of a heritage building subject to external
paint controls.
C33.3.3 Application of planning scheme
Section 16 specifies the application of planning schemes
16. Application of planning scheme
A planning scheme is binding on every Minister, government department, public
authority and municipal council except to the extent that the Governor in Council,
on the recommendation of the Minister, directs by Order published in the
Government Gazette. Planning Schemes also apply to reserved public land
46. Planning schemes may apply to reserved land
(1) Without limiting the operation of section 6, a planning scheme may
regulate or prohibit the use or development of land which is permanently or
temporarily reserved for any purpose under the Crown Land (Reserves) Act
1978.
(2) If a provision of a planning scheme is expressed or purports to deal with
land that has been permanently reserved for any purpose under the Crown
Land (Reserves) Act 1978 or any part of that land in a manner which is
inconsistent with the purpose of the reservation, the provision does not take
effect until the reservation of that land or part is revoked by or pursuant to
an Act of Parliament.
This is the only express exception from the application of planning schemes even to
public land in the Planning & Environment Act 1987 (Vic). Indeed, many other
provisions contemplate the application of planning schemes to public land, and the
reservation of land for public purposes: see section 6 for example. It is thus
difficult to see how it could be claimed that land which has been alienated by
Crown Grant to a public corporation could find an exemption from planning even if
the Crown Grant contained a reservation for education.
325
C33.3.4 Enforcement
Planning Schemes may be enforced by prosecution in the Magistrates Court. More
usually, Planning Schemes are enforced through an Enforcement Order being obtained in
VCAT [the Victorian Civil and Administrative Tribunal]. Section 114 of the Planning and
Environment Act 1987 (Vic) provides that "any person" may apply for an Enforcement
Order. Under s 133, the making of the order immediately exposes the person against
whom it is made to the risk of imprisonment until the order is complied with, or three
months imprisonment, or a fine of 20 penalty units. If the activity continues, there is
further liability to a fine of up to 5 penalty units per day, to a maximum of 50 penalty
units. Ultimately, it can be enforced through the Supreme Court: section 122 Victorian Civil
and Administrative Tribunal Act 1998 (Vic).
C33.3.4.1 Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic)
The Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic) provides a range of further enforcement
methods:
Interim Enforcement Orders in urgent cases: s 120 Planning and Environment Act
1987 (Vic)
Injunction to restrain breaches of Enforcement Orders or Interim Enforcement
Orders where immediate and irreparable harm is threatened: s 125 Planning and
Environment Act 1987 (Vic)
Infringement Notice for minor infringements, which is comparable to an
"onthespot fine": s 130 Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic)
Another possible consequence of the breach of a Planning Scheme is that an application
might be made under s 87 of the Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic) for
cancellation of any relevant Planning Permission. Grounds for cancellation include
substantial failure to comply with conditions of the permit and material change of
circumstances which has occurred since the permit was granted.
Section 6 of the Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic) preserves the legality of
continuing to pursue existing uses. The terms existing use and nonconforming use both
refer to land uses which were being pursued on the relevant land at the time when a
contrary provision was created in the applicable Planning Scheme. despite the new
provision.
Section 6(4) provides that an existing use can no longer be justified if it has stopped at
some time for a continuous period of two years, or it stopped for two or more periods
which together equalled two years in a period of three years, or the activity is seasonal in
nature and it discontinued for two seasons.
C33.4 Further Information

Infringement Notice for minor infringements, which is comparable to an "onthespot fine":
s 130 Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic)
326
Legislation
C33.5 The University of Melbourne

C33.5.1 Specific Provisions
Infringement Notice for minor infringements, which is comparable to an "onthespot fine":
s 130 Planning and Environment Act 1987 (Vic)
C33.5.2 Zone
PUZ2 [Public Use Zone 2]
C33.5.3 Scope of Activities
Education operation of a Tertiary Education Centre Planning permits are required for
new use of heritage buildings [note that permits are not required for continuation of existing
uses]
C33.5.4 Applicable Overlays and Controls
Heritage Overlay identifies the following buildings [not including Colleges and Sports
Grounds]
HO323 Ormond College (see also Heritage Register), HO324 1888 Building (see also
Heritage Register), HO326 Beaurepaire Centre (see also Heritage Register), HO327
Beham Building, HO328 Bishops Building, HO329 Botany Building, HO330 Chemistry
Building, HO331 Colonial Bank Door, HO332 Conservatorium of Music and Melba Hall
(see also Heritage Register), HO333 Cricket Pavillion and Scoreboard, HO334 Walter
Boas Building, HO335 Former Bank Faade, HO336 Former National Museum (Student
Union Building), HO338 Gate Lodge (see also Heritage Register), HO339 Grainger
Museum (see also Heritage Register), HO340 Janet Clarke Hall (see also Heritage
Register), HO341 Natural Philosophy Building, HO342 Law School and Old Quadrangle
(see also Heritage Register), HO343 Main entrance gates, pillars and fence (see also
Heritage Register), HO344 Newman College (see also Heritage Register), HO345 Old
Arts Building (see also Heritage Register), HO 346 Old Engineering Building, HO347 Old
Geology Building, HO348 Old Pathology Building (see also Heritage Register), HO349 Old
Physics Conference Centre & Gallery (see also Heritage Register), HO350 Old Zoological
Building (see also Heritage Register), HO352 Queens College, HO354 Squash Courts,
HO355 Systems Gardens Tower, HO357 Trinity Chapel & College, HO359 Underground
Carpark (see also Heritage Register), HO360 University House, HO361 Wilson Hall (see
also Heritage Register), HO362 Vetinary Precinct Fence.
No permit is required to effect changes to these buildings which are regulated under the
heritage scheme if a permit has been granted under the Heritage Act 1995 (Vic) or it is
exempt under section 66 of the Heritage Act 1995 (Vic) [see Heritage]: paragraph 43.011.
C33.5.5 Relevant Planning Permits

The Property and Buildings Department advises that it has not been necessary to obtain
planning permits for most developments on the Parkville Campus in the PUZ2 zone. The
most likely explanation for this is the broad scope of activities permitted in the zone,
continuing use rights and the prevalence of the Heritage Register, rather than the nature of
the land title (Crown Grant).
Environmental Conditions Where planning permits have been obtained, only one significant
environmental condition has on occasions been imposed to ensure that rubbish and waste
327
is deposited or stored in places and conditions satisfactory to the responsible authority (City
of Melbourne).
C34 Litter
C34.1 Litter Act 1987
Section 5 of the Litter Act 1987 (Vic) provides a general offence of depositing litter in the
following terms
(1) A person must not deposit any litter unless
(a) the person deposits the litter in any place
(i) that is provided for the deposit of litter and
(ii) that is appropriate for litter of that size, shape, nature or volume;
or
(b) the person deposits the litter in or on a place in such a way that it
cannot leave the place without human assistance and the person
(i) owns, controls or is in possession of the place; or
(ii) is acting with the express consent of the person who owns,
controls or is in possession of the place; or
(c) the person is authorised to deposit the litter by or under an Act or a
Commonwealth Act; or
(d) the deposit of the litter is an unavoidable consequence of a lawful
activity; or
(e) the deposit is accidental and the person does everything that is
reasonably possible to retrieve the litter
(2) For the purposes of subsection (1)(d), a consequence is unavoidable if there is
no reasonably practicable way of avoiding it.
The maximum penalty is 20 penalty units. Section 6 goes on to provide an offence of
aggravated littering, which basically requires an added element of danger and introduces
the possible further penalty of one months imprisonment.
Litter is broadly defined in section 3(1) to include

(a) any solid or liquid domestic or commercial waste, refuse, debris or rubbish and,
without limiting the generality of the above, includes any glass, metal, plastic,
paper, fabric, wood, food, abandoned vehicles, abandoned vehicle parts, garden
remnants and clippings, soil, sand, concrete or rocks; and
(b) any other material, substance or thing deposited in a place if its size, shape,
nature or volume makes the place where it is deposited disorderly or detrimentally
affects the proper use of that place but does not include any gases, dust or
smoke or any waste matter which is produced or emitted during or as a result of
any of the normal operations of the mining, building or manufacturing industry or of
any primary industry;
Section 7 applies to make the driver, the owner and authorised users of vehicles liable for
litter thrown from them unless the true culprit can be identified.
328
Legislation
The Environment Protection Authority may direct a person who deposited litter, or the
occupier of land on which it is situated, to remove it: section 8A.
Section 19 creates a range of miscellaneous offences, for which a maximum penalty of
five penalty units may be imposed, including
failure to remove any litter which one has deposited when asked to do so by an
authorised officer
defacing a receptacle for litter provided by a public authority
setting fire to a receptacle for litter provided by a public authority
requiring another person to move a vehicle carrying a load without supplying him or
her with sufficient means to secure the load in such a way that litter cannot leave
the vehicle without human assistance
failure to ensure that a vehicle under ones control is loaded in such a way that
litter cannot leave it without human assistance.
C35 Nature Conservation

C36 Noise
Emissions Regulations
C37 Noxious Weeds

Land Management
C38 Nutrients
Trade Waste
C39 Ozonedepleting Substances

Trade Waste
C40 Pesticides
C40.1 Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of Use) Act 1992
The Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of Use) Act 1992 (Vic) establishes a
comprehensive scheme for the regulation of the chemicals to which it applies. The
relevant chemicals are defined according to usage in the Agvet Code. The Agvet Code is
scheduled to the Commonwealth Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals Code Act 1994.
Relevant chemicals may not be supplied unless they are registered: see section 6. They
must be used in accordance with Regulations and Orders: section 25A. The chemicals
must be used by qualified operators. For example
329
C40.1.1 Offence to use without certificate

A person must not
(a) use a prescribed chemical product, fertiliser or stock food, or a chemical
product, fertiliser or stock food of a class that is prescribed; or
(b) use in a prescribed manner a prescribed chemical product, fertiliser or stock
food, or a chemical product, fertiliser or stock food of a class that is prescribed
unless
(c) that person
(i) holds an applicator (chemical rating) certificate; and
(ii) complies with any conditions of that certificate; or
(d) that person acts under the direct supervision of a person who complies with
paragraph (c). Penalty: 100 penalty units.
C40.1.2 Application of relevant chemicals
The application of relevant chemicals is also regulated by the Act. The
GovernorinCouncil may make Orders prohibiting in the interests of the environment and
human health the application of chemicals. Unless the person is acting in accordance with
a permit, these Orders must be complied at risk of prosecution and penalties, in the case of
a corporation, 400 penalty units, and in any other case 200 penalty units: section 39(4).
C40.1.3 Damage by spray drift
Section 40 of the Act also creates an offence of creating damage by spraying
40. Damage by spray drift
(1) A person must not carry out agricultural spraying which injuriously affects
(a) any plants or stock outside the target area; or
(b) any land outside the target area so that growing plants or keeping stock
on that land can be reasonably expected to result in the contamination of
the stock or of agricultural produce derived from the plants or stock.
Penalty: In the case of a corporation, 400 penalty units. In any other case,
200 penalty units
(2) It is a defence to a prosecution under subsection (1)(a) to prove that the plants
or stock have no economic value.
C40.1.4 Regulations made under the Act
Regulations made under the Act include
Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Control of Use) Regulations 1996 (Vic)
Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Fertilisers) Regulations 1995 (Vic)
Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Hormonal Growth Promotants) Regulations
1993 (Vic)
Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Infringement Notices) Regulations 1994
(Vic)
The Agricultural and Veterinary Chemicals (Victoria) Act 1994 (Vic) gives the AgVet
Code legal status in Victoria.
330
Legislation
C40.2 Civil Liability

There are WorkCare issues when a University employee is injured through the use of
pesticides and other chemicals. Others entering the University have legal rights under law
relating to occupiers responsibility for their safety. Others who are injured, or whose
property is damaged, or who otherwise suffer loss, through the use of pesticides and other
chemicals will probably have the right to recover compensation through common law
actions such as negligence and private nuisance. There is strict liability for the results of
aerial spraying under Part VI of the Wrongs Act 1958 (Vic).
C41 Pests
Animals
Plants (weeds)
C42 Planning
Land use Planning
C43 Plant Disease

Biohazards
C44 Polyacrylamide Gels

Trade Waste4
C45 Pressure Vessels

C45.1 Transportation
C46 Quarantine
C47 Radiation
Relevant State and Commonwealth Laws
Victorian Law
Radiation safety in Victoria is most broadly regulated under Part V of the Health Act
1958 (Vic) and the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) which are made
under the Act.
Commonwealth Law
The Commonwealth Government has recently enlarged its role through enactment of the
Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) and the Australian
Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth) made under it.
The object of this Act is very broad
... to protect the health and safety of people, and to protect the environment, from the
harmful effects of radiation1
331
However, the Act contains few provisions that apply generally. The main general
provision is a complete exclusion of the construction or operation of the following nuclear
installations2
(a) nuclear fuel fabrication plants
(b) nuclear power plants
(c) enrichment plants
(d) reprocessing facilities
The Chief Executive Officer [CEO] of ARPANSA must not issue a licence for such
facilities4. Apart from this general provision, the regulatory scheme of the
Commonwealth Act is specifically restricted to "controlled persons" which are generally
Commonwealth agencies and Commonwealth contractors as defined in section 13
controlled person means any of the following:
(a) a Commonwealth entity5 ;
(b) a Commonwealth contractor;
(c) a person in the capacity of an employee of a Commonwealth contractor;
(d) a person in a prescribed Commonwealth place6.
Enforcement Powers
Victorian Law
The powers set out in Part 13 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic)
may be exercised in the enforcement of those provisions. Division 3 of the Health Act
1958 (Vic) also contains extensive enforcement powers. They include
Inspection of any place where radiation apparatus or radioactive substances might be
kept. In pursuit of this a specially authorised officer may, at any reasonable time, enter
such a place and inspect it, test any substance or apparatus found there, remove a sample
of any substance for analysis or examination8.
Seizing apparatus9
a specially authorised officer may seize or render incapable of operation any radiation
apparatus (a) which is not registered as required by or under the Act, or (b) where, in the
opinion of the officer, there is a danger to the health or safety of any person.
a specially authorised officer may seize a radioactive substance where, in the opinion of
the officer, there is a danger to the health or safety of any person.
Inspecting records. A specially authorised officer may require any person to produce for
inspection any record required to be kept by that person under the Regulations and may
copy or take extracts from that record10.
Inspecting radiographs. A specially authorised officer may require a registered person or
licensee to produce for inspection any radiograph in order to assess the quality control of
the radiographic technique and processing for the purposes of assessing a patients
exposure to radiation11.
Commonwealth Law
The Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) contains the
following provisions with respect to enforcement
Directions. The CEO may give written directions requiring a controlled person to take such
steps in relation to a thing12 as the CEO considers appropriate, if the CEO believes on
332
Legislation
reasonable grounds that a controlled person is not complying with the Act or regulations in
respect of the thing, and believes it necessary to give directions in order to protect the
health and safety of people or to avoid damage to the environment. Directions are laid
before the Commonwealth Parliament. If the steps specified in the notice are not taken
within the time specified in the notice an offence is committed13.
Reports to Parliament. The CEO may at any time cause a report about matters relating
to the CEOs functions to be tabled in either House of the Parliament. If a serious
accident or malfunction occurs at a nuclear installation, the CEO must cause a report
about the incident to be tabled in each House of the Parliament no later than 3 sitting
days after the incident occurs. The CEO must give a copy of the report to the Minister14.
Injunctions. The Federal Court of Australia may upon application by the CEO grant an
injunction restraining a person from engaging in conduct that is or would be an offence
against the Act or the regulations15.
Forfeiture. A court may order forfeiture to the Commonwealth of any substance or thing
used or otherwise involved in the commission of an offence against the Act or
regulations16.
Entering Premises. An inspector may enter any premises17, and exercise the inspectors
general powers18 for the purpose of finding out whether the Act or the regulations have
been complied with19. The occupier of the premises must have consented to the entry, or
the entry must be made under a warrant20. An inspector must produce an identity card
when requested21.
General Powers. An inspector may enter premises and search them for a hazardous thing
in respect of which the Act or the regulations have not been complied with, and seize it.
The Inspector may also require a controlled person to take such steps that the inspector
considers necessary if the inspector has reasonable grounds for suspecting that a controlled
person has not complied with this Act or the regulations in respect of the hazardous thing.
The inspector may exercise these powers if the inspector has reasonable grounds for
suspecting that (a) there may be a hazardous thing on premises, and (b) it is necessary in
the interests of public health to exercise powers under these powers in order to avoid an
imminent risk of death, serious illness, serious injury or serious damage to the environment22.
Victorian Law Terms What is a Radioactive Substance?
A "radioactive substance" is defined in section 108AB of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) to
mean any natural or artificial substance whether in solid or liquid form or in the form of a
gas or vapour and includes any article or compound whether it has or has not been subject
to any artificial treatment or process
(a) which emits ionizing radiation spontaneously with a specific activity which is equal to
or greater than the prescribed amount and which is not a prescribed item; or
(b) which emits ionizing radiation spontaneously with a specific activity less than the
prescribed amount and which occurs in the prescribed circumstances;
This is supplemented in Regulation 5 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994
(Vic)
(1) A natural or artificial substance that emits ionizing radiation spontaneously and has a
specific activity equal to or greater than 30 becquerels per gram ...
(2) A natural or artificial substance that emits ionizing radiation spontaneously and
exceeds the maximum activity value for that substance specified in Table 1 of Schedule
223
333
(3) A natural or artificial substance that emits ionizing radiation spontaneously and is not
specified in Table 1 of Schedule 2 but exceeds 0004 megabecquerel ...
Regulation 6 goes on to include mixtures of radioactive materials which together satisfy
these tests. Regulations 7 and 8 bring other materials and radioactive ore within the
meaning of "radioactive substance", the essential test being whether it may result in an
individual receiving an effective dose24 exceeding 10 microsievert in a year, or, with
respect to ore, may give rise to a radiation hazard26.
Offences Victorian Law
Section 108AI of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) sets out in the most general terms the main
offence for breach of the provisions in Part V of the Act and sets the penalty at not more
than 100 penalty units27:
Any person who contravenes or fails to comply with any provision of this Division or of
any condition restriction or limitation of any licence registration or exemption under this
Division shall be guilty of an
offence ...
The most relevant provisions relate to
registration of equipment
registration of sources, and
licensing of users.
These are dealt with in turn below.
The Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) also contain a range of offences to
support the safety precautions which they contain. These are also set out below.
The Need to Register Equipment Victorian Law
Section 108AC of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) requires that radiation apparatus28 be
registered
A person shall not use
(a) an ionizing radiation apparatus29; or
(b) a nonionizing radiation apparatus30 of a prescribed class
unless the apparatus is registered or exempted from registration under this Act.
The Secretary to the Department of Human Services registers radiation apparatus: see
section 108AE Health Act 1958 (Vic). Details about the registration categories and fees
for equipment are set out in Part 4 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994
(Vic).
The Need to Register RadioActive Sources Victorian Law
Section 108AD of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) requires that sealed radioactive sources31
be registered
A person shall not possess use or handle a sealed radioactive source unless the source is
registered or exempted from registration under this Act.
The Secretary to the Department of Human Services registers sealed radioactive sources:
see section 108AE Health Act 1958 (Vic). Details about the registration categories and
fees for radioactive sources are set out in Part 4 of the Health (Radiation Safety)
Regulations 1994 (Vic).
334
Legislation
Registration Victorian Law

The Secretary to the Department of Human Services may impose conditions when
registering radiation apparatus or sealed radioactive sources, or impose them at any other
time: see section 108AE (2) Health Act 1958 (Vic).
Details about the exemption of equipment, such as smoke detectors,32 and substances,
such as depleted uranium,33 from registration are set out in Part 6 of the Health
(Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
The Health Act requires that the following conditions must be imposed upon registration:
section 108AE (3). The person in whose name the apparatus or source is registered34
must
(a) appoint a Radiation Safety Officer approved by the Secretary to supervise all
radiation safety practices in respect of the registered apparatus or source (the Secretary
may exempt this);
(b) keep or cause to be kept the prescribed records in respect of the registered apparatus or
source and make those records available at the request of the Secretary or an authorized
officer of the Department;
(c) must have the registered apparatus or equipment incorporating a radioactive source
tested by a specially authorized officer or a person licensed to do so at such times or
intervals as the Secretary from time to time directs; and
(d) display a certificate on or near the apparatus or source to which it relates signed by a
specially authorized officer or a person licensed to test radiation apparatus that the
apparatus or source has been tested as directed by the Secretary and complies with the
regulations (s 108(3)(d)).35
Cancellation, Suspension and Variation of Registration Victorian Law
The Secretary to the Department of Human Services may, under section 108AG of the
Health Act 1958 (Vic), vary, suspend or cancel the registration of an apparatus or source
if satisfied that
registration was obtained improperly;
the registered person36 has contravened, or failed to comply with, a condition of the
registration;
the registered person has been convicted of an offence against the provisions relating to
radiation safety;
the registered apparatus or source (i) does not comply with the regulations, or (ii) has no
current certificate of compliance with the regulations required under section 108AE (3) (d)
of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) (above);
there is a significant risk that the health of any person is or may be endangered; or
the registered person has failed to maintain a satisfactory standard of radiation safety.
The Need to Obtain Licences for Equipment and Radioactive Substances
Commonwealth Law
The requirement to obtain licences for equipment and radioactive substances in
Commonwealth Law is found in section 31 of the Australian Radiation Protection and
Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth). It provides that a controlled person37 must not 38 deal
with39 a controlled material40 or controlled apparatus41 unless (a) the dealing is authorised
by a source licence, or (b) the dealing is an exempt dealing under the regulations.42
335
Obtaining a Source Licence Commonwealth Law

The grant of source licences to meet the requirement in section 31 is provided for in section
33 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth). It provides
that the CEO of ARPANSA may issue a licence to a controlled person authorising persons
to deal with a controlled apparatus or a controlled material. In deciding whether to issue a
licence, the CEO must take into account the matters (if any) specified in the regulations,
and must also take into account international best practice in relation to radiation
protection and nuclear safety.
Considerations to be taken into account
Regulation 42(3) of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations
1999 (Cth) sets out the matters which must be taken into account by the CEO when
deciding whether to issue a licence or not. They include whether
the information establishes that the proposed conduct can be carried out without undue risk
to the health and safety of people, and to the environment
the applicant has shown that there is a net benefit from dealing with the controlled
apparatus or material
the applicant has shown that the magnitude of individual doses, the number of people
exposed, and the likelihood that exposure will happen, are as low as reasonably
achievable, having regard to economic and social factors
Conditions on Source Licences
The holder of a source licence must43 comply with the conditions of the licence, and a
person covered by the source licence must also comply with any conditions of the licence
applicable to them.
Section 35 provides for the imposition of conditions on a licence. Conditions may be
(a) required by section 35
Section 35(4) imposes this condition on a source licence: any person authorised by the
licence to deal with a controlled apparatus or controlled material must allow the CEO, or a
person authorised by the CEO, to inspect the apparatus or material at reasonable times,
and comply with any requirements specified in the regulations relating to such an
inspection.
(b) required by the regulations;
(c) imposed by the CEO at the time of issuing the licence; or
(d) imposed by the CEO after the licence is issued.44
Conditions may be specific to particular apparatus or material, including apparatus or
material acquired after the licence is obtained.
Conditions required by the Regulations
Under the requirements set out in Regulations 44 55 licence holders must
take all reasonably practicable steps to prevent breaches of licence conditions
investigate suspected breaches of licence conditions . rectify identified breaches and any
consequences of breaches as soon as reasonably practicable
tell the CEO as soon as reasonably practicable about identified breaches
take all reasonably practicable steps to prevent accidents involving controlled materials,
controlled apparatus or controlled facilities described in the licence
336
Legislation
take all reasonably practicable steps to control accidents

take all reasonably practicable steps to minimise the consequences of an accident,
including injury to any person and damage or harm to the environment
tell the CEO about the accident within 24 hours of it happening
give the CEO a written report about the accident within 14 days of it happening
ensure that conduct and dealings with controlled materials, controlled apparatus and
controlled facilities comply with the National Standard for Limiting Occupational Exposure
to Ionizing Radiation45
ensure46 that all conduct and dealings with controlled materials, controlled apparatus and
controlled facilities are in accordance with:
a) the Recommendations for limiting exposure to ionizing radiation; and b) the Code of
Practice for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Substances
ensure47 that dealings with the disposal of controlled material and controlled apparatus
are in accordance with the following Codes of Practice:
a) the Code of Practice for the Disposal of Radioactive Waste by the User
b) the Code of Practice for the NearSurface Disposal of Radioactive Waste in Australia
c) the Code of Practice for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Substances.
ensure that all dealings with controlled materials and controlled apparatus, and all
activities related to controlled facilities, comply with the plans and arrangements for
managing safety of the source or facility, mentioned in the licence application
review and update, at least once every 12 months, any plans and arrangements for
managing the controlled facility, controlled material or controlled apparatus to ensure the
health and safety of people and protection of the environment, and give the CEO
information about the review
seek the CEOs prior approval to make a relevant change that will have significant
implications for safety
tell the CEO at least once every 3 months, unless the licence makes other arrangements,
about any changes that are unlikely to have significant implications for safety, and thus
may be made without the CEOs approval
dispose of controlled apparatus or controlled materials only with the approval of the CEO48
tell the CEO within 7 days about the transfer of controlled apparatus or controlled
materials into the possession of another person or body,49 including the
name of the other person or body . number of the licence held by the other person or body
location of the controlled apparatus or controlled materials after the transfer
not dispose of, or transfer to the possession of another person or body, a controlled facility
without the CEOs approval50
only construct an item that is important for safety, and identified in a safety analysis
report, as part of the construction of a controlled facility, if the CEO has given the holder
approval to construct it
only load nuclear fuel into a controlled facility, as part of the construction of the controlled
facility, if the CEO has given the holder approval to load it.
The Need for Users to be Licensed Victorian Law
337
Section 108AF (1) of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) provides that personnel using equipment or
sources must be licensed
A person must not operate, use, manufacture, store, transport, sell, possess, install, service,
maintain, repair, test, dispose of or otherwise deal with an ionizing radiation apparatus or
nonionizing radiation apparatus of a prescribed class or radioactive substance unless the
person is the holder of a licence issued under this Part, or is exempt51 from the requirement
to hold a licence under this Part.
Section 108AF (1A) of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) suggests that persons performing these
actions need not hold a licence if they are agents of principals who hold licences.52
The Secretary to the Department of Human Services issues licences: section 108AF(2)
Health Act 1958 (Vic). The different categories of licence are set out in Part 3 of the
Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
Licensing Victorian Law
The Secretary to the Department of Human Services may impose conditions, limitations or
restrictions on a licence: section 108AF(2) Health Act 1958 (Vic).
It appears that conditions or restrictions may also be imposed on an exemption from the
requirement to hold a licence. Details about the exemption of different professions from
licensing are set out in Part 6 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
These include,53 for example
The following persons ... if they are under appropriate supervision of the holder of an
operator licence or a person registered by the Medical Radiation Technologists Board of
Victoria
(a) a person who is a medical registrar at a hospital and is training in nuclear medicine,
diagnostic radiology, radiation oncology, or in a medical discipline that uses fluoroscopy;
(b) a person who is a student in radiography or nuclear medicine technology, and who is a
trainee in medical imaging technology, radiation therapy technology, or nuclear medicine
technology; and
...
(d) an undergraduate in a university or other educational institution who is undertaking
course work or research;
(e) a postgraduate student in a university or other educational institution who is undertaking
research or higher studies.
Clearly it would be advisable to obtain written confirmation of exempt status from the
Medical Radiation Technologists Board of Victoria.
Conditions which the Secretary might impose include such matters relating to radiation
safety as
(a) the purpose for which a licence may be issued;
(b) safety precautions and procedures to be taken or followed by the person holding the
licence;
(c) supervision of the licence holder by a Radiation Safety Officer appointed in respect of
the registration of the apparatus or source;
(d) in the case of an unsealed radioactive source54 (i) the appointment of a Radiation
Safety Officer approved by the Secretary, or (ii) appropriate methods of disposal;
338
Legislation
(e) requiring or controlling the use of nuclear medicine or radiological equipment which is
ancillary to the apparatus or radioactive substance.
Cancellation, Suspension and Variation of Licences Victorian Law
The Secretary to the Department of Human Services may, under section 108AG of the
Health Act 1958 (Vic), vary, suspend or cancel the registration of an apparatus or source
if satisfied that
the licence was obtained improperly; . the holder of the licence has contravened, or failed
to comply with, a condition of the licence; . the holder of the licence has been convicted
of an offence against the provisions relating to radiation safety;
the holder of the licence has ceased to hold a qualification upon the basis of which the
Secretary granted the licence;
there is a significant risk that the health of any person is or may be endangered; or
the holder of the licence has failed to maintain a satisfactory standard of radiation safety.
The Need to Obtain a Facility Licence Commonwealth Law
The requirement to obtain licences for the construction and operation of nuclear
installations55 and prescribed radiation facilities56 in Commonwealth Law is found in
section 30 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth).
It provides that a controlled person57 must not58
(a) prepare a site for a controlled facility;
(b) construct a controlled facility;
(c) have possession or control of a controlled facility;
(d) operate a controlled facility;
(e) decommission, dispose of or abandon a controlled facility;
unless authorised to do so by a facility licence, or the person is exempted by the
regulations.59
As noted above,60 it is not possible to licence the following installations under the Act
(a) nuclear fuel fabrication plants
(b) nuclear power plants
(c) enrichment plants
(d) reprocessing facilities
Obtaining a Facility Licence Commonwealth Law
The grant of a facility licence to meet the requirement in section 30 is provided for in
section 32 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth). It
provides that the CEO of ARPANSA may issue a licence to a controlled person
authorising persons to do some or all of the things referred to in section 30.61 In deciding
whether to issue a licence, the CEO must take into account the matters (if any) specified
in the regulations, and must also take into account international best practice in relation to
radiation protection and nuclear safety.
Considerations to be taken into account
339
Regulation 41(3) of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations
1999 (Cth) sets out the matters which must be taken into account by the CEO when
deciding whether to issue a licence or not. They include whether
the information establishes that the proposed conduct can be carried out without undue risk
to the health and safety of people, and to the environment
the applicant has shown that there is a net benefit from carrying out the conduct relating
to the controlled facility
the applicant has shown that the magnitude of individual doses, the number of people
exposed, and the likelihood that exposure will happen, are as low as reasonably
achievable, having regard to economic and social factors
Conditions on Facility Licences
The holder of a facility licence must62 comply with the conditions of the licence, and a
person covered by the source licence must also comply with any conditions of the licence
applicable to them.
Section 35 provides for the imposition of conditions on a licence. Conditions may be
(a) required by section 35
Section 35(3) imposes this condition on a facility licence: any person authorised by the
licence to prepare a site for a controlled facility or to construct, have possession or control
of, operate, decommission, dispose of or abandon a controlled facility must allow the
CEO, or a person authorised by the CEO, to enter and inspect the site or facility at
reasonable times, and comply with any requirements specified in the regulations in relation
to such an inspection.
(d) required by the regulations;63
(e) imposed by the CEO at the time of issuing the licence; or
(d) imposed by the CEO after the licence is issued.64
Conditions may be specific to particular apparatus or material, including apparatus or
material acquired after the licence is obtained.
Amendment, Cancellation and Suspension of Licences Commonwealth Law
Amendment
The CEO may65 at any time amend a licence. This includes
imposing additional licence conditions
removing or varying licence conditions that were imposed by the CEO
extending or reducing the authority granted by the licence.
The CEO must give notice in writing given to the licence holder. If the relevant conditions
are specific to particular material, or to particular apparatus, the notice must be given to
the licence holder who, according to the CEOs records, has possession or control of the
material or apparatus at the time the condition is imposed, removed or varied.
Cancellation and Suspension
The CEO may66 suspend or cancel a licence for any of the following reasons
a condition of the licence has been breached
the CEO believes on reasonable grounds that the licence holder, or a person covered by the
licence, has committed an offence against the Act or the regulations
340
Legislation
any annual charge payable in respect of the licence remains unpaid

the licence was obtained improperly.
The CEO must give notice in writing to the licence holder.
Radiation Advisory Committee (Victoria)
Section 108AK of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) provides for the establishment of a Radiation
Advisory Committee with the purpose of advising the Minister and Secretary.
Medical Radiation Technologists Board (Victoria)
Section 108AL of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) founds the Medical Radiation Technologists
Board which registers practitioners in radiography or nuclear medicine technology as
medical imaging technologists, radiation therapy technologists or nuclear medicine
technologists.
The CEO of ARPANSA (Commonwealth)
The position of Chief Executive Officer [CEO] of the Australian Radiation Protection and
Nuclear Safety Agency [ARPANSA] is established by section 14 of the Australian
Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth).67 Section 15 sets out the
functions of the CEO. They include
promoting uniformity of radiation protection and nuclear safety policy and practices across
jurisdictions of the Commonwealth, the States and the Territories
providing advice on radiation protection, nuclear safety and related issues
undertaking research in relation to radiation protection, nuclear safety and medical
exposures to radiation
providing services relating to radiation protection, nuclear safety and medical exposures to
radiation
accrediting persons with technical expertise for the purposes of this Act
monitoring compliance ... and making recommendations to the Director of Public
Prosecutions
Radiation Health and Safety Advisory Council (Commonwealth)
The Radiation Health and Safety Advisory Council is established by section 19 of the
Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth).68 Its functions are
set out in section 20 and include
identifying emerging issues relating to radiation protection and nuclear safety and advising
the CEO on them
examining matters of major concern to the community in relation to radiation protection
and nuclear safety and advising the CEO on them
advising the CEO on the adoption of recommendations, policies, codes and standards in
relation to radiation protection and nuclear safety
Radiation Health Committee (Commonwealth)
The Radiation Health Committee is established by section 22 of the Australian Radiation
Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth).69 Its functions are set out in section 23
and include
advising the CEO and the Council on matters relating to radiation protection
341
developing policies and preparing draft publications for the promotion of uniform national
standards of radiation protection
formulating draft national policies, codes and standards in relation to radiation protection
for consideration by the Commonwealth, the States and the Territories
consulting publicly in the development and review of policies, codes and standards in
relation to radiation protection.
Nuclear Safety Committee (Commonwealth)
The Nuclear Safety Committee is established by section 25 of the Australian Radiation
Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth).70 Its functions are set out in section 26
and include
advising the CEO and the Council on matters relating to nuclear safety and the safety of
controlled facilities
reviewing and assessing the effectiveness of standards, codes, practices and procedures in
relation to the safety of controlled facilities
developing detailed policies and preparing draft publications for the promotion of uniform
national standards in relation to the safety of controlled facilities
Safety Precautions Victorian Law
Part 7 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) sets out the general safety
precautions which are summarised below. Reference should be made to the Regulations
for greater detail
Unless indicated otherwise, responsibility for compliance rests with (a) the person with
respect to whom equipment or a radioactive source is registered, or (b) the licensee in the
case of an unsealed radioactive source.
The precautions are to
31 be informed of radiation hazards (10 penalty units).71
32 provide any necessary training or instructions
(a) to employees whose duties necessitate the handling of radioactive substances
(b) to other employees who may occasionally be exposed to radiation
(c) to each authorised visitor72 to any area where radiation may be present. (10 penalty
units). 73
33 take reasonable steps to ensure that a radioactive substance, irradiating apparatus or
sealed source apparatus is not dealt with in circumstances where a person may be
exposed to radiation in excess of the amounts specified in Schedule 1 of these
Regulations.74 (100 penalty units)75
34 ensure that appropriate measures are taken to control the exposure of pregnant
employees to radiation as specified in Schedule 176 (100 penalty units).77
35 ensure that records are kept of
(a) working rules for the control of radiation exposure in the workplace; and
(b) plans for dealing with radiation accidents and emergencies. (25 penalty units)78
36 report to the Chief General Manager if it is believed that an equivalent dose79 received
by any person has or may have exceeded one millisievert as a result of an abnormal or
unplanned exposure to radiation. (25 penalty units)80
342
Legislation
37 report to the Chief General Manager if a source of radiation is or has been out of
control (25 penalty units).81
38 report to the Chief General Manager if an irradiating apparatus, sealed radioactive
source or sealed source apparatus is or has been damaged or has malfunctioned in a
manner which could result in a person receiving a higher equivalent dose than would be
received under normal circumstances (25 penalty units).82
39 notify the Chief General Manager of the loss or theft of an irradiating apparatus or
radioactive source immediately (100 penalty units).83
40 report to the Chief General Manager as soon as practicable contamination by a
radioactive substance in excess of
(a) 10 x 103 becquerels per square metre in case of alphaemitting radioactive
substances; or
(b) 10 x 106 becquerels per square metre in the case of betaemitting or gammaemitting
radioactive substances. (25 penalty units)84
41 report unintentional or accidental releases of a radioactive substance to the Chief
General Manager (25 penalty units).85
42 immediately take reasonable steps to ascertain and correct the cause of any abnormal
radiation conditions (50 penalty units)86 and report the details of the corrective actions
taken to the Chief General Manager as soon as practicable (25 penalty units).87
43 make proper use of the safety devices that are provided and carry out all radiation
safety procedures and requirements when one is an employee of the responsible person or
a visitor to a place at which there is an ionizing radiation apparatus or a sealed or
unsealed radioactive source (25 penalty units).88
44 (1) ensure that
(a) each storage area for radioactive substances, work area or other area where a
radiation hazard arising from the manufacture, use or storage of radioactive substances
may exist is posted with appropriate radiation hazard labels; and
(b) each container for radioactive substances is clearly and permanently labelled
"CAUTIONRADIOACTIVE"; and
(c) equipment containing radioactive substances is labelled
"CAUTIONRADIOACTIVE";and
(d) any radiation hazard label incorporates the radiation warning symbol specified in
Schedule 4; and
(e) each container of a radioactive substance bears a clearly visible label identifying that
radioactive substance, its activity and the date on which its activity was measured. (25
penalty units).89
(2) ensure that a label referred to in (1)
(a) is durable, having a regard to the period for which it is required to be attached; and
(b) has clearly legible lettering which, together with the radiation warning symbol referred
to in subregulation (1)(d), if any, is surrounded by a black border. (25 penalty units)90
(3) If directed by the Chief General Manager, provide on or near any label referred to in
subregulation (2) any additional information which is appropriate to minimizing the
exposure of people to radiation. (25 penalty units).91
45 label irradiating apparatus (25 penalty units).92
343
46 monitor contamination by radioactive substances (50 penalty units).93

47 contain contamination on workers to work areas (50 penalty units).94
48 contain clothing contaminated by radioactive substances to work areas (50 penalty
units).95
Safety Precautions Commonwealth Law
Part 5 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth)
sets out the following safe practices which are prescribed for facilities at which controlled
material is present and dealings with controlled apparatus and controlled material
The holder of a facility licence for operating the controlled facility must ensure that the
doses to which a person is exposed, inside or outside the facility, while the material is under
the holders control, do not exceed the effective dose limits,96 and the equivalent dose
limits.97
The holder of a source licence for dealing with controlled apparatus or controlled material
must ensure that the doses to which a person is exposed while the source in the apparatus
or material is under the holders control do not exceed the effective dose limits,98 and the
equivalent dose limits.99
NonIonizing Radiation
For each controlled material, controlled apparatus (excluding apparatus prescribed by
these regulations that produce harmful nonionizing radiation when energised) and
controlled facility, the holder of a licence must ensure that radiation protection and safety
are optimised100 so that the following are as low as reasonably achievable after taking
into account economic and social factors:
(a) the magnitude of individual doses;
(b) the number of people who are exposed;
(c) the likelihood of incurring exposures to radiation.
For apparatus that are prescribed by the regulations and that produce harmful nonionising
radiation when energised, the holder of a licence must ensure that exposure to people is
kept to the lowest level that can be achieved, consistent with best practice.
The holder of a source licence must ensure that all dealings with controlled apparatus
generating nonionizing radiation comply with the appropriate exposure limits set out in the
standards and codes mentioned in Schedule 1.101
Effective dose limits
The effective dose limit102 for occupational exposure is 20 mSv annually, averaged over 5
consecutive calendar years. but the effective dose for a person subject to occupational
exposure must not, in a year, be greater than 50 mSv.
The effective dose limit for public exposure is 1 mSv annually.
The effective dose limit for an unborn child is to be consistent with the effective dose limit
for public exposure.103
Calculation of Effective Doses
A persons effective dose for a relevant period is the sum of
a) the effective dose that the person receives, from external exposure, during the relevant
period; and
344
Legislation
b) the persons committed effective dose, received from intakes during the relevant period,
for the next 50 years. If the person is under 18, the committed effective dose must be
worked out on the basis of the number of years calculated by subtracting the persons age,
at the time of the calculation, from 70.
Annual equivalent dose limit
The annual equivalent dose limit104 to the lens of the eye is:
a) for occupational exposure 150 mSv; and
b) for public exposure 15 mSv.
For occupational exposure, the annual equivalent dose limit to the hands and feet is 500
mSv.
The annual equivalent dose limit to the skin is:
a) for occupational exposure 500 mSv; and
b) for public exposure 50 mSv.
The annual equivalent dose limit to the skin applies to the average dose received by any 1
cm2 of skin.
Patient Dose (Victorian Law)
Part 8 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) sets out precautions for the
protection of patients. These are summarised below. Reference should be made to the
Regulations for greater detail.
49 minimise the radiation dose to the person being diagnosed or treated (25 penalty
units).105
50 not use nonscreen film for radiological purposes other than for intraoral dental
procedures (25 penalty units).106
51 provide to the patient a copy of any radiograph relating to that patient on written
request (25 penalty units).107 The copy is to be provided at the expense of the patient. It
need not be provided if the original radiograph has already been provided to the patient or
sent to the patients referring practitioner.
Personal Monitoring (Victorian Law)
Part 9 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) sets out provisions relating
to personal monitoring of radiation dose.108 These are summarised below. Reference
should be made to the Regulations for greater detail.
53 wear an approved personal monitoring device at any time when one is likely to be
exposed to radiation in excess of one millisievert in any one year. (25 penalty units)109
345
this applies to any person or class of persons who may be exposed to radiation; including
licensees, registered persons, employees of licensees or registered persons, and students
undertaking courses of training at recognized institutions.
the person responsible for compliance must provide a personal monitoring device to every
person who is required to wear one. (50 penalty units)110
a personal monitoring device must not be used for more than 3 months, or a lesser period
specified by the Chief General Manager for that profession or occupational category.
54 submit personal monitoring devices to a laboratory designated by the Chief General
Manager for assessment immediately after the period of use (25 penalty units).111
55 not intentionally tamper with or interfere with a personal monitoring device or the
personal monitoring records of any person (50 penalty units).112 This provision applies to
anyone.
56 keep adequate records of
(a) doses assessed to have been received by employees
(b) details of monitoring results and dose calculation methodologies
(c) the effective dose computed for emergency or accidental exposure. (25 penalty
units)113
a person who keeps a record must make it available at any reasonable time for
inspection by a specially authorised officer (10 penalty units).114 57 undertake additional
personal monitoring directed by the Chief General Manager. (25 penalty units)115
Medical Examinations (Victorian Law)
Part 10 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) sets out provisions for the
medical examination of persons likely to be exposed to radiation. These are summarised
below. Reference should be made to the Regulations for greater detail.
When Medical Examination is Required
Where
a person or class of persons is likely to be exposed to a radiation hazard during the
course of employment, the Chief General Manager may direct that they be medically
examined prior to entering that employment
an employee or class of employees may have been exposed to a radiation hazard
during employment, the Chief General Manager may direct that they be medically
examined on termination of that employment
an employee or class of employees may be exposed to a radiation hazard during the
course of employment, the Chief General Manager may direct that they be medically
examined during the course of that employment at any time which he or she determines
a person may be exposed to a radiation hazard in the course of scientific or medical
research the Chief General Manager may direct that he or she be medically examined at
any time determined by the Chief General Manager.
Type of Medical Examination
346
Legislation
The type of medical examination to be undertaken must be as directed by the Chief

General Manager and the responsible person must record the results of all the
examinations in an ongoing personal record.116 (25 penalty units)117
Expenses
The employer is liable for the expenses of conducting the medical examination of an
employee, but the responsible person is liable for the expenses of the medical examination
of a person exposed to a radiation hazard in the course of scientific or medical research.
Results
The results of such a medical examination must be sent to the Chief General Manager if
so directed. (25 penalty units)118
Transportation of Radioactive Materials (Victorian Law)
to the transportation of radioactive materials. In these provisions extensive reference is
made to the Transport Code, which means the Code of Practice for the Safe Transport of
Radioactive Substances.119 Indeed, Regulation 61(1) applies it directly
A person must not transport radioactive substances or store, pack and stow those
substances for transport unless that transport, storage, packing or stowing is in accordance
with the Transport Code.120
Penalty: 100 penalty units.121
Relevant requirements are summarised below. Reference should be made to the
Regulations and the Transport Code for greater detail.122
Modification of the Transport Code
Regulation 62 modifies the Transport Code in the following ways
1) a reference in the Transport Code to "the competent authority" or "the relevant
authority" is a reference to the Chief General Manager123
2) as if the following paragraphs of the Transport Code were omitted
201 which subjects the exposure of transport workers and the general public to
requirements in the publication of IAEA, ILO, NEA of the OECD and WHO, "Basic
Safety Standards for Radiation Protection" Safety Series No 9, IAEA, Vienna, 1982
202 requiring that exposure be kept as low as reasonably achievable, that managers and
workers have continuing responsibility for safety, and that wotkers receive training
concerning hazards and precautions
203 which requires periodic assessment to evaluate the radiation doses to workers and to
the general public due to transportation of radioactive material
204 which sets out threshold doses for the initiation of various environmental and health
monitoring procedures and supervision
207 which requires the implementation of international guidelines in the event of a
transport accident
210 requiring the regulatory body to assure compliance with the Regulations and provide
evidence of their implementation in practice
407 providing that radioactive material with other dangerous properties in addition should
be packaged to guard against those other dangers as well124
347
483 which requires that customs inspection be carried out safely with due regard to the
radioactivity of the material
523(b) requiring that standardised freight containers meet international standards with
respect to loss of shielding
Annex 2(a) which contains the document National Health and Medical Research
Council, Recommended Radiation Protection Standards for Individuals Exposed to Ionising
Radiation, Commonwealth Department of Health AGPS, Canberra,1981
Annex 2(b) which contains an amendment of the National Health and Medical
Research Council document contained in Annex 2(a)
Annex 2(c) which contains the document National Health and Medical Research
Council, Australias Radiation Protection Standards, 1989
Annex 3 which contains a list of competent authorities in Australia with respect to
transport of radioactive substances
3) as if the following paragraphs of the Transport Code were amended as follows
519 the words "or, alternatively to the tests specified for packaging group III in the
Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, prepared by the United Nations
Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, were omitted
209 the words "design, manufacture, testing," were omitted
611 the words "may be excepted from:" were replaced with "need not be
using:"
tested
If the Radioactive Substances also has Other Dangerous Properties

If goods which are subject to the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) would
be dangerous goods within the meaning of the Dangerous Goods Act 1985 (Vic) if they
were not radioactive,125 then a person who packs, marks, labels, transports or stores the
goods must do so also in accordance with the requirements of the Dangerous Goods
Act.126
The Carriers127 Responsibilities
In relation to the transportation of radioactive substances, the Carrier128 is responsible129
for compliance with the requirements set out in the following paragraphs of the Transport
Code 205, 206, 406, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 427, 443, 444, 445, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464,
465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482, 484, 561, 562
The Consignors130 Responsibilities
In relation to the transportation of radioactive substances, the Consignor131 is
responsible132 for compliance with the requirements set out in the following paragraphs of
the Transport Code 208, 209, 211, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311,
312, 313, 314, 315, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 408, 409, 415, 416, 417, 418, 419, 420, 421,
422, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 428, 429, 430459, 469, 471, 472, 501730
Security during Transport
The carrier must133 take all reasonable steps to stow and secure any package in a freight
container or on a vehicle so as to ensure that
(a) it will remain in position despite vehicle movements including starting, stopping, swaying
or jolting; and
(b) it does not project beyond the periphery of the carrying vehicle; and
348
Legislation
(c) it is kept away from heavy articles or goods likely to cause damage to it.
Damage to a Transport Vehicle
If a vehicle being used for the transport of radioactive material is damaged and for that
reason there is or is likely to be damage to any package containing radioactive material,
then the driver of the vehicle must134 take all action that he or she is reasonably able to
take to
(a) forthwith notify the consignor and the Chief General Manager
(i) that damage to a vehicle or goods has occurred; and
(ii) of the place at which the damage has occurred; and
(iii) of the place at which the vehicle is located; and
(b) prevent as far as is practicable the access of any person to the damaged vehicle or to
any package containing radioactive material except a person authorised by the Chief
General Manager, emergency service workers or the consignor; and
(c) obey any instructions given to him or her by the Chief General Manager or a specially
authorised officer relating to the safety of persons who may be affected by the damage.
Interference with Packages
A person must not135 deliberately interfere with
(a) the contents of a consignment; or
(b) any labelling or marking required by paragraphs 436 to 445,136 467 and 468137 of the
Transport Code; or
(c) any document relating to a consignment except in the exercise of any power or the
performance of any duty conferred or imposed on that person by or under the Act or with
the permission of the relevant carrier or consignor or of the Chief General Manager.
Authority to Transport High Activity Radioactive Sources
A person may138 only
. transport,
. offer for transport, or
. cause to be offered for transport
in one container a radioactive substance in excess of 37 terabecquerels if the transport is
authorised by the Chief General Manager and complies with any conditions which the
Chief General Manager may impose and specify in writing.
Disposal of Radioactive Waste (Victorian Law)
to the disposal of radioactive waste.
Regulation 70 provides that
A person responsible for the disposal of radioactive wastes must not release those wastes
in a manner that could cause any person to receive more than the effective dose limits
prescribed in Schedule 1 of these Regulations.139
Penalty: 100 penalty units.140
349
The regulations do not specify a responsible person, so presumably general legal principles
would apply to encompass employers and supervisors, as well as the person who
performed the act of disposal.
Disposal of Radioactive Waste into the Sewerage System
Regulation 73 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) provides that a
person must not discharge a quantity of radioactive substance into a sewerage system
from any site in any 24 hour period which, if diluted by the average daily quantity of
sewage discharged into that system from that site, would result in an average
concentration in excess of
a) for a single radioactive substance, the appropriate maximum concentration set out in
Column 3, Part 1 of Schedule 5 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) ; or
b) for a mixture of radioactive substances, the concentration limit calculated using the
method specified in Part 2 of Schedule 5 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994
(Vic); or
c) in the case of any radioactive substance not listed in Schedule 5, a concentration
specified by the Chief General Manager as a condition of a licence. Penalty: 100 penalty
units.141
The quantity of any radioactive substance released into the sewerage system in any 7 day
period must not exceed 20 times the annual limit on intake by ingestion for that
radionuclide specified in the ICRP Publication Annual Limits on Intake of Radionuclides by
Workers Based on 1990 Recommendations142 (100 penalty units). 143 This does not
apply if a specific exemption has been granted in writing by the Chief General Manager
for a particular radioactive substance for disposal at that site.
Limits in Regulation 73 do not affect a licence condition that requires a more stringent
level of disposal.
Apart from discharge from sites which are subject to Part 12 of the Health (Radiation
Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic), Regulation 73 does not apply to the discharge into a
sewerage system of radioactive waste contained in the excreta of individuals undergoing
medical diagnosis or treatment with radioactive substances.
Disposal of Radioactive Waste at Other Places
Regulations 71 and 72 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) apply to
the disposal of radioactive substances to places other than a sewerage system.
Regulation 71(2) provides that a person must not144 discharge from a site145
a) a single radioactive substance in a concentration which exceeds the limits specified in
Columns 4 and 5 of Part 1, Schedule 5, Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic);
or
b) a mixture of radioactive substances which exceeds the concentration limit calculated
using the method specified in Part 2 of Schedule 5, Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations
1994 (Vic); or
c) in the case of any radionuclide not listed in Schedule 5, a concentration exceeding that
specified by the Chief General Manager as a condition of a licence.
Unknown Radioactive Substances
A person must not dispose of a material which contains one or more unknown radioactive
substances except under conditions approved by the Chief General Manager, having
regard to the nature of the radioactive substances and any other factors affecting safe
disposal.146
350
Legislation
Disposal of solid radioactive wastes

Solid radioactive wastes must be147 disposed of either
a) in accordance with procedures which have been approved by the Chief General
Manager having regard to
(i) the nature of the waste; and
(ii) the extent of radioactive decay; and
(iii) any other factors affecting safe disposal; or
b) in accordance with a condition of a licence or registration imposed by the Chief General
Manager.
SCHEDULE 1148
of the
RADIATION PROTECTION LIMITS
Part 1: Occupational limits
(1) The limit on effective dose149 for occupational exposure is 20 millisievert per year
averaged over a period of 5 consecutive years.
(2) Despite the requirements of clause (1), the limit on effective dose for occupational
exposure in any single year is 50 millisievert, but the total effective dose received in the 5
year period must not exceed an average of 20 millisievert per year.
(3) For occupational exposure of a woman who has declared that she is pregnant, the
embryo or foetus must be afforded the level of protection specified by the Chief General
Manager having regard to internationally accepted standards of practice.
(4) In the case of the lens of the eye, the limit on equivalent dose for occupational
exposure in any single year is 150 millisievert.
(5) In the case of the skin, the limit on equivalent dose for occupational exposure in any
single year is 500 millisievert averaged over any 1 cm2, regardless of the total area
exposed.
(6) In the case of the hands and feet, the limit on equivalent dose for occupational
exposure in any single year is 500 millisievert.
(7) If it is known that a part or parts only of the body has or have been exposed to ionizing
radiation, the effective dose for the person exposed must be determined by a method
specified by the Chief General Manager having regard to internationally accepted
standards of practice.
(8) In the case of nonuniform whole body exposure to ionizing radiation, the effective dose
for the person exposed must be determined by a method specified by the Chief General
Manager having regard to internationally accepted standards of practice.
(9) These limits do not apply to a person operating or using a radioactive substance or
radiation apparatus who acts in rescuing or safeguarding a person from serious injury or
danger to life.
(10) In assessing compliance with the limits for occupational exposure the following must
not be taken into account
(a) doses due to natural background radiation, other than in special circumstances
declared by the Chief General Manager; and
351
(b) doses received as a result of radiological examinations, radiotherapy and nuclear

medicine investigations.
Part 2: Public limits
(1) The limit on effective dose for public exposure is one millisievert per year averaged over
a period of 5 consecutive years.
(2) Despite clause (1) and with the approval of the Chief General Manager, a higher value
of effective dose for a person who is not occupationally exposed to radiation would be
permitted in a single year, provided that the average effective dose over 5 years does not
exceed one millisievert per year.
(3) In the case of the lens of the eye and the skin, the limit on equivalent dose for public
exposure is onetenth of the limit on equivalent dose for occupational exposure.
(4) For the purpose of this Schedule, public exposure encompasses all exposures other than
occupational exposures, medical exposures and exposures incurred by volunteers as part of
a program of biomedical research.
(5) In assessing compliance with the limits for exposure of the public, the following must
not be taken into account
(a) doses due to natural background radiation, other than in special circumstances
declared by the Chief General Manager; and
(b) doses received as a result of radiological examinations, radiotherapy and nuclear
medicine investigations.
Schedule 1
of the
Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth)150
Schedule 1 Exposure limits for nonionizing radiation (regulations 4 and 61)
1 The exposure limits mentioned in the Interim guidelines on limits of exposure to 50/60 Hz
electric and magnetic fields, National Health and Medical Research Council, Radiation
Health Series No. 30, 1989, as in force when these regulations commence.
2 For frequencies other than 50/60 Hz, and below 3 kHz, the field limits mentioned in the
International Commission on NonIonizing Radiation Protection Guidelines for limiting
exposure to timevarying electric, magnetic, and electromagnetic fields (up to 300 GHz),
Health Physics (1998), 74, 494522, as in force when these regulations commence.
3 The maximum exposure levels mentioned in interim Australia / New Zealand Standard
AS/NZS 2772.1(Int): 1998 Radiofrequency fields, Part 1: Maximum exposure levels 3
kHz to 300 GHz, published by Standards Australia, Homebush, NSW, 1998, as in force
when these regulations commence.
4 The maximum permissible exposure limits mentioned in the Australia / New Zealand
Standard AS/NZS 2211.1: 1997 Laser Safety, Part 1: Equipment classification
requirements and users guide, published by Standards Australia, Homebush, NSW, 1997,
as in force when these regulations commence.
5 The exposure limits mentioned in the International Commission on NonIonizing Radiation
Protection: Guidelines on limits of exposure to broadband incoherent optical radiation (0.38
to 3 ?m), Health Physics (1997), 73, 539553, as in force when these regulations
commence.
352
Legislation
6 The exposure limits mentioned in the Occupational standard for exposure to ultraviolet
radiation (1989), National Health and Medical Research Council, Radiation Health Series
No. 29, 1989, as in force when these regulations commence.
7 For static magnetic fields the limits mentioned in the International Commission on
NonIonizing Radiation Protection: Guidelines on limits of exposure to static magnetic
fields, Health Physics (1994), 66, 100106, as in force when these regulations commence.
Schedule 2, Part 1
of the
Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth)
Table C2: Schedule 2 Exempt dealings (regulations 6 and 38) Part 1
Dealings151
Item
Description of dealing
The dealing involves a controlled material that has:

(a) an activity concentration less than the
concentration for the material mentioned in column 3
of Part 2; or (b) an activity of less than the activity
in column 4 of Part 2.
The dealing is mixing 2 or more controlled materials.

The activity for each material being mixed is divided
by: (a) the activity for the material in column 4 of
Part 2; or (b) the activity concentration for the
material in column 3 of Part 2, and then divided by
the total mass of the mixture. The results for all of
the materials are added. The total is 1 or less.
The dealing involves naturally occurring radon222

with an activity concentration of less than 1000
Bq/m3 in the special case of exposure in the
workplace. If the dealing includes any other
controlled material, the use of the other material
must also be an exempt dealing.
The dealing involves depleted uranium and no other

controlled material. The uranium: (a) is being used as
radiation shielding in a container for controlled
materials; and (b) is completely contained in an
appropriate metallic sheath; and (c) is in a container
for controlled materials that complies with the
requirements in the Code of Practice for the Safe
Transport of Radioactive Substances for
transporting radioactive substances.
The dealing involves depleted uranium and no other

controlled material. The depleted uranium is in solid
massive form that is used for ballast.
The dealing involves a smoke detector designed and

made in accordance with Australian Standard
AS3786, as in force when these regulations
commence. The dealing is not repair or maintenance
of the detector.
The dealing involves any of the following items and no

other controlled material: (a) a clock, watch or other
device with a luminous dial that includes a quantity
of a controlled material that is not more than the
quantity in Part 4; 152 (b) a gaseous tritium light
device that: (i) is used solely for safety purposes; and
(ii) includes less than 74 GBq of tritium. (c) a
television receiver; (d) a visual display terminal; (e) a
cathode ray tube; (f) an electron microscope.
353
Schedule 2, Part 2
of the
Part 2153 Exemption levels: exempt activity concentrations and exempt activities of
radionuclides (rounded)
For a nuclide marked a in this Part, parent nuclides and their progeny included in secular
equilibrium are listed in Part 3.154
Table C3: Part 2 Exemption levels
Item
Nuclide
Activity concentration
(Bq/g)
Activity
H3
1 x 106
1 x 10 9
Be7
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
C11
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
C14
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
O15
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
N13
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
F18
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
Na22
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
Na24
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
10
Mg28
1 x 101
1 x 1 05
11
Si31
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
12
P32
1 x 103
1 x 10 5
13
P33
1 x 105
1 x 10 8
14
S35
1 x 105
1 x 10 8
15
Cl36
1 x 104
1 x 10 6
16
Cl38
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
17
Ar37
1 x 106
1 x 10 8
18
Ar41
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
19
K40
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
20
K42
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
21
K43
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
22
Ca45
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
23
Ca47
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
24
Sc46
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
25
Sc47
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
26
Sc48
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
27
V48
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
28
Cr51
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
29
Mn51
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
30
Mn52
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
31
Mn52m
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
Mn53
1 x 104
1 x 10 9
32
354
(Bq)
Legislation
33
Mn54
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
34
Mn56
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
35
Fe52
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
36
Fe55
1 x 104
1 x 10 6
37
Fe59
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
38
Co55
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
39
Co56
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
40
Co57
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
41
Co58
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
42
Co58m
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
43
Co60
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
44
Co60m
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
45
Co61
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
46
Co62m
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
47
Ni59
1 x 104
1 x 10 8
48
Ni63
1 x 105
1 x 10 8
49
Ni65
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
50
Cu64
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
51
Cu67
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
52
Zn65
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
53
Zn69
1 x 104
1 x 10 6
54
Zn69m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
55
Ga67
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
56
Ga72
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
57
Ge68
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
58
Ge71
1 x 104
1 x 10 8
59
As73
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
60
As74
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
61
As76
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
62
As77
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
63
Se73
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
64
Se75
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
65
Br75
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
66
Br76
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
67
Br82
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
68
Kr74
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
69
Kr76
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
70
Kr77
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
71
Kr79
1 x 103
1 x 10 5
72
Kr81
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
73
Kr83m
1 x 105
1 x 10 12
74
Kr85
1 x 105
1 x 10 4
75
Kr85m
1 x 103
1 x 10 10
355
356
76
Kr87
1 x 102
1 x 109
77
Kr88
1 x 102
1 x 10 9
78
Rb81
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
79
Rb86
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
80
Sr85
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
81
Sr85m
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
82
Sr87m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
83
Sr89
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
84
Sr90a
1 x 102
1 x 10 4
85
Sr91
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
86
Sr92
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
86A
Y88
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
87
Y90
1 x 103
1 x 10 5
88
Y91
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
89
Y91m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
90
Y92
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
91
Y93
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
92
Zr93a
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
93
Zr95
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
94
Zr97a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
95
Nb93m
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
96
Nb94
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
97
Nb95
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
98
Nb97
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
99
Nb98
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
100
Mo90
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
101
Mo93
1 x 103
1 x 10 8
102
Mo99a
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
103
Mo101
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
104
Tc95m
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
105
Tc96
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
106
Tc96m
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
107
Tc97
1 x 103
1 x 10 8
108
Tc97m
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
109
Tc99
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
110
Tc99m
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
111
Ru97
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
112
Ru103
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
113
Ru105
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
114
Ru106a
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
115
Rh103m
1 x 104
1 x 10 8
116
Rh105
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
117
Pd103
1 x 103
1 x 10 8
Legislation
118
Pd109
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
119
Ag105
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
120
Ag110m
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
121
Ag111
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
122
Cd109
1 x 104
1 x 10 6
123
Cd115
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
124
Cd115m
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
125
In111
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
126
In113m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
127
In114m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
128
In115m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
129
Sn113
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
130
Sn117m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
131
Sn121
1 x 105
1 x 10 7
132
Sn125
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
133
Sb122
1 x 102
1 x 10 4
134
Sb124
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
135
Sb125
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
136
Te123m
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
137
Te125m
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
138
Te127
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
139
Te127m
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
140
Te129
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
141
Te129m
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
142
Te131
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
143
Te131m
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
144
Te132
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
145
Te133
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
146
Te133m
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
147
Te134
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
148
I123
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
149
I124
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
150
I125
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
151
I126
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
152
I129
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
153
I130
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
154
I131
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
155
I132
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
156
I133
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
157
I134
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
158
I135
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
159
Xe131m
1 x 104
1 x 10 4
160
Xe133
1 x 103
1 x 10 4
357
358
161
Xe135
1 x 103
1 x 10 10
162
Cs129
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
163
Cs131
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
164
Cs132
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
165
Cs134m
1 x 103
1 x 10 5
166
Cs134
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
167
Cs135
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
168
Cs136
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
169
Cs137a
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
170
Cs138
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
171
Ba131
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
172
Ba133
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
173
Ba140a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
174
La140
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
175
Ce139
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
176
Ce141
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
177
Ce143
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
178
Ce144a
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
179
Pr142
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
180
Pr143
1 x 104
1 x 10 6
181
Nd147
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
182
Nd149
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
183
Pm147
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
184
Pm149
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
185
Sm147
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
186
Sm151
1 x 104
1 x 10 8
187
Sm153
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
188
Eu152
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
189
Eu152m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
190
Eu154
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
191
Eu155
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
192
Gd153
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
193
Gd159
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
194
Tb149
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
195
Tb160
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
196
Dy165
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
197
Dy166
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
198
Ho166
1 x 103
1 x 10 5
199
Er161
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
200
Er169
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
201
Er171
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
202
Tm170
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
203
Tm171
1 x 104
1 x 10 8
Legislation
204
Yb169
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
205
Yb175
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
206
Lu177
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
207
Hf181
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
208
Ta182
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
209
W181
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
210
W185
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
211
W187
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
212
W188
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
213
Re186
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
214
Re188
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
215
Os185
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
216
Os191
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
217
Os191m
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
218
Os193
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
219
Ir190
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
220
Ir192
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
221
Ir194
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
222
Pt191
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
223
Pt193m
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
224
Pt197
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
225
Pt197m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
226
Au198
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
227
Au199
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
228
Hg195m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
229
Hg197
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
230
Hg197m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
231
Hg203
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
232
Tl200
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
233
Tl201
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
234
Tl202
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
235
Tl204
1 x 104
1 x 10 4
235A
Pb201
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
236
Pb203
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
237
Pb210a
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
238
Pb212a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
239
Bi206
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
240
Bi207
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
241
Bi210
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
242
Bi212a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
243
Bi213
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
244
Po203
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
245
Po205
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
359
360
246
Po207
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
246A
Po208
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
246B
Po209
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
247
Po210
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
248
At211
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
249
Rn220a
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
250
Rn222a
1 x 101
1 x 10 8
251
Ra223a
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
252
Ra224a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
253
Ra225
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
254
Ra226a
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
255
Ra227
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
256
Ra228a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
257
Ac225
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
258
Ac227
1 x 101
1 x 10 3
259
Ac228
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
260
Th226a
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
261
Th227
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
262
Th228a
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
263
Th229a
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
264
Th230
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
265
Th231
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
266
Thnat (including
Th232)a
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
267
Th234a
1 x 103
1 x 10 5
268
Pa230
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
269
Pa231
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
270
Pa233
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
271
U230a
1 x 101
1 x 10 5
272
U231
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
273
U232a
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
274
U233
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
275
U234
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
276
U235a
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
277
U236
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
278
U237
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
279
U238a
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
280
Unata
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
281
U239
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
282
U240
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
283
U240a
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
284
Np237a
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
285
Np239
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
286
Np240
1 x 101
1 x 10 6
Legislation
287
Pu234
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
288
Pu235
1 x 102
1 x 10 7
289
Pu236
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
290
Pu237
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
291
Pu238
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
292
Pu239
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
293
Pu240
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
294
Pu241
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
295
Pu242
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
296
Pu243
1 x 103
1 x 10 7
297
Pu244
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
298
Am241
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
299
Am242
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
300
Am242ma
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
301
Am243a
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
302
Cm242
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
303
Cm243
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
304
Cm244
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
305
Cm245
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
306
Cm246
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
307
Cm247
1 x 100
1 x 10 4
308
Cm248
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
309
Bk249
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
310
Cf246
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
311
Cf248
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
312
Cf249
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
313
Cf250
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
314
Cf251
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
315
Cf252
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
316
Cf253
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
317
Cf254
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
318
Es253
1 x 102
1 x 10 5
319
Es254
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
320
Es254m
1 x 102
1 x 10 6
321
Fm254
1 x 104
1 x 10 7
322
Fm255
1 x 103
1 x 10 6
323
alphaemitting
radionuclide not
mentioned in another
item
1 x 100
1 x 10 3
324
radionuclide that is not

alphaemitting and not
mentioned in another
item
1 x 101
1 x 10 4
361
Schedule 2, Part 3
of the
Part 3 Nuclides and progeny155
For a nuclide marked a in Part 2, parent nuclides and their progeny included in secular
equilibrium are listed in the following table:
Table C4: Parent nuclides and their progeny included in secular equilibrium
Item
Parent nuclide
Progeny
Sr90
Y90
Zr93
Nb93m
Zr97
Nb97
Mo99
Tc99m
Ru106
Rh106
Cs137
Ba137m
Ba140
La140
Ce144
Pr144
Pb210
Bi210
Po210
10
Pb212
Bi212
Tl208 (0.36)
Po212 (0.64)
11
Bi212
Tl208 (0.36)
Po212 (0.64)
12
Rn220
Po216
13
Rn222
Po218
Pb214
Bi214
Po214
14
Ra223
Rn219
Po215
Pb211
Bi211
Tl207
15
Ra224
Rn220
Po216
Pb212
Bi212
Tl208 (0.36)
Po212 (0.64)
362
Legislation
16
Ra226
Rn222
Po218
Pb214
Bi214
Po214
Pb210
Bi210
Po210
17
Ra228
Ac228
18
Th226
Ra222
Rn218
Po214
19
Th228
Ra224
Rn220
Po216
Pb212
Bi212
Tl208 (0.36)
Po212 (0.64)
20
Th229
Ra225
Ac225
Fr221
At217
Bi213
Po213
Pb209
21
Thnat
Ra228
Ac228
Th228
Ra224
Rn220
Po216
Pb212
Bi212
Tl208(0.36)
Po212 (0.64)
22
Th234
Pa234m
23
U230
Th226
Ra222
Rn218
Po214
363
24
U232
Th228
Ra224
Rn220
Po216
Pb212
Bi212
Tl208 (0.36)
Po212 (0.64)
25
U235
26
U238
Th231
Th234
Pa234m
27
Unat
Th234
Pa234m
U234
Th230
Ra226
Rn222
Po218
Pb214
Bi214
Po214
Pb210
Bi210
Po210
28
U240
Np240m
29
Np237
Pa233
30
Am242m
Am242
31
Am243
Np239
Schedule 2, Part 4
of the
Part 4 Quantities of radioactive substances in timekeeping and other devices
Table C5: Quantities of radioactive substances in timekeeping and other
devices
Item
Radioactive substance
Quantity
H3
280 MBq
Pm147
5.5 MBq
Ra226
5.5 kBq
H3
280 MBq
Pm147
5.5 MBq
For a wrist watch
For a pocket watch
364
Legislation
For a clock
6
H3
370 MBq
Pm147
7.4 MBq
Ra226
7.4 kBq
H3
920 MBq
Pm147
18 MBq
Ra226
5.5 kBq
12
H3
920 MBq
13
Pm147
18 MBq
14
Ra226
5.5 kBq
For another timepiece usually

worn by a person, containing
quantities of radioactive
substances to produce luminosity
necessary for special purposes
9
10
11
For other devices
Regulations 811 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations
1999 (Cth)157
8 Prescribed activity level nuclear waste storage or disposal facility
(1) For paragraph (c) of the definition of nuclear installation, this regulation sets out
activity concentrations and activity levels for facilities that: (a) are nuclear waste storage
or disposal facilities; and (b) contain, or are designed to contain, waste that contains
controlled materials.
(2) If a facility contains waste that is in the form of sealed sources the activity level is
activity in a quantity greater than 1010 times that mentioned in column 4 of Part 2 of
Schedule 2.
(3) If a facility contains waste that is in the form of unsealed sources, the activity level is
activity in a quantity greater than 106 times that mentioned in column 4 of Part 2 of
Schedule 2, with activity concentration in a quantity greater than 104 times that mentioned
in Column 3 of Part 2 of Schedule 2.
(4) If a facility contains waste that contains a mixture of controlled materials, the activity
level is activity in a quantity greater than the applicable level, with activity concentration
in a quantity greater than the applicable level.
Note To work out whether the activity level and activity concentration is in a quantity
greater than the applicable level, see regulations 9 and 10.
9 How to work out activity and applicable level The activity of a mixture, and its
applicable level, are worked out using the following steps:
Step 1 Divide the activity of each controlled material in mixture by the activity value
mentioned in column 4 of Part 2 of Schedule 2 for the material.
Step 2 Add the fractions for each controlled material.
Step 3 The activity for the mixture is greater than the applicable level if the result from
step 2 is greater than:
(i) for sealed sources 1010; or
365
(ii) for unsealed sources 106.

10 How to work out activity concentration The activity concentration of a mixture, and
its applicable level, are worked out using the following steps:
Step 1 Divide the activity of each controlled material in mixture by the mass of the mixture
and then by the activity concentration value mentioned in column 3 of Part 2 of Schedule
2 for the material.
Step 2 Add the fractions for each controlled material. Step 3 The activity concentration
for the mixture is greater than the applicable level if the result from step 2 is greater than
104.
11 Prescribed activity level facility for the production of radioisotopes For paragraph (d)
of the definition of nuclear installation, the activity level for a facility that produces
radioisotopes containing a mixture of controlled materials is activity in a quantity greater
than the applicable level. Note To work out whether the activity level is in a quantity
greater than the applicable level, see regulation 9.
Footnote
1 section 3 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth)
2 "nuclear installation" is defined in section 13 of the Australian Radiation Protection and
Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) to mean "any of the following:
(a) a nuclear reactor for research or production of nuclear materials for industrial or
medical use (including critical and subcritical assemblies);
(b) a plant for preparing or storing fuel for use in a nuclear reactor as described in
paragraph (a);
(c) a nuclear waste storage or disposal facility with an activity that is greater than the
activity level prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this section;
(d) a facility for production of radioisotopes with an activity that is greater than the
activity level prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this section."
Relevant "activity levels" are calculated in accordance with Regulations 811 of the
Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999. See below at note
157.
3 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Agency
4 section 32 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth)
authorises licensing.
5 "Commonwealth entity" is defined in section 13 of the Australian Radiation Protection
and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) to mean any of the following:
(a) the Commonwealth;
(b) a body corporate established for a public purpose by or under an Act;
(c) a company in which a controlling interest is held by any one of the following persons, or
by 2 or more of the following persons together: (i) the Commonwealth; (ii) a body covered
by paragraph (b);
(d) an employee of a person or body covered by any of the above paragraphs.
6 A Commonwealth place is a place referred to in section 52(i) of the Australian
Constitution and is a place over which the Commonwealth has exclusive jurisdiction.
7 This must be authorised by the Chief General Manager.
366
Legislation
8 Regulation 76 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).

9 Regulation 77 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) specially authorised
officers may not exercise the following powers unless they believe on reasonable grounds
that action of the kind proposed or taken is necessary to prevent a danger to the health of
any person.
10 Regulation 78 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic)
11 Regulation 79 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic)
12 "thing" is defined in section 13 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear
Safety Act 1998 (Cth) to include "a substance, and a thing in electronic or magnetic
form"
13 Section 41 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth):
Penalty: 30 penalty units (section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1919 (Cth) provides that a
penalty unit is $110)
14 Section 61 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth)
17 "premises" are defined in section 13 of the Australian Radiation Protection and
Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) to include a structure, building, aircraft, vehicle or vessel, a
place (whether enclosed or built on or not), or a part of those things
18 Section 67(1) Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth).
20 Warrants are issued under section 77 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear
Safety Act 1998 (Cth)
22 Section 65 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth). There
are similar powers in section 66 when evidential material could be on premises.
23 Table 1, Schedule 2 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
24 "effective dose" is defined through the application of a formula set out in Regulation 4
of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
26 "radiation hazard" is defined in section 108AB of the Health Act 1958 (Vic) to mean
"the danger to health arising from exposure to radiation whether such danger is due to
radiation arising from sources outside the human body or to radiation from radioactive
substances within the body".
27 A penalty unit equals $100: see s 110 of the Sentencing Act 1991 (Vic).
28 "radiation apparatus" means any ionizing or nonionizing radiation apparatus: section
108AB Health Act 1958 (Vic).
29 "ionizing radiation apparatus" means apparatus capable of producing ionizing
radiation when electrically energized and sealed source apparatus: section 108AB Health
Act 1958 (Vic) "ionizing radiation" means electromagnetic or particulate radiation capable
of producing ions directly or indirectly in passage through matter but does not include
electromagnetic radiation of a wavelength greater than 100 nanometres. "sealed source
apparatus" means any gauge, instrument, equipment or other device in which is
incorporated a sealed radioactive source but does not include a container used solely for
storage or transport purposes. "sealed radioactive source" means a radioactive

substance bonded within metals or other solid substance or sealed in a capsule or other
container in such a way as to
(a) minimize the possibility of escape or dispersion of radioactive substance; and
(b) allow the emission of ionizing radiation as required. "radioactive substance" means
any natural or artificial substance whether in solid or liquid form or in the form of a gas or
vapour and includes any article or compound whether it has or has not been subject to any
artificial treatment or process
(a) which emits ionizing radiation spontaneously with a specific activity which is equal to
or greater than the prescribed amount and which is not a prescribed item; or
(b) which emits ionizing radiation spontaneously with a specific activity less than the
prescribed amount and which occurs in the prescribed circumstances;
30 "nonionizing radiation apparatus" means apparatus capable of producing nonionizing
radiation but not ionizing radiation exceeding a prescribed amount: section 108AB Health
Act 1958 (Vic). "nonionizing radiation" means electromagnetic radiation of a wavelength
greater than 100 nanometres and sonic infrasonic or ultrasonic waves.
31 "sealed radioactive source" means a radioactive substance bonded within metals or
other solid substance or sealed in a capsule or other container in such a way as to
(b) allow the emission of ionizing radiation as required.
32 see Regulation 24 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
33 see Regulation 26 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic). Regulation 4
Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) defines "depleted uranium" as "uranium
containing less than 072% of Uranium235".
34 "registered person" with respect to an ionizing radiation apparatus or a nonionizing
radiation apparatus of a prescribed class means the person in the name of whom the
Secretary has registered the apparatus or source under section 108AE(2A) Health Act
1958 (Vic) or into whose name the Secretary has transferred the registration of the
apparatus or source under section 108AEA Health Act 1958 (Vic).
35 Details about radiation safety testing prior to registration are set out in Part 5 of the
Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
36 "registered person" with respect to an ionizing radiation apparatus or a nonionizing
radiation apparatus of a prescribed class means the person in the name of whom the
Secretary has registered the apparatus or source under section 108AE(2A) Health Act
1958 (Vic) or into whose name the Secretary has transferred the registration of the
apparatus or source under section 108AEA Health Act 1958 (Vic).
37 See above at note 5
38 Maximum penalty: 2,000 penalty units (section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1919 (Cth)
provides that a penalty unit is $110)
39 See above at note
40 "controlled material" is defined in section 13 of the Australian Radiation Protection and
Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) to mean "any natural or artificial material, whether in solid
or liquid form, or in the form of a gas or vapour, which emits ionizing radiation
spontaneously"
368
Legislation
41 "controlled apparatus" is defined in section 13 of the Australian Radiation Protection

and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth) to mean any of the following
(a) an apparatus that produces ionizing radiation when energised or that would, if
assembled or repaired, be capable of producing ionizing radiation when energised;
(b) an apparatus that produces ionizing radiation because it contains radioactive material;
(c) an apparatus prescribed by the regulations that produces harmful nonionizing radiation
when energised.
This term is expanded in Regulation 4 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear
Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth). According to Regulation 4
Apparatus is controlled apparatus if:
(a) the apparatus is: (i) a magnetic field nondestructive testing device; or (ii) an induction
heater or induction furnace; or (iii) an industrial radiofrequency heater or welder; or (iv) a
radiofrequency plasma tube; or (v) microwave or radiofrequency diathermy equipment; or
(vi) an industrial microwave or radiofrequency processing system; or (vii) an optical
source, other than a laser product, emitting ultraviolet radiation, infrared or visible light; or
(viii) a laser product with an accessible emission level greater than the accessible emission
limit of a Class 3B (Restricted) laser product as defined by the accessible emission limit
given in AS/NZS 2211.1:1997; or (ix) an optical fibre communication system exceeding
Hazard Level 3A as defined by AS/NZS 2211.2:1997; and
(b) it produces nonionizing radiation that could lead to a person being exposed to radiation
levels in excess of the exposure limits mentioned in Schedule 1; and
(c) the excess levels of radiation mentioned in paragraph (b) are readily accessible to
persons: (i) in the course of intended operations or procedures of the apparatus; or (ii)
under a reasonably foreseeable abnormal event involving the apparatus; or (iii) under a
reasonably foreseeable single element failure of the apparatus; or (iv) without the use of
tools or other specialised equipment required to remove protective barriers or access panels.
(3) However, the CEO may declare, in writing, that the CEO is satisfied that an apparatus
mentioned in the declaration should not be controlled apparatus.
(4) The CEO must publish the declaration in the Gazette as soon as practicable after
making it.
42 Provision is made in Regulation 38 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear
Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth) for obtaining a declaration of exemption.
Maximum penalty: 2,000 penalty units, or such lower amount as is prescribed by the
regulations (section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1919 (Cth) provides that a penalty unit is $110)
44 Section 36(2) Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth)
45 this applies to the holder of a source licence or a facility licence
46 not applying to conduct and dealings with controlled apparatus of a kind mentioned in
regulation 4
47 this applies to the holder of a source licence or a facility licence
48 to the extent that the licence makes no other arrangements
369
51 A person who is registered under section 108AL of the Health Act to practise
radiography or nuclear medicine technology is exempt from the requirement to obtain a
licence: section 108AF (1E) Health Act 1958 (Vic).
52 See also Regulation 21 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
53 Regulation 21(1) Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic).
54 "unsealed radioactive source" means a radioactive substance that is not a sealed
radioactive source. "sealed radioactive source" means a radioactive substance bonded
within metals or other solid substance or sealed in a capsule or other container in such a
way as to
(b) allow the emission of ionizing radiation as required.
55 "nuclear installation" is defined in section 13 to include
(a) a nuclear reactor for research or production of nuclear materials for industrial or
medical use (including critical and subcritical assemblies);
(b) a plant for preparing or storing fuel for use in a nuclear reactor as described in
paragraph (a);
(c) a nuclear waste storage or disposal facility with an activity that is greater than the
activity level prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this section;
(d) a facility for production of radioisotopes with an activity that is greater than the
activity level prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this section.
56 "controlled facility" is defined in section 13 to mean
(a) a nuclear installation; or
(b) a prescribed radiation facility.
Prescribed facilities are further defined in Regulation 6 of the Australian Radiation
Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth). According to Regulation 6
(1) A prescribed radiation facility is any of the following:
(a) a particle accelerator that: (i) has, or is capable of having, a beam energy greater
than 1 MeV; or (ii) can produce neutrons;
(b) an irradiator that contains more than 1015 Bq of a controlled material;
(c) an irradiator that contains more than 1013 Bq of a controlled material and: (i) does
not include shielding as an integral part of its construction; or (ii) if it does include shielding
as an integral part of its construction the shielding does not prevent a person from being
exposed to the source; or (iii) if it does include shielding as an integral part of its
construction has a source that is not inside shielding during the operation of the irradiator;
(d) a facility used for the production, processing, use, storage, management or disposal of:
(i) sealed sources of controlled materials of activity in a quantity greater than 109 times
that specified in column 4 of Part 2 of Schedule 2; [See below at note 153] or (ii)
unsealed sources of controlled materials of activity in a quantity greater than 106 times
that mentioned in column 4 of Part 2 of Schedule 2; [See below at note 153]
(e) a facility where: (i) a mixture of controlled materials is produced, used, stored,
managed or disposed of using the facility; and (ii) the activity of the mixture, worked out
using subregulation (2) is greater than the applicable level mentioned in subregulation (2).
370
Legislation
(2) The activity of a mixture, and its applicable level, are worked out using the following
steps:
Step 1 Divide the activity of each controlled material in mixture by the activity value
mentioned in Part 2 of Schedule 2 [See below at note 153] for the material.
Step 2 Add the fractions for each controlled material.
Step 3 The activity for the mixture is greater than the applicable level if the result from
step 2 is greater than: (i) for sealed sources 109; or (ii) for unsealed sources 106.
(3) However, the CEO may declare, in writing, that the CEO is satisfied that a facility
mentioned in the declaration should not be a prescribed radiation facility.
(4) The CEO must publish the declaration in the Gazette as soon as practicable after
making it.
(5) A facility is not a prescribed radiation facility if it is mentioned in the declaration.
57 See above at note 5
58 Maximum penalty: 2,000 penalty units (section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1919 (Cth)
provides that a penalty unit is $110)
59 Provision is made in Regulations 37 and 37A of the Australian Radiation Protection
and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999 (Cth) for obtaining a declaration of exemption.
60 above following note 2
61 Set out above following note 58
Maximum penalty: 2,000 penalty units, or such lower amount as is prescribed by the
regulations (section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1919 (Cth) provides that a penalty unit is $110)
63 these are the same as for a source licence, set out above following note 43
64 Section 36(2) Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Act 1998 (Cth)
67 See further the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999
72 In many situations the law also imposes responsibility for unauthorised visitors.
74 Schedule 1 is appended below, following note 148.
371
79 "equivalent dose" is defined through a formula set out in Regulation 4 of the Health
(Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994.
96 See below at note 102.
97 See below at note 104
98 See below at note 102.
100 The optimisation of radiation protection and safety must be in accordance with
sourcerelated dose constraints established in accordance with the Recommendations for
limiting exposure to ionising radiation and agreed by the CEO
101 Schedule 1 is set out at below at note 150.
102 Regulation 59 Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations 1999
(Cth)
103 For the obligation imposed on employees who are pregnant, see the National Standard
for Limiting Occupational Exposure to Ionizing Radiation, which is a prescribed standard
for regulation 62
104 These equivalent dose limits are set out in Regulation 62, and not Regulation 64
[Inspectors identity cards] as suggested in the cross references found in the Regulations.
372
Legislation
108 "personal monitoring device" is defined in Regulation 4 of the Health (Radiation

Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) to mean a device worn by a person to monitor levels of
ionizing radiation to which that person is exposed.
119 approved by order under section 9(1) of the Environment Protection (Nuclear Codes)
Act 1978 (Cth) and published for the Department of the Arts, Sport, the Environment,
Tourism and Territories by the Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra, 1990.
120 If the Transport Code is inconsistent with the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations
1994 (Vic) then the Regulations prevail: Regulation 61(2).
122 Code of Practice for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Substances, published for the
Department of the Arts, Sport, the Environment, Tourism and Territories by the Australian
Government Publishing Service, Canberra, 1990. Obtainable only in hard copy through
AusInfo http://www.ausinfo.gov.au/
123 unless a contrary intention appears.
124 see Regulation 63 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic), and below at
note 125
125 section 9(a) of the Dangerous Goods Act 1985 (Vic) provides that radioactive
substances and radiation apparatus are not subject to that legislation.
126 Regulation 63 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic): Penalty: 50 penalty
units (A penalty unit equals $100: see s 110 of the Sentencing Act 1991 (Vic))
127 "carrier" is defined in Regulation 4 to mean "any individual, organization or
government undertaking the carriage of radioactive material by any means of transport
and includes both carriers for hire or reward and carriers on own account"
128 "carrier" is defined in Regulation 4 to mean "any individual, organization or
government undertaking the carriage of radioactive material by any means of transport
and includes both carriers for hire or reward and carriers on own account"
130 "consignor" is defined in Regulation 4 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations
1994 (Vic) to mean "any individual, organization or government that presents a
consignment for transport and is named as consignor in the transport documents"
373
131 "consignor" is defined in Regulation 4 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994

(Vic) to mean "any individual, organization or government that presents a consignment for
transport and is named as consignor in the transport documents"
136 summarised above under Consignors responsibilities.
137 Paras 467 and 468 require display of the radioactivity symbol and Unitied Nations
number on the vehicle
142 Annual Limits on Intake of Radionuclides by Workers Based on 1990
Recommendations, ICRP Publication 61, Annals of the ICRP, Volume 21: No. 4, Pergamon
Press, 1991.
144 Penalty: 100 penalty units (A penalty unit equals $100: see s 110 of the Sentencing
Act 1991 (Vic))
145 Regulation 4 of the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic) defines a "site"
to mean "land together with its buildings where a registered person or licensee carries out
his or her trade or business to which these Regulations apply." The boundary of the site is
the place where the concentration limits in Schedule 5 apply. If the radioactive substance
is discharged through a stack, pipe or similar conduit, the point where the substance leaves
that conduit is deemed to be the boundary of the site, but if the substance is discharged
through a stack, pipe or similar conduit which discharges within the site, then the
concentration at the boundary is determined by calculations which make due allowance
for dilution, dispersion, or decay between the point of discharge and the boundary:
Regulation 72.
148 Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 (Vic), Schedule 1, as at 17.2.2000
149 "effective dose" is defined by means of a formula set out in Regulation 4.
150 Schedule 1 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations
1999 (Cth), as at February 2000
374
Legislation
151 Schedule 2, Part 1 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety
Regulations 1999 (Cth) as at February 2000
153 Schedule 2, Part 2 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety
155 Schedule 2, Part 3, Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Regulations
1999 (Cth) at February 2000
156 Schedule 2, Part 4, of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety
Regulations 1999 (Cth)
157 Regulations 811 of the Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety
C48 Recycling
C49 Resource Usage
C50 Salinity
Emissions Regulation
C51 Sewage
Discharge Regulation
C52 Soil Conservation

C53 Soil Disease
Biohazards
C54 Smoke
Control and Storage of Hazardous Materials
C55 Spills
C56 Stromeyerite
C57 Suspended Solids
Trade Waste
375
C58 Town and Country Planning

Land Use Planning
C59 Trade Waste

C59.1 Regulation 401 of the Water Industry Regulations 1995 (Vic)
Trade waste is water running into sewers from sources such as sinks and floor drains.
There are limits on the permissible levels of contaminants released in water running to
trade waste. Regulation 401 of the Water Industry Regulations 1995 (Vic) includes the
following
C59.1.1 Trade Waste Definition
401. Trade waste
(1) The following waste is prescribed to be trade waste for the purposes of the
Act
(a) any matter discharged from premises as a result of trade, industrial,
commercial, medical, dental, veterinary, agricultural, horticultural or
scientific research or experimental activities; or
(b) any waste matter consisting solely or partly of food, which results from
any process connected with the preparation, on premises other than private
residences, of food for consumption; or
(c) any matter discharged from any laundry used for
(i) the purposes of a private or public hospital, school or any other
institution; or
(ii) the purposes of an hotel, motel or similar establishment; or
(iii) commercial purposes, or for which a user pays a fee; or
(d) any matter discharged
(i) from any cooling, refrigeration or airconditioning system installed
on premises where any activity
referred to in paragraph (a)
occurs; or
(ii) from any ships ballast; or
(iii) as polluted stormwater runoff; or
(iv) as runoff from water used to extinguish a fire or to deal with
any other hazard or emergency on premises
where any activity
referred to in paragraph (a) occurs; or
(v) as leachate from any private, commercial or municipal tip; or
(vi) as sewage sludge from a sewage dump point;
376
Legislation
C59.1.2 Trade Waste Agreements

Trade waste agreements or consents are required by any commercial facility which
discharges trade waste to sewer. The facility making the discharge is required to fit and
maintain treatment equipment as specified in a trade waste agreement (e.g., neutralisation
pits and grease traps), to carry out selfmonitoring if specified, and to ensure its discharges
remain within a comprehensive set of discharge quality requirements.
402. Trade waste agreements
(1) An occupier of land may discharge trade waste if
(a) a trade waste agreement (whether made before or after the
commencement of these Regulations) exists between a licensee and the
occupier; and
(b) the trade waste complies with all provisions of the relevant agreement;
and
(c) the occupier has complied with all provisions of the relevant agreement,
including any provision incorporated into an agreement made before 1
January 1995 by reference to Bylaw No. 208 Trade Waste or Bylaw No.
332 Trade Waste made by Melbourne Water Corporation.
C59.1.2.1 City West Water Parkville Campus
City West Water is the Water Corporation [licensee] which receives trade waste from the
Parkville Campus.
C59.1.3 Trade Waste Quality Requirements
Water Corporations [licensees] are responsible to Melbourne Water and ultimately the
Environment Protection Authority for the quality of water entering the sewerage system.
Quality standards for discharges to trade waste are set out in the Water Industry
Regulations 1995 (Vic), and are cited in all trade waste agreements administered by water
corporations throughout Victoria. The applicable standards follow. Note that these are
total volumes.
Table C6:
Criteria
Limits
Temperature
Not greater than 38C
Suspended Solids
Settling rate of less than 3 m/hour
Dissolved solids
Not greater than 200 kg/day
Oil, fats or grease
No free or floating material
Comments
Limits on
fibrous
material
Can discharge
emulsified oil,
fat & grease
under certain
conditions
Not more than

1,000 mg/L of
nonbiodegradable
emulsified material
Organic liquids
No free or floating material
No flammable,
toxic or harmful
material
377
Radioactivity
Must comply with Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1984
pH
between pH 6.0 and 10.0
Organic
concentration
B.O.D. (5day) not greater than 4,000 mg/L
Nitrogen
Total Kjeldahl nitrogen less than 500 mg/L
(no limit if
water
discharge is
less than 1,000
kg/day
Ammonia (plus
ammoniacal ion)
less than 50 mg/L
Sulphur
Oxidised sulphur less than 500 mg/L
Metals and other

elements
Arsenic compounds 1 ppm Boron compounds 30 ppm

Bromine 5 ppm Cadmium compounds 2 ppm
Chlorine 5 ppm Chromium compounds 10 ppm
Cobalt compounds 10 ppm Copper compounds
10 ppm
Cyanide compounds 10 ppm Fluoride compounds
30 ppm
Iodine 5 ppm Iron compounds 30 ppm Lead compounds 10 ppm
Manganese compounds 10 ppm Mercury compounds 1 ppm
Molybdenum compounds 10 ppm Nickel compounds 10 ppm
Selenium compounds 10 ppm Silver compounds 1 ppm
Tin compounds
10 ppm Zinc compounds
10 ppm
Common organic
compounds
Acetone 50ppm Formaldehyde 200ppm Phenol 300 ppm
Other organice
compounds
There are limits for many individual organic compounds and classes of
compounds. Some of these limits (e.g. for chlorinated solvents, PCBs,
pesticides are a s low as 0.001 ppm
Methyl Chloride 0.001 ppm
C59.1.4 Enforcement
Failure to comply with trade waste agreement conditions, or depositing in sewers material
other than sewage or trade waste, may result in a compliance notice, and disconnection if
the notice conditions are not met.
Penalties are up to 200 penalty units plus an additional 80 penalty units for each day the
offence continues after conviction or service of a notice of contravention: see s 93 Water
Industry Act 1994 (Vic) and Regulation 5 of Bylaw No 332: Trade Waste.
Regulation 403 of the Water Industry Regulations 1995 (Vic) provides further for
termination of trade waste agreements
403. Failure to comply with conditions
(1) Whenever the licensee considers that an occupier has not complied with any
condition of a trade waste agreement, it may serve a notice on the occupier setting
out
(a) the condition which the licensee considers has not been complied with;
and
(b) why the licensee considers that the condition has not been complied
with; and
(c) a date by which the occupier must comply with the condition.
378
Legislation
(2) An occupier must comply with any condition mentioned in a notice under
subregulation (1) by the date specified in that notice, to the satisfaction of the
licensee.
(3) If the licensee considers that the occupier has not complied with any condition
in a notice under subregulation (1)
(a) by the date specified in the notice; or
(b) at any time during the period of 90 days from that date the licensee
may serve written notice of termination of the trade waste agreement on
the occupier and the agreement automatically terminates at midnight on
the day on which the notice of termination is served.
(4) If an agreement terminates automatically under subregulation (3)
(a) the occupier is not discharged from any condition still to be performed
by, or on behalf of, the occupier; and
(b) employees of the licensee may continue to exercise any power to enter
the land of the occupier conferred by the agreement. .
waste disposal
C60 Transgenic Organisms

Genetically Modified Organisms
C61 Underground Storage Tanks

C62 Urban Planning
Land Use Planning
C63 Vehicle Exhaust Emissions

discharge regulation
C64 Waste Disposal

C64.1 Intractable Waste
emssions regulation
trade waste
C64.2 Landfill
C64.2.1 Disposal of material
equipment containing hazardous substance
rubbish containing hazardous substances
C64.2.2 Management
379
C64.2.3 Subcontractors accreditation
C65 Waste minimisation

C66 Water Supply
C66.1 Standards
C66.2 Liability for interference with water supply
Backflow prevention problem with laboratory sinks filled with liquid and a rubber hose
from the tab outflow which is so long that the distant end is below the surface of the
liquid. This poses a risk of the liquid being siphoned back up into water supply. To avoid
valves needed at water meter controls in the sinks, such a shorter hoses, or water level
control plugs in the sinks with hoses shorter than that level.
C66.3 Water Restrictions
C67 Weeds
pests
2000 Dr Murray Raff, Faculty of Law, University of Melbourne. Except for the
purposes of environmental management at or in connection with the activities of The
University of Melbourne or as permitted under the Copyright Act 1968 (Cth) no part of this
publication may be reproduced by any process, electronic or otherwise, without the specific
written permission of the copyright owner.
380

EHSmanual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EHSmanual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Environment Health and Safety

Version 1.1 May 2000

The University of Melbourne

2000 The University of Melbourne.

Introduction to Environment Health and Safety

The University of Melbourne

15.1.6.4 Communication of relevant information on legal

Introduction to Environment Health and Safety

16.2 Document and Data Control

The University of Melbourne

Structure and Responsibilities

Structure and Responsibilities

21.2 Insurance Guidelines and Information

The University of Melbourne

24 Department and Faculty Responsibilities for Environment

Structure and Responsibilities

24.4 Health and Safety Representatives

Identification, Assessment and Control

The University of Melbourne

31.6 Procedure and Guidelines

Identification, Assessment and Control

34 EHS PrePurchasing (July 2003) DRAFT

The University of Melbourne

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

The University of Melbourne

52.3 Dangerous Goods

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

52.5 Other Chemical Substances

The University of Melbourne

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

The University of Melbourne

53.7.6 Procedure and Guidelines

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

The University of Melbourne

55.3 Purchasing Procedures

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

The University of Melbourne

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

57.3 Withdrawl of Unsafe Equipment from Use (DRAFT)

The University of Melbourne

58.3.6 Procedure and Guidelines

Environment and Safety in the Workplace

58.6.6 Procedure and Guidelines

The University of Melbourne

61 Emergency Management Plans June 2003

63.6 Procedure and Guidelines

The University of Melbourne

68 Portable Fire Fighting Equipment

71 Off Campus Travel and Work Policy Draft July 2003

The University of Melbourne

74 Driving Safety DRAFT June 2003

The University of Melbourne

82.3.6 Procedure and Guidelines

82.6.6 Procedure and Guidelines

The University of Melbourne

83.2 Ergonomic Principles for Screen Based Work

84.1.6 Procedure and Guidelines

The University of Melbourne

85.1.10 Offers of Employment

86.6 Procedure and Guidelines

The University of Melbourne